LaTeX Ebook Reader

Wikibooks.
org
LaTeX
On the 28th of April 2012 the contents of the English as well as

German Wikibooks and Wikipedia projects were licensed under Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike 3.0 Unported
license. An URI to this license is given in the list of figures on
page 1271. If this document is a derived work from the contents of one of these projects and the content was still licensed
by the project under this license at the time of derivation this
document has to be licensed under the same, a similar or a
compatible license, as stated in section 4b of the license. The
list of contributors is included in chapter Contributors on page
1211. The licenses GPL, LGPL and GFDL are included in
chapter Licenses on page 1295, since this book and/or parts
of it may or may not be licensed under one or more of these
licenses, and thus require inclusion of these licenses. The
licenses of the figures are given in the list of figures on page
1271.
June 29, 2012
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1. What is TeX? . . . . . . .
1.2. What is LaTeX? . . . . .
1.3. Other terms regarding TeX
1.4. Prerequisites . . . . . . .
1.5. What next? . . . . . . . .
2. Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1. The LaTeX source . . . .
2.2. Input File Structure . . . .
2.3. Our first document . . . .
2.4. And what now? . . . . . .
I.
1.
Contents
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
3
5
5
8
14
15
32
35
36
44
56
71
Document Structure . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1. The document environment . . .
4. Errors and Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1. Error messages . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2. Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3. Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5. Bibliography Management . . . . . . . . .
5.1. Embedded system . . . . . . . . .
5.2. Citations . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3. BibTeX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4. Bibliography in the table of contents
5.5. Multiple Bibliographies . . . . . .
5.6. References . . . . . . . . . . . . .
II. Formating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6. List Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1. List Structures . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2. Easylist package . . . . . . . . . .
7. Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1. Floating with table . . . . . . . .
7.2. The tabular environment . . . .
3.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
77
78
. 101
102
104
105
117
118
. 121
133
180
187
189
. 191
193
194
216
219
. 221
224
7.16.
7.17.
7.18.
7.19.
7.20.
7.3.
7.4.
7.5.
7.6.
7.7.
7.8.
7.9.
7.10.
7.11.
7.12.
7.13.
7.14.
7.15.
Spanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resize tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sideways tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alternate Row Colors in Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Colors of individual Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Partial Vertical Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Space between rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The table environment - captioning etc . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The tabular* environment - controlling table width . . . . . .
The tabularx package - simple column stretching . . . . . . .
Vertically centered images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Professional tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding rule spacing above or below \hline and \cline commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tables with different font size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table with legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Need more complicated features? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
258
258
258
258
258
258
248
255
258
258
258
258
258
258
258
258
258
258
Title Creation . . . . . . . . . .
8.1. Standard Title Pages . .
8.2. Custom Title Pages . . .
9. Page Layout . . . . . . . . . .
9.1. Page dimensions . . . .
9.2. Page orientation . . . .
9.3. Page styles . . . . . . .
9.4. Multi-column pages . .
9.5. Manual page formatting
9.6. Widows and orphans . .
9.7. Summary . . . . . . . .
10. Paragraph Formatting . . . . . .
10.1. Paragraph Alignment . .
10.2. Paragraph Indents . . . .
10.3. Line Spacing . . . . . .
10.4. Special Paragraphs . . .
10.5. Notes and References . .
11. Importing Graphics . . . . . . .
11.1. The graphicx package
11.2. Creating Vector Graphics
8.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
258
259
262
273
274
284
288
307
310
313
315
317
317
320
324
327
. 341
343
344
378
11.3. References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12. Creating Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1. Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2. Alternatives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13. Floats, Figures and Captions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1. Floats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.2. Captions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.3. Labels in the figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.4. References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14. Hyperlinks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.1. Hyperref . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.2. Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.3. Customization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.4. Problems with Links and Equations . . . . . . . . . . .
14.5. Problems with Links and Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.6. Problems with Bookmarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.7. Problems with tables and figures . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.8. Problems with long caption and \listoffigures or long title
14.9. Problems with already existing .toc, .lof and similar files
14.10. Problems with footnotes and special characters . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
385
387
389
392
399
400
407
434
436
437
437
438
445
457
458
462
464
466
467
468
III.
17.
16.
15.
14.11. Problems with Beamer . . . . . . . . . .

14.12. References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.1. Adding the color package . . . . . . . .
15.2. Entering colored text . . . . . . . . . . .
15.3. Entering colored background for the text
15.4. Predefined colors . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.5. The 68 standard colors known to dvips .
15.6. Defining new colors . . . . . . . . . . .
15.7. Advanced color settings . . . . . . . . .
15.8. Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.1. XeTeX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.2. Useful websites . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mathematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.1. Mathematics environments . . . . . . . .
17.2. Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.3. Greek letters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.4. Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
468
469
. 471
472
473
475
476
477
483
489
490
. 491
494
496
499
. 501
503
506
508
510
17.5. Powers and indices . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17.6. Fractions and Binomials . . . . . . . . . . .
17.7. Roots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.8. Sums and integrals . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.9. Brackets, braces and delimiters . . . . . . . .
17.10. Matrices and arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.11. Adding text to equations . . . . . . . . . . .
17.12. Formatting mathematics symbols . . . . . .
17.13. Plus and minus signs . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.14. Controlling horizontal spacing . . . . . . . .
17.15. Advanced Mathematics: AMS Math package
17.16. List of Mathematical Symbols . . . . . . . .
17.17. Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.18. Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.19. Further reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.20. External links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18. Advanced Mathematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.1. Equation numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.2. Vertically aligning displayed mathematics . .
18.3. Indented Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
512
514
522
527
533
538
549
554
. 561
562
572
579
583
584
584
585
587
588
595
620
18.4. Page breaks in math environments . . . . . . . . . .

18.5. Boxed Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.6. Custom operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.7. Advanced formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.8. Text in aligned math display . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.9. Changing font size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.10. Forcing \displaystyle for all math in a document . . .
18.11. Adjusting vertical whitespace around displayed math
18.12. Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19. Labels and Cross-referencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.2. Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.3. The varioref package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.4. The hyperref package and \autoref{} . . . .
19.5. The hyperref package and \nameref{} . . . .
19.6. The hyperref package and \phantomsection
19.7. References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20. Theorems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20.1. Basic theorems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20.2. Theorem counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 621
625
628
630
638
640
643
644
645
647
647
652
660
. 661
663
664
665
667
668
669
25.
26.
23.
24.
21.
22.
20.3. Proofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20.4. Theorem styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20.5. Conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20.6. Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20.7. External links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Algorithms and Pseudocode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typesetting Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22.1. Typesetting using the algorithmic package . . . . .
22.2. Typesetting using the algorithmicx package . . . .
22.3. The algorithm environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22.4. Typesetting using the program package . . . . . . . .
22.5. Source Code Formatting using the Listings package
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Linguistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.1. Enumerated examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.2. Syntactic trees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.3. Glosses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.4. IPA characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 671
674
677
678
678
679
. 681
. 681
683
692
697
704
707
709
. 711
720
737
740
747
749
IV. Special Documents and Pages . . . . .

27. Indexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27.1. Using makeidx . . . . . . . .
27.2. Using glossaries . . . . . .
27.3. Defining glossary entries . . . .
27.4. Defining terms . . . . . . . . .
27.5. The letter class . . . . . . . . .
27.6. Envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . .
27.7. Windowed envelopes . . . . . .
27.8. Reference: letter.cls commands
27.9. Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . .
28. Presentations . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
28.1. The Beamer package . . . . . .
28.2. The powerdot package . . . . .
28.3. References . . . . . . . . . . .
28.4. Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29. Teacher's Corner . . . . . . . . . . . .
29.1. Intro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29.2. The exam class . . . . . . . . .
29.3. References . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 751
753
753
758
759
760
762
766
770
774
777
779
780
807
808
808
. 811
. 811
812
816
V. Advanced Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30. General Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30.1. Project structure . . . . . . . . . . . .
30.2. Getting LaTeX to process multiple files
30.3. The file mystyle.sty . . . . . . . .
30.4. The main document document.tex .
30.5. Writing your document . . . . . . . . .
30.6. External Links . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31. Customizing LaTeX . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31.1. New commands . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31.2. New Environments . . . . . . . . . . .
31.3. Command-line LaTeX . . . . . . . . .
31.4. Creating your own package . . . . . .
31.5. Creating your own style . . . . . . . .
32. Packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32.1. Using an existing package . . . . . . .
32.2. Package documentation . . . . . . . .
32.3. Packages list . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32.4. Creating packages . . . . . . . . . . .
32.5. External resources . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
817
819
820
. 821
835
837
. 841
842
843
844
849
853
854
856
859
. 861
863
865
885
885
33. Advanced Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

33.1. Adding your own counters . . . . . . .
33.2. Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
33.3. Rules and Struts . . . . . . . . . . . .
34. Collaborative Writing of LaTeX Documents . .
34.1. Abstract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
34.2. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
34.3. Interchanging Documents . . . . . . .
34.4. The Version Control System Subversion
34.5. Hosting LaTeX files in Subversion . . .
34.6. Subversion really makes the difference
34.7. Managing collaborative bibliographies .
34.8. Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
34.9. Acknowledgements . . . . . . . . . . .
34.10. References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35. Export To Other Formats . . . . . . . . . . . .
35.1. Convert to PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35.2. Convert to PostScript . . . . . . . . . .
35.3. Convert to RTF . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35.4. Convert to HTML . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
887
888
892
897
899
900
904
905
907
910
914
924
. 931
934
934
937
939
943
944
946
35.5. Convert to image formats . . . . . . . . . . . . .

35.6. Convert to plain text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
36. Internationalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
36.1. Hyphenating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
36.2. Text encoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
36.3. Output encoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
36.4. Hyphenating languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37. Accents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37.1. Text mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37.2. Math mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37.3. Tabbing environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37.4. Degree symbol for temperature and math . . . .
37.5. Related issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37.6. External links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
38. Tips and Tricks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
38.1. Always writing LaTeX in roman . . . . . . . . .
38.2. id est and exempli gratia (i.e. and e.g.) . . . . . .
38.3. Grouping Figure/Equation Numbering by Section
38.4. Generic header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
38.5. Graphics and Graph editors . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
947
. 951
953
954
957
960
963
997
998
1003
1005
1006
1006
1008
1009
1009
. 1011
1012
1013
1015
42.
40.
41.
VI.
39.
38.6. Spell-checking and Word Counting

38.7. New even page . . . . . . . . . . .
38.8. Sidebar with information . . . . . .
38.9. Hide auxiliary files . . . . . . . . .
Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
39.1. Included books . . . . . . . . . . .
39.2. Wiki users . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
41.1. TeX and LaTeX . . . . . . . . . . .
41.2. Editors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
41.3. Bibliography management . . . . .
41.4. Graphics tools . . . . . . . . . . .
41.5. See also . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
41.6. References . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Useful Measurement Macros . . . . . . . .
42.1. Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
42.2. Length 'macros' . . . . . . . . . . .
42.3. Length manipulation macros . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1026
1028
1030
. 1031
1033
1035
1035
1038
1039
1047
1048
. 1051
1053
1055
1057
1057
1059
1059
. 1061
1064
42.4. Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
42.5. References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
42.6. See also . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
43. Text Formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
43.1. Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
43.2. Hyphenation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
43.3. Quote-marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
43.4. Diacritics and accents . . . . . . . . .
43.5. Space between Words and Sentences . .
43.6. Ligatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
43.7. Slash marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
43.8. Emphasizing Text . . . . . . . . . . . .
43.9. Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
43.10. Symbols and special characters . . . .
43.11. Notes and References . . . . . . . . . .
44. Sample LaTeX documents . . . . . . . . . . .
44.1. General examples . . . . . . . . . . . .
44.2. Semantics of Programming Languages
45. Command Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45.1. # . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1066
1068
1068
1069
1070
1076
1080
1083
1084
1088
1090
1092
1093
1115
1125
1127
1127
1129
. 1131
. 1131
45.2.
45.3.
45.4.
45.5.
45.6.
45.7.
45.8.
45.9.
45.10.
45.11.
45.12.
45.13.
45.14.
45.15.
45.16.
45.17.
45.18.
45.19.
45.20.
45.21.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I .
K
L
M
N
O
P
R
S
T
U
V
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1135
1137
1139
1142
1142
1143
1146
1146
1148
1150
1150
1153
1155
1158
1159
. 1161
1163
1167
1173
1174
46. More Bibliographies . . . . . . . .

46.1. The example data . . . . . .
46.2. The limits of BibTeX styles
46.3. Natbib . . . . . . . . . . . .
46.4. Citation . . . . . . . . . . .
47. Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47.1. A . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47.2. B . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47.3. C . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47.4. D . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47.5. E . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47.6. F . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47.7. G . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47.8. H . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47.9. I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47.10. L . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47.11. M . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47.12. P . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47.13. Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47.14. R . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1177
1178
1178
1179
1184
. 1191
. 1191
1192
1194
1195
1196
1197
1198
1199
1200
. 1201
1202
1203
1204
1205
47.15. S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47.16. T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47.17. U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47.18. V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47.19. W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47.20. X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
48. Contributors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
49. Licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
49.1. GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
49.2. GNU Free Documentation License . .
49.3. GNU Lesser General Public License .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1205
1206
1208
1208
1209
1209
. 1211
. 1271
1295
1295
1304
. 1311
Getting Started
Part I.
1
2
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/TeX
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Donald%20Knuth
TeX1 is a low-level markup and programming language created by Donald

Knuth2 to typeset documents attractively and consistently. The X, representing
the Greek letter "chi", is pronounced as in the ending of the Scottish loch
or the name Bach. Its name originates from the Greek word ""
(technologa), which translates as "technology" in English; its first syllable is
1.1. What is TeX?
1. Introduction
TeX is a programming language, in the sense that it supports the if-else construct, you can make calculations with it (that are performed while compiling
the document), etc., but you would find it very hard to do anything else but
typesetting with it. The fine control TeX offers makes it very powerful, but also
difficult and time-consuming to use. TeX is renowned for being extremely sta-
Knuth started writing the TeX typesetting engine in 1977 to explore the potential of the digital printing equipment that was beginning to infiltrate the
publishing industry at that time, especially in the hope that he could reverse
the trend of deteriorating typographical quality that he saw affecting his own
books and articles.
UNKNOWN TEMPLATE TeX
"", similar to TeX in the Latin alphabet. According to a different approach

the name originates from the Greek word "" (techni), which translates as
art in English. In the second case the first syllable is "" again. Within the
typesetting system, its name is formatted as
As powerful as TeX might be, effective use requires a fairly high level of
learning, and investment of time to build custom macros for text formatting.
For those searching for a more straightforward solution, document preparation
systems based on TeX, consisting of collections of pre-built macros, exist.
LaTeX is one of the more popular of these. It is appreciated for being time
saving, automating certain tasks and reducing user introduced errors. This is
what makes it so popular. However, this comes at the cost of a sacrifice of
flexibility. TeX remains the language of choice for those wishing a dedicated
formatting language and almost unlimited functionality.
ble, for running on many different kinds of computers, and for being virtually
bug free.
3
4
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Leslie%20Lamport
http://www.ctan.org
Many later authors have contributed extensions, called packages or styles,

to LaTeX. Some of these are bundled with most TeX/LaTeX software distributions; more can be found in the Comprehensive TeX Archive Network (
CTAN4 ).
UNKNOWN TEMPLATE LaTeX
LaTeX (pronounced either "Lah-tech" or "Lay-tech") is a macro package

based on TeX created by Leslie Lamport3 . Its purpose is to simplify TeX typesetting, especially for documents containing mathematical formulae. Within
the typesetting system, its name is formatted as
1.2. What is LaTeX?
5
6
7
8
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/TeX
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/WYSIWYG
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Openoffice.org
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Microsoft%20Word
On the other hand, there are certain advantages to the LaTeX approach:
You don't (usually) see the final version of the document when editing it.
You generally need to know the necessary commands for LaTeX markup.
It can sometimes be difficult to obtain a certain look for the document.
In LaTeX:
This approach has some disadvantages in comparison with a WYSIWYG6

(What You See Is What You Get) program such as Openoffice.org7 Writer or
Microsoft Word8 .
Since LaTeX comprises a group of TeX5 commands, LaTeX document processing is essentially programming. You create a text file in LaTeX markup,
which LaTeX reads to produce the final document.
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/XML
Document sources can be read with any text editor and understood, unlike
the complex binary and XML9 formats used with WYSIWYG programs.
You can concentrate purely on the structure and contents of the document,
not get caught up with superficial layout issues.
You don't need to manually adjust fonts, text sizes, line heights, or text flow
for readability, as LaTeX takes care of them automatically.
In LaTeX the document structure is visible to the user, and can be easily
copied to another document. In WYSIWYG applications it is often not
obvious how a certain formatting was produced, and it might be impossible
to copy it directly for use in another document.
The layout, fonts, tables and so on are consistent throughout the document.
Mathematical formulae can be easily typeset.
Indexes, footnotes, citations and references are generated easily.
Since the document source is plain text, tables, figures, equations, etc. can
be generated programmatically with any language.
You are forced to structure your documents correctly.
10
11
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/WYSIWYM
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/DVI%20file%20format
The LaTeX document is a plain text file containing the content of the document,
with additional markup. When the source file is processed by the macro
package, it can produce documents in several formats. LaTeX natively supports
DVI11 and PDF, but by using other software you can easily create PostScript,
PNG, JPEG, etc.
The LaTeX-like approach can be called WYSIWYM10 , i.e. What You See
Is What You Mean: you can't see what the final version will look like while
typing. Instead you see the logical structure of the document. LaTeX takes
care of the formatting for you.
One solution to this dilemma is to make use of the modular possibilities of

LaTeX. You can build your own macros, or use macros developed by others.
You are likely not the first person to face some particular formatting problem,
One of the most frustrating things beginners and even advanced users might
encounter using LaTeX is the lack of flexibility regarding the document design
and layout. If you want to design your document in a very specific way, you
may have trouble accomplishing this. Keep in mind that LaTeX does the
formatting for you, and mostly the right way. If it is not exactly what you
desired, then the LaTeX way is at least not worse, if not better. One way to
look at it is that LaTeX is a bundle of macros for TeX that aims to carry out
everything regarding document formatting, so that the writer only needs to
care about content. If you really want flexibility, use plain TeX instead.
Flexibility and modularity
1.2.1. Philosophy of use
12
http://www.ctan.org/
Besides internet resources being plentiful, the best documentation source

remains the official manual for every specific package, and the reference documentation, i.e. the TeXbook by D. Knuth and LaTeX: A document preparation
system by L. Lamport.
Questions and documentation
CTAN12 is a good place to find many resources regarding TeX and derivative
packages. It is the first place where you should begin searching.
and someone who encountered a similar problem before may have published
their solution as a package.
13
14
15
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/XeTeX
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ConTeXt
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/LuaTeX
Therefore code written for TeX, LaTeX or ConTeXt are (mostly) not compatible. Additionnaly, engine-specific code (like font for XeTeX) may not be
compiled by every engine.
ConTeXt is a TeX-based document preparation system (as LaTeX is) with a

very consistent and easy syntax and support for pdfTeX, XeTeX and LuaTeX
engines. It does not have the same objective as LaTeX however.
When searching for information on LaTeX, you might also stumble upon
XeTeX13 , ConTeXt14 , LuaTeX15 or other names with a -TeX suffix. XeTeX
is a TeX engine which uses Unicode and supports widely popular .ttf and
.otf fonts. LuaTeX is another engine with Lua scripting engine embedded
aiming at making TeX internals more flexible.
1.3. Other terms regarding TeX
16
http://scribtex.com/
and continue this tutorial in the next chapter. ScribTeX is a web based online
editor for LaTeX documents with collaboration capabilities allowing you to
experiment with LaTeX syntax without having to bother with installing and
configuring a distribution and an editor. When you later feel that you would
benefit from having a standalone LaTeX installation, you can return to this
chapter and follow the instructions below.
ScribTeX.com16
At a minimum, you'll need a TeX distribution, a good text editor and a DVI or
PDF viewer. But, if this is the first time you are trying out LaTeX, you don't
even need to install anything. Just create an user account at:
1.4. Prerequisites
17
18
19
http://www.tug.org/texlive/
http://www.miktex.org/
http://www.tug.org/mactex/
TeX Live17 is a major TeX distribution for Unix/Linux, Mac OS and Windows.
MiKTeX18 is a Windows-specific distribution.
MacTeX19 is a Mac OS-specific distribution based on TeX Live.
If you want to use LaTeX locally on your computer, you generally need
to install a TeX distribution. TeX distributions are packaged collections of
packages and programs that enable you to typeset without having to manually
fetch files and configure things. The recommended distributions for each of
the major operating systems are:
1.4.1. Installing a distribution
20
21
22
http://www.tug.org/texlive/acquire.html
http://miktex.org/
http://alexkrispin.wordpress.com/2010/10/12/
a-script-to-automate-the-installation-of-texlive-2010/
Ubuntu has a 2009 version of TeX Live in the repositories, so you can use:
sudo apt-get install texlive. Here22 is a script to automate
the installation of TeX Live 2010 on Ubuntu.
Linux
TeX Live can be downloaded here20 .

MiKTeX can be downloaded here21 .
TeX live and MikTeX have easy installers that take care of setting up the
environment and downloading packages.
Windows
25
23
24
http://fedoraproject.org/wiki/Features/TeXLive
http://www.gentoo.org/proj/en/tex/texlive-migration-guide.
xml#doc_chap2
http://www.tug.org/texlive/acquire.html
If your distribution does not have the TeX Live packages, you should report a
wish to the bug tracking system. In the worst case you will need to download
TeX Live25 yourself and run the installer by hand. It is not hard, but requires
that you know how to use a console and make multiple choices during the
installation.
Fedora has only 2007 version of TeX Live, but luckily there is a good
repository here23 that you can use to directly install the latest version: yum
install texlive (plus yum install texlive-latex and any
of the texlive-scheme- packages).
Gentoo provides an ebuild to install texlive using the command
emerge texlive. http://www.gentoo.org/proj/en/tex/texlive-migrationguide.xml#doc_chap224 This is a meta-ebuild that pulls in many other packages depending on its USE flags.
26
http://www.tug.org/mactex/
You will also need a text editor to write LaTeX code. You should use a text
editor (e.g. Notepad), not a word processor (Word, Openoffice). Dedicated
LaTeX editors are more useful than plain text editors, because they usually have
autocompletion of commands, spell and error checking and handy macros.
1.4.2. Getting a text editor
Download MacTeX.mpkg.zip on the MacTeX page26 , unzip it and follow

the instructions.
Mac OS
27
http://www.tug.org/texworks/
You can install TeXworks with the package manager of your Linux distribution
or choose it as an install option in the Windows or Mac installer.
TeXworks27 is a dedicated TeX editor that is included in MiKTeX and TeX

Live. It was developed with the idea that a simple interface is better than a
cluttered one, and thus to make it easier for people in their early days with
LaTeX to get to what they want to do: write their documents. TeXworks
originally came about precisely because a math professor wanted his students
to have a better initial experience with LaTeX.
TeXworks
28
29
30
http://www.lyx.org/
http://kile.sourceforge.net/
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/KDE_Software_Compilation_4
Kile29 is a LaTeX editor for KDE30 (cross platform), providing a powerful

GUI for editing multiple documents and compiling them with many different
TeX compilers. Kile is based on Kate editor, has a quick access toolbar for
symbols, document structure viewer, a console and customizable build options.
Kile can be run in all operating systems that can run KDE.
Kile
LyX28 is a popular LaTeX editor for Windows, Linux and Mac OS. It contains
formula and table editors and shows visual clues of the final document on the
screen enabling users to write LaTeX documents without worrying about the
actual syntax.
LyX
31
32
http://www.xm1math.net/texmaker/
http://texstudio.sourceforge.net/
TeXstudio32 is a cross-platform open source LaTeX editor with interface

similar to Texmaker.
TeXstudio
TeXmaker31 is a cross-platform editor very similar to Kile in features and user

interface. In addition it has its own PDF viewer.
TeXmaker
33
34
http://www.texniccenter.org/
http://www.winedt.com/
WinEdt34 is a powerful and versatile text editor with strong predisposition

towards creation of LaTeX/TeX documents for Windows. It has been designed
and configured to integrate with TeX Systems such as MiTeX or TeX Live.
Its in-built macro helps in compiling the LaTeX source to the WYSIWYGlike DVI or PDF or PS and also in exporting the document to other mark-up
languages as html or XML.
WinEdt
TeXnicCenter33 is a popular free and open source LaTeX editor for Windows.
It also has a similar user interface to TeXmaker and Kile.
TeXnicCenter
35
36
http://bakoma-tex.com/menu/about.php
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/TeXShop
TeXShop36 is a TeXworks-like editor for Mac OS.
TeXShop
BaKoMa TeX35 is an editor for Windows and Mac OS with WYSIWYG-like

features. It takes care of compiling the LaTeX source and updating it constantly
to view changes to document almost in real time.
BaKoMa TeX
37
38
http://www.michaels-website.de/gedit-latex-plugin/
http://gummi.midnightcoding.org/
Gummi38 is a LaTeX editor for Linux, which compiles the output of pdflatex
in realtime and shows it on the right half of the screen.
Gummi
Gedit with gedit-latex-plugin37 is also worth trying out for users of GNOME.
GEdit is a cross-platform application for Windows, Mac, and Linux
gedit-latex-plugin
39
40
41
http://www.gnu.org/software/emacs
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Vim
http://www.vim.org/scripts/script.php?script_id=3109
Vim40 is another general purpose text editor for a wide variety of platforms
including UNIX, Mac OS X and Windows. A variety of extensions exist
including LaTeX Box41 and Vim-LaTeX.
Vim
Emacs39 is a general purpose text processing system. When used in combination with Auctex and Reftex (extensions that may be installed into the Emacs
program), Emacs provides a complete LaTeX editing environment complete
with table of contents view, document preview and many other features. Emacs
is a very mature editing system with a unique set of keyboard commands.
Emacs
42
http://latexila.sourceforge.net/
Usually you will use a LaTeX compiler like pdflatex to produce a PDF
file directly, or a tool like dvi2pdf to convert the DVI file to PDF format.
Then you can view the result with your preferred PDF viewer (Adobe Reader,
Okular, Evince, Sumatra, Foxit).
Finally, you will need a viewer for the files LaTeX outputs. Normally LaTeX
saves the final document as a .dvi (Device independent file format), but you
will rarely want it to. DVI files do not contain embedded fonts and many
document viewers are unable to open them.
1.4.3. Viewers
LaTeXila42 is another text editor for Linux (Gnome).
LaTeXila
latex compiler reads a LaTeX .tex file and creates a .dvi

pdflatex compiler reads a LaTeX .tex file and creates a .pdf
dvi2ps converts the .dvi file to .ps (postscript).
dvi2pdf converts the .dvi file to .pdf (dvi2pdfm is an improved
version).
Also tex and pdftex compilers are included, but you should be careful with
using them, because they support only plain TeX. Note that since LaTeX is
just a collection of macros for TeX if you compile a plain TeX document with
a LaTeX compiler (such as pdflatex) it will work while the opposite is not
Here are the main programs you expect to find in any LaTeX distribution:
1.4.4. Applications within a distribution
Practically all LaTeX distributions have a DVI viewer for viewing the default
output of latex, and also tools such as dvi2pdf for converting the result
automatically to PDF and PS formats.
You would write your document slightly differently depending on the compiler
you are using (latex or pdflatex). But as we will see later it is possible
to add a sort of abstraction layer to hide the details of which compiler you're
using, while the compiler can handle the translation itself.
When LaTeX was created, the only format it could create was DVI; later
PDF support was added by pdflatex. PDF files can be created with both
pdflatex and dvipdfm. The output of pdflatex takes direct advantage
of modern features of PDF such as hyperlinks and embedded fonts, which are
not part of DVI. Passing through DVI imposes limitations of its older format.
On the other hand, some packages, such as PSTricks, exploit the process of
conversion to DVI, and therefore will not work with pdflatex. Some of those
packages embed information in the DVI that doesn't appear when the DVI is
viewed, but reemerges when the DVI is converted to another, newer format.
true: if you try to compile a LaTeX source with a TeX compiler you will get
many errors.
Figure 1
(pdf,
png,
jpg)
PDF
pdf2ps
ps2pdf
dvipdfm
PostScript
Output formats
dvi2ps
latex
pdatex
Source formats
tex
pdftex
(eps)
DVI
The following diagram shows the relationships between the LaTeX source
code and the formats you can create from it:
43
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ghostscript
Most of the programs should be already within your LaTeX distribution; the
others come with w:Ghostscript43 , which is a free and multi-platform software
as well.
The boxed red text represents the file formats, the blue text on the arrows
represents the commands you have to use, the small dark green text under the
boxes represents the image formats that are supported. Any time you pass
through an arrow you lose some information, which might decrease the quality
of your document. Therefore, in order to achieve the highest quality in your
output file, you should choose the shortest route to reach your target format.
This is probably the most convenient way to obtain an output in your desired
format anyway. Starting from a LaTeX source, the best way is to use only latex
for a DVI output or pdflatex for a PDF output, converting to PostScript only
when it is necessary to print the document.
44
45
46
Chapter 35 on page 937

http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/..%2FAbsolute%20Beginners
http://webchat.freenode.net?channels=latex
the #latex46 IRC channel on Freenode,
Throughout this book you should also utilise other means for learning about
LaTeX. Good sources are:
Now you should check that your editor and LaTeX distribution are functioning
properly by trying to compile the first example source in the beginning of the
next chapter45 .
1.5. What next?
Chapter ../Export To Other Formats/44 discusses more about exporting LaTeX

source to other file formats.
47
48
49
http://tex.stackexchange.com/
http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html
http://www.texample.net/
the TeX Stack Exchange47 Q&A,

the TeX48 FAQ,
and the TeXample.net49 Community.
1
2
Chapter 1 on page 5
Before starting, ensure you have LaTeX installed on your computer (see
Installation2 for instructions of what you will need). We begin by creating the
source LaTeX file, and then take you through how to feed this file through the
LaTeX system to produce quality output, such as postscript or PDF.
This tutorial is aimed at getting familiar with the bare bones of LaTeX1 .
2. Basics
\begin{document}
\documentclass{article}
For the truly impatient, a minimal example looks something like the following
(the commands will be explained later):
The input for LaTeX is a plain ASCII text file. You can create it with any text
editor. It contains the text of the document, as well as the commands that tell
LaTeX how to typeset the text.
LaTeX uses a markup language in order to describe document structure and

presentation. LaTeX converts your source text, combined with the markup,
into a high quality document. For the purpose of analogy, web pages work
in a similar way: the HTML is used to describe the document, but it is your
browser that presents it in its full glory - with different colours, fonts, sizes,
etc.
2.1. The LaTeX source
"Whitespace" characters, such as blank or tab, are treated uniformly as "space"

by LaTeX. Several consecutive whitespace characters are treated as one "space".
Whitespace at the start of a line is generally ignored, and a single line break is
treated as whitespace. An empty line between two lines of text defines the
end of a paragraph. Several empty lines are treated the same as one empty line.
The text below is an example. On the left hand side is the text from the input
file, and on the right hand side is the formatted output.
2.1.1. Spaces
Hello world!
\end{document}
spaces
The following symbols are reserved characters that either have a special
meaning under LaTeX or are unavailable in all the fonts. If you enter them
directly in your text, they will normally not print, but rather make LaTeX do
2.1.2. Special Characters
It does not matter whether you enter one or several spaces after a word.
An empty line starts a new paragraph.
An empty line starts a new

paragraph.
It does not matter whether you

enter one or several
after a word.
The command \ produces a tilde which is placed over the next letter. For
example \n gives . To produce just the character , use \{} which places
a over an empty box.
The backslash character \ can not be entered by adding another backslash

in front of it (\\); this sequence is used for line breaking. For introducing a
backslash in math mode, you can use \backslash instead.
The other symbols and many more can be printed with special commands in
mathematical formulae or as accents.
\# \$ \% \textasciicircum{} \& \_ \{ \} \~{} \textbackslash{}
As you will see, these characters can be used in your documents all the same
by adding a prefix backslash:
# $ % & _ { } \
things you did not intend.
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/LaTeX%2FFormatting
They start with a backslash \ and then have a name consisting of letters
only. Command names are terminated by a space, a number or any other
"non-letter".
They consist of a backslash \ and exactly one non-letter.
LaTeX commands are case sensitive, and take one of the following two formats:
2.1.3. LaTeX commands
If you want to insert text that might contain several particular symbols (such as
URIs), you can consider using the \verb command, which will be discussed
later in the section on formatting3 .
Similarly, the command \ produces a hat over the next character, for example
\{o} produces . If you need in text to display the symbol you have to use
\textasciicircum.
{
\bf This is bold.
}
This is no more bold.
Example:
A group is basically defined by a pair of braces. The range of commands put

between braces is limited to them. The \begingroup and \endgroup
commands are equivalent to opening brace and closing brace.
2.1.4. LaTeX groups
\commandname[option1,option2,...]{argument1}{argument2}...
Some commands need an argument, which has to be given between curly

braces { } after the command name. Some commands support optional
parameters, which are added after the command name in square brackets [ ].
The general syntax is:
Between the \begin and the \end you can put other commands and nested
environments. The internal mechanism of environments defines a group, which
makes its usage safe (no influence on the other parts of the document). In
general, environments can accept arguments as well, but this feature is not
commonly used and so it will be discussed in more advanced parts of the
document.
\begin{environmentname}
text to be influenced
\end{environmentname}
Environments in LaTeX have a role that is quite similar to commands, but they
usually have effect on a wider part of the document. Their syntax is:
2.1.5. LaTeX environments
For some commands it is important to restrict their range of action, and that's
where groups come to be very useful.
This is an % stupid
% Better: instructive <---example: Supercal%
ifragilist%
icexpialidocious
This can be used to write notes into the input file, which will not show up in
the printed version.
When LaTeX encounters a % character while processing an input file, it ignores

the rest of the current line, the line break, and all whitespace at the beginning
of the next line.
2.1.6. Comments
Anything in LaTeX can be expressed in terms of commands and environments.
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/LaTeX%2FFormatting%
23Multi-line_comments
When LaTeX processes an input file, it expects it to follow a certain structure.

Thus every input file must start with the command
2.2. Input File Structure
The core LaTeX language does not have a predefined syntax for commenting
out regions spanning multiple lines. Refer to multi-line comments4 for simple
workarounds.
Note that the % character can be used to split long input lines that do not allow
whitespace or line breaks, as with Supercali...cious above.
This is an example: Supercalifragilisticexpialidocious
\end{document}
Now you enter the text mixed with some useful LaTeX commands. At the end
of the document you add the
\begin{document}
When all the setup work is done, you start the body of the text with the
command
\usepackage{...}
This specifies what sort of document you intend to write. After that, you can
include commands that influence the style of the whole document, or you can
load packages that add new features to the LaTeX system. To load such a
package you use the command
\documentclass{...}
Example: an input file for a LaTeX document could start with the line
Here class specifies the type of document to be created. The LaTeX distribution
provides additional classes for other documents, including letters and slides.
The options parameter customizes the behavior of the document class. The
options have to be separated by commas.
\documentclass[options]{class}
The first information LaTeX needs to know when processing an input file is
the type of document the author wants to create. This is specified with the
\documentclass command.
2.2.1. Document Classes
command, which tells LaTeX to call it a day. Anything that follows this
command will be ignored by LaTeX. The area between \documentclass
and \begin{document} is called the preamble.
proc
IEEEtran
Document Classes
article
for articles in scientific journals,

presentations, short reports, program documentation, invitations,
...
for articles with the IEEE Transactions format.
a class for proceedings based on
the article class.
Here are some document classes that can be used with LaTeX:
which instructs LaTeX to typeset the document as an article with a base font
size of 11 points, and to produce a layout suitable for double sided printing on
A4 paper.
\documentclass[11pt,twoside,a4paper]{article}
book
slides
report
Document Classes
minimal
is as small as it can get. It only
sets a page size and a base font.
It is mainly used for debugging
purposes.
for longer reports containing several chapters, small books, thesis,
...
for real books
for slides. The class uses big sans
serif letters.
for changing sensibly the output

of the document. It is based on
the book class, but you can
create any kind of document
with it http://www.ctan.org/texarchive/macros/latex/contrib/memoir/m
for writing letters.
for writing presentations (see LaTeX/Presentations6 ).
http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/
memoir/memman.pdf
The most common options for the standard document classes are listed in the
following table:
letter
beamer
Document Classes
memoir
fleqn
a4paper, letterpaper,...
Document Class Options

10pt, 11pt, 12pt
Sets the size of the main font in the

document. If no option is specified,
10pt is assumed.
Defines the paper size. The default size is letterpaper;
However, many European distributions of TeX now come pre-set
for A4, not Letter, and this is also
true of all distributions of pdfLaTeX. Besides that, a5paper,
b5paper, executivepaper,
and legalpaper can be specified.
Typesets displayed formulas leftaligned instead of centered.
onecolumn, twocolumn
titlepage, notitlepage

leqno
Places the numbering of formulas
on the left hand side instead of the
right.
Specifies whether a new page
should be started after the document title or not. The article class
does not start a new page by default, while report and book do.
Instructs LaTeX to typeset the
document in one column or two
columns.
landscape

twoside, oneside
Specifies whether double or single sided output should be generated. The classes article and
report are single sided and the
book class is double sided by
default. Note that this option concerns the style of the document
only. The option twoside does
not tell the printer you use that it
should actually make a two-sided
printout.
Changes the layout of the document to print in landscape mode.

openright, openany
Makes chapters begin either only
on right hand pages or on the next
page available. This does not work
with the article class, as it does
not know about chapters. The
report class by default starts
chapters on the next page available
and the book class starts them on
right hand pages.
makes LaTeX indicate hyphenation

and justification problems with
a small square in the right-hand
margin of the problem line so they
can be located quickly by a human.
It also suppresses the inclusion of
images and shows only a frame
where they would normally occur.
\documentclass[12pt,a4paper,oneside,draft]{report}
For example, if you want a report to be in 12pt type on A4, but printed onesided in draft mode, you would use:

draft
Modern TeX distributions come with a large number of packages pre-installed.

If you are working on a Unix system, use the command texdoc for accessing
package documentation. For more information, see the Packages7 section.
command, where package is the name of the package and options is a list of
keywords that trigger special features in the package. Some packages come
with the LaTeX base distribution. Others are provided separately.
\usepackage[options]{package}
While writing your document, you will probably find that there are some
areas where basic LaTeX cannot solve your problem. If you want to include
graphics, colored text or source code from a file into your document, you need
to enhance the capabilities of LaTeX. Such enhancements are called packages.
Packages are activated with the
2.2.2. Packages
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/Learning%20the%20vi%20Editor%
2FVim
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/emacs
% hello.tex - Our first LaTeX example!

\begin{document}
Hello World!
\end{document}
Open your favorite text-editor. vim8 , emacs9 , Notepad++, and other text
editors will have syntax highlighting that will help to write your files.
Reproduce the following text in your editor. This is the LaTeX source.
Now we can create our first document. We will produce the absolute bare
minimum that is needed in order to get some output; the well known Hello
World! approach will be suitable here.
2.3. Our first document
% hello.tex - Our first LaTeX
2.3.1. What does it all mean?

The first line is a comment. This is
because it begins with the percent
example!
symbol (%); when LaTeX sees
this, it simply ignores the rest of
the line. Comments are useful
for people to annotate parts of
the source file. For example, you
could put information about the
author and the date, or whatever
you wish.
When picking a name for your file, make sure it bears a .tex extension.
Save your file as hello.tex.
\begin{document}
This line is a command and tells

LaTeX to use the article document class. A document class file
defines the formatting, which in
this case is a generic article format.
The handy thing is that if you want
to change the appearance of your
document, substitute article for
another class file that exists.
This line is the beginning of the
environment called document;
it alerts LaTeX that content of the
document is about to commence.
Anything above this command is
known generally to belong in the
preamble.
The document environment

ends here. It tells LaTeX that the
document source is complete, anything after this line will be ignored.
As we have said before, each of the LaTeX commands begins with a backslash
(\). This is LaTeX's way of knowing that whenever it sees a backslash, to
expect some commands. Comments are not classed as a command, since all
they tell LaTeX is to ignore the line. Comments never affect the output of the
document.
\end{document}
Hello World!
This was the only actual line containing real content - the text that
we wanted displayed on the page.
1. Type the command: latex hello (the .tex extension is not required, although you can include it if you wish)
2. Various bits of info about LaTeX and its progress will be displayed. If
all went well, the last two lines displayed in the console will be:
It is clearly not going to be the most exciting document you have ever seen,
but we want to see it nonetheless. I am assuming that you are at a command
prompt, already in the directory where hello.tex is stored. LaTeX itself
does not have a GUI (graphical user interface), since it is just a program that
crunches away at your input files, and produces either a DVI or PDF file. Some
LaTeX installations feature a graphical front-end where you can click LaTeX
into compiling your input file. On other systems there might be some typing
involved, so here is how to coax LaTeX into compiling your input file on a text
based system. Please note: this description assumes that you already have a
working LaTeX installation on your computer.
2.3.2. Generating the document
1. Type the command: pdflatex hello (as before, the .tex extension is not required)
2. Various bits of info about LaTeX and its progress will be displayed. If
all went well, the last two lines displayed in the console will be:
This way you created the DVI file, but with the same source file you can create
a PDF document. The steps are exactly the same as before, but you have to
replace the command latex with pdflatex:
This means that your source file has been processed and the resulting document
is called hello.dvi, which takes up 1 page and 232 bytes of space. Now you
may view the DVI file. On Unix with X11 you can type xdvi foo.dvi, on
Windows you can use a program called yap (yet another previewer). (Now
evince and okular, the standard document viewers for many Linux distributions
are able to view DVI files.)
Output written on hello.dvi (1 page, 232 bytes).

Transcript written on hello.log.
DVI needs less disk space and it is faster to create. It does not include the
fonts within the document, so if you want the document to be viewed properly
on another computer, there must be all the necessary fonts installed. It does
not support any interactivity such as hyperlinks or animated images. DVI
viewers are not very common, so you can consider using it for previewing
your document while typesetting.
PDF needs more disk space and it is slower to create, but it includes all
the necessary fonts within the document, so you will not have any problem
of portability. It supports internal and external hyperlinks. It also supports
you can notice that the PDF document is bigger than the DVI, even if it contains
exactly the same information. The main differences between the DVI and PDF
formats are:
Output written on hello.pdf (1 page, 5548 bytes).

Transcript written on hello.log.
10
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hanging%20punctuation
Note, in this instance, due to the simplicity of the file, you only need to run the
LaTeX command once. However, if you begin to create complex documents,
including bibliographies and cross-references, etc, LaTeX needs to be executed
multiple times to resolve the references. But this will be discussed in the future
when it comes up.
About now, you saw you can create both DVI and PDF document from the
same source. This is true, but it gets a bit more complicated if you want
to introduce images or links. This will be explained in detail in the next
chapters, but for now assume you can compile in both DVI and PDF without
any problem.
advanced typographic features: hanging punctuation10 , font expansion and

margin kerning resulting in more flexibility available to the TeX engine and
better looking output. Nowadays it is the de facto standard for sharing and
publishing documents, so you can consider using it for the final version of
your document.
Never, ever use directories (folders) or file names that contain spaces. Although
your operating system probably supports them, some don't, and they will only
cause grief and tears with TeX. Make filenames as short or as long as you wish,
2.3.4. Picking suitable filenames
$ gs -dBATCH -dNOPAUSE -q -sDEVICE=pdfwrite

-sOutputFile="Compressed.pdf" "Original.pdf"
For a PDF output, you may have noticed that the output PDF file is not always
the same size depending on the engine you used to compile the file. So latex
dvips ps2pdf will usually be much smaller than pdflatex. So
if you want pdflatex features along with a small output file size, you can use
the Ghostscript command:
2.3.3. Compressed PDF
Common file extensions in LaTeX
When you work with LaTeX you will soon find yourself in a maze of files with
various extensions and probably no clue. The following list explains the most
common file types you might encounter when working with TeX:
2.3.5. Files you might encounter
but strictly avoid spaces. Stick to lower-case letters without accents (a-z), the
digits 0-9, the hyphen (), and only one full point or period (.) to separate the
file extension (somewhat similar to the conventions for a good Web URL): it
will let you refer to TeX files over the Web more easily and make your files
more portable. Some operating systems do not distinguish between upper-case
and lower-case letters, others do. Therefore it's best not to mix them.
.bib
.blg
.bst
.cls
.bbl

.aux
A file that transports information

from one compiler run to the next.
Among other things, the .aux
file is used to store information
associated with cross-references.
Bibliography file output by BiBTeX and used by LaTeX
Bibliography database file
BiBTeX log file.
BiBTeX style file.
Class files define what your document looks like. They are selected
with the \documentclass command.
.fd
.ins

.dtx
Documented TeX. This is the
main distribution format for LaTeX style files. If you process a
.dtx file you get documented
macro code of the LaTeX package
contained in the .dtx file.
The installer for the files contained in the matching .dtx file.
If you download a LaTeX package
from the net, you will normally
get a .dtx and a .ins file. Run
LaTeX on the .ins file to unpack
the .dtx file.
Font description file telling LaTeX
about new fonts.
.log
.pdf

.dvi
Device Independent File. This is
the main result of a LaTeX compile run with latex. You can look
at its content with a DVI previewer
program or you can send it to a
printer with dvips or a similar application.
Portable Document Format. This
is the main result of a LaTeX compile run with pdflatex. You can
look at its content or print it with
any PDF viewer.
Gives a detailed account of what
happened during the last compiler
run.
.ind
.idx
.lot
.lof

.toc
Stores all your section headers. It
gets read in for the next compiler
run and is used to produce the
table of contents.
This is like .toc but for the list
of figures.
And again the same for the list of
tables.
If your document contains an
index. LaTeX stores all the words
that go into the index in this file.
Process this file with makeindex.
The processed .idx file, ready for
inclusion into your document on
the next compile cycle.
.out
.tex
.sty

.ilg
Logfile telling what makeindex
did.
LaTeX Macro package. This is a
file you can load into your LaTeX
document using the \usepackage
command.
LaTeX or TeX input file. It can be
compiled with latex.
hyperref package file, just one for
the master file.
11
12
The simplest is the \input command:
When working on big documents, you might want to split the input file into
several parts. LaTeX has three commands to insert a file into another when
building the document.
See General Guidelines12 for further explanations.
2.4.2. Big Projects
See Document Structure11 and the Formatting part.
2.4.1. Formatting text
2.4. And what now?
This
command
is
roughly
equivalent
to
\clearpage
\input{filename} \clearpage. The \include command is
different from \input in that it's the output that is added instead of the
commands from the other files. Therefore a new page will be created at
every \include command, which makes it appropriate to use it for large
entities such as book chapters. The file extension of the .tex file which is to
be included must also be omitted from the filename, unlike with input for
\include{filename}
The other main inclusion command is \include:
\input inserts the contents of another file, named filename.tex; note that the
.tex extension is omitted. For all practical purposes, \input is no more than
a simple, automated copy-and-paste of the source code in filename.tex.
\input{filename}
In this case, the user wants to include only filename2.tex and filename3.tex.
If the inclusion hierarchy is intricate, commenting can become error-prone:
page numbering will change, and any cross references won't work. A better
alternative is to retain the include calls and use the \includeonly command
in the preamble:
%\include{filename1}
\include{filename2}
\include{filename3}
%\include{filename4}
Very large documents (that usually include many files) take a very long time
to compile, and most users find it convenient to test their last changes by
including only the files they have been working on. One option is to hunt down
all \include commands in the inclusion hierarchy and to comment them
out:
which it is optional. This is because \include also creates an appropriate

.aux file and needs the name without extension to achieve this.
line of your included file.
\end{document}
Remember that the input file should omit all the commands referring to the
main document structure, which should be kept in the original document file.
This includes lines containing usepackages, document class, and everything
but the code strictly referring to the section that is to be included. In this way
you'll avoid finding characters of your code in the output document, or worse,
not finding anything after the included file, in case you forget to erase the
This way, only \include commands for the specified files will be executed,
and inclusion will be handled in only one place. Note that there must be no
spaces between the filenames and the commas.
\includeonly{filename2,filename3}
13
See chapter ../Collaborative Writing of LaTeX Documents/13 .
2.4.3. Working in a team
LaTeX is different from other typesetting systems in that you just have to tell it
the logical and semantical structure of a text. It then derives the typographical
form of the text according to the rules given in the document class file and
in various style files. LaTeX allows users to structure their documents with a
variety of hierarchal constructs, including chapters, sections, subsections and
paragraphs.
The main point of writing a text is to convey ideas, information, or knowledge

to the reader. The reader will understand the text better if these ideas are wellstructured, and will see and feel this structure much better if the typographical
form reflects the logical and semantic structure of the content.
3. Document Structure
Chapter 2.2.1 on page 46
You would put your text where the dots are. The reason for marking off
the beginning of your text is that LaTeX allows you to insert extra setup
specifications before it (where the blank line is in the example above: we'll be
using this soon). The reason for marking off the end of your text is to provide
\begin{document}
...
\end{document}
\documentclass[11pt,a4paper,oneside]{report}
After the document class1 declaration, the text of your document is enclosed
between two commands which identify the beginning and end of the actual
document:
3.1. The document environment
% simple.tex - A simple article to illustrate document structure.
The preamble is everything from the start of the LaTeX source file until the
\begin{document} command. It normally contains commands that affect
the entire document.
3.1.1. Preamble
...
\end{document}
A useful side-effect of marking the end of the document text is that you can
store comments or temporary text underneath the \end{document} in the
knowledge that LaTeX will never try to typeset them:
a place for LaTeX to be programmed to do extra stuff automatically at the end

of the document, like making an index.
The first line is a comment (as denoted by the % sign).

The
\documentclass command takes an argument, which in this case is article,
because that's the type of document we want to produce. It is also possible to
create your own, as is often done by journal publishers, who simply provide
you with their own class file, which tells LaTeX how to format your content.
But we'll be happy with the standard article class for now. \usepackage
is an important command that tells LaTeX to utilize some external macros.
In this instance, we specified mathptmx which means LaTeX will use the
Postscript Times type 1 font instead of the default ComputerModern font. And
finally, the \begin{document}. This strictly isn't part of the preamble,
but I'll put it here anyway, as it implies the end of the preamble by nature of
stating that the document is now starting.
\begin{document}
\usepackage{mathptmx}
\begin{document}
\title{How to Structure a LaTeX Document}
\author{Andrew Roberts}
\date{December 2004}
\maketitle
\end{document}
At the beginning of most documents there will be information about the

document itself, such as the title and date, and also information about the
authors, such as name, address, email etc. All of this type of information
within LaTeX is collectively referred to as top matter. Although never explicitly
specified (there is no \topmatter command) you are likely to encounter
the term within LaTeX documentation.
A simple example:
3.1.2. Top Matter
\title{How to Structure a \LaTeX{} Document}

\author{Andrew Roberts\\
School of Computing,\\
University of Leeds,\\
Leeds,\\
United Kingdom,\\
LS2 1HE\\
\texttt{andyr@comp.leeds.ac.uk}}
Here is a more complicated example:
The \title, \author, and \date commands are self-explanatory. You

put the title, author name, and date in curly braces after the relevant command.
The title and author are usually compulsory (at least if you want LaTeX to write
the title automatically); if you omit the \date command, LaTeX uses today's
date by default. You always finish the top matter with the \maketitle
command, which tells LaTeX that it's complete and it can typeset the title
according to the information you have provided and the class (style) you are
using. If you omit \maketitle, the titling will never be typeset (unless you
write your own).
If you are provided with a class file from a publisher, or if you use the AMS
article class (amsart), then you can use several different commands to enter author information. The email address is at the end, and the \texttt
commands formats the email address using a mono-spaced font. The built-in
command called \today will be replaced with the current date when pro-
\title{Our Fun Document}

\author{Jane Doe \and John Doe}
\date{\today}
\maketitle
If there are two authors separate them with the \and command:
as you can see, you can use commands as arguments of \title and the
others. The double backslash (\\) is the LaTeX command for forced linebreak.
LaTeX normally decides by itself where to break lines, and it's usually right,
but sometimes you need to cut a line short, like here, and start a new one.
\date{\today}
\maketitle
As most research papers have an abstract, there are predefined commands for
telling LaTeX which part of the content makes up the abstract. This should
appear in its logical order, therefore, after the top matter, but before the main
sections of the body. This command is available for the document classes
article and report, but not book.
3.1.3. Abstract
Using this approach, you can create only basic output whose layout is very
hard to change. If you want to create your title freely, see the Title Creation2
section.
cessed by LaTeX. But you are free to put whatever you want as a date, in no
set order. If braces are left empty, then the date is omitted.
The commands for inserting sections are fairly intuitive. Of course, certain
commands are appropriate to different document classes. For example, a book
3.1.4. Sectioning Commands
\renewcommand{\abstractname}{Executive Summary}
By default, LaTeX will use the word "Abstract" as a title for your abstract, if
you want to change it into anything else, e.g. "Executive Summary", add the
following line before your abstract:
\begin{abstract}
Your abstract goes here...
...
\end{abstract}
...
\end{document}
\begin{document}
Command
Level
Comment
Notice that you do not need to specify section numbers; LaTeX will sort that
out for you. Also, for sections, you do not need to markup which content
belongs to a given block, using \begin and \end commands, for example.
LaTeX provides 7 levels of depth for defining sections:
\subsubsection{Article Information}
This subsubsection's content...
\subsection{Top Matter}
This subsection's content...
\section{Structure}
This section's content...
\section{Introduction}
This section's content...
has chapters but an article doesn't. Here is an edited version of some of the
structure commands in use from simple.tex.
All the titles of the sections are added automatically to the table of contents
(if you decide to insert one). But if you make manual styling changes to your
heading, for example a very long title, or some special line-breaks or unusual
font-play, this would appear in the Table of Contents as well, which you almost
certainly don't want. LaTeX allows you to give an optional extra version of the
heading text which only gets used in the Table of Contents and any running
heads, if they are in effect. This optional alternative heading goes in [square
brackets] before the curly braces:
Command
Level
Comment
\part{part}
-1
not in letters
\chapter{chapter}
0
only books and reports
\section{section}
1
not in letters
\subsection{subsection}2
not in letters
\subsubsection{subsubsection}
3
not in letters
\paragraph{paragraph} 4
not in letters
\subparagraph{subparagraph}
5
not in letters
Numbering of the sections is performed automatically by LaTeX, so don't

bother adding them explicitly, just insert the heading you want between the
curly braces. Parts get roman numerals (Part I, Part II, etc.); chapters and
sections get decimal numbering like this document, and appendices (which are
just a special case of chapters, and share the same structure) are lettered (A,
B, C, etc.). You can change the depth to which section numbering occurs, so
you can turn it off selectively. By default it is set to 2. If you only want parts,
chapters, and sections numbered, not subsections or subsubsections etc., you
can change the value of the secnumdepth counter using the \setcounter
command, giving the depth level from the previous table. For example, if you
want to change it to "1":
Section numbering
\section[Effect on staff turnover]{An analysis of the

effect of the revised recruitment policies on staff
turnover at divisional headquarters}
All the divisional commands from \part* to \subparagraph* have this "starred"
version which can be used on special occasions for an unnumbered heading when the setting of secnumdepth would normally mean it would be
numbered.
\subsection*{Introduction}
To get an unnumbered section heading which does not go into the Table of
Contents, follow the command name with an asterisk before the opening curly
brace:
\setcounter{tocdepth}{3}
A related counter is tocdepth, which specifies what depth to take the Table
of Contents to. It can be reset in exactly the same way as secnumdepth. For
example:
\setcounter{secnumdepth}{1}
\cleardoublepage
\phantomsection
\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Bibliography}
For chapters you will also need to clear the page (this will also correct page
numbering in the ToC):
\phantomsection
\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Introduction}
\section*{Introduction}
Note if you use pdf bookmarks you will need to add a phantom section so that
bookmark will lead to the correct place in the document:
\section*{Introduction}
\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Introduction}
If you want the unnumbered section to be in the table of contents anyway, use
the \addcontentsline command like this:
The \phantomsection command is defined in the hyperref package.
\addtocounter{counter}{integer}
Any counter can be incremented/decremented with the following command:
The next section after this command will now be numbered 5.
\setcounter{section}{4}
The value where the section numbering starts from can be set with the following
command:
\bibliographystyle{unsrt}
\bibliography{my_bib_file}
Only use the \appendix macro once for all appendices.
\appendix
\section{First Appendix}
For the article class use:
\appendix
\chapter{First Appendix}
In the report or book classes this gives:
The separate numbering of appendices is also supported by LaTeX. The

\appendix macro can be used to indicate that following sections or chapters
are to be numbered as appendices.
3.1.5. Appendices
23Paragraph_Indents
All auto-numbered headings get entered in the Table of Contents (ToC) automatically. You don't have to print a ToC, but if you want to, just add the
command \tableofcontents at the point where you want it printed (usually after the Abstract or Summary).
3.1.7. Table of contents
Paragraphs of text come after section headings. Simply type the text and
leave a blank line between paragraphs. The blank line means "start a new
paragraph here": it does not mean you get a blank line in the typeset output.
For formatting paragraph indents and spacing between paragraphs, refer to the
Formatting3 section.
3.1.6. Ordinary paragraphs
The commands \listoffigures and \listoftables work in exactly the same way as \tableofcontents to automatically list all
your tables and figures. If you use them, they normally go after the
\tableofcontents command. The \tableofcontents command
normally shows only numbered section headings, and only down to the level
defined by the tocdepth counter, but you can add extra entries with the
\addcontentsline command. For example if you use an unnumbered
section heading command to start a preliminary piece of text like a Foreword
or Preface, you can write:
Entries for the ToC are recorded each time you process your document, and
reproduced the next time you process it, so you need to re-run LaTeX one extra
time to ensure that all ToC pagenumber references are correctly calculated.
We've already seen how to use the optional argument to the sectioning commands to add text to the ToC which is slightly different from the one printed in
the body of the document. It is also possible to add extra lines to the ToC, to
force extra or unnumbered section headings to be included.
\renewcommand{\contentsname}{<New table of contents title>}
To change the title of the TOC, you have to paste this command
\cleardoublepage
\phantomsection
\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{List of Figures}
\listoffigures
This will format an unnumbered ToC entry for "Preface" in the "subsection" style. You can use the same mechanism to add lines to the
List of Figures or List of Tables by substituting lof or lot for toc.
If the hyperref package is used and the link does not point correct
to the chapter, the command \phantomsection in combination with
\clearpage or \cleardoublepage can be used (see also Labels_and_Cross-referencing4 ):
\subsection*{Preface}
\addcontentsline{toc}{subsection}{Preface}
\setcounter{tocdepth}{4}
The default ToC will list headings of level 3 and above. To change how deep
the table of contents displays automatically the following command can be
used in the preamble:
Depth
for LoT.
\listtablename
for LoF and
\listfigurename
with
\contentsname
in your document preamble. The List of Figures (LoF) and List of Tables
(LoT) names can be changed by replacing the
\makeatletter
\renewcommand*{\toclevel@chapter}{-1} % Put chapter depth at the same
level as \part.
\chapter{Epilog}
\renewcommand*{\toclevel@chapter}{0} % Put chapter depth back to its
default value.
\makeatother
You can change the depth of specific section type, which could be useful for
PDF bookmarks (if you are using the hyperref package) :
This will make the table of contents include everything down to paragraphs.
The levels are defined above on this page. Note that this solution does not
permit changing the depth dynamically.
5
6
http://www.ctan.org/pkg/tocvsec2
http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/tocvsec2/
tocvsec2.pdf
you can embed them within the document itself. It's simpler, but it can be
time-consuming if you are writing several papers about similar subjects so
that you often have to cite the same books.
Any good research paper will have a whole list of references. There are two
ways to insert your references into LaTeX:
3.1.8. The Bibliography
In order to further tune the display or the numbering of the table of contents,
for instance if the appendix should be less detailed, you can make use of the
tocvsec2 package ( CTAN5 , doc6 ).
7
8
9
http://www.bibtex.org
http://www.cs.stir.ac.uk/~kjt/software/latex/showbst.html
In order to know how to add the bibliography to your document, see the
Bibliography Management9 section.
you can store them in an external BibTeX file 7 and then link them via a
command to your current document and use a Bibtex style8 to define how
they appear. This way you can create a small database of the references you
might use and simply link them, letting LaTeX work for you.
Don't panic if you see error messages: it's very common to mistype or misspell
commands, forget curly braces, type a forward slash instead of a backslash,
or use a special character by mistake. Errors are easily spotted and easily
corrected in your editor, and you can then run LaTeX again to check you
have fixed everything. Some of the most common errors are described in next
sections.
LaTeX describes what it's typesetting while it does it, and if it encounters
something it doesn't understand or can't do, it will display a message saying
what's wrong. It may also display warnings for less serious conditions.
4. Errors and Warnings
Key
x
Meaning
Stop immediately and exit the
program.
When LaTeX finds an error like this, it displays the error message and pauses.
You must type one of the following letters to continue:
! Undefined control sequence.

l.6 \tableofcotnetns
The format of an error message is always the same. Error messages begin
with an exclamation mark at the start of the line, and give a description of
the error, followed by another line starting with the number, which refers to
the line-number in your document file which LaTeX was processing when
the error was spotted. Here's an example, showing that the user mistyped the
\tableofcontents command:
4.1. Error messages
h
i
Key
q
Meaning
Carry on quietly as best you can
and don't bother me with any more
error messages.
Stop the program but re-position
the text in my editor at the point
where you found the error (This
only works if you're using an editor which LaTeX can communicate
with).
Try to give me more help.
(followed by a correction) means
input the correction in place of the
error and carry on (This is only a
temporary fix to get the file processed. You still have to make that
correction in the editor).
Meaning
run in non-stop mode. Plow
through any errors, unless too
many pile up and it fails (100 errors).
Warnings don't begin with an exclamation mark: they are just comments by
LaTeX about things you might want to look into, such as overlong or underrun
lines (often caused by unusual hyphenations, for example), pages running
short or long, and other typographical niceties (most of which you can ignore
4.2. Warnings
Some systems (Emacs is one example) run LaTeX with a "nonstop" switch
turned on, so it will always process through to the end of the file, regardless of
errors, or until a limit is reached.
Key
r
Most error messages are self-explanatory, but be aware that the place where
LaTeX spots and reports an error may be later in the file than the place where
it actually occurred. For example if you forget to close a curly brace which
Only a few common error messages are given here: those most likely to be
encountered by beginners. If you find another error message not shown here,
and it's not clear what you should do, ask for help.
4.3. Examples
until later). Unlike other systems, which try to hide unevennesses in the text
(usually unsuccessfully) by interfering with the letter spacing, LaTeX takes the
view that the author or editor should be able to contribute. While it is certainly
possible to set LaTeX's parameters so that the spacing is sufficiently sloppy
that you will almost never get a warning about badly-fitting lines or pages, you
will almost certainly just be delaying matters until you start to get complaints
from your readers or publishers.
The reason LaTeX thinks there are too many }'s here is that the opening
curly brace is missing after the \date control sequence and before the word
! Too many }'s.

l.6 \date December 2004}
4.3.1. Too many }'s
Newcomers should remember to check the list of special characters: a very

large number of errors when you are learning LaTeX are due to accidentally
typing a special character when you didn't mean to. This disappears after a
few days as you get used to them.
encloses, say, italics, LaTeX won't report this until something else occurs
which can't happen until the curly brace is encountered (e.g. the end of the
document!) Some errors can only be righted by humans who can read and
understand what the document is supposed to mean or look like.
In this example, LaTeX is complaining that it has no such command ("control

sequence") as \dtae. Obviously it's been mistyped, but only a human can
detect that fact: all LaTeX knows is that \dtae is not a command it knows
about: it's undefined. Mistypings are the most common source of errors.
Some editors allow common commands and environments to be inserted using
drop-down menus or icons, which may be used to avoid these errors.
! Undefined control sequence.

l.6 \dtae
{December 2004}
4.3.2. Undefined control sequence
December, so the closing curly brace is seen as one too many (which it is!). In
fact, there are other things which can follow the \date command apart from
a date in curly braces, so LaTeX cannot possibly guess that you've missed out
the opening curly brace until it finds a closing one!
Runaway argument?
{December 2004 \maketitle
4.3.4. Runaway argument
This can also happen if you use the wrong character encoding, for example
using utf8 without "\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}" or using iso8859-1 without
"\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}", there are several character encoding formats,
make sure to pick the right one.
A character that can only be used in the mathematics was inserted in normal
text. Either switch to mathematic mode via \begin{math}...\end{math} or use
the 'quick math mode': \ensuremath{math stuff}
! Missing $ inserted
4.3.3. Not in Mathematics Mode
Underfull \hbox (badness 1394) in paragraph

at lines 28--30
[][]\LY1/brm/b/n/10 Bull, RJ: \LY1/brm/m/n/10
Ac-count-ing in Busi[94]
4.3.5. Underfull hbox
In this error, the closing curly brace has been omitted from the date. It's the
opposite of the error of too many }'s, and it results in \maketitle trying to
format the title page while LaTeX is still expecting more text for the date! As
\maketitle creates new paragraphs on the title page, this is detected and LaTeX
complains that the previous paragraph has ended but \date is not yet finished.
! Paragraph ended before \date was complete.

<to be read again>
\par
l.8
[101]
Overfull \hbox (9.11617pt too wide) in paragraph
at lines 860--861
4.3.6. Overfull hbox
This comes up if you force a linebreak, e.g., \\, and have a return before it.
Normally TeX ignores linebreaks, providing full paragraphs to ragged text.
In this case it is necessary to pull the linebreak up one line to the end of the
previous sentence.
This is a warning that LaTeX cannot stretch the line wide enough to fit, without
making the spacing bigger than its currently permitted maximum. The badness
(0-10,000) indicates how severe this is (here you can probably ignore a badness
of 1394). It says what lines of your file it was typesetting when it found this,
and the number in square brackets is the number of the page onto which the
offending line was printed. The codes separated by slashes are the typeface
and font style and size used in the line. Ignore them for the moment.
The warning is given so that you can find the line in the code that originates
the problem (in this case: 860-861) and fix it. The line on this example is too
long by a shade over 9pt. The chosen hyphenation point which minimizes the
error is shown at the end of the line (Win-). Line numbers and page numbers
are given as before. In this case, 9pt is too much to ignore (over 3mm), and a
manual correction needs making (such as a change to the hyphenation), or the
flexibility settings need changing.
An overfull \hbox means that there is a hyphenation or justification problem:

moving the last word on the line to the next line would make the spaces in the
line wider than the current limit; keeping the word on the line would make the
spaces smaller than the current limit, so the word is left on the line, but with
the minimum allowed space between words, and which makes the line go over
the edge.
[]\LY1/brm/m/n/10 Windows, \LY1/brm/m/it/10 see

\LY1/brm/m/n/10 X Win-
! LaTeX Error: File paralisy.sty' not found.

Type X to quit or <RETURN> to proceed,
or enter new name. (Default extension: sty)
Enter file name:
4.3.7. Missing package
It can also issue this warning if the \end{document} tag was not included
and/or was deleted.
If the "overfull" word includes a forward slash, such as "input/output",

this should be properly typeset as "input\slash output". The use of
\slash has the same effect as using the "/" character, except that it can
form the end of a line (with the following words appearing at the start of the
next line). The "/" character is typically used in units, such as "mm/year"
character, which should not be broken over multiple lines.
Although this is a warning from the Babel package and not from LaTeX,
this error is very common and (can) give some strange hyphenation (word
breaking) problems in your document. Wrong hyphenation rules can decrease
the neatness of your document.
4.3.8. Package babel Warning: No hyphenation patterns were

loaded for the language X
When you use the \usepackage command to request LaTeX to use a certain
package, it will look for a file with the specified name and the filetype .sty.
In this case the user has mistyped the name of the paralist package, so it's easy
to fix. However, if you get the name right, but the package is not installed on
your machine, you will need to download and install it before continuing. If
you don't want to affect the global installation of the machine, you can simply
download from Internet the necessary .sty file and put it in the same folder
of the document you are compiling.
1
2

Chapter 41.1 on page 1048
The solution is not difficult, just install the used language in your LaTeX
distribution2 .
\usepackage[latin]{babel}
This can happen after the usage of: (see LaTeX/Internationalization1 )
Package babel Warning: No hyphenation patterns were loaded for

(babel)
the language Latin'
(babel)
I will use the patterns loaded for \language=0
instead.
http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nag
nag ( www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nag3 ) is a LaTeX package designed to indicate the use of obsolete commands.
There are several programs capable of checking LaTeX source, with the aim
of finding errors or highlighting bad practice, and providing more help to
(particularly novice) users than the built-in error messages.
4.3.10. Software that can check your .tex Code
If you previously set the X language, and then decided to switch to Y, you
will get this error. This may seem awkward, as there is obviously no error in
your code if you did not change anything. The answer lies in the .aux file,
where babel defined your language. If you try the compilation a second time, it
should work. If not, delete the .aux file, then everything will work as usual.
4.3.9. Package babel Error: You haven't loaded the option X yet.
4
5
http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/support/lacheck
http://baruch.ev-en.org/proj/chktex/
lacheck ( www.ctan.org/tex-archive/support/lacheck4 ) is a consistency

checker intended to spot mistakes in code. It is available as source code or
compiled for Windows and OS/2
chktex ( baruch.ev-en.org/proj/chktex/5 ) is a LaTeX semantic checker available as source code for Unix-like systems.
http://www.bibtex.org
BibTeX provides for the storage of all references in an external, flat-file

database. This database can be linked to any LaTeX document, and citations
For any academic/research writing, incorporating references into a document

is an important task. Fortunately, LaTeX has a variety of features that make
dealing with references much simpler, including built-in support for citing
references. However, a much more powerful and flexible solution is achieved
thanks to an auxiliary tool called BibTeX1 (which comes bundled as standard
with LaTeX).
5. Bibliography Management
If you are writing only one or two documents and aren't planning on writing
more on the same subject for a long time, maybe you don't want to waste
time creating a database of references you are never going to use. In this case
5.1. Embedded system
made to any reference that is contained within the file. This is often more
convenient than embedding them at the end of every document written. There is
now a centralized bibliography source that can be linked to as many documents
as desired (write once, read many!). Of course, bibliographies can be split
over as many files as one wishes, so there can be a file containing references
concerning General Relativity and another about Quantum Mechanics. When
writing about Quantum Gravity (QG), which tries to bridge the gap between
these two theories, both of these files can be linked into the document, in
addition to references specific to QG.
OK, so what is going on here? The first thing to notice is the establishment of
the environment. thebibliography is a keyword that LaTeX recognizes
\end{thebibliography}
\bibitem{lamport94}
Leslie Lamport,
\emph{\LaTeX: A Document Preparation System}.
Addison Wesley, Massachusetts,
2nd Edition,
1994.
\begin{thebibliography}{9}
LaTeX provides an environment called thebibliography that you have

to use where you want the bibliography; that usually means at the very end
of your document, just before the \end{document} command. Here is a
practical example:
you should consider using the basic and simple bibliography support that is
embedded within LaTeX.
Next is the actual reference entry itself. This is prefixed with the
\bibitem{cite_key} command. The cite_key should be a unique identifier for that particular reference, and is often some sort of mnemonic consisting
of any sequence of letters, numbers and punctuation symbols (although not a
comma). I often use the surname of the first author, followed by the last two
digits of the year (hence lamport94). If that author has produced more than one
reference for a given year, then I add letters after, 'a', 'b', etc. But, you should
do whatever works for you. Everything after the key is the reference itself.
You need to type it as you want it to be presented. I have put the different parts
as everything between the begin and end tags as being data for the bibliography.
The mandatory argument, which I supplied after the begin statement, is telling
LaTeX how wide the item label will be when printed. Note however, that the
number itself is not the parameter, but the number of digits is. Therefore, I am
effectively telling LaTeX that I will only need reference labels of one character
in length, which ultimately means no more than nine references in total. If
you want more than nine, then input any two-digit number, such as '56' which
allows up to 99 references.
Instead of WYSIWYG editors, typesetting systems like \TeX{} or

\LaTeX{} \cite{lamport94} can be used.
To actually cite a given document is very easy. Go to the point where you want
the citation to appear, and use the following: \cite{cite_key}, where
the cite_key is that of the bibitem you wish to cite. When LaTeX processes the
document, the citation will be cross-referenced with the bibitems and replaced
with the appropriate number citation. The advantage here, once again, is that
LaTeX looks after the numbering for you. If it were totally manual, then
adding or removing a reference would be a real chore, as you would have to
re-number all the citations by hand.
5.2. Citations
of the reference, such as author, title, etc., on different lines for readability.
These linebreaks are ignored by LaTeX. I wanted the title to be in italics, so I
used the \emph{} command to achieve this.
When a sequence of multiple citations are needed, you should use a single
\cite{} command. The citations are then separated by commas. Note that
you must not use spaces between the citations. Here's an example:
5.2.2. Multiple Citations
The argument, "p. 215", will show up inside the same brackets. Note the tilde
in [p.215], which replaces the end-of-sentence spacing with a non-breakable
inter-word space. There are two reasons: end-of-sentence spacing is too wide,
and "p." should not be separated from the page number.
\cite[p.~215]{citation01}
Sometimes you want to refer to a certain page, figure or theorem in a text book.
For that you can use the arguments to the \cite command:
5.2.1. Referring More Specific
\nocite{lamport95}.
5.2.4. Natbib
A special version of the command, \nocite{*}, includes all entries from

the database, whether they are referenced in the document or not.
Lamport showed in 1995 something...
If you only want a reference to appear in the bibliography, but not where it is
referenced in the main text, then the \nocite{} command can be used, for
example:
5.2.3. No Cite
The result will then be shown as citations inside the same brackets.
\cite{citation01,citation02,citation03}
Output
Goossens et al. (1993)
(Goossens et al., 1993)
Goossens, Mittlebach, and
Samarin (1993)
\citep*{goossens93}
(Goossens, Mittlebach, and
Samarin, 1993)
\citeauthor{goossens93}
Goossens et al.
\citeauthor*{goossens93} Goossens, Mittlebach, and
Samarin
\citeyear{goossens93}
1993
\citeyearpar{goossens93} (1993)
\citealt{goossens93}
Goossens et al. 1993
\citealp{goossens93}
Goossens et al., 1993
Natbib commands
Citation command
\citet{goossens93}
\citep{goossens93}
\citet*{goossens93}
Also, you need to change the bibliography style file to be used, so

edit the appropriate line at the bottom of the file so that it reads:
\bibliographystyle{plainnat}. Once done, it is basically a matter
\usepackage[options]{natbib}
The first job is to add the following to your preamble in order to get LaTeX to
use the Natbib package:
Using the standard LaTeX bibliography support, you will see that each reference is numbered and each citation corresponds to the numbers. The numeric
style of citation is quite common in scientific writing. In other disciplines,
the author-year style, e.g., (Roberts, 2003), such as Harvard is preferred, and
is in fact becoming increasingly common within scientific publications. A
discussion about which is best will not occur here, but a possible way to get
such an output is by the natbib package. In fact, it can supersede LaTeX's
own citation commands, as Natbib allows the user to easily switch between
Harvard or numeric.
Provided
REVTeX 4 home
page2
unsrtnat
apsrev
http://authors.aps.org/revtex4/
Provided
abbrvnat
Natbib-compatible styles
Style
Source
plainnat
Provided
Description
natbib-compatible
version of plain
natbib-compatible
version of abbrv
natbib-compatible
version of unsrt
natbib-compatible
style for Physical
Review journals
of altering the existing \cite commands to display the type of citation you
want.
3
4
TeX Catalogue entry5
achemso
Description
natbib-compatible
style for Review of
Modern Physics journals
natbib-compatible
style for IEEE publications
natbib-compatible
style for American
Chemical Society
journals
http://authors.aps.org/revtex4/
http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/
ieeetran.html
achemso.html
IEEEtranN
Style
Source
rmpaps
REVTeX 4 home
page3
Meaning
Parentheses () (default)
Square brackets []
Curly braces {}
Angle brackets <>
multiple citations are separated by
semi-colons (default)
Description
natbib-compatible
style for Royal Society of Chemistry
journals
http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/rsc.
html
Natbib options
Option
round
square
curly
angle
colon
Style
Source
rsc
longnamesfirst
sort&compress
numbers
super
sort
authoryear
Natbib options
Option
comma
Meaning
multiple citations are separated by
commas
author year style citations (default)
numeric citations
superscripted numeric citations
multiple citations are sorted into
the order in which they appear in
the references section
as sort, compressing multiple
numeric citations where possible
the first citation of any reference
will use the starred variant (full
author list), subsequent citations
will use the abbreviated et al. style
Meaning
for use with the chapterbib package. redefines \thebibliography to
issue \section* instead of \chapter*
keeps all the authors names in a
citation on one line to fix some hyperref problems - causes overfull
hboxes
The main commands simply add a t for 'textual' or p for 'parenthesized', to

the basic \cite command. You will also notice how Natbib by default
will compress references with three or more authors to the more concise
1st surname et al version. By adding an asterisk (*), you can override this
default and list all authors associated with that citation. There are some other
specialized commands that Natbib supports, listed in the table here. Keep
in mind that for instance abbrvnat does not support \citet* and will
automatically choose between all authors and et al..
nonamebreak
Natbib options
Option
sectionbib
The symbol for the opening bracket.

The symbol for the closing bracket.
The symbol that appears between multiple citations.
This argument takes a letter:
n - numerical style.
s - numerical superscript style.
any other letter - author-year style.
5. The punctuation to appear between the author and the year (in parenthetical case only).
1.
2.
3.
4.
The command requires six mandatory parameters.
\bibpunct{(}{)}{;}{a}{,}{,}
The final area that I wish to cover about Natbib is customizing its citation
style. There is a command called \bibpunct that can be used to override
the defaults and change certain settings. For example, I have put the following
in the preamble:
http://www.ctex.org/documents/packages/bibref/natbib.pdf
So as you can see, this package is quite flexible, especially as you can easily
switch between different citation styles by changing a single parameter. Do
have a look at the Natbib manual7 , it's a short document and you can learn
even more about how to use it.
Some of the options controlled by \bibpunct are also accessible by passing

options to the natbib package when it is loaded. These options also allow some
other aspect of the bibliography to be controlled, and can be seen in the table
(right).
6. The punctuation used between years, in multiple citations when there

is a common author. e.g., (Chomsky 1956, 1957). If you want an extra
space, then you need {,}.
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX
@article{greenwade93,
author = "George D. Greenwade",
title
= "The {C}omprehensive {T}ex {A}rchive {N}etwork
({CTAN})",
year
= "1993",
journal = "TUGBoat",
volume = "14",
A BibTeX database is stored as a .bib file. It is a plain text file, and so can
be viewed and edited easily. The structure of the file is also quite simple. An
example of a BibTeX entry:
I have previously introduced the idea of embedding references at the end of

the document, and then using the \cite command to cite them within the
text. In this tutorial, I want to do a little better than this method, as it's not as
flexible as it could be. Which is why I wish to concentrate on using BibTeX8 .
5.3. BibTeX
= "3",
= "342--351"
After the type, you must have a left curly brace '{' to signify the beginning
of the reference attributes. The first one follows immediately after the brace,
which is the citation key, or the BibTeX key. This key must be unique for all
entries in your bibliography. It is this identifier that you will use within your
document to cross-reference it to this entry. It is up to you as to how you
wish to label each reference, but there is a loose standard in which you use the
author's surname, followed by the year of publication. This is the scheme that
I use in this tutorial.
Each entry begins with the declaration of the reference type, in the form of
@type. BibTeX knows of practically all types you can think of, common
ones are: book, article, and for papers presented at conferences, there is
inproceedings. In this example, I have referred to an article within a journal.
number
pages
10
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX%23Bibliographic%
20information%20file
Next, it should be clear that what follows are the relevant fields and data for
that particular reference. The field names on the left are BibTeX keywords9 .
They are followed by an equals sign (=) where the value for that field is then
placed. BibTeX expects you to explicitly label the beginning and end of each
value. I personally use quotation marks ("), however, you also have the option
of using curly braces ('{', '}'). But as you will soon see, curly braces have
other roles, within attributes, so I prefer not to use them for this job as they can
get more confusing. A notable exception is when you want to use characters
with umlauts (, , etc), since their notation10 is in the format \"{o}, and
the quotation mark will close the one opening the field, causing an error in
the parsing of the reference. Using \usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
in the preamble to the .tex source file can get round this, as the accented
characters can just be stored in the .bib file without any need for special
markup. This allows a consistent format to be kept throughout the .bib file,
avoiding the need to use braces when there are umlauts to consider.
11
12
http://newton.ex.ac.uk/tex/pack/bibtex/btxdoc/node6.html
http://newton.ex.ac.uk/tex/pack/bibtex/btxdoc/node7.html
BibTeX can be quite clever with names of authors. It can accept names in
forename surname or surname, forename. I personally use the former, but
5.3.1. Authors
It can take a while to learn what the reference types are, and what fields each
type has available (and which ones are required or optional, etc). So, look at
this entry type reference11 and also this field reference12 for descriptions of
all the fields. It may be worth bookmarking or printing these pages so that they
are easily at hand when you need them.
Remember that each attribute must be followed by a comma to delimit one

from another. You do not need to add a comma to the last attribute, since the
closing brace will tell BibTeX that there are no more attributes for this entry,
although you won't get an error if you do.
@book{goossens93,
author
= "Michel Goossens and Frank Mittelbach and Alexander
Samarin",
Secondly, there is the issue of how to tell BibTeX when a reference has more
than one author. This is very simply done by putting the keyword and in
between every author. As we can see from another example:
remember that the order you input them (or any data within an entry for that
matter) is customizable and so you can get BibTeX to manipulate the input
and then output it however you like. If you use the forename surname method,
then you must be careful with a few special names, where there are compound
surnames, for example "John von Neumann". In this form, BibTeX assumes
that the last word is the surname, and everything before is the forename, plus
any middle names. You must therefore manually tell BibTeX to keep the 'von'
and 'Neumann' together. This is achieved easily using curly braces. So the
final result would be "John {von Neumann}". This is easily avoided with the
surname, forename, since you have a comma to separate the surname from the
forename.
=
=
=
=
"The LaTeX Companion",

"1993",
"Addison-Wesley",
"Reading, Massachusetts"
An article from a magazine or a journal.
@article
Be careful if you copy the following templates, the % sign is not valid to
comment out lines in bibtex files. If you want to comment out a line, you have
to put it outside the entry.
5.3.2. Standard templates
This book has three authors, and each is separated as described. Of course,
when BibTeX processes and outputs this, there will only be an 'and' between
the penultimate and last authors, but within the .bib file, it needs the ands so
that it can keep track of the individual authors.
title
year
publisher
address
Required fields: author/editor, title, publisher, year.

Optional fields: volume/number, series, address, edition, month, note.
A published book
@book
@article{Xarticle,
= "",
author
title
= "",
journal
= "",
%volume
= "",
%number
= "",
%pages
= "",
= "XXXX",
year
%month
= "",
%note
= "",
}
Required fields: author, title, journal, year.

Optional fields: volume, number, pages, month, note.
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
"",
"",
"",
"",
"",
"",
"",
"",
"XXXX",
"",
"",
@booklet{Xbooklet,
Required fields: title.

Optional fields: author, howpublished, address, month, year, note.
A bound work without a named publisher or sponsor.
@booklet
@book{Xbook,
author
title
publisher
%volume
%number
%series
%address
%edition
year
%month
%note
}
@conference{Xconference,
author
= "",
title
= "",
booktitle = "",
%editor
= "",
Required fields: author, title, booktitle, year.

Optional fields: editor, volume/number, series, pages, address, month,
organization, publisher, note.
Equal to inproceedings
@conference
%author
= "",
title
= "",
%howpublished
= "",
%address = "",
= "XXXX",
year
%month
= "",
%note
= "",
"",
"",
"",
"",
"",
"XXXX",
"",
"",
"",
Required fields: author, title, booktitle, publisher, year.
A section of a book having its own title.
@incollection
Required fields: author/editor, title, chapter and/or pages, publisher, year.

Optional fields: volume/number, series, type, address, edition, month, note.
A section of a book without its own title.
@inbook
%volume
=
%number
=
%series
=
%pages
=
%address =
year
=
%month
=
%publisher=
%note
=
Master's thesis
@mastersthesis
Required fields: title.

Optional fields: author, organization, address, edition, month, year, note.
Technical manual
@manual
Required fields: author, title, booktitle, year.

Optional fields: editor, volume/number, series, pages, address, month,
organization, publisher, note.
An article in a conference proceedings.
@inproceedings
Optional fields: editor, volume/number, series, type, chapter, pages, address,

edition, month, note.
@misc{Xmisc,
Required fields: none

Optional fields: author, title, howpublished, month, year, note.
Template useful for other kinds of publication
@misc
@mastersthesis{Xthesis,
author
= "",
= "",
title
school
= "",
%type
= "diploma thesis",
%address = "",
year
= "XXXX",
%month
= "",
%note
= "",
}
Required fields: author, title, school, year.

Optional fields: type (eg. "diploma thesis"), address, month, note.
Required fields: title, year.

Optional fields: editor, volume/number, series, address, month, organization, publisher, note.
The proceedings of a conference.
@proceedings
Required fields: author, title, year, school.

Optional fields: address, month, keywords, note.
Ph.D. thesis
@phdthesis
%author
= "",
%title
= "",
%howpublished = "",
%year
= "XXXX",
%month
= "",
%note
= "",
An unpublished article, book, thesis, etc.
@unpublished
@techreport{Xtreport,
author
= "",
title
= "",
institution = "",
%type
= "",
%number
= "",
%address = "",
year
= "XXXX",
%month
= "",
%note
= "",
}
Required fields: author, title, institution, year.

Optional fields: type, number, address, month, note.
Technical report from educational, commercial or standardization institution.
@techreport
13
http://www.see-out.com/sandramau/bibpat.html
@electronic
@collection
(see Cite Patents with Bibtex13 for more details)
@patent
5.3.3. Not standard templates
Required fields: author, title, note.

Optional fields: month, year.
For convenience though, many people simply put double curly braces, which
may help when writing scientific articles for different magazines, conferences
with different BibTex styles that do sometimes keep and sometimes not keep
the capital letters:
title = "{The LaTeX Companion}",
However, avoid putting the whole title in curly braces, as it will look odd if
different capitalization format is used:
title = "The {LaTeX} Companion",
In the event that BibTeX has been set by the chosen style to not preserve all
capitalization within titles, problems can occur, especially if you are referring
to proper nouns, or acronyms. To tell BibTeX to keep them, use the good old
curly braces around the letter in question, (or letters, if it's an acronym) and all
will be well!
5.3.4. Preserving capital letters
@article{AbedonHymanThomas2003,
author = "Abedon, S. T. and Hyman, P. and Thomas, C.",
year = "2003",
title = "Experimental examination of bacteriophage latent-period
evolution as a response to bacterial availability",
journal = "Applied and Environmental Microbiology",
volume = "69",
pages = "7499--7506"
}
Below you will find a few additional examples of bibliography entries. The
first one covers the case of multiple authors in the Surname, Firstname format,
and the second one deals with the incollection case.
5.3.5. A few additional examples
As an alternative, try other BibTex styles or modify the existing.
title = {{The LaTeX Companion}},
@misc{website:fermentas-lambda,
author = "Fermentas Inc.",
title = "Phage Lambda: description \& restriction map",
month = "November",
year = 2008,
url =
If you have to cite a website you can use @misc, for example:
@incollection{Abedon1994,
author = "Abedon, S. T.",
title = "Lysis and the interaction between free phages and infected
cells",
pages = "397--405",
booktitle = "Molecular biology of bacteriophage T4",
editor = "Karam, Jim D. Karam and Drake, John W. and Kreuzer,
Kenneth N. and Mosig, Gisela
and Hall, Dwight and Eiserling, Frederick A. and Black,
Lindsay W. and Kutter, Elizabeth
and Carlson, Karin and Miller, Eric S. and Spicer,
Eleanor",
publisher = "ASM Press, Washington DC",
year = "1994"
}
At the end of your LaTeX file (that is, after the content, but before
\end{document}, you need to place the following commands:
5.3.6. Getting current LaTeX document to use your .bib file
@article{blackholes,
author="Rabbert Klein",
title="Black Holes and Their Relation to Hiding Eggs",
journal="Theoretical Easter Physics",
publisher="Eggs Ltd.",
year="2010",
note="(to appear)"
}
The note field comes in handy if you need to add unstructured information, for
example that the corresponding issue of the journal has yet to appear:
"http://www.fermentas.com/techinfo/nucleicacids/maplambda.htm"
}
The second command is the one that actually specifies the .bib file you
wish to use. The ones I created for this tutorial were called sample1.bib,
sample2.bib, . . ., samplen.bib, but once again, you don't include
the file extension. At the moment, the .bib file is in the same directory as the LaTeX document too. However, if your .bib file was elsewhere
(which makes sense if you intend to maintain a centralized database of ref-
Bibliography styles are files recognized by BibTeX that tell it how to format
the information stored in the .bib file when processed for output. And so the
first command listed above is declaring which style file to use. The style file in
this instance is plain.bst (which comes as standard with BibTeX). You do
not need to add the .bst extension when using this command, as it is assumed.
Despite its name, the plain style does a pretty good job (look at the output of
this tutorial to see what I mean).
\bibliographystyle{plain}
\bibliography{sample1,sample2,...,samplen}
% Note the lack of whitespace between the commas and the next bib
file.
The addition of BibTeX adds extra complexity for the processing of the source
to the desired output. This is largely hidden to the user, but because of all
the complexity of the referencing of citations from your source LaTeX file
to the database entries in another file, you actually need multiple passes to
accomplish the task. This means you have to run LaTeX a number of times.
5.3.7. Why won't LaTeX generate any output?
Now that LaTeX and BibTeX know where to look for the appropriate files,
actually citing the references is fairly trivial. The \cite{ref_key} is the
command you need, making sure that the ref_key corresponds exactly to one
of the entries in the .bib file. If you wish to cite more that one reference at
the same time, do the following: \cite{ref_key1, ref_key2, ...,
ref_keyN}.
erences for all your research), you need to specify the path as well, e.g
\bibliography{/some/where/sample}.
latex latex_source_code.tex
bibtex latex_source_code.aux
LaTeX Warning: Citation lamport94' on page 1 undefined on input line

21.
...
LaTeX Warning: There were undefined references.
After the first LaTeX run, you will see errors such as:
(Extensions are optional, if you put them note that the bibtex command takes
the AUX file as input.)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Each pass will perform a particular task until it has managed to resolve all the
citation references. Here's what you need to type (into command line):
If you want a pdf output instead of a dvi output you can use pdflatex
instead of latex as follows:
The third step, which is invoking LaTeX for the second time will
see more errors like "LaTeX Warning: Label(s) may have
changed. Rerun to get cross-references right.". Don't
be alarmed, it's almost complete. As you can guess, all you have to do is follow
its instructions, and run LaTeX for the third time, and the document will be
output as expected, without further problems.
This is BibTeX, Version 0.99c (Web2C 7.3.1)

The top-level auxiliary file: latex_source_code.aux
The style file: plain.bst
Database file #1: sample.bib
The next step is to run bibtex on that same LaTeX source (or more precisely the
corresponding AUX file, however not on the actual .bib file) to then define all
the references within that document. You should see output like the following:
pdflatex latex_source_code.tex
bibtex latex_source_code.aux
pdflatex %
bibtex %
It appears that the file extension is included by default when the current file
command (%) is executed. To process your document from within vim, you
1. I couldn't open file name 'current_file.tex.aux'
You will get an error similar to this:
1. :!
2. :!
Note that if you are editing your source in vim and attempt to use command
mode and the current file shortcut (%) to process the document like this:
(Extensions are optional, if you put them note that the bibtex command takes
the AUX file as input.)
1.
2.
3.
4.
14
15
http://vim-latex.sourceforge.net/
http://vim-latex.sourceforge.net/documentation/
latex-suite-quickstart/
However, it is much easier to install the Vim-LaTeX plugin from here14 . This
allows you to simply type \ll when not in insert mode, and all the appropriate
commands are automatically executed to compile the document. Vim-LaTeX
even detects how many times it has to run pdflatex, and whether or not it has
to run bibtex. This is just one of the many nice features of Vim-LaTeX, you
can read the excellent Beginner's Tutorial15 for more about the many clever
shortcuts Vim-LaTeX provides.
1. :! pdflatex %
2. :! bibtex %:r (without file extension, it looks for the AUX file
as mentioned above)
3. :! pdflatex %
4. :! pdflatex %
must explicitly name the file without the file extension for bibtex to work, as is
shown below:
16
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Make_%28software%29
Below you can see three styles available with LaTeX:
5.3.8. Bibliography styles
latex_source_code.pdf: latex_source_code.tex latex_source_code.bib

bibtex latex_source_
Another option exists if you are running Unix/Linux or any other platform
where you have make16 . Then you can simply create a Makefile and use vim's
make command or use make in shell. The Makefile would then look like this:
Figure 2 plain
Figure 3 abbrv
\bibliographystyle{ieeetr}
To number the references in order of appearance, rather than alphabetical order use ieeetr
Figure 4 alpha
apa
acn
authordate1
abstract
abbrv
alpha
unsrt
plain
Style Name
Author Name
Format
Homer Jay
Simpson
Homer Jay
Simpson
H. J. Simpson
Homer Jay
Simpson
Homer Jay
Simpson
Simpson, H. J.
Simpson,
Homer Jay
Simpson, H. J.
(1995)
Simpson1995
Simpson1995a
#ID#
Simpson, 1995
#ID#
Sim95
#ID#
Reference
Format
#ID#
by author
by author
as referenced
by author
Sorting
Author Name
Format
Homer Jay
Simpson
Reference
Format
Simpson 1995
Sorting
17
http://www.cs.stir.ac.uk/~kjt/software/latex/showbst.html
As you can see, there is no field for URLs. One possibility is to include
Internet addresses in howpublished field of @misc or note field of
@techreport, @article, @book:
5.3.9. Including URLs in bibliography
Web page http://www.cs.stir.ac.uk/ kjt/software/latex/showbst.html17

contains more examples.
Examples given in PDF format
http://amath.colorado.edu/documentation/LaTeX/reference/faq/bibstyles.pdf
More info can also be found on http://amath.colorado.edu/documentation/LaTeX
named
Style Name
the
first
case
or
19
18
23Typesetting%20URLs
http://purl.org/nxg/dist/urlbst
Styles provided by Natbib (see below) handle this field, other styles can be
modified using urlbst19 program. Modifications of three standard styles (plain,
abbrv and alpha) are provided with urlbst.
You need to use \usepackage{url} in

\usepackage{hyperref} in the second case.
url = "http://www.example.com"
Another way is to use special field url and make bibliography style recognise
it.
Note the usage of \url command to ensure proper appearance of URLs18 .
howpublished = "\url{http://www.example.com}"
20
http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=citeURL
It can achieve this because of the nature of the .bib database, where all the
information about your references is stored in a structured format, but nothing
One of the main advantages of BibTeX, especially for people who write
many research papers, is the ability to customize your bibliography to suit the
requirements of a given publication. You will notice how different publications
tend to have their own style of formatting references, to which authors must
adhere if they want their manuscripts published. In fact, established journals
and conference organizers often will have created their own bibliography style
(.bst file) for those users of BibTeX, to do all the hard work for you.
5.3.10. Customizing bibliography appearance
If you need more help about URLs in bibliography, visit FAQ of UK List of
TeX20 .
21
http://www.mps.mpg.de/software/latex/localtex/localltx.
html#makebst
It should be installed with the LaTeX distribution (otherwise, you can

download it21 ) and it's very simple to initiate. At the command line, type:
Makebst can be used to automatically generate a .bst file based on your

needs. It is very simple, and actually asks you a series of questions about your
preferences. Once complete, it will then output the appropriate style file for
you to use.
A bibliography style file (.bst) will tell LaTeX how to format each attribute,
what order to put them in, what punctuation to use in between particular
attributes etc. Unfortunately, creating such a style by hand is not a trivial task.
Which is why Makebst (also known as custom-bib) is the tool we need.
about style. This is a common theme in LaTeX in general, where it tries as

much as possible to keep content and presentation separate.
22
http://www.mps.mpg.de/software/latex/localtex/doc/merlin.
pdf
If you are using a custom built .bst file, it is important that LaTeX can find it!
So, make sure it's in the same directory as the LaTeX source file, unless you
are using one of the standard style files (such as plain or plainnat, that come
bundled with LaTeX - these will be automatically found in the directories that
they are installed. Also, make sure the name of the .bst file you want to use
LaTeX will find the relevant file and the questioning process will begin. You
will have to answer quite a few (although, note that the default answers are
pretty sensible), which means it would be impractical to go through an example
in this tutorial. However, it is fairly straight-forward. And if you require further
guidance, then there is a comprehensive manual22 available. I'd recommend
experimenting with it and seeing what the results are when applied to a LaTeX
document.
latex makebst
23
http://tug.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/
babelbib/
\usepackage[fixlanguage]{babelbib}
\selectbiblanguage{german}
When writing documents in languages other than English, you may find it desirable to adapt the appearance of your bibliography to the document language.
This concerns words such as editors, and, or in as well as a proper typographic
layout. The babelbib package23 can be used here. For example, to layout
the bibliography in German, add the following to the header:
5.3.11. Localizing bibliography appearance
is reflected in the \bibliographystyle{style} command (but don't

include the .bst extension!).
\bibliographystyle{babplain}
\bibliography{sample}
For babelbib to take effect, a bibliography style supported by it - one

of babplain, babplai3, babalpha, babunsrt, bababbrv, and
bababbr3 - must be used:
@article{mueller08,
% ...
language = {german}
}
The language of an entry is specified as an additional field in the BibTeX entry:
\usepackage{babelbib}
Alternatively, you can layout each bibliography entry according to the language
of the cited document:
24
http://scholar.google.com
Many online databases provide bibliographic data in BibTeX-Format, making

it easy to build your own database. For example, Google Scholar24 offers
5.3.13. Getting Bibliographic data
\nocite{Name89} % Show Bibliography entry of Name89

\nocite{*} % Show all Bib-entries
. It's possible to make uncited entries visible:
\cite
Usually Latex only display the entries which are referred to with
5.3.12. Showing unused items
25
http://scholar.google.de/scholar_preferences?hl=en&lr=
&output=search
w:en:Comparison of reference management software
UNKNOWN TEMPLATE See also
5.3.14. Helpful Tools
One should be alert to the fact that bibliographic databases are frequently the
product of several generations of automatic processing, and so the resulting
BibTex code is prone to a variety of minor errors, especially in older entries.
the option to return properly formatted output, but you must turn it on in the
Preferences25 .
Figure 5 Literatur-Generator
Figure 6 JabRef
Figure 7 BibDesk
26
27
28
29
http://literatur-generator.de/
http://mendeley.com
http://www.zotero.org/
http://jabref.sourceforge.net/
Literatur-Generator26 FAST and EASY to create your own Bibliographie

(Bibtex, Endnote, Din 1505, ...). The Literatur-Generator is totally free and
you do not need a registration to use the Literatur-Generator.
Mendeley27 Mendeley is cost-free academic software for managing PDFs
which can manage a bibliography in Open Office and read BibTeX.
Zotero28 Zotero is a free and open reference manager working as a Firefox
plugin capable of importing and exporting bib files.
JabRef29 is a Java program (under the GPL license) which lets you search
many bibliographic databases such as Medline, Citeseer, IEEEXplore and
arXiv and feed and manage your BibTeX local databases with your selected
articles. Based on BiBTeX, JabRef can export in many other output formats
such as html, MS Word or EndNote. It can be used online without being
installed (http://jabref.sourceforge.net/jws/jabref.jnlp)
30
31
32
http://icculus.org/referencer/index.html
http://www.citavi.ch
http://bibliographer.homelinux.net/
Referencer30 Referencer is a Gnome application to organise documents or

references, and ultimately generate a BibTeX bibliography file.
Citavi31 Commercial software (with size-limited free demo version) which
even searches libraries for citations and keeps all your knowledge in a
database. Export of the database to all kinds of formats is possible. Works
together with MS Word and Open Office Writer. Moreover plug ins for
browsers and Acrobat Reader exist to automatically include references to
your project.
bibliographer32 (broken link) Bibliographer is a BibTeX bibliography
database editor which aims to be easy to use. Its features include linking files to your records with indexing and searching support. The interface
is designed for the easy navigation of your bibliography, and double clicking
a record will open the linked file.
33
34
35
http://www.molspaces.com/cb2bib/
http://www.unix-ag.uni-kl.de/~fischer/kbibtex/
http://users.tpg.com.au/thachly/kbib/
cb2Bib33 The cb2Bib is a tool for rapidly extracting unformatted, or unstandardized bibliographic references from email alerts, journal Web pages, and
PDF files.
KBibTeX34 KBibTeX is a BibTeX editor for KDE to edit bibliographies
used with LaTeX. Features include comfortable input masks, starting web
queries (e. g. Google or PubMed) and exporting to PDF, PostScript, RTF and
XML/HTML. As KBibTeX is using KDE's KParts technology, KBibTeX
can be embedded into Kile or Konqueror.
KBib35 Another BibTeX editor for KDE. It has similar capabilities, and
slightly different UI. Features include BibTeX reference generation from
PDF files, plain text, DOI, arXiv & PubMed IDs. Web queries to Google
Scholar, PubMer, arXiv and a number of other services are also supported.
36
37
38
39
http://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Extension:Bibwiki
http://bibdesk.sourceforge.net/
http://www.citeulike.org/
http://stat.genopole.cnrs.fr/~cambroise/doku.php?id=
softwares:dokuwikibibtexplugin
Bibwiki36 Bibwiki is a Specialpage for MediaWiki to manage BibTeX bibliographies. It offers a straightforward way to import and export bibliographic
records.
BibDesk37 BibDesk is a bibliographic reference manager for Mac OS X. It
features a very usable user interface and provides a number of features like
smart folders based on keywords and live tex display.
CiteULike38 CiteULike is a free online service to organise academic papers.
It can export citations in BibTeX format, and can "scrape" BibTeX data from
many popular websites.
Bibtex39 Bibtex is a DokuWiki plugin that allows for the inclusion
of bibtex formatted citations in DokuWiki pages and displays them in
APA format. Note: This Plugins is vulnerable to an XSS attack ->
http://www.dokuwiki.org/plugin:bibtex
40
41
http://www.bibsonomy.org/
http://www.verzetteln.de/synapsen/
Although it can take a little time to get to grips with BibTeX, in the long term,
it's an efficient way to handle your references. It's not uncommon to find .bib
files on websites that people compile as a list of their own publications, or a
survey of relevant works within a given topic, etc. Or in those huge, online
bibliography databases, you often find BibTeX versions of publications, so it's
a quick cut-and-paste into your own .bib file, and then no more hassle!
5.3.15. Summary
BibSonomy40 A free social bookmark and publication management

system based on BibTeX.
Synapsen41 Hypertextual Card Index / Reference Manager with special
support for BiBTeX / biblatex, written in Java.
Or, if you are using BibTeX, your references will be saved in a .bib file, and
your TeX document will include the bibliography by these commands:
\bibitem{bib:one_book} some information
\bibitem{bib:one_article} other information
If you are writing a book or report, you'll likely insert your bibliography using
something like:
5.4. Bibliography in the table of contents
Having all your references in one place can be a big advantage. And having
them in a structured form, that allows customizable output is another one.
There are a variety of free utilities that can load your .bib files, and allow you
to view them in a more efficient manner, as well as sort them and check for
errors.
\usepackage[nottoc,numbib]{tocbibind}
The most comfortable way of adding your bibliography to the table of contents
is to use the dedicated package tocbibind that works with many standard
document classes. Simply include this code in the preamble of your document:
5.4.1. Using tocbibind
Both of these examples will create a chapter-like (or section-like) output

showing all your references. But even though the resulting References looks
like a chapter or section, it will not be handled quite the same: it will not
appear in the Table of Contents.
\bibliographystyle{plain}
\bibliography{mybibtexfile}
42
tocbibind
\clearpage
If you want your bibliography to be in the table of contents, just add the
following two lines just before the thebibliography environment:
As unnumbered item
5.4.2. Other methods
This will include the Bibliography in the Table of Contents with proper numbering. The tocbibind package can also handle including the List of Figures,
List of Tables and the Table of Contents itself in the Table of Contents. It has
many options for numbering, document structure etc. to fit almost any scenario.
See the tocbibind CTAN page42 for detailed documentation.
43
If you use hyperref43 package, you should also use \phantomsection

command to enable hyperlinking from the table of contents to bibliography.
The first line just terminates the current paragraph and page. If you are
writing a book, use \cleardoublepage to match the style used. The
second line will add a line in the Table of Contents (first option, toc), it will
be like the ones created by chapters (second option, chapter), and the third
argument will be printed on the corresponding line in the Table of Contents;
here Bibliography was chosen because it's the same text the thebibliography
environment will automatically write when you use it, but you are free to write
whatever you like. If you are using separate bib file, add these lines between
\bibliographystyle and \bibliography.
if you're writing an article)
\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Bibliography}
(OR
\cleardoublepage % This is needed if the book class is used, to place

the anchor in the correct page,
% because the bibliography will start on its own
page.
If you instead want bibliography to be numbered section or chapter, you'll

likely use this way:
As numbered item
This trick is particularly useful when you have to insert the bibliography in
the Table of Contents, but it can work for anything. When LaTeX finds the
code above, it will record the info as described and the current page number,
inserting a new line in the Contents page.
\cleardoublepage
\phantomsection
\renewcommand{\refname}{\section{Sources}} % Using "Sources" as the

title of the section
block:
\renewcommand
inside of the
\section
Another even easier solution is to use
...
% Use \clearpage instead if the document class uses

the "oneside" argument
\renewcommand*{\refname}{} % This will define heading of bibliography
to be empty, so you can...
\section{Bibliography}
% ...place a normal section heading before
the bibliography entries.
if you use the book or report class.
\refname
instead of
\bibname
inserts.
Note: Use
\refname
to counteract the extra space the blank
\vspace*{-1em}
followed by
\renewcommand*{\refname}{\vspace*{-1em}}
You may wish to use
...
44
45
http://ctan.org/pkg/multibib
http://ctan.org/pkg/bibtopic
The bibtopic-Package45 is created to differ the citations on more files, so that

you can divide the bibliography into more parts.
5.5.2. Using bibtopic
This package is for multiple Bibliographies for different sections in your work.
For example, you can generate a bibliography for each chapter You can find
information about the package on CTAN44
5.5.1. Using multibib
5.5. Multiple Bibliographies
File books.bib is use for this listing:

\begin{btSect}{books}
\section{References from books}
\btPrintCited
\end{btSect}
Here, the articles.bib is used, and the listing is in plain-format
instead pf the standard alpha.
\begin{btSect}[plain]{articles}
\section{References from articles}
\btPrintCited
\section{Articles not cited}
\btPrintNotCited
\end{btSect}
Just print alll entries here with \btPrintAll
\begin{btSect}[plain]{internet}
\section{References from the internet}
\btPrintAll
\bibliographystyle{alpha}
\section{Testing}
Lets cite all the books: \cite{ColBenh:93} and
\cite{Munt:93}; and an article: \cite{RouxSmart:95}.
\usepackage{bibtopic}
\begin{document}
46
http://fr.wikibooks.org/wiki/LaTeX%2FGestion%20de%20la%
20bibliographie
fr:LaTeX/Gestion de la bibliographie46
5.6. References
\end{btSect}
\end{document}
Formating
Part II.
Convenient and predictable list formatting is one of the many advantages

of using LaTeX. Users of WYSIWYG word processors can sometimes be
frustrated by the software's attempts to determine when they intend lists to
begin and end. As a mark-up language, LaTeX gives more control over the
structure and content of lists.
6. List Structures
\item The first item

\item The second item
\begin{list_type}
All lists follow the basic format:
description
and
enumerate
itemize
Lists often appear in documents, especially academic, as their purpose is often

to present information in a clear and concise fashion. List structures in LaTeX
are simply environments which essentially come in three flavors:
6.1. List Structures
This environment is for your standard bulleted list of items.
6.1.1. Itemize
All three of these types of lists can have multiple paragraphs per item: just
type the additional paragraphs in the normal way, with a blank line between
each. So long as they are still contained within the enclosing environment,
they will automatically be indented to follow underneath their item.
\end{list_type}
\item The third etc \ldots
Figure 8
The enumerate environment is for ordered lists, where by default, each item is
numbered sequentially.
6.1.2. Enumerate
\begin{itemize}
\end{itemize}
Figure 9
The description environment is slightly different. You can specify the item
label by passing it as an optional argument (although optional, it would look
odd if you didn't include it!). Ideal for a series of definitions, such as a glossary.
6.1.3. Description
\begin{enumerate}
\end{enumerate}
\hfill
. The trick is to use
\\
Sometimes you want a description where the text begins on a new line. This
cannot easily be done with
Figure 10
\begin{description}
\item[First] The first item
\item[Second] The second item
\item[Third] The third etc \ldots
\end{description}
Figure 11
As you may have noticed, in standard LaTeX document classes, the vertical
spacing between items, and above and below the lists as a whole, is more
6.1.4. Compacted lists
\begin{description}
\item[First] \hfill \\
The first item
\item[Second] \hfill \\
The second item
\item[Third] \hfill \\
The third etc \ldots
\end{description}
Alternatively, use the memoir class and with \tightlists.
. They work exactly in the same way, but the output is more compact. Other
packages providing compacted lists are paralist and enumitem.
description*
and
enumerate*
itemize*
than between paragraphs: it may look odd if the descriptions are too short.
If you want tightly-packed lists, use the mdwlist package (included in the
mdwtools bundle), which provides compact, "starred" versions of the previous environments, i.e.
Latex will happily allow you to insert a list environment into an existing
one (up to a depth of four -- if you need more than four, use the easylist
package). Simply begin the appropriate environment at the desired point within
the current list. Latex will sort out the layout and any numbering for you.
6.1.5. Nested Lists
\begin{enumerate}
\begin{enumerate}
\item Nested item 1
\item Nested item 2
\end{enumerate}
\end{enumerate}
Figure 12
\begin{itemize} \itemsep1pt \parskip0pt \parsep0pt

\item first item
Inside lists you can redefine some length/dimension variables of LaTeX, for
example using:
Customizing Line Spacing in Lists
However, since the tutorial is on formatting, I shall still include a brief guide
on customizing lists. Feel free to skip!
Customizing LaTeX is outside the beginners' domain. While not necessarily

difficult in itself, because beginners are already overwhelmed with the array
of commands and environments, moving on to more advanced topics runs the
risk of confusion.
6.1.6. Customizing Lists
The thing people want to change most often with Enumerated lists are the
counters. A quick solution to this problem is provided by the enumerate
Customizing Enumerated Lists
\newenvironment{my_enumerate}
{\begin{enumerate}
\setlength{\itemsep}{1pt}
\setlength{\parskip}{0pt}
\setlength{\parsep}{0pt}}
{\end{enumerate}}
Alternatively, to create a unified look in your document you can define your
own enumerate environment:
\item second item

\end{itemize}
http://mirrors.fe.up.pt/pub/CTAN/macros/latex/required/
tools/enumerate.pdfThe enumerate package, David Carlisle 1999
http://mirrors.fe.up.pt/pub/CTAN/macros/latex/contrib/
enumitem/enumitem.pdfThe enumitem package, Javier Bezos 2011
enumii
enumi
There are four individual counters that are associated with itemized lists, each
one represents the four possible levels of nesting, which are called:
To go any further and do it yourself instead, a brief introduction to LaTeX

counters is required. For anything that LaTeX automatically numbers, such as
section headers, figures, and itemized lists, there is a counter associated with it
that controls the numbering.
package of David Carlisle1 , or the more sophisticated package enumitem by

Javier Bezos2 .
\begin{enumerate}
\setcounter{enumi}{4}
\item fifth element
\end{enumerate}
use:
enumi
before it is printed. For example to reset
\item
. The counter is incremented by
\setcounter
. In order to reset any of these counters in the middle of an enumeration simply

use
enumiv
enumiii
Command
\arabic
\alph
\Alph
\roman
\Roman
\fnsymbol
Example
1, 2, 3 ...
a, b, c ...
A, B, C ...
i, ii, iii ...
I, II, III ...
Aimed at footnotes (see below),
but prints a sequence of symbols.
Each counter also has a default format that dictates how it is displayed whenever LaTeX needs to print it. Such formats are specified using internal LaTeX
commands:
5. fifth element
which prints as:
%Redefine the first level

\renewcommand{\theenumi}{\Roman{enumi}}
\renewcommand{\labelenumi}{\theenumi}
Admittedly, the generic version is not that clear, so a couple of examples will
clarify:
\renewcommand{\representation}{\format_command{counter}}
Now, that's most of the technicalities out of the way. To make changes to the
formatting of a given level:
. This is often referred to as the representation of a counter.
\theenumi
followed immediately (i.e., no space) by the name of the counter, e.g.,
\the
Each counter entity holds various bits of information about itself. To get to the
numbered element, simply use
Note that you can also add other symbols, such as parentheses and periods,
before and after the counter. For instance, to create a list indexed by lower
This simply redefines the appearance of the label, which is fine, providing that
you do not intend to cross-reference to a specific item within the list, in which
case the reference will be printed in the previous format. This issue does not
arise in the first example.
\renewcommand{\labelenumi}{\Roman{enumi}}
The method used above first explicitly changes the format used by the counter.
However, the element that controls the label needs to be updated to reflect the
change, which is what the second line does. Another way to achieve this result
is this:
%Redefine the second level

\renewcommand{\theenumii}{\Alph{enumii}}
\renewcommand{\labelenumii}{\theenumii}
\labelitemi
.
The itemize labels are accessed via
\item[$\star$]
, eg
\item[new symbol]
Itemized lists are not as complex as they do not need to count. Therefore, to
customize, you simply change the labels. It can be done manually for each
entry with
Customizing Itemised Lists
\renewcommand{\labelenumi}{(\alph{enumi})}
case letters with parentheses before and after the letter, you might enter the
following:
The above example would set the labels for the first level to a greater than (>)
symbol. Of course, the text symbols available in Latex are not very exciting.
Why not use one of the ZapfDingbat symbols, as described in the Symbols3
section. Or use a mathematical symbol:
\renewcommand{\labelitemi}{\textgreater}
, for the four respective levels.
\labelitemiv
\labelitemiii
\labelitemii
\begin{document}
appears after the
\renewcommand
Note that it is necessary that the
Details of Customizing Lists
\begin{itemize}
\setlength{\itemsep}{0cm}%
\setlength{\parskip}{0cm}%
\item Item opening the list
\item Item tightly following
\end{itemize}
Itemized list with tightly set items, that is with no vertical space between two
consecutive items, can be created as follows.
\renewcommand{\labelitemi}{$\star$}
environment (with an optional formatting specification in square brackets):
inparaenum
Inline lists are a special case as they require the use of the paralist package
which provides the
6.1.7. Inline lists
instruction so the changes made are taken into account. This is needed for both
enumerated and itemized lists.
Figure 13
\Alph
To change the styles of the counter, tokens A, a, I, i, and 1 can be used in the
optional argument to produce the counter with one of the styles
\textbf{\itshape Inline lists}, which are

sequential in nature, just like enumerated
lists, but are
\begin{inparaenum}[\itshape a\upshape)]
\item formatted within their paragraph;
\item usually labelled with letters; and
\item usually have the final item prefixed with
and' or or',
\end{inparaenum} like this example.
...
\begin{document}
...
\usepackage{paralist}
Other packages providing inline lists are shortlst and enumitem.
produces the labels (i), (ii), (iii) ...
\begin{inparaenum}[(i)]
. For example:
\arabic
and
\roman
\Roman
\alph
\ListProperties(Style2*=,Numbers=a,Numbers1=R,FinalMark=.)
& Main item~:
&& Sub item.
&& Another sub item.
\end{easylist}
\begin{easylist}[enumerate]
Example of custom enumerate:
\usepackage[ampersand]{easylist}
Load the package with the control character as optional argument:
The easylist package allows you to create list using a more convenient
syntax and with infinite nested levels. It is also very customizable.
6.2. Easylist package
Besides using easylist along with figures may cause some trouble to the layout
and the indentation. LaTeX lists do not have this problem.
\Activate
\begin{easylist}
& ...
\end{easylist}
\Deactivate
Important note: easylist has some drawbacks. First if you need to put an
easylist inside an environment using the same control character as the one
specified for easylist, you may get an error. To circumvent it, use the following
commands provided by easylist:
However, if there is one area about LaTeX that is the least intuitive, then this
is it. Basic tables are not too taxing, but you will quickly notice that anything
more advanced can take a fair bit of construction. So, we start slowly and build
up from there.
In academic writing, tables are a common feature, often for summarizing

results from research. It is therefore a skill that needs mastering in order to
produce quality papers.
7. Tables
4
5
6
1
2
3
http://calc2latex.sourceforge.net/
http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/support/excel2latex/
http://www.mathworks.com/matlabcentral/fileexchange/
4894-matrix2latex
https://code.google.com/p/matrix2latex/
http://rubygems.org/gems/latex-tools
http://cran.r-project.org/web/packages/xtable/index.html
calc2latex1 : for OpenOffice.org Calc spreadsheets,

excel2latex2 : for Microsoft Office Excel,
matrix2latex3 : for MATLAB,
matrix2latex4 : for Python and MATLAB,
latex-tools5 : a Ruby library,
xtable6 : a library for R,
Workaround: You might save lots of time by building tables using specialized
software and exporting them in LaTeX format. The following plugins and
libraries are available for some popular software:
9
10
7
8
http://orgmode.org/
https://www.gnu.org/software/emacs/manual/html_node/org/
A-LaTeX-example.html
http://emacswiki.org/emacs/AlignCommands
http://truben.no/latex/table/
It is highly recommended to place a tabular-environment only in the

table-environment, which is able to float and add a label and caption.
7.1. Floating with table
org-mode7 : for Emacs users, org-mode tables can be used inline in LaTeX documents, see https://www.gnu.org/software/emacs/manual/html_node/org/A-LaTeX-example.html8 for a tutorial.
Emacs Align Commands9 : while not a workaround per se, the align commands can clean up a messy LaTeX table.
Online Table generator for LATeX10 : An online tool for creating simple
tables within the browser. LaTeX format is directly generated as you type.
h
t
b
p
here
top
bottom
page
You can set the optional parameter position specifier to define the position of
the table, where it should be placed. The following characters are all possible
placements. Using sequences of it define your "wishlist" to LaTeX.
The captions show now up in the list of tables, if displayed.
\begin{table}[position specifier]
\centering
\begin{tabular}{|l|}
... your table ...
\end{tabular}
\caption{This table shows some data}
\label{tab:myfirsttable}
\end{table}
11
More informations about floating environments, captions etc. can be found in

Floats, Figures and Captions11 .
Default is tbp, which means that it is by default placed on the top of the page.
If it's not possible, its placed on the bottom and last possibility is to place it
with other floating environments on an extra page. You can force LaTeX to use
one given position. E.g. [!h] forces LaTeX to place it exactly where you place
it (Except when it's really impossible, e.g you place a table here and this place
would be the last line on a page). Centering the table horizontally works using
the \centering-command just after opening the table-environment.
left-justified column
The number of columns does not need to be specified as it is inferred by looking

at the number of arguments provided. It is also possible to add vertical lines
between the columns here. The following symbols are available to describe the
table columns (some of them require that the package array has been loaded):
The table spec argument tells LaTeX the alignment to be used in each column
and the vertical lines to insert.
\begin{tabular}[pos]{table spec}
The first line of the environment has the form:
The tabular environment can be used to typeset tables with optional horizontal and vertical lines. LaTeX determines the width of the columns automatically.
7.2. The tabular environment
centered column
right-justified column
paragraph column with text vertically aligned at the top
paragraph column with text vertically aligned in the middle (requires array package)
paragraph column with text vertically aligned at the bottom (requires array package)
vertical line
double vertical line
By default, if the text in a column is too wide for the page, LaTeX wont
automatically wrap it. Using p{width} you can define a special type of
column which will wrap-around the text as in a normal paragraph. You can
pass the width using any unit supported by LaTeX, such as pt and cm, or
|
||
b{width}
m{width}
c
r
p{width}
bottom
center (default)
top
12
In the first line you have pointed out how many columns you want, their
alignment and the vertical lines to separate them. Once in the environment, you
have to introduce the text you want, separating between cells and introducing
new lines. The commands you have to use are the following:
b
c
t
The optional parameter pos can be used to specify the vertical position of the
table relative to the baseline of the surrounding text. In most cases, you will
not need this option. It becomes relevant only if your table is not in a paragraph
of its own. You can use the following letters:
command lengths, such as \textwidth.You can find a complete list in

appendix Useful Measurement Macros12 .
column separator
start new row (additional space
may be specified after \\ using square brackets, such as
\\[6pt])
horizontal line
start a new line within a cell (in a
paragraph column)
partial horizontal line beginning in
column i and ending in column j
Note, any white space inserted between these commands is purely down to
ones' preferences. I personally add spaces between to make it easier to read.
\cline{i-j}
\hline
\newline
&
\\
Expanding upon that by including some vertical lines:
\begin{tabular}{ l c r }
1 & 2 & 3 \\
4 & 5 & 6 \\
7 & 8 & 9 \\
\end{tabular}
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
This example shows how to create a simple table in LaTeX. It is a three-bythree table, but without any lines.
7.2.1. Basic examples
3
6
9
To add horizontal lines to the very top and bottom edges of the table:
\begin{tabular}{ l | c || r }
1 & 2 & 3 \\
4 & 5 & 6 \\
7 & 8 & 9 \\
\end{tabular}
1 2
4 5
7 8
3
6
9
And finally, to add lines between all rows, as well as centering (notice the use
of the center environment - of course, the result of this is not obvious from the
preview on this web page):
\hline
1 & 2 & 3 \\
4 & 5 & 6 \\
7 & 8 & 9 \\
\hline
\end{tabular}
1 2
4 5
7 8
\begin{center}
\hline
1 & 2 & 3 \\ \hline
4 & 5 & 6 \\ \hline
7 & 8 & 9 \\
\hline
\end{tabular}
\end{center}
1 2
4 5
7 8
3
6
9
Figure 14
The column specification can be altered using the array package. This is
done in the argument of the tabular environment using >{\command} for
commands executed right before each column element and <{\command} for
commands to be executed right after each column element. As an example: to
7.2.2. Column specification using >{\cmd} and <{\cmd}
\begin{tabular}{|r|l|}
\hline
7C0 & hexadecimal \\
3700 & octal \\ \cline{2-2}
11111000000 & binary \\
\hline \hline
1984 & decimal \\
\hline
\end{tabular}
>{\begin{lrbox}{\boxname}}%
l%
<{\end{lrbox}%
The argument of the > and < specifications must be correctly balanced when
it comes to { and } characters. This means that >{\bfseries} is valid,
while >{\textbf} will not work and >{\textbf{} is not valid. If there
is the need to use the text of the table as an argument (for instance, using the
\textbf to produce bold text), one should use the \bgroup and \egroup
commands: >{\textbf\bgroup}c<{\egroup} produces the intended
effect. This works only for some basic LaTeX commands. For other commands,
such as \underline to underline text, it is necessary to temporarily store
the column text in a box using lrbox. First, you must define such a box with
\newsavebox{\boxname} and then you can define:
get a column in math mode enter: \begin{tabular}{>{$}c<{$}}. Another example is changing the font: \begin{tabular}{>{\small}c}
to print the column in a small font.
\begin{tabular}{>{\centering}p{3.5cm}<{\centering}p{3.5cm}}
Geometry & Algebra
\tabularnewline
\hline
Points & Addition
\tabularnewline
Here is an example showing the use of both p{...} and >{\centering}

:
This same trick done with \raisebox instead of \underline can force
all lines in a table to have equal height, instead of the natural varying height
that can occur when e.g. math terms or superscripts occur in the text.
This stores the text in a box and afterwards, takes the text out of the box with
\unhbox (this destroys the box, if the box is needed again one should use
\unhcopy instead) and passing it to \underline. (For LaTeX2e, you may
want to use \usebox{\boxname} instead of \unhbox\boxname.)
\underline{\unhbox\boxname}}%
}
Here is a practical example. The following code creates two tables with the
same code; the only difference is that the last column of the second one has
LaTeX's algorithms for formatting tables have a few shortcomings. One is that
it will not automatically wrap text in cells, even if it overruns the width of the
page. For columns that you know will contain a certain amount of text, then
it is recommended that you use the p attribute and specify the desired width
of the column (although it may take some trial-and-error to get the result you
want). Use the m attribute to have the lines aligned toward the middle of the
box and the b attribute to align along the bottom of the box.
7.2.3. Text wrapping in tables
Note the use of \tabularnewline instead of \\ to avoid a Misplaced

\noalign error.
Spheres & Multiplication

\end{tabular}
\begin{center}
\begin{tabular}{ | l | l | l | l |}
\hline
Day & Min Temp & Max Temp & Summary \\ \hline
Monday & 11C & 22C & A clear day with lots of sunshine.
However, the strong breeze will bring down the temperatures. \\
\hline
Tuesday & 9C & 19C & Cloudy with rain, across many northern
regions. Clear spells
across most of Scotland and Northern Ireland,
but rain reaching the far northwest. \\ \hline
Wednesday & 10C & 21C & Rain will still linger for the morning.
Conditions will improve by early afternoon and continue
Without specifying width for last column:
\begin{document}
\usepackage[english]{babel}
a defined width of 5 centimeters, while in the first one we didn't specify any
width. Compiling this code:
\begin{center}
\begin{tabular}{ | l | l | l | p{5cm} |}
\hline
Day & Min Temp & Max Temp & Summary \\ \hline
Monday & 11C & 22C & A clear day with lots of sunshine.
However, the strong breeze will bring down the temperatures. \\
\hline
Tuesday & 9C & 19C & Cloudy with rain, across many northern
regions. Clear spells
across most of Scotland and Northern Ireland,
but rain reaching the far northwest. \\ \hline
Wednesday & 10C & 21C & Rain will still linger for the morning.
Conditions will improve by early afternoon and continue
throughout the evening. \\
\hline
\end{tabular}
\end{center}
With width specified:
throughout the evening. \\

\hline
\end{tabular}
\end{center}
Figure 15
You get the following output:
\end{document}
\newsavebox{\tstretchbox}
On rare occasions, it might be necessary to stretch every row in a table to the

natural width of its longest line, for instance when one has the same text in two
languages and wishes to present these next to each other with lines synching
up. A tabular environment helps control where lines should break, but cannot
justify the text, which leads to ragged right edges. The eqparbox package
provides the command \eqmakebox which is like \makebox but instead
of a width argument, it takes a tag. During compilation it bookkeeps which
\eqmakebox with a certain tag contains the widest text and can stretch all
\eqmakeboxes with the same tag to that width. Combined with the array
package, one can define a column specifier that justifies the text in all lines:
(See the documentation of the eqparbox package for more details.)
7.2.4. Text justification in tables
Note that the first table is cropped: The output is wider than the page width.
13
23Enumerate
\begin{tabular}{| c | c |}
\hline
\begin{verbatim}
code
\end{verbatim}
& description
If you use some LaTeX environments inside table cells, like verbatim or
enumerate13
7.2.5. Other environments inside tables
\newcolumntype{S}[1]{%
>{\begin{lrbox}{\tstretchbox}}%
l%
<{\end{lrbox}%
\eqmakebox[#1][s]{\unhcopy\tstretchbox}}%
}
14
It is possible to define many identical columns at once using the

*{num}{str} syntax.
7.2.6. Defining multiple columns
\begin{tabular}{| m{5cm} | c |}
To solve this problem, change column specifier14 to "paragraph" (p, m or b).
! LaTeX Error: Something's wrong--perhaps a missing \item.
you might encounter errors similar to
\\ \hline
\end{tabular}
\begin{tabular}{l*{6}{c}r}
Team
& P & W &
\hline
Manchester United & 6 & 4 &
Celtic
& 6 & 3 &
Benfica
& 6 & 2 &
FC Copenhagen
& 6 & 2 &
\end{tabular}
0
0
1
1
&
&
&
&
2
3
3
2
\\
\\
\\
\\
& A & Pts \\
& 10 & 5 & 12

& 8 & 9 & 9
& 7 & 8 & 7
& 5 & 8 & 7
D & L & F
Here is a table with six centered columns flanked by a single column on each
side:
This is particularly useful when your table has many columns.
It typically takes some text as its argument, and when appended to a column,
it will automatically insert that text into each cell in that column before the
actual data for that cell. This command kills the inter-column space and
The column separator can be specified with the @{...} construct.
7.2.7. @-expressions
Figure 16
123.456
Note
that
the
headers
should
\multicolumn{2}{l}{HEADER}.
\begin{tabular}{r@{.}l}
3
& 14159 \\
16 & 2
\\
123 & 456
\\
\end{tabular}
16.2
3.14159
be
enclosed
in
Admittedly, this is not that clear, and so will require a few examples to clarify.
Sometimes, it is desirable in scientific tables to have the numbers aligned on
the decimal point. This can be achieved by doing the following:
replaces it with whatever is between the curly braces. To add space, use
@{\hspace{width}}.
\begin{tabular}{|l|l|}
\hline
stuff & stuff \\ \hline
stuff & stuff \\
\hline
\end{tabular}
The space-suppressing qualities of the @-expression actually make it quite

useful for manipulating the horizontal spacing between columns. Given a basic
table, and varying the column descriptions:
Alternatively, to center the column on the decimal separator the dcolumn

package may be used, which provides a new column specifier for floating point
data.
{|@{}l|l@{}|}
{|l|l|}
Figure 18
Figure 17
{|@{}l@{}|l@{}|}
Figure 19
Figure 20
To complete this tutorial, we take a quick look at how to generate slightly more
complex tables. Unsurprisingly, the commands necessary have to be embedded
within the table data itself.
7.3. Spanning
{|@{}l@{}|@{}l@{}|}
The command for this looks like this: \multicolumn{num_cols}{alignment}{contents}. num_cols is the number of subsequent columns to merge; alignment is either l, c, r, or to have text wrapping
specifiy a width p{5.0cm} . And contents is simply the actual data you want
to be contained within that cell. A simple example:
7.3.1. Rows spanning multiple columns
\begin{tabular}{|l|l|}
\hline
\multicolumn{2}{|c|}{Team sheet} \\
\hline
GK & Paul Robinson \\
LB & Lucus Radebe \\
DC & Michael Duberry \\
DC & Dominic Matteo \\
RB & Didier Domi \\
MC & David Batty \\
MC & Eirik Bakke \\
MC & Jody Morris \\
FW & Jamie McMaster \\
ST & Alan Smith \\
Figure
ST & Mark Viduka \\
\hline
\end{tabular}
21
GK
LB
DC
DC
RB
MC
MC
MC
FW
ST
ST
Team sheet
Paul Robinson
Lucus Radebe
Michael Duberry
Dominic Matteo
Dider Domi
David Batty
Eirik Bakke
Jody Morris
Jamie McMaster
Alan Smith
Mark Viduka
15
Package multirow
on CTAN {http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/
macros/latex/contrib/multirow/}
The first thing you need to do is add \usepackage{multirow} to the

preamble15 . This then provides the command needed for spanning rows:
\multirow{num_rows}{width}{contents}. The arguments are
pretty simple to deduce (* for the width means the content's natural width).
7.3.2. Columns spanning multiple rows
\begin{tabular}{|l|l|l|}
\hline
\multicolumn{3}{|c|}{Team sheet} \\
\hline
Goalkeeper & GK & Paul Robinson \\ \hline
\multirow{4}{*}{Defenders} & LB & Lucus Radebe \\
& DC & Michael Duberry \\
& DC & Dominic Matteo \\
& RB & Didier Domi \\ \hline
Figure 22
\multirow{3}{*}{Midfielders} & MC & David Batty \\
& MC & Eirik Bakke \\
& MC & Jody Morris \\ \hline
Forward & FW & Jamie McMaster \\ \hline
\multirow{2}{*}{Strikers} & ST & Alan Smith \\
& ST & Mark Viduka \\
\hline
\end{tabular}
...
\usepackage{multirow}
...
Here is a nontrivial example of how to use spanning in both directions simultaneously and have the borders of the cells drawn correctly:
7.3.3. Spanning in both directions simultaneously
If there is no data for a cell, just don't type anything, but you still need the "&"
separating it from the next column's data. The astute reader will already have
deduced that for a table of n columns, there must always be n1 ampersands in
each row. The exception to this is when \multicolumn and \multirow
are used to create cells which span multiple columns or rows.
The main thing to note when using \multirow is that a blank entry must be
inserted for each appropriate cell in each subsequent row to be spanned.
The command \multicolumn{1}
\begin{tabular}{cc|c|c|c|c|l}
\cline{3-6}
& & \multicolumn{4}{|c|}{Primes} \\ \cline{3-6}
& & 2 & 3 & 5 & 7 \\ \cline{1-6}
\multicolumn{1}{|c|}{\multirow{2}{*Figure
}{Powers}}
23 &
\multicolumn{1}{|c|}{504} & 3 & 2 & 0 & 1 &
\multicolumn{1}{|c|}{}
&
\multicolumn{1}{|c|}{540} & 2 & 3 & 1 & 0 &
\multicolumn{1}{|c|}{\multirow{2}{*}{Powers}} &
\multicolumn{1}{|c|}{gcd} & 2 & 2 & 0 & 0 & min
\multicolumn{1}{|c|}{}
&
\multicolumn{1}{|c|}{lcm} & 3 & 3 & 1 & 1 & max
\end{tabular}
\usepackage{multirow}
\\ \cline{1-6}
\\ \cline{2-6}
\\ \cline{1-6}
\\ \cline{2-6}
The command
Here is another example exploiting the same ideas to
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
21
22
23
24
25
26
19
20
18
ctable/
caption/
http://tug.ctan.org/pkg/hhline
http://tug.ctan.org/pkg/array
http://tug.ctan.org/pkg/colortbl
http://tug.ctan.org/pkg/supertabular
http://tug.ctan.org/pkg/longtable
http://ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/
threeparttable
http://tug.ctan.org/pkg/xtab
http://tug.ctan.org/pkg/tabulary
http://tug.ctan.org/pkg/arydshln
http://tug.ctan.org/pkg/ctable
http://tug.ctan.org/pkg/slashbox
http://tug.ctan.org/pkg/dcolumn
http://tug.ctan.org/pkg/rccol
http://tug.ctan.org/pkg/numprint
http://www.ctan.org/pkg/spreadtab
http://ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/siunitx
38
39
40
37
http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/graphics/pgf/contrib/
pgfplots
http://fr.wikibooks.org/wiki/LaTeX%2FFaire_des_tableaux
http://nl.wikibooks.org/wiki/LaTeX%2FTabellen
http://pl.wikibooks.org/wiki/LaTeX%2FTabele
Both \resizebox and \scalebox require the graphicx package.

To tweak the space between columns (LaTeX will by default
\scalebox{0.7}{
\begin{tabular}...
\end{tabular}
}
Alternatively you can use \scalebox{ratio}{object} in the

same way but with ratios rather than fixed sizes:
\resizebox{8cm}{!} {
\begin{tabular}...
\end{tabular}
}
\resizebox{width}{height}{object} can be used with tabular to specify the height and width of a table. The following example shows how to
resize a table to 8cm width while maintaining the original width/height
ratio.
\title{The Triangulation of Titling Data in
Many document classes will form a title page for you. One must specify what
to fill it with using these commands placed in the top matter1 :
8.1. Standard Title Pages
There are several situations where you might want to create a title in a custom
format, rather than in the format natively supported by LaTeX. For shorter documents such as basic articles, the output of \maketitle is often adequate,
but longer documents (such as books and reports) often require more involved
formatting. While it is possible to change the output of \maketitle, it can
be complicated even with minor changes to the title. In such cases it is often
better to create the title from scratch, and this section will show you how to
accomplish this.
23Abstracts
This should go after the preceding commands. For most document styles, this
will form a separate page, while the article document style will place the
title on the top of the first page. Note that the abstract2 environment should
precede the \maketitle command in AMS documents.
\maketitle
To form a title page, use
Commonly the date is excluded from the title page by using \date{}. It
defaults to \today if not in the source file.
Non-Linear Gaussian Fashion via $\rho$ Series}

\date{October 31, 475}
\author{John Doe\\ Magic Department, Richard Miles University
\and Richard Row, \LaTeX\ Academy}
It is dependent on the document class which commands are used in the title
page generated by \maketitle. For example, the amsart uses commands
such as \address, \dedicatory, \email and more in the title page
while other classes may only use \title.
The \thanks command can also be used in the \title.
\author{John Doe\thanks{Funded by NASA Grant \#42}}
Footnotes within the title page can be specified with the \thanks command.
For example, one may add
Normally, the benefit of using LaTeX instead of traditional word processing

programs is that LaTeX frees you to concentrate on content by handling
margins, justification, and other typesetting concerns. On the other hand, if
you want to write your own title format, it is exactly the opposite: you have to
take care of everything--this time LaTeX will do nothing to help you. It can be
challenging to create your own title format since LaTeX was not designed to
be graphically interactive in the adjustment of layout. The process is similar to
working with raw HTML with the added step that each time you want to see
how your changes look, you have to re-compile the source. While this may
seem like a major inconvenience, the benefit is that once the customized title
format has been written, it serves as a template for all other documents that
would use the title format you have just made. In other words, once you have a
8.2.1. Create the title
8.2. Custom Title Pages
\input{./title.tex}
\end{document}
\begin{document}
\newcommand{\HRule}{\rule{\linewidth}{0.5mm}}
\usepackage[pdftex]{graphicx}
\documentclass[pdftex,12pt,a4paper]{report}
First step: since you'll be working only on the first page of your document
and you'll have to compile very often, you don't have to compile the whole
document each time, you only need to take a look at the first page. That is
why we'll first create a dummy document for preparing the title and then we'll
simply include it within the existing big document we are writing. Call the
dummy document test_title.tex and put the following code in it:
layout you like, you can use it for any other documents where you would like
the same layout without any additional fiddling with layout.
\end{titlepage}
\begin{titlepage}
Now create the title.tex and write in it:
It is meant to be compiled with pdflatex to create a PDF in output. It is a

very basic document, but take care that it has the same settings of the document
you are writing, so the output won't change when you include the title in your
document. In this case (see the first line) the font size is set to 12pt and the
paper size is an A4. The package graphicx is included to insert an image
in the title. Then a command is defined called \HRule; it will just insert a
horizontal line whose length is like the size of the paper and whose thickness
is 0.5 mm. If you want you can change its settings in the definition. Finally
the document starts and it simply includes the title.tex file, that must be
placed in the same directory of our dummy file test_title.tex.
the command for including images is the following (the example

is for a small logo, but you can introduce any image of any
size): \includegraphics[width=0.15\textwidth]{./logo}.
There is no \begin{figure} as you usually do because you don't want it
Images
if you want to center some text just use \begin{center} ...

\end{center}. If you want to align it differently you can use the environment flushright for right-alignment and flushleft for left-alignment.
Alignment
all the things you want to put in the title must be inside the titlepage
environment. Now if you compile test_title.tex you will see a preview
of your title in the test_title.pdf file. Here is what you need to know
to write your title:
you can force the start of a new line by \\. If you want to add more vertical
space you don't need to use several new-line commands, just insert some
New lines
\normalsize is used to create text at the default size for the document.
{\large this text is slightly bigger than normal}, this one is not
If you want to change the size of some text just place it within
brackets, {like this}, and you can use the following commands (in order of size): \Huge, \huge, \LARGE, \Large, \large, \small,
\footnotesize, \tiny. So for example:
Text size
to be floating3 , you just want it there where you placed it. When handling it,
remember that it is considered like a big box by the TeX engine.
All these tips might have made you confused. Then, here is a practical example.
Get the test_title.tex described above and here is an example of a
8.2.2. A practical example
the command \vfill keeps on adding empty spaces until the page is full.
If you put it in the page, you are sure that all the following text will be placed
at the bottom of the page.
Filling the page
you can insert the date of the current day with the command \today. If you
do not wish to insert any date, keep it blank e.g.\date{}
Date
vertical space. For example, this way \\[1cm] you start a new line after
having left 1 cm of empty space.
title.tex. On the right you can see the output after you compile test_title.tex in PDF:
% Author and supervisor

\begin{minipage}{0.4\textwidth}
\begin{flushleft} \large
\emph{Author:}\\
\HRule \\[1.5cm]
% Title
Figure 35
\HRule \\[0.4cm]
{ \huge \bfseries Lager brewing techniques}\\[0.4cm]
\textsc{\Large Final year project}\\[0.5cm]
\textsc{\LARGE University of Beer}\\[1.5cm]
% Upper part of the page

\includegraphics[width=0.15\textwidth]{./logo}\\[1cm]
\begin{center}
\begin{titlepage}
As you can see, the code looks "dirtier" than standard LaTeX source because
you have to take care of the output as well. If you start changing font's
output it will get more confused, but you can do it: it's only for the title and
your complicated code will be isolated from all the rest within its own file
title.tex.
The picture is from a file called logo.png that is in the same directory of
both title.tex and test_title.tex. Since I wanted to insert both the
author and supervisor names properly aligned I used a trick: I created two
small minipages, one on left and one on the right. Their width is a bit less than
half of page width (as you can see, they are exactly 40% of the text width).
Within the minipages I have used different alignments. Using \vfill I could
write the date exactly at the bottom of the page.
\input{./title.tex}
\begin{document}
\newcommand{\HRule}{\rule{\linewidth}{0.5mm}}
...
For example, the top section of your document would look like:
Assuming that your title page is now contained in a file named

title.tex, it must be placed in the same directory as the main document. In order to integrate it, the input command must be used by
placing \input{./title.tex} at the top of the document. Don't
forget to add the commands \usepackage[pdftex]{graphicx}
and \newcommand{\HRule}{\rule{\linewidth}{0.5mm}} in
the preamble section as well.
8.2.3. Integrating the title page
The titlepages package presents many styles of designs for title pages.
Italian users may also want to use the frontespizio package.
8.2.4. Additional documentation and packages
\tableofcontents
...
Latex and the document class will normally take care of page layout issues for
you. For submission to an academic publication, this entire topic will be out
of your hands, as the publishers want to control the presentation. However,
for your own documents, there are some obvious settings that you may wish
to change: margins, page orientation and columns, to name but three. The
purpose of this tutorial is to show you how to configure your pages.
9. Page Layout
A page in Latex is defined by myriad internal parameters. Each parameter corresponds to the length of an element of the page, for example, \paperheight
is the physical height of the page. Here you can see a diagram showing all the
variables defining the page. All sizes are given in Postscript Points (pt), there
are 72pt in an inch or 1pt = 0.3527mm.
9.1. Page dimensions
1.
2.
3.
4.
10
11
one inch + \hoffset

one inch + \voffset
\oddsidemargin = 31pt
\topmargin = 20pt
Figure 36
Margin notes
4
5
Footer
Body
Header
\marginparpush = 7pt (not shown)

\hoffset = 0pt
\voffset = 0pt
\paperwidth = 597pt
\paperheight = 845pt
It will not have been immediately obvious - because it doesn't really cause any
serious problems - that the default page size for all standard document classes
is US letter. This is shorter by 18 mm (about 3/4 inch), and slightly wider by 8
mm (about 1/4 inch), compared to A4 (which is the standard in almost all the
\headheight = 12pt
\headsep = 25pt
\textheight = 592pt
\textwidth = 390pt
1. \marginparsep = 10pt
2. \marginparwidth = 35pt
3. \footskip = 30pt
5.
6.
7.
8.
Readers from a word processing background are probably thinking why there
is so much white space surrounding the text. There is a good reason, and it's
all down to readability. Have a look in a few books, and pick a few lines at
random. Count the number of characters per line. I bet the average is about 66.
Studies have shown that it's easier to read text when there are 60-70 characters
per line - and it would seem that 66 is the optimal number. Therefore, the
page margins are set to ensure that readability remains as good as possible.
The above example illustrates how to pass the optional argument to the
\documentclass, which will then modify the page dimensions accordingly. The standard document classes that are a part of Latex are built to be
fairly generic, which is why you have the flexibility of specifying the page size.
Other classes may have different options (or none at all). Normally, 3rd party
classes come with some documentation to let you know.
\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
rest of the world). While this is not a serious issue (most printers will print the
document without any problems), it is possible to specify alternative sizes:
If you wish to change the margins of your document, there are many ways to
do so:
However, those who want to read on iPads or other handheld digital devices
need to create documents without the extra whitespace. In order to create
PDF documents with optimal handheld viewing, not only must the text field
and margins be adjusted, so must the page size. To do this, use the setlength
command to adjust the parameters "pdfpagewidth" and "pdfpagelength" to the
appropriate dimensions. If you are looking for a sensible dimension, consider
following the paper size used by the Supreme Court of the United States, 441pt.
by 666pt (or 6.125 inches by 9.25 inches), which looks great on the iPad. You
could also use the Supreme Court's text field size of 297 pt by 513 pt, but this
is too wide for font's other than Century Schoolbook, the font required by the
Supreme Court.
Also, white space is often left in the inner margin for the assumption that the
document will be bound.
Use the geometry package. This package allows you to specify the 4
margins without needing to remember the particular page dimensions commands. You can enter the measures in centimeters and inches as well. Use
cm for centimeters and in for inches after each value (e.g: 1.0in or 2.54cm).
Note that by default (i.e. without any options) this package already reduces
the margins, so for a 'standard layout' you may not need to specify anything.
These values are relative to the edge of paper (0in) and go inward it. It may
be implemented as follows:
Use the a4wide package for a page with A4 document size with smaller
margins.
\usepackage[cm]{fullpage}
For an even greater effect give it the cm option (around 1.5cm):
\usepackage{fullpage}
Simply use the fullpage package for somewhat standardized smaller

margins (around an inch):
The geometry package has many pre-defined page sizes, like a4paper,
built in.
Others include: a0paper, a1paper, ..., a6paper,
\usepackage[a4paper]{geometry}
Additionally, there are several packages designed to solve the problem of

varying pages sizes, which override any defaults setup by the document class.
One of the most versatile packages for page layout is the geometry package.
For instance, to set the page size, add the following to your preamble:
\oddsidemargin=-1cm
\setlength{\textwidth}{6.5in}
\addtolength{\voffset}{-5pt}
Edit individual page dimension variables described above, using the

\addtolength and \setlength commands. For instance,
\usepackage[top=tlength, bottom=blength, left=llength,

right=rlength]{geometry}
The value of evensidemargin is larger than oddsidemargin in the two-sided

default layout, as one could wish to write notes on the side of the page. The side
for the large margin is chosen opposite to the side where pages are conjucted
together.
\setlength{\oddsidemargin}{15.5pt}
\setlength{\evensidemargin}{15.5pt}
A quick way to eliminate the difference in position between even and odd
numbered pages would be setting the values to evensidemargin and oddsidemargin to the half of odd's default:
\usepackage[margin=1in, paperwidth=5.5in,
paperheight=8.5in]{geometry}
To explicitly change the paper dimensions using the geometry package, the
paperwidth and paperheight options can be used. For example:
b0paper, b1paper, ..., b6paper, letterpaper, legalpaper,

executivepaper.
http://www.ctex.org/documents/packages/layout/titlesec.pdf
If you intend to get a pdf in the end, there are basically three ways:
9.1.2. Page size issues
The command \titleformat must be used when the spacing of a chapter

is changed. In case of a section this command can be omitted.
\usepackage{titlesec}
\titlespacing*{\chapter}{0pt}{-50pt}{20pt}
\titlefo
rmat{\chapter}[display]{\normalfont\huge\bfseries}{\chaptertitlename\
\thechapter}{20pt}{\Huge}
The top margin above a chapter can be changed using the titlesec package.
Example: http://www.ctex.org/documents/packages/layout/titlesec.pdf1
9.1.1. Top margin above Chapter
#
#
#
#
#
TeX => PDF

TeX => DVI
DVI => PDF
DVI => PS
PS => PDF
to the tex file, -t a4 after dvips and -sPAPERSIZE=a4 after the ps2pdf.
For pdflatex to work fine, using the package geometry usually works.
\documentclass[...,a4paper,...]{...}
\special{papersize=210mm,297mm}
With all the available Ghostscript versions, the safest way to always get the
right paper size in the end is to add
pdflatex myfile
latex myfile
dvipdf myfile
dvips myfile -o myfile.ps
ps2pdf myfile.ps myfile.pdf
Which are in general obtained with
TeX => PDF

TeX => DVI => PDF
TeX => DVI => PS => PDF
\usepackage[landscape]{geometry}
The first is for when you want all of your document to be in landscape from the
very beginning. There are various packages available to achieve this, but the
one I prefer is the geometry package. All you need to do is call the package,
with landscape as an option:
When you talk about changing page orientation, it usually means changing
to landscape mode, since portrait is the default. I shall introduce two slightly
different styles of changing orientation.
9.2. Page orientation
If you want US Letter instead, replace "210mm,297mm" by "8.5in,11in" and

"a4" by "letter".
The lscape package is for this very purpose. It supplies a landscape environment, and anything inside is basically rotated. No actual page dimensions
are changed. This approach is more applicable to books or reports than to
typical academic publications. Using pdflscape instead of lscape when
The second method is for when you are writing a document in portrait, but
you have some contents, like a large diagram or table that would be displayed
better on a landscape page. However, you still want the consistency of your
headers and footers appearing the same place as the other pages.
9.2.1. Change orientation of specific part
\usepackage[a4paper,landscape]{geometry}
Although, if you intend to use geometry to set your paper size, don't add
the \usepackage commands twice, simply string all the options together,
separating with a comma:
\begin{landscape}
\begin{table}
\centering
% optional, probably makes it look better to have it
centered on the page
\begin{tabular}{....}
.......
\end{tabular}
\end{table}
\end{landscape}
Also, to get a table to appear correctly on a landscaped page, one must place
the tabular environment inside a table environment, which is itself inside
the landscape environment. e.g., it should look like this:
generating a PDF document will make the page appear right side up when
viewed: the single page that is in landscape format will be rotated, while the
rest will be left in portrait orientation.
\begin{table}[p]
\centering
\rotatebox{90}{
\begin{minipage}{\textheight}
\begin{tabular}{|l|l|l|}
...
\end{tabular}
\end{minipage}
}
\end{table}
If you use the above code, you will see that the table is inserted where it is in
the code. It will not be floated! To fix this you need the package rotating
9.2.2. Change orientation of floating environment
empty
Both header and footer are clear
The possibilities of changing the headers in plain Latex are actually quite
limited. There are two commands available: \pagestyle{style} will
apply the specified style to the current and all subsequent pages, and
\thispagestyle{style} will only affect the current page. The possible styles are:
9.3.1. Standard page styles
Page styles in Latex terms refers not to page dimensions, but to the running
headers and footers of a document. These headers typically contain document
titles, chapter or section numbers/names, and page numbers.
9.3. Page styles
Header is clear, but the footer

contains the page number in the
center.
Footer is blank, header displays
information according to document
class (e.g., section name) and page
number top right.
Page number is top right, and it is
possible to control the rest of the
header.
With myheadings, the commands \markright (in the standard document

classes, book, report and article) and \markboth (only in the book class) are
used to control the headings. The following commands placed at the beginning
of an article document will set the header of all pages to contain "John Smith"
top left, "On page styles" centered and the page number top right:
myheadings
headings
plain
An issue to look out for is that the major sectioning commands (\part,
\chapter or \maketitle) specify a \thispagestyle{plain}. So,
if you wish to suppress all styles by inserting a \pagestyle{empty} at the
beginning of your document, then the style command at each section will override your initial rule, for those pages only. To achieve the intended result one
can follow the new section commands with \thispagestyle{empty}.
The \part command, however, cannot be fixed this way, because it sets
the page style, but also advances to the next page, so that \thispagestyle{}
cannot be applied to that page. Another approach is to simply write
\usepackage{nopageno} in the preamble. This package will make
\pagestyle{plain} have the same effect as \pagestyle{empty},
effectively suppressing page numbering when it is used.
\pagestyle{myheadings}
\markright{John Smith\hfill On page styles\hfill}
fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
\leftmark
and
\rightmark
The tricky problem when customizing headers and footers is to get things like
running section and chapter names in there. Standard LaTeX accomplishes
this with a two-stage approach (although an alternative one-stage mechanism
is provided by the package titleps). In the header and footer definition,
you use the commands
To get better control over the headers, one can use the package fancyhdr
written by Piet van Oostrum. It provides several commands that allow you to
customize the header and footer lines of your document. For a more complete
guide, the author of the package produced this documentation2 .
9.3.2. Customising with fancyhdr
) that is responsible for redefining
\subsectionmark
, or
\sectionmark
\chaptermark
themselves. They call yet another command (
\leftmark
and
\rightmark
command and its friends do not redefine
\chapter
to represent the current section and chapter heading, respectively. The values of
these two commands are overwritten whenever a chapter or section command
is processed. For ultimate flexibility, the
\usepackage{fancyhdr}
\setlength{\headheight}{15.2pt}
\pagestyle{fancy}
To begin, add the following lines to your preamble:
command.
\chaptermark
If you want to change the look of the chapter name in the header line, you need
only "renew" the
, etc., must be used after the sectioning command if header and footer lines are
to be updated.
\chaptermark
, except if they are starred -- in such a case,
\leftmark
and
\rightmark
Hopefully, the behaviour of the above commands is fairly intuitive: if it has

head in it, it affects the head etc, and obviously, l, c and r means left, centre
and right respectively. Documents can be either one- or two-sided. Articles are
by default one-sided, books are two-sided. Two-sided documents differentiate
the left (even) and right (odd) pages, whereas one-sided do not.
\lfoot[<lf-even>]{<lf-odd>}
\cfoot[<cf-even>]{<cf-odd>}
\rfoot[<rf-even>]{<rf-o
\lhead[<lh-even>]{<lh-odd>}
\chead[<ch-even>]{<ch-odd>}
\rhead[<rh-even>]{<rh-o
The second line will prevent LaTeX from giving a warning. Both the header
and footer comprise three elements each according to its horizontal position
(left, centre or right). To set their values, the following commands are available:
\chaptername
\rightmark
\leftmark
\thepage
the name chapter in the current

language. If this is English, it will
display "Chapter"
current section name printed like

"1.6. THIS IS THE SECTION
TITLE"
current chapter name printed like

"CHAPTER 3. THIS IS THE
CHAPTER TITLE"
number of the current page
Watch out: if you provide long text in two different "parts" only in the footer
or only in the header, you might see overlapping text. There are special
commands you can use as arguments:
current section number
convert the names to uppercase, whichever was the formatting of the text. If
you want them to print the actual name of the chapter without converting it to
uppercase use the following command:
\rightmark
and
\leftmark
Note that
\thesection
\thechapter
current chapter number
\renewcommand{\chaptermark}[1]{\markboth{\MakeUppercase{\chaptername\
\thechapter.\ #1}}{}}
is:
\chaptermark
. The standard book formatting of the
\pagestyle{fancy}
will just print the name of the chapter and section, without number and without
affecting the formatting. Note that these redefinitions must be inserted after
the first call of
\rightmark
and
\leftmark
now
\renewcommand{\chaptermark}[1]{\markboth{#1}{}}
\renewcommand{\sectionmark}[1]{\markright{#1}{}}
It is often necessary to clear any defaults or a previous style definition, and the
first line of the above example will do this. The commands are an alternative
\lhead{Andrew Roberts}
\rhead{\today}
\rfoot{\thepage}
\fancyhf{}
An example:
The first line for the header, the second for the footer. Setting it to zero means
that there will be no line.
\renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{0.5pt}
\renewcommand{\footrulewidth}{0pt}
Moreover, with the following commands you can define the thickness of the
decorative lines on both the header and the footer:
etc.
\lhead{...}
inside
\fancyplain{...}{...}
This approach has a serious bad point: some pages like the title or the beginning
of each chapter have no header or footer, but with the code we have shown
every page will get the same output. There is a way to solve this problem: you
can use the fancyplain style. If you do so, you can use the command
The result of these commands will put my name at the top left, todays date
at the top right, and the current page number at the bottom right of the page.
Even if the document class was two-sided, because no optional text has been
supplied for the even pages, the style will be used for all pages.
interface to customising the headers/footers that fancyhdr offers, and so by not

passing anything to them, it assumes that you want it all blank.
\lhead[Andrew Roberts]{}
For two-sided, it's common to mirror the style of opposite pages, you tend to
think in terms of inner and outer. So, the same example as above for two-sided
is:
It has the same behavior of the previous code, but you will get empty header
and footer in the title and at the beginning of chapters.
\lhead{\fancyplain{}{Andrew Roberts}}
\rhead{\fancyplain{}{\today}}
\rfoot{\fancyplain{}{\thepage}}
\fancyhf{}
\pagestyle{fancyplain}
When LaTeX wants to create a page with an empty style, it will insert the
first argument of fancyplain, in all the other cases it will use the second
argument. So, an improved version of the previous code would be:
\lhead{\fancyplain{}{\thepage}}
\chead{}
\rhead{\fancyplain{}{\textit{\leftmark}}}
\pagestyle{fancyplain}
\setlength{\headheight}{15pt}
As an example, here is the complete code of a basic configuration you could

use for a real document:
This is effectively saying my name is top outer, todays date is top inner, and
current page number is bottom outer. You can use the fancyplain command
within them for two-sided documents, too.
\rhead[]{Andrew Roberts}
\lhead[]{\today}
\rhead[\today]{}
\lfoot[\thepage]{}
\rfoot[]{\thepage}
class
two-sided,
use
it will just delete the current heading/footer configuration, so you can

make your own. Now you can create what you want using the command
\fancyhead for header and \fancyfoot for footer. They work in the
same way, so we'll explain only the first one. The syntax is:
\fancyhf{}
If you want to get different style for even and odd pages, there is another
possible way, still using fancyhdr. Start again with:
9.3.3. Another approach with fancyhdr
NB. If you want to make the article

\documentclass[twoside]{article}.
\lfoot{}
\cfoot{}
\rfoot{}
even page
odd page
left side
centered
right side
\fancyhead[CE]{Author's Name}
\fancyhead[CO]{\today}
\fancyfoot[LE,RO]{\thepage}
so CE will refer to the center of the even pages and RO to the right side
of the odd pages. Whether it is header or footer, depends if you are using
\fancyhead or \fancyfoot. You can use multiple selectors separated by
a comma. Here is an example:
E
O
L
C
R
The selectors are the following:
\fancyhead[selectors]{output you want}
\setlength{\headheight}{15pt}
Finally, here is the complete code of a possible style you could use for a
two-sided document:
\fancypagestyle{plain}{ %
\fancyhf{} % remove everything
\renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{0pt} % remove lines as well
\renewcommand{\footrulewidth}{0pt}}
it will print author's name on the center of the header of the even pages, the
date of the current day on the center of the odd pages and the current page
number on the left side of even pages and on the right size of the odd pages.
Finally, in order to have the pages at the beginning of any chapter really plain,
you could redefine the plain style, for example to have a really plain page when
you want. The command to use is \fancypagestyle{plain}{...}
and the argument can contain all the commands explained before. An example
is the following:
Some people like to put the current page number in context with the whole
document. LaTeX only provides access to the current page number. However,
you can use the lastpage package to find the total number of pages, like
this:
9.3.4. Page n of m
\fancypagestyle{plain}{ %
\fancyhf{} % remove everything
\renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{0pt} % remove lines as well
\renewcommand{\footrulewidth}{0pt}}
\fancyhf{}
\fancyhead[LE,RO]{\thepage}
\fancyhead[RE]{\textit{\nouppercase{\leftmark}}}
\fancyhead[LO]{\textit{\nouppercase{\rightmark}}}
\pagestyle{fancy}
\renewcommand{\sectionmark}[1]{\markright{#1}{}}
Other packages for page styles are scrpage2, very similiar to fancyhdr,
and titleps, which takes a one-stage approach, without having to use
\leftmark or \rightmark.
9.3.5. Alternative packages
Note the capital letters. Also, add a backslash after \thepage to ensure
adequate space between the page number and 'of'. And recall, when using
references, that you have to run LaTeX an extra time to resolve the crossreferences.
\usepackage{lastpage}
...
\cfoot{\thepage\ of \pageref{LastPage}}
Can support up to ten columns.
While this simple addition will do the job 9 out of 10 times, it is widely
acknowledged that there are many limitations of this approach, and that the
multicol package is much more useful for handling multiple columns. It
has several advantages:
It is common to see articles and conference proceedings formatted with

two columns of text. However, such publishers will usually provide you
with their own document class, which automatically implements this format, without you having to do anything. It is very easy to format your
page in this way. If you are using a standard Latex document class, then
you can simply pass the optional argument twocolumn to the document
class: \documentclass[twocolumn]{article} which will give the
desired effect.
9.4. Multi-column pages
To create a typical two-column layout:
Floats are not fully supported by this environment. It can only cope if you use
the starred forms of the float commands (e.g., \begin{figure*} ) which
makes the float span all columns. This is not hugely problematic, since floats
of the same width as a column may be too small, and you would probably want
to span them anyway. See this section3 for a more detailed discussion.
Implements a multicols environment, therefore, it is possible to mix the

number of columns within a document.
Additionally, the environment can be nested inside other environments, such
as figure.
Multicol outputs balanced columns, whereby the columns on the final
page will be of roughly equal length.
Vertical rules between columns can be customised.
Column environments can be easily customised locally or globally.
To force a break in a column, the command \columnbreak is used in a

multicols environment.
\setlength{\columnsep}{20pt}
This will draw a thin line of 1pt in width. A thick line would not look very
pleasing, however, you are free to put in any length of your choosing. Also,
to change the horizontal space in between columns (the default is set at 10pt,
which is quite narrow) then you need to change the \columnsep parameter:
\setlength{\columnseprule}{1pt}
The parameter \columnseprule holds the width of the vertical rules. By

default, the lines are omitted as this parameter is set to a length of 0pt. Do the
following before the beginning of the environment:
\begin{multicols}{2}
lots of text
\end{multicols}
\\
\newline
Breaks the line at the point of the

command.
command; it is a shorter version of
the previous command, but it does
exactly the same thing.
There may be instances, especially in very long documents, such as books,

that LaTeX will not get all page breaks looking as good as it could. It may,
therefore, be necessary to manually tweak the page formatting. Of course, you
should only do this at the very final stage of producing your document, once
all the content is complete. LaTeX offers the following:
9.5. Manual page formatting
\newpage
\linebreak[number]
\\*
Breaks the line at the point of

the command and additionally
prohibits a page break after the
forced line break
command. The number you provide as an argument represents the
priority of the command in a range
from 0 (it will be easily ignored)
to 4 (do it anyway). LaTeX will
try to produce the best line breaks
possible. If it cannot, it will decide
whether including the linebreak or
not according to the priority you
have provided.
Ends the current page and starts a
new one.
\clearpage
\nopagebreak[number]
\pagebreak[number]
Breaks the current page at the

point of the command. The optional number argument sets the
priority in a scale from 0 to 4.
Stops the page being broken at
the point of the command. The
optional number argument sets the
priority in a scale from 0 to 4.
Ends the current page and causes
any floats encountered in the input,
but yet to appear, to be printed.
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Widows%20and%20orphans
\widowpenalty=300
\clubpenalty=300
LaTeX has a parameter for 'penalty' for widows and orphans ('club lines'
in LaTeX terminology). With the greater penalty LaTeX will try more to
avoid widows and orphans. You can try to increase these penalties by putting
following commands in your document preamble:
w:Widows and orphans4 In professional books, it's not desirable to have single
lines at the beginning or end of a page. In typesetting such situations are
called 'widows' and 'orphans'. Normally it is possible that widows and orphans
appear in LaTeX documents. You can try to deal with them using manual page
formatting, but there's also an automatic solution.
9.6. Widows and orphans
\needspace{5\baselineskip}
Some
text
on
5
lines.
Alternatively, you can use the needspace package to reserve some lines and
thus to prevent page breaking for those lines.
\setlength{\parskip}{3ex plus 2ex minus 2ex}
It also helps to have rubber band values for the space between paragraphs:
If this does not help, you can try increasing these values even more, to a
maximum of 10000. However, it is not recommended to set this value too high,
as setting it to 10000 forbids LaTeX from doing this altogether, which might
result in strange behavior.
This tutorial is relatively short, largely due to the fact that the whole LaTeX
ethos is to concentrate on the content, and let LaTeX (and/or other typographers
who have developed suitable document classes) decide on the best presentation.
The next step to achieve greater control of page layout is to set about designing
your own class. Unfortunately, that is not a straightforward task, and is often
best left to the professionals!
9.7. Summary
Paragraphs in LaTeX are usually fully justified (i.e., flush with both the left and
right margins). For whatever reason, should you wish to alter the justification
10.1. Paragraph Alignment
Altering the paragraph formatting is not often required, especially in academic writing. However, it is useful to know, and applications tend to be for
formatting text in floats, or other more exotic documents.
10. Paragraph Formatting
Environment
flushleft
flushright
center
Command
\raggedright
\raggedleft
\centering
(paragraph) columns in
of the specified environment will be justified appropriately. The commands

listed are for use within other environments. For example,
\end
and
\begin
All text between the
Alignment
Left justified
Right justified
Center
of a paragraph, there are three environments at hand, and also LaTeX command
equivalents.
{
\raggedleft
Some text flushed right.
}
There is no way to set full justification. It means that if you do not

enclose the previous 3 commands into a group, the rest of the document
will be affected. So the right way of doing this with commands is
B Warning
tabular
Be careful, however, if you decide to set the indent to zero, then it means you
will need a vertical space between paragraphs in order to make them clear. The
space between paragraphs is held in
This will set paragraph indents to 1cm.
\setlength{\parindent}{1cm}
command.
\setlength
. The default length that this constant holds is set by the document class that
you use. It is possible to override using the
\parindent
By default, the first paragraph after a heading follows the standard AngloAmerican publishers' practice of no indentation. The size of subsequent
paragraph indents are determined by a parameter called
10.2. Paragraph Indents
command.) An example follows.
\hangafter
. (While the default behaviour is to apply the hanging indent after the first line,
this may be changed with the
\hangindent
To indent subsequent lines of a paragraph, use the TeX command
\usepackage{parskip}
, which could be altered in a similar fashion as above. However, this parameter

is used elsewhere too, such as in lists, which means you run the risk of making
various parts of your document look very untidy by changing this setting.
If you want to use the style of having no indentation with a space between
paragraphs, use the parskip package, which does this for you, while making
adjustments to the spacing of lists and other structures which use paragraph
spacing, so they don't get too far apart. Add this to the preamble:
\parskip
\parfillskip
.
To change the indentation of the last line in a paragraph, use the TeX command
\hangindent
and
\parindent
add additional space to the left and right sides of each line, allowing the
formatting for subsequent paragraphs to differ from the overall document
margins. This space is in addition to the indentation added by
\rightskip
and
\leftskip
The TeX commands
\hangindent=0.7cm This paragraph has an extra indentation at the

left.
\indent
If you want to indent a paragraph that is not indented, you can use
\setlength{\parskip}{1cm plus4mm minus3mm}
command like this:
\setlength
can have a default dimension plus an amount of expansion minus an amount

of contraction. This is useful on pages in complex documents where not every
page may be an exact number of fixed-height lines long, so some give-and-take
in vertical space is useful. You specify this in a
\parskip
.
White-space in LaTeX can also be made flexible (what Lamport calls "rubber"
lengths). This means that values such as extra vertical space inserted before a
paragraph
\linespread
To change line spacing in the whole document use the command
10.3. Line Spacing
as the first command of the paragraph. This might come in handy when you
start a document with body text and not with a sectioning command.
\noindent
To create a non-indented paragraph, you can use
at the beginning of the paragraph. Obviously, this will only have an effect
when \parindent is not set to zero. If you want to indent the beginning of
every section, you can use the indentfirst package, see the chapter about
LaTeX/Packages1 for more information.
singlespace
- line spacing set to one-and-half spacing.
onehalfspace
- all lines are double spaced.
\setstretch{baselinestretch}
- normal line spacing.

3. To change line spacing to custom values, use the command
to the document preamble.

2. This then provides the following environments to use within your document:
doublespace
\usepackage{setspace}
1. Add
To change line spacing in specific environments do the following:
covered in LaTeX/Text_Formatting#Spacing2 .
will specify the line spacing for all sections and paragraphs until another
command is used.
\onehalfspacing
, or
\doublespacing
\singlespacing
to change the line spacing to whatever is greater, the document-wide or

environment-wide one.
After declaring the package in the preamble the use of the command
\begin{spacing}{2.5} ... \end{spacing}
in the preamble to change line spacing for the whole document or use
the environment
environment, everything input between the begin and end commands are
processed as if by a typewriter. All spaces and new lines are reproduced as
given, and the text is displayed in an appropriate fixed-width font. Any LaTeX
command will be ignored and handled as plain text. This is ideal for typesetting
program source code. Here is an example:
verbatim
There are several ways to introduce text that won't be interpreted by the
compiler. If you use the
10.4.1. Verbatim Text
10.4. Special Paragraphs
See the section on customizing lists3 below for information on how to change
the line spacing in lists.
Figure 37
. Any others will be output. The font size in the verbatim environment can be
adjusted by placing a font size command4 before
\end{verbatim}
environment, the only command that will be recognized is
verbatim
Note: once in the
\begin{verbatim}
The verbatim environment
simply reproduces every
character you input,
including all s p a c e s!
\end{verbatim}
alltt
to your preamble to use it though! Within the
\usepackage{alltt}
Remember to add
\begin{alltt}
Verbatim extended with the ability
to use normal commands. Therefore, it
Figure
is possible to \emph{emphasize} words in
this environment, for example.
\end{alltt}
38
. If this is an issue, then you can use the alltt package instead, providing an
environment with the same name:
\begin{verbatim}
alltt
inside the
\textbf{}
.
When using
to enclose them, instead of the usual
\)
and
\(
enviroment, you can use
alltt
to get back the normal font. To write equations within the
\normalfont
environment, you can use the command
is the delimiter: here we have used "+", but you can use any character you like
but * and space;
\verb
The first character following
\verb+my text+
command:
\verb
.
If you just want to introduce a short verbatim phrase, you don't need to use the
whole environment, but you have the
\usepackage{alltt}
after
\renewcommand{\ttdefault}{txtt}
enviroment, note that the standard font has no bold TT font. Txtfonts has bold
fonts: just add
Verbatim
environment (note the capital letter) which lets you draw a rule round the
verbatim text, change the font size, and even have typographic effects inside
the
Verbatim
should have on text.

For more control over formatting, however, you can try the fancyvrb package, which provides a
\textbf
will print \textbf{Hi mate!}, ignoring the effect
\verb|\textbf{Hi mate!}|
will print verbatim all the text after it until it finds the next delimiter. For
example, the code:
\verb
\url
command), but the
\verb
will show this URL exactly as typed (similar to the
Go to \url{http://www.uni.edu/~myname/best-website-ever.html} for my
website.
command, which properly typesets URLs, for example:
\url
One of either the hyperref or url packages provides the
Typesetting URLs
environment. It can also be used in conjunction with the fancybox package

and it can add reference line numbers (useful for chunks of data or programming), and it can even include entire external files.
\hypersetup{}
might work if the four zeroes does not) inside the
pdfborder = {0 0 0}
(alternately
pdfborder = {0 0 0 0}
When using this command through the hyperref package, the URL is
"clickable" in the PDF document, whereas it is not linked to the web when
using only the url package. Also when using the hyperref package, to
remove the border placed around a URL, insert
arguments will fail, as will using other non-URL-valid characters.
\url
command also performs a hyphenless break at punctuation characters (only in

PDFLaTeX, not in plain LaTeX+ dvips). It was designed for Web URLs, so it
understands their syntax and will never break mid-way through an unpunctuated word, only at slashes and full stops. Bear in mind, however, that spaces
are forbidden in URLs, so using spaces in
. The mandatory first line argument is for specifying which line the numbering
shall commence. The optional step is the step between numbered lines (the
default is 1, which means every line will be numbered).
\begin{listing}[step]{first line}
This is also an extension of the verbatim environment provided by the

moreverb package. The extra functionality it provides is that it can add
line numbers along side the text. The command:
Listing Environment
See also LaTeX/Hyperlinks#Customization5
\urlstyle{same}
You can put the following code into your preamble to change the style, how
URLs are displayed to the normal font:
\usepackage{verbatim}
As we have seen, the only way LaTeX allows you to add comments is by using
the special character %, that will comment out all the rest of the line after itself.
This approach is really time-consuming if you want to insert long comments
or just comment out a part of your document that you want to improve later,
unless you're using an editor6 that automates this process. Alternatively, you
can use the verbatim package, to be loaded in the preamble as usual:
10.4.2. Multi-line comments
to the document preamble.
\usepackage{moreverb}
To use this environment, remember to add
Note that this wont work inside complex environments, like math for example.
You may be wondering, why should I load a package called verbatim to have
This is another example for embedding comments in your document.
This is another
\begin{comment}
rather stupid,
but helpful
\end{comment}
example for embedding
comments in your document.
(you can also use the comment package instead) you can use an environment
called comment that will comment out everything within itself. Here is an
example:
\comment{ This is a long comment and can extend over multiple lines,
etc. }
Then, to comment out text, simply do something like this:
\newcommand{\comment}[1]{}
Alternatively, you can define a \comment{} command, by adding the

following to the document's preamble:
the possibility to add comments? The answer is straightforward: commented

text is interpreted by the compiler just like verbatim text, the only difference is
that verbatim text is introduced within the document, while the comment is
just dropped.
is for quotations where line breaks are important, such as poetry. Once in,
new stanzas are created with a blank line, and new lines within a stanza are
indicated using the newline command,
verse
for use with longer quotations, of more than one paragraph, because it indents
the first line of each paragraph.
quotation
for a short quotation, or a series of small quotes, separated by blank lines.
quote
LaTeX provides several environments for quoting text; they have small differences and they are aimed for different types of quotations. All of them are
indented on either margin, and you will need to add your own quotation marks
if you want them. The provided environments are:
10.4.3. Quoting text
document classes; it's not available in the
report
and
article
environment for this purpose. It is available in
abstract
In scientific publications it is customary to start with an abstract which gives

the reader a quick overview of what to expect. LaTeX provides the
10.4.4. Abstracts
\\
. If a line takes up more than one line on the page, then all subsequent lines
are indented until explicitly separated with
\\
This page uses material from Andy Roberts Getting to grips with LaTeX with
permission from the author.
10.5. Notes and References
, but it's quite simple to create your own if you really need it.
book
Strictly speaking, LaTeX cannot manage pictures directly: in order to introduce

graphics within documents, LaTeX just creates a box with the same size as
the image you want to include and embeds the picture, without any other
processing. This means you will have to take care that the images you want
to include are in the right format to be included. This is not such a hard task
because LaTeX supports the most common picture formats around.
11. Importing Graphics
dvips (default if compiling with latex), if you are compiling with latex to
get a DVI and you want to see your document with a DVI or PS viewer.
dvipdfm, if you are compiling with latex to get a DVI that you want to
convert to PDF using dvipdfm, to see your document with any PDF viewer.
This package accepts as an argument the external driver to be used to manage

pictures; however, the latest version of this package takes care of everything
by itself, changing the driver according to the compiler you are using, so you
don't have to worry about this. Still, just in case you want to understand better
how it works, here are the possible options you can pass to the package:
\usepackage{graphicx}
As stated before, LaTeX can't manage pictures directly, so we will need some
extra help: we have to load the graphicx package in the preamble of our
document:
11.1. The graphicx package
1
2

The graphics and graphicx packages recognize the "draft" and "final" options1
given in the \documentclass2 [...]{...} command at the start of the
11.1.1. Document Options
In many respects, importing your images into your document using LaTeX is
fairly simple... once you have your images in the right format that is! Therefore,
I fear for many people the biggest effort will be the process of converting their
graphics files. Now we will see which formats we can include and then we
will see how to do it.
but, again, you don't need to pass any option to the package because the default
settings are fine in most of the cases.
pdftex (default if compiling with pdflatex), if you are compiling with

pdftex to get a PDF that you will see with any PDF viewer.
As explained before, the image formats you can use depend on the driver that
graphicx is using but, since the driver is automatically chosen according to
the compiler, then the allowed image formats will depend on the compiler you
are using.
11.1.2. Supported image formats
file. Using "draft" as the option will suppress the inclusion of the image in the
output file and will replace the contents with the name of the image file that
would have been seen. Using "final" will result in the image being placed in
the output file. The default is "final".
3
4
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Encapsulated%20PostScript
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Vector%20graphics
Many graphics software packages have the ability to save images in the EPS
format (extension is normally .eps). Here are some examples of software
that can output EPS formats:
The EPS format was defined by Adobe Systems for making it easy for applications to import postscript-based graphics into documents. Because an EPS
file declares the size of the image, it makes it easy for systems like LaTeX to
arrange the text and the graphics in the best way. EPS is a vector format4 this
means that it can have very high quality if it is created properly, with programs
that are able to manage vector graphics. It is also possible to store bit-map
pictures within EPS, but they will need a lot of disk space.
The only format you can include while compiling with latex is Encapsulated
PostScript3 (EPS).
Compiling with latex
5
6
7
http://sourceforge.net/projects/pdfcreator/
http://www.inkscape.org
http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/support/epstopdf/
Printing in an EPS file:

Under Windows, PDFCreator5 is an open source software that can create
PDF as well as EPS files. It installs a virtual printer that can be accessed
from other software having a "print..." entry in their menu (virtually any
program).
Creating and converting vector graphics:
Commercial vector graphics software, such as Adobe Illustrator, CorelDRAW, and FreeHand are commonly used and can read and write EPS
figures. However, these products are limited to Windows and Mac OS
platforms.
Inkscape6 can save in vector EPS format, and it can run on multiple
platforms. Inkscape cannot open EPS figures directly; however, with the
epstopdf utility7 one can convert EPS into PDF and Inkscape can import
8
9
10
11
12
13
http://wiki.inkscape.org/wiki/index.php/LaTeX
http://live.gnome.org/Dia
http://www.gimp.org
http://pts.szit.bme.hu/sam2p/
http://www.imagemagick.org/
http://www.graphicsmagick.org/
PDF. From version 0.48, Inkscape has a special PDF+LaTeX output option
(and for EPS/PS too). See Inkscape website8 .
Dia9 is a cross platform diagramming utility which can export eps images,
or generate tex drawn using the tikz package.
Creating and converting raster-only graphics to EPS:
Commercial product Adobe Photoshop can save to EPS.
GIMP10 , has a graphical user interface, and it is multi-platform.
For command-line:
Sam2p11 (convert) or
ImageMagick12 (convert) or
GraphicsMagick13 (gm convert).
14
15
16
17
18
19
http://imgtops.sourceforge.net/
http://www.gnuplot.info
http://www.r-project.org/
http://gmt.soest.hawaii.edu/
http://projects.gnome.org/gnumeric/
http://matplotlib.sourceforge.net/
These three programs operate much the same way, and can convert between
most graphics formats. Sam2p however is the most recent of the three and
seems to offer both the best quality and to result in the smallest files.
imgtops14 . A lightweight graphics utility.
Creating publication-quality vector-based plots and charts:
Gnuplot15 , producing scientific graphics since 1986.
R16 , statistical and scientific figures.
Generic Mapping Tools (GMT)17 , maps and a wide range of highly customisable plots.
Gnumeric18 , spreadsheets has SVG, EPS, PDF export
matplotlib19 , plotting library written in python, with PDF and EPS export.
20
21
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/lossless
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Vector%20graphics
JPG, widely used on Internet, digital cameras, etc. They are the best choice
if you want to insert photos
PNG, a very common format (even if not as much as JPG); it's a lossless20
format and it's the best choice for diagrams (if you were not able to generate
a vector21 version) and screenshots
If you are compiling with pdflatex to produce a PDF, you have a wider
choice. You can insert:
Compiling with pdflatex
There are some tricks to be able to import formats other than EPS into your
DVI document, but they're very complicated. On the other hand, converting
any image to EPS is very simple, so it's not worth considering them.
24
25
22
23
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Raster%20graphics
http://mirrors.ctan.org/info/svg-inkscape/InkscapePDFLaTeX.
pdf
http://dirkraffel.com/2007/11/19/include-eps-files-in-latex
http://www.inkscape.org
JPG and PNG are supported by any image processing program, so you just
have to use the one you prefer. If you want to create high quality vector PDF
to embed within your PDF document, you can use Inkscape25 : it supports
many vector formats and so you can use it to convert from one to an other. You
PDF, it is widely used for documents but can be used to store images as well.
It supports both vector and bit-map22 images, but it's not recommended for
the latter, as JPG or PNG will provide the same result using less disk space.
Vector formats can be used with the help of Inkscape. There are instructions23 on how to save your vector images in a PDF format understood
by LaTeX and have LaTeX manage the text styles and sizes in the image
automatically.
EPS can be used with the help of the epstopdf package. Please see these
instructions24 .
29
26
27
28
http://www.gnuplot.info
epstopdf-pkg.html
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Batch%20file
which can then be run from the command line.
for %%f in (*.eps) do epstopdf %%f
Note, that EPS files cannot be used with pdflatex, however they can be converted to PDF using the epstopdf utility27 , included in most LaTeX distributions. This can be called automatically by LaTeX using the epstopdf package28 .
In Windows, multiple files can be converted by placing the following line in
a batch file29 (a text file with a .BAT extension) in the same directory as the
images:
could also create your graphics directly with Inkscape. If you want to make
mathematical plots, then Gnuplot26 can save in any format.
30
31
http://svn.ghostscript.com/ghostscript/trunk/gs/doc/Ps2pdf.
htm
to crop final PDF.
$ ps2pdf -dEPSCrop foo.eps
or try using ps2pdf31 utility
$ epstopdf --gsopt=-dEPSCrop foo.eps
If epstopdf30 produces whole page with your small graphics somewhere on it,
use
$ for i in *.eps; do epstopdf "$i"; done
In Bash this can be done by:
32
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ImageMagick
convert -alpha off input.png output.png
Acrobat Reader sometimes has problems with displaying colors correctly if

you include graphics in PNG format with alpha channel. You can solve this
problem by dropping the alpha channel. On Linux it can be achieved with
convert from the ImageMagick32 program:
which specifies the files to include in the document, if files with the same
basename exist, but with different extensions.
\DeclareGraphicsExtensions{.pdf,.png,.jpg}
Images can be saved in multiple formats for different purposes. For example,
a directory can have "diagram.pdf" for high-resolution printing, while
"diagram.png" can be used for previewing on the monitor. You can specify
which image file is to be used by pdflatex through the preamble command:
width=xx
Specify the preferred width of
NB. Only
As you should hopefully be aware by now, arguments in square brackets are

optional, whereas arguments in curly braces are compulsory. The argument
in the curly braces is the name of the image. Write it without the extension.
This way the LaTeX compiler will look for any supported image format in that
directory and will take the best one (EPS if the output is DVI; JPEG, PNG or
PDF if the output is PDF). The variety of possible attributes that can be set is
fairly large, so only the most common are covered below:
\includegraphics[attr1=val1, attr2=val2, ..., attrn=valn]{imagename}
Now that we have seen which formats we can include and how we could
manage those formats, it's time to learn how to include them in our document.
After you have loaded the graphicx package in your preamble, you can
include images with \includegraphics, whose syntax is the following:
11.1.3. Including graphics
Specify the preferred height of

the imported image to xx.
keepaspectratio
This can be set to either true or false. When true,
it will scale the image according to both height and
width, but will not distort the image, so that neither
width nor height are exceeded.
scale=xx
Scales the image by the desired scale factor. e.g, 0.5
to reduce by half, or 2 to double.
angle=xx
This option can rotate the image by xx degrees
(counter-clockwise)
trim=l b r
This option will crop the imported image by l from
t
the left, b from the bottom, r from the right, and t
from the top. Where l, b, r and t are lengths.
clip
For the trim option to work, you must set
clip=true.
height=xx
If the image file is a pdf file with multiple pages,

this parameter allows you to use a different page
than the first.
33
Also note that the trim option does not work with XeLaTex.
Included graphics will be inserted just there, where you placed the code, and
the compiler will handle them as "big boxes". As we will see in the next
section33 , this can disrupt the layout; you'll probably want to place graphics
inside floating objects.
In order to use more than one option at a time, simply separate each with a
comma. The order you give the options matters. E.g you should first rotate
your graphic (with angle) and then specify its width.
page=x
This simply imports the image, without any other processing. However, it is
very large (so I won't display it here!). So, let's scale it down:
\includegraphics{chick}
OK, it's time to see graphicx in action. Here are some examples:
11.1.4. Examples
\includegraphics*[100,100][300,300]{mypicture}
The star version of the command will work for .eps files only. For a more
portable solution, the standard way should take precedence. The star command
will take the crop dimension as extra parameter:
Figure 39
This has now reduced it by half. If you wish to be more specific and give actual
lengths of the image dimensions, this is how to go about it:
\includegraphics[scale=0.5]{chick}
One can also specify the scale with respect to the width of a line in the local
environment (\linewidth), the width of the text on a page (\textwidth)
or the height of the text on a page (\textheight) (pictures not shown):
Figure 40
\includegraphics[width=2.5cm]{chick}
To rotate (I also scaled the image down):
\includegraphics[height=\textheight]{chick}
\includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{chick}
\includegraphics[width=\linewidth]{chick}
And finally, an example of how to crop an image should you wish to focus on
one particular area of interest:
Figure 41
\includegraphics[scale=0.5, angle=180]{chick}
As you may have noticed, the file name of the picture is always without the
extension: LaTeX will take care of getting the right version for us. Consider
Trick: You can also use negative trim values to add blank space to your
graphics, in cases where you need some manual alignment.
Note the presence of clip, as the trim operation will not work without it.
Figure 42
%trim option's parameter order: left bottom right top

\includegraphics[trim = 10mm 80mm 20mm 5mm, clip, width=3cm]{chick}
\setlength\fboxsep{0pt}
\setlength\fboxrule{0.5pt}
\fbox{\includegraphics{chick}}
It is possible to have LaTeX create a border around your image by using fbox:
11.1.5. Borders
the following situation: you have added some pictures to your document in
JPG and you have successfully compiled it in PDF. Now you want to compile
it in DVI, you run latex and you get a lot of errors... because you forgot to
provide the EPS versions of the pictures you want to insert. At the beginning
of this book, we had stated that the same LaTeX source can be compiled in
both DVI and PDF without any change. This is true, as long as you don't use
particular packages, and graphicx is one of those. In any case, you can
still use both compilers with documents with pictures as well, as long as you
always remember to provide the pictures in two formats (EPS and one of JPG,
PNG or PDF).
\graphicspath{{c:\mypict~1\camera}}
\graphicspath{{c:/mypict~1/camera/}} % works well in Win XP
\graphicspath{{/var/lib/images/}}
There is a way to tell LaTeX where to look for images: for example, it can be
useful if you store images centrally for use in many different documents. The
answer is in the command \graphicspath which you supply with an argument giving the name of an additional directory path you want searched when
a file uses the \includegraphics command, here are some examples
(trailing / is required):
11.1.6. Graphics storage
You can control the border padding with the \setlength\fboxsep{0pt}

command, in this case I set it to 0pt to avoid any padding, so the border will be
placed tightly around the image. You can control the thickness of the border
by adjusting the \setlength\fboxrule{0.5pt} command.
35
34
http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/
graphics/grfguide.pdf.
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/grffile
As you may have noticed, in the first example I've used the "safe" (MS-DOS)
form of the Windows MyPictures folder because it's a bad idea to use directory
names containing spaces. Using absolute paths, \graphicspath does make
your file less portable, while using relative paths (like the last example), you
shouldn't have any problem with portability, but remember not to use spaces in
file-names. Alternatively, if you are using PDFLaTeX, you can use the package
grffile35 which will then allow you to use spaces in file names.
Please see http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfgu

In the last example shown you would have a directory named "images" in the
same directory as your main tex file, i.e. this is RELATIVE addressing.
\graphicspath{{images_folder/}{other_folder/}{third_folder/}}
\graphicspath{{./images/}}
\begin{figure}[htb]
There are many scenarios where you might want to accompany an image
with a caption and possibly a cross-reference. This is done using the figure
environment. The following code sample shows the bare minimum required to
use an image as a figure.
11.1.7. Images as Figures
before running latex/pdflatex or your TeX-IDE. (But this, of course, is not a

portable method.)
export TEXINPUTS=./images//:./Snapshots//
Note that you cannot make the graphicx package search directories recursively.
Under Linux/Unix, you can achieve a recursive search using the environment
variable TEXINPUTS, e.g., by setting it to
36
The figure environment is not exclusively used for images. More information
on the figure environment and how to use it can be found in Floats, Figures
and Captions36 .
\begin{figure}[htb]
\centering
\includegraphics[width=0.8\textwidth]{image.png}
\caption{Awesome Image}
\label{fig:awesome_image}
\end{figure}
The above code extract is relatively trivial, and doesn't offer much functionality.
The following code sample shows an extended use of the figure environment
which is almost universally useful, offering a caption and label, centering the
image and scaling it to 80% of the width of the text.
\includegraphics{image.png}
\end{figure}
Placement
There are overall eight possible positioning targets:
% content section
\begin{wrapfigure}{r}{8cm} % "placement and width parameter for the
width of the image space.
\centering
\includegraphics[height=80mm]{Abb/bluesniper.jpg}
\caption{Selbstgebaute Bluesniper um Bluetooth-Gerte aus ber 1 km
Entfernung anzugreifen. (Stand: 2004)}
\label{bluesniper}
\end{wrapfigure}
%import section
\usepackage{wrapfig}
Text can also be wrapped around images. (This is especially useful if you
include tall pictures.)
11.1.8. Text Wrapping around Images
right side of the text

left side of the text
inside edgenear
the binding (in a
twoside document)
outside edgefar
from the binding
37
http://ftp.univie.ac.at/packages/tex/macros/latex/contrib/
wrapfig/wrapfig-doc.pdf
The uppercase-character allows the figure to float, while the lowercase version
means "exactly here". 37
R
L
I
r
l
i
38
pdfpages
final: Inserts pages. This is the default.

draft: Does not insert pages, but prints a box and the filename instead.
Options:
\usepackage[ options ]{pdfpages}
Package Options
There is a great package for including full pages of PDF files: pdfpages38 .
It is capable of inserting full pages as is and more pages per one page in any
layout (e.g. 2x3).
11.1.9. Including full PDF pages
Options for key=val (A comma separated list of options using the key = value
syntax)
\includepdf[ key=val ]{ filename }
includepdf
Commands
enable-survey: Activates survey functionalities. (experimental, subject to

change)
pages
will insert page 3, an empty page,

and pages 8, 9, 10, 11, and 15.
Actually not only links but all
kinds of PDF annotations will
get lost. Page ranges are specified
by the following syntax: m - n.
This selects all pages from m to
n. Omitting m defaults to the first
pages={3,{},8-11,15}
Selects pages to insert. The argument is a comma separated

list, containing page numbers
(pages={3,5,6,8}), ranges of page
numbers (pages={4-9}) or any
combination. To insert empty
pages use {}. E.g.:
angle
angle=90
You can use the angle-option for

turning the included page, for exampe for turning a landscape document when the latex-document is
portrait. E.g.:
addtolist
page number : Page number of the

inserted page.
type: Name of a floating environment. (figure, table, etc.)
heading: Title inserted into LoF,
LoT, etc.
label: Name of the label. This
label can be referred to with \ref
and \pageref.
Like addtotoc, addtolist accepts
addtolist={ page number , type , he
Adds an entry to the list of figures,

the list of tables, or any other list
(e.g. from float.sty). This option
requires four arguments, separated
by commas:
pagecommand={\label{fig:mylabel}}
Declares LaTeX-commands,
which are executed on each sheet
of paper. (Default: pagecommand={\thispagestyle{empty}}
Several PDFs can be placed table-like on one page.
Layout
\includepdfmerge[ key=val ]{ file-page-list }
includepdfmerge
Inserts pages of several external PDF documents.
pagecommand
40
39
pdfpages/pdfpages.pdf
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/LaTeX%2FPGF%2FTikZ
% This needs \usepackage{tikz} in the preamble

\begin{figure}
You can draw graphics directly with TeX commands using the tikz package:
http://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/entries/pgf.html It comes with
very good documentation with many examples.
More thorough introduction to TikZ is available at the PGF/TikZ40 chapter
11.2.1. TikZ/PGF
11.2. Creating Vector Graphics
See more information in its documentation39 .
of
examples
can
be
found
here:
Further packages which are based on TikZ (e.g.

for drawing
electrical circuits), can be found here:
http://ftp.dante.de/texarchive/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html#pgftikzsection
An extensive collection
http://www.texample.net/tikz/
\centering
\begin{tikzpicture}
\draw[thick,rounded corners=8pt]
(0,0) -- (0,2) -- (1,3.25) -- (2,2) -- (2,0) -- (0,2) -- (2,2) -(0,0) -- (2,0);
\end{tikzpicture}
\caption{This is the caption of my figure}
\label{fig:test}
\end{figure}
41
\begin{figure}
\centering
\input{./xfig/test.pstex_t}
\caption{This is the caption of my figure}
\label{fig:test}
\end{figure}
Vector graphics can be created using the vector painting program Xfig (see
Installation41 ), and exported for LaTeX. In Xfig, once your graphic is saved as
a file test.fig, you need to export it using the File > Export drop down
menu from the main Xfig window and then select the "Combined PS/Latex
(both parts)" in the language drop down list. If you don't change any other
settings, two files will be created in the same directory as the test.fig file,
such as: test.pstex_t and test.pstex. The figure can then be placed
in a LaTeX document:
11.2.2. Xfig
42
43
44
45
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ipe%20%28program%29
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/LaTeX
http://www.inkscape.org/
http://www.w3.org/Graphics/SVG/
Another program for creating vector graphics is Inkscape44 . It works with

Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG)45 files, although it can export to many formats
11.2.4. Inkscape
The Ipe42 extensible drawing editor is a free vector graphics editor for creating
figures in PDF or EPS format. Unlike Xfig, Ipe represents LaTeX43 fonts in
their correct size on the screen which makes it easier to place text labels at
the right spot. Ipe also has various snapping modes (for example, snapping to
points, lines, or intersections) that can be used for geometric constructions.
11.2.3. Ipe
46
47
48
http://www.pstoedit.net/
To properly edit an EPS file, you can convert it to an editable format using
pstoedit48 . For instance, to get an Xfig-editable file, do:
As described above, graphics content can be imported into LaTeX47 from

outside programs as EPS files. But sometimes you want to edit or retouch
these graphics files. An EPS file can be edited with any text editor since it
is formatted as ASCII. In a text editor, you can achieve simple operations
like replacing strings or moving items slightly, but anything further becomes
cumbersome.
11.2.5. Editing EPS graphics
that can be included in LaTeX46 files, such as EPS and PDF. From version
0.48, there is a combined PDF/EPS/PS+LaTeX output option, like XFig has.
49
http://linuxcommand.org/man_pages/eps2eps1.html
When all of the above fails, one can simplify the EPS file before attempting
other conversions, by using the eps2eps49 tool (also see next section):
$ epstopdf input.eps
$ inkscape input.pdf
Sometimes pstoedit fails to create the target format (for example when the
EPS file contains clipping information). A more robust way to edit EPS files
is achieved by converting it first to PDF and then importing the resulting
PDF in Inkscape. Inkscape uses the Cairo library that achieves a high-quality
transformation of the original EPS figure:
$ pstoedit -f plot-svg input.eps output.svg
And to get an SVG file for Inkscape you can do:
$ pstoedit -f fig input.eps output.fig
50
51
52
http://linuxcommand.org/man_pages/eps2eps1.html
http://ghostscript.com/
http://www.pa.op.dlr.de/~PatrickJoeckel/pscol/index.html
Sometimes color EPS figures need to be converted to black-and-white or

grayscale to meet publication requirements. This can be achieved with the
eps2eps50 of the Ghostscript51 package and http://www.pa.op.dlr.de/ PatrickJoeckel/pscol/index.html52 programs:
11.2.6. Converting a color EPS to grayscale
This will convert all the fonts to pre-drawn images, which is sometimes desirable when submitting manuscripts for publication. However, on the downside,
the fonts are NOT converted to lines, but instead to bitmaps, which reduces
the quality of the fonts.
$ eps2eps input.eps input-e2.eps
11.3. References
$ eps2eps input.eps input-e2.eps

$ pscol -0gray input-e2.eps input-gray.eps
In the Importing Graphics1 chapter, you learned that you can import or link
graphics into LaTeX, such as graphics that you have created in another program
or obtained elsewhere. In this chapter, you will learn how to create or embed
graphics directly in a LaTeX document. The graphics is marked up using
commands similar to those for typesetting bold text or creating mathematical
formulas, as the following example of embedded graphics shows:
12. Creating Graphics
2
3
4
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/LaTeX%2FPicture
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/LaTeX%2FXy-pic
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/LaTeX%2FPGF%2FTikZ
There are several packages supporting the creation of graphics directly in

LaTeX, including picture2 , xy-Pic3 and PGF/TikZ4 , described in the
following sections.
Figure 43
\begin{displaymath}
\xymatrix{ \bullet \ar[r] \ar@{.>}[r] & \bullet }
\end{displaymath}
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/catenary
Although programming pictures directly in LaTeX is severely restricted, and

often rather tiresome, there are still reasons for doing so. The documents thus
The picture environment allows programming pictures directly in LaTeX.

On the one hand, there are rather severe constraints, as the slopes of line
segments as well as the radii of circles are restricted to a narrow choice
of values. On the other hand, the picture environment of LaTeX2e brings
with it the \qbezier command, "q" meaning quadratic. Many frequentlyused curves such as circles, ellipses, and catenaries5 can be satisfactorily
approximated by quadratic Bzier curves, although this may require some
mathematical toil. If a programming language like Java is used to generate
\qbezier blocks of LaTeX input files, the picture environment becomes
quite powerful.
12.1. Overview
In addition, numerous packages have been written for specific purposes. One
of them is XY-pic, described at the end of this chapter. A wide variety of these
packages are described in detail in The LaTeX Graphics Companion (not to be
confused with The LaTeX Companion).
While the former two packages just enhance the picture environment, the
pstricks package has its own drawing environment, pspicture. The
power of pstricks stems from the fact that this package makes extensive use
of PostScript possibilities. Unfortunately it has one big shortcoming: it doesn't
work together with pdfLaTeX, as such to generate a PDF document form TeX
source you have to go TeXDVIPDF; losing hyperlinks, metadata and
microtypographic features of pdflatex.
Packages like epic, eepic or pstricks enhance the original picture

environment, and greatly strengthen the graphical power of LaTeX.
produced are "small" with respect to bytes, and there are no additional graphics
files to be dragged along.
6
7
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/MetaPost
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/METAFONT
The last but certainly not least is the PGF/TikZ system. While the previous
systems (picture, epic, pstricks or metapost) focus on the how to
draw, TikZ focuses more on the what to draw. One could say that TikZ is to
drawing in LaTeX as LaTeX is to digital typesetting. It's recommended to use
it if your LaTeX distribution includes it.
Perhaps the most powerful graphical tool related with LaTeX is MetaPost6 ,
the twin of Donald E. Knuths METAFONT7 . MetaPost has the very powerful and mathematically sophisticated programming language of METAFONT.
Contrary to METAFONT, which generates bitmaps, MetaPost generates encapsulated PostScript files, which can be imported in LaTeX. For an introduction,
see A Users Manual for MetaPost. A very thorough discussion of LaTeX and
TEX strategies for graphics (and fonts) can be found in TEX Unbound.
The easiest solution is to use the picture environment and then simply use the
"put" command to put a graphics file inside the picture, along with any other
desired LaTeX element. For example:
In many cases, especially for more advanced diagrams, it may be easier to

draw the graphics using external vector graphics software, and then import the
file into the document (see ../Importing Graphics8 ). However most software
does not support LaTeX fonts or mathematical notation, which can result in not
suitable and inconsistent graphics. There are several solutions to this problem.
12.2. Alternatives
9
10
11

http://pav.iki.fi/software/textext/
http://www.inkscape.org/
Another solution is to use textext10 , a plug-in for Inkscape11 which allows

one to insert small LaTeX objects into .SVG images. These images can then
Note that the border around the picture in the above example was added by
using \fbox9 , so the contents of the border is the picture as generated by the
above code.
Figure 44
\setlength{\unitlength}{0.8cm}
\begin{picture}(6,5)
\put(3.5,0.4){$\displaystyle
s:=\frac{a+b+c}{2}$}
\put(1,1){\includegraphics[
width=2cm,height=2cm]{picture.eps}}
\end{picture}
12
13
14
http://www.math.uni-leipzig.de/~matveyev/lpic/
http://www.xfig.org
http://www.macports.org
An option that allows significantly more flexibility while creating graphics

that are consistent with LaTeX is to use xfig13 . xfig is a drawing program,
which allows exports into various formats from which it's possible to import
into LaTeX. While the software is designed for Linux, it can be run using
Macports14 for Macs and under any X-Window System for Windows.
12.2.1. Using xfig to create pictures
Yet another solution is provided by lpic12 , which allows TeX annotations to

imported graphics.
be saved as .EPS (or .PDF) files which may then be imported into the LaTeX
document proper.
1. Create the drawing in xfig. Wherever you need LaTeX text, such as
a mathematical formula, enter a LaTeX string in a textbox. Use the
Edit tool to open the properties of each of those textboxes, and change
the option on the "Special Flag" field to Special. This tells LaTeX to
interpret these textboxes when it opens the figure.
2. Go to File -> Export and export the file as PDF/LaTeX (both parts) or
PS/LaTeX (both parts), depending on whether you are using pdflatex or
pslatex to compile your file. In your LaTeX document, where the picture
should be, use the following, where "test" is replaced by the name of the
image:
Exporting a file as PDF/LaTeX or PS/LaTeX, on the other hand, offers a good

deal more flexibility in drawing. Here's how it's done:
There are many ways to use xfig to create graphics for LaTeX documents. One
method is to export the drawing as a LaTeX document. This method, however,
suffers from various drawbacks: lines can be drawn only at angles that are
multiples of 30 and 45 degrees, lines with arrows can only be drawn at angles
that are multiples of 45 degrees, several curves are not supported, etc.
And you're done!
\usepackage{color}
Observe that this is just like including a picture, except that rather than
using \includegraphics, we use \input. If the export was into
PS/LaTeX, the file extension to include would be .pstex_t instead of
.pdf_t.
3. Make sure to include packages graphicx and color in the file, with
the usepackage command right below the documentclass command, like this:
\begin{figure}[htbp]
\centering
\input{test.pdf_t}
\caption{Your figure}
\label{figure:example}
\end{figure}
15
16
http://www-epb.lbl.gov/xfig/latex_and_xfig.html
http://www-epb.lbl.gov/xfig/contents.html
For more details on using xfig with LaTeX, this chapter15 of the xfig User
Manual16 may prove helpful.
The previous1 chapter introduced importing graphics. However, just having a

picture stuck in between paragraphs does not look professional. For starters,
we want a way of adding captions, and to be able to cross-reference. What we
need is a way of defining figures. It would also be good if LaTeX could apply
principles similar to when it arranges text to look its best to arranging pictures
as well. This is where floats come into play.
13. Floats, Figures and Captions
Floats are not part of the normal stream of text, but separate entities, positioned
in a part of the page to themselves (top, middle, bottom, left, right, or wherever
the designer specifies). They always have a caption describing them and they
are always numbered so they can be referred to from elsewhere in the text.
LaTeX automatically floats Tables and Figures, depending on how much space
is left on the page at the point that they are processed. If there is not enough
room on the current page, the float is moved to the top of the next page. This
can be changed by moving the Table or Figure definition to an earlier or
Floats are containers for things in a document that cannot be broken over a
page. LaTeX by default recognizes "table" and "figure" floats, but you can
define new ones of your own (see Custom Floats2 below). Floats are there to
deal with the problem of the object that won't fit on the present page, and to
help when you really don't want the object here just now.
13.1. Floats
\begin{figure}[placement specifier]
... figure contents ...
\end{figure}
To create a figure that floats, use the figure environment.
13.1.1. Figures
Authors sometimes have many floats occurring in rapid succession, which

raises the problem of how they are supposed to fit on the page and still leave
room for text. In this case, LaTeX stacks them all up and prints them together
if possible, or leaves them to the end of the chapter in protest. The skill is to
space them out within your text so that they intrude neither on the thread of
your argument or discussion, nor on the visual balance of the typeset pages.
later point in the text, or by adjusting some of the parameters which control
automatic floating.
t
b
p
Specifier
h
Permission
Place the float here, i.e., approximately at the same point it occurs
in the source text (however, not
exactly at the spot)
Position at the top of the page.
Position at the bottom of the page.
Put on a special page for floats
only.
The previous section mentioned how floats are used to allow LaTeX to handle
figures, while maintaining the best possible presentation. However, there may
be times when you disagree, and a typical example is with its positioning of
figures. The placement specifier parameter exists as a compromise, and its
purpose is to give the author a greater degree of control over where certain
floats are placed.
Permission
Override internal parameters LaTeX uses for determining "good"
float positions.
Places the float at precisely the
location in the LaTeX code. Requires the float package,3 e.g.,
\usepackage{float}. This is
somewhat equivalent to h!.
float/
What you do with these placement permissions is to list which of the options
you wish to make available to LaTeX. These are simply possibilities, and
LaTeX will decide when typesetting your document which of your supplied
specifiers it thinks is best.
Specifier
!
The border will not include the caption.
\usepackage{float}
\floatstyle{boxed}
\restylefloat{figure}
It's possible to get a thin border around all figures. You have to write the
following once at the beginning of the document:
13.1.2. Figures with borders
Use \listoffigures to add a list of the figures in the beginning of the document. To change the name used in the caption from Figure to Example, use
\renewcommand{\figurename}{Example} in the figure contents.
Use \listoftables to add a list of the tables in the beginning of the

document.
You may feel that it is a bit long winded, but such distinctions are necessary,
because you may not want all tables to be treated as a float.
\begin{table}
\begin{tabular}{...}
... table data ...
\end{tabular}
\end{table}
Although tables have already been covered4 , it was only the internal syntax
that was discussed. The tabular environment that was used to construct the
tables is not a float by default. Therefore, for tables you wish to float, wrap the
tabular environment within a table environment, like this:
13.1.3. Tables
5
6
http://ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/placeins
http://www.ctan.org/pkg/endfloat
The placeins5 package provides the command \FloatBarrier, which can

be used to prevent floats from being moved over it. This can, e.g., be useful at
the beginning of each section. The package even provides an option to change
the definition of \section to automatically include a \FloatBarrier.
This can be set by loading the package with the option [section]
(\usepackage[section]{placeins}). \FloatBarrier may also
be useful to prevent floats intruding on lists created using itemize or
enumerate. The flafter package can be used to force floats to appear
after they are defined, and the endfloat6 package can be used to place all floats
at the end of a document.
13.1.4. Keeping floats in their place
The location of the caption is traditionally underneath the float. However, it

is up to you to therefore insert the caption command after the actual contents
of the float (but still within the environment). If you place it before, then
the caption will appear above the float. Try out the following example to
demonstrate this effect:
It is always good practice to add a caption to any figure or table. Fortunately,

this is very simple in LaTeX. All you need to do is use the \caption{text}
command within the float environment. Because of how LaTeX deals sensibly
with logical structure, it will automatically keep track of the numbering of
figures, so you do not need to include this within the caption text.
13.2. Captions
\begin{table}[h!]
\begin{figure}[h!]
Figure 45
\centering
\reflectbox{%
\includegraphics[width=0.5\textwidth]{gull}}
\caption{A picture of the same gull
looking the other way!}
\end{figure}
\begin{figure}[h!]
\caption{A picture of a gull.}
\centering
\includegraphics[width=0.5\textwidth]{gull}
\end{figure}
\begin{document}
\documentclass[a4paper,12pt]{article}
The \caption command also has an optional parameter,

\caption[short]{long} which is used for the List of Tables or
List of Figures. Typically the short description is for the caption listing,
and the long description will be placed beside the figure or table. This is
particularly useful if the caption is long, and only a "one-liner" is desired in
the figure/table listing. Here is an example of this usage:
Captions can be listed at the beginning of a paper or report in a "List of

Tables" or a "List of Figures" section by using the \listoftables or
\listoffigures commands, respectively. The caption used for each figure
will appear in these lists, along with the figure numbers, and page numbers
that they appear on.
13.2.1. Lists of figures and tables
note that the command \reflectbox{...} flips its content horizontally.
\end{document}
\begin{figure}[hb]
\centering
\includegraphics[width=4in]{gecko}
\caption[Close up of \textit{Hemidactylus} sp.]
Figure
{Close up of \textit{Hemidactylus}
sp.,46
which is
part the genus of the gecko family. It is the
second most speciose genus in the family.}
\end{figure}
\section{Introduction}
\listoffigures
\begin{document}
\documentclass[12pt]{article}
It is sometimes desirable to have a caption appear on the side of a float, rather

than above or below. The sidecap package can be used to place a caption
beside a figure or table. The following example demonstrates this for a figure
by using a SCfigure environment in place of the figure environment.
13.2.2. Side captions
\end{document}
\begin{SCfigure}
\centering
\includegraphics[width=0.5\textwidth]%
{Giraff_picture}% picture filename
\caption{ ... caption text ... } Figure
\end{SCfigure}
\begin{document}
\usepackage{sidecap}
47
Warning: If you want to label a figure so that you can reference it later, you
have to add the label after the caption (inside seems to work in LaTeX 2e)
but inside the floating environment. If it is declared outside, it will give the
section number. If the label picks up the section or list number instead of the
figure number, put the label inside the caption to ensure correct numbering. If
you get an error when the label is inside the caption, use \protect infront
of the \label command.
Labels and cross-references work fairly similarly to the general case - see the
Labels and Cross-referencing7 section for more information.
13.2.3. Labels and Cross-referencing
A word of warning: Wrapping figures in LaTex will require a lot of manual

adjustment of your document. There are several packages available for the
task, but none of them work perfectly. Before you make the choice of including
figures with text wrapping in your document, make sure you have considered
all the options. For example, you could use a layout with two columns for your
documents and have no text-wrapping at all.
Although not normally the case in academic writing, an author may prefer
that some floats do not break the flow of text, but instead allow text to wrap
around it. (Obviously, this effect only looks decent when the figure in question
is significantly narrower than the text width.)
13.2.4. Wrapping text around figures
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/LaTeX/Packages/Installing_
Extra_Packages
Alignment can normally be either l for left, or r for right. Lowercase l or r

forces the figure to start precisely where specified (and may cause it to run over
page breaks), while capital L or R allows the figure to float. If you defined your
document as twosided, the alignment can also be i for inside or o for outside,
as well as I or O. The width is, of course, the width of the figure. An example:
\begin{wrapfigure}[lineheight]{alignment}{width}
This then gives you access to:
\usepackage{wrapfig}
To use wrapfig, you must first add this to the preamble:
Anyway, we will look at the package wrapfig. (Note: wrapfig may not come
with the default installation of LaTeX; you might need to install additional
packages manually8 .)
Note that we have specified a size for both the wrapfigure environment
and the image we have included. We did it in terms of the text width: it is
always better to use relative sizes in LaTeX, let LaTeX do the work for you!
The "wrap" is slightly bigger than the picture, so the compiler will not return
any strange warning and you will have a small white frame between the image
Figure 48
\begin{wrapfigure}{r}{0.5\textwidth}
\begin{center}
\end{center}
\caption{A gull}
\end{wrapfigure}
It happens that you'll generate figures with too much (or too little) white space
on the top or bottom. In such a case, you can simply make use of the optional
argument [lineheight]. It specifies the height of the figure in number of
lines of text. Also remember that the environment center adds some extra
white space at its top and bottom; consider using the command \centering
instead.
13.2.5. Tip for figures with too much white space
The wrapfig package can also be used with user-defined floats with float
package. See below in the section on custom floats9 .
and the surrounding text. You can change it to get a better result, but if you
don't keep the image smaller than the "wrap", you will see the image over the
text.
Another possibility is adding space within the float using the \vspace{...}
command. The argument is the size of the space you want to add, you can
use any unit you want, including pt, mm, in, etc. If you provide a negative
argument, it will add a negative space, thus removing some white space.
Using \vspace tends to move the caption relative to the float while the
[lineheight] argument does not. Here is an example using the \vspace
command, the code is exactly the one of the previous case, we just added some
negative vertical spaces to shrink everything up:
In this case it may look too shrunk, but you can manage spaces the way you like.
In general, it is best not to add any space at all: let LaTeX do the formatting
work!
Figure 49 336
\begin{wrapfigure}{r}{0.5\textwidth}
\vspace{-20pt}
\begin{center}
\end{center}
\vspace{-20pt}
\caption{A gull}
\vspace{-10pt}
\end{wrapfigure}
11
10
http://tug.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/
floatflt/
floatflt/floatflt.pdf
There is also an alternative to wrapfig: the package floatflt

http://tug.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/floatflt/10
for
documentation
see
http://www.ctan.org/tex11
archive/macros/latex/contrib/floatflt/floatflt.pdf .
Alternatively you might use the picins package instead of the wrapfigure
package which produces a correct version without the excess white space out
of the box without any hand tuning.
(In this case, the problem is the use of \begin{center} to center the
image. The center environment adds extra space that can be avoided if
\centering is used instead.)
\begin{figure}
\begin{subfigure}[b]{0.3\textwidth}
\centering
\includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{gull}
\caption{A gull}
\label{fig:gull}
\end{subfigure}%
\usepackage{caption}
\usepackage{subcaption}
A useful extension is the subcaption package [ftp://ftp.dante.de/texarchive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/subcaption.pdf] (the subfigure and

subfig packages are deprecated and shouldn't be used any more), which
uses subfloats within a single float. This gives the author the ability to have
subfigures within figures, or subtables within table floats. Subfloats have their
own caption, and an optional global caption. An example will best illustrate
the usage of this package:
13.2.6. Subfloats
%(or a blank line to force the subfigure onto a new line)

\centering
\includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{tiger}
\caption{A tiger}
\label{fig:tiger}
\end{subfigure}
~ %add desired spacing between images, e. g. ~, \quad, \qquad
~ %add desired spacing between images, e. g. ~, \quad, \qquad
%(or a blank line to force the subfigure onto a new line)

\centering
\includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{mouse}
\caption{A mouse}
\label{fig:mouse}
\end{subfigure}
\caption{Pictures of animals}\label{fig:animals}
\end{figure}
etc.
etc.
\begin{subfigure}[<placement specifier>]{<width>}
\centering
... figure or table ...
You will notice that the figure environment is set up as usual. You may also
use a table environment for subtables. For each subfloat, you need to use:
Figure 50
A non-breaking space (specified by as in the example above) can be used

to insert a space in between the subfigs.
Horizontal spaces between figures are controlled by one of several

commands, which are placed in between \begin{subfigure} and
\end{subfigure}:
subcaption will arrange the figures or tables side-by-side providing they

can fit, otherwise, it will automatically shift subfloats below. This effect can
be added manually, by putting the newline command (\\) before the figure
you wish to move to a newline.
If you intend to cross-reference any of the subfloats, see where the label is
inserted; \caption outside the subfigure-environment will provide the
global caption.
\caption{<sub caption>}
\end{subfigure}
12
If
you
are
writing
a
document
using
two
columns
(i.e.
you started your document with something like
\documentclass[twocolumn]{article}), you might have noticed that you can't use floating elements that are wider than the width of a
column (using a LaTeX notation, wider than 0.5\textwidth), otherwise
you will see the image overlapping with text. If you really have to use
such wide elements, the only solution is to use the "starred" variants of the
floating environments, that are {figure*} and {table*}. Those "starred"
versions work exactly like the standard ones, but they will be as wide as the
page, so you will get no overlapping.
13.2.7. Wide figures in two column documents
Math spaces12 : \qquad, \quad, \;, and \,

Generic space: \hspace{length}
Automatically expanding/contracting space: \hfill
13
http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=
2colfltorder
If tables and figures are not adequate for your needs, then you always have the
option to create your own! Examples of such instances could be source code
13.2.8. Custom Floats
To prevent the figures from being placed out-of-order with respect to their
"non-starred" counterparts, the package fixltx2e 13 should be used (e.g.
\usepackage{fixltx2e}).
A bad point of those environments is that they can be placed only at the top of
the page or on their own page. If you try to specify their position using modifiers like b or h they will be ignored. Add \usepackage{dblfloatfix}
to the preamble in order to alleviate this problem with regard to placing these
floats at the bottom of a page, using the optional specifier [b]. Default is
[tbp]. However, h still does not work.
14
1. Add \usepackage{float} to the preamble of your document

2. Declare your new float using: \newfloat{type}{placement}{e
counter], where:
type - the new name you wish to call your float, in this instance,
'program'.
placement - t, b, p, or h (as previously described in Placement14 ),
where letters enumerate permitted placements.
ext - the file name extension of an auxiliary file for the list of figures
(or whatever). Latex writes the captions to this file.
outer counter - the presence of this parameter indicates that the counter
associated with this new float should depend on outer counter, for
example 'chapter'.
examples, or maps. For a program float example, one might therefore wish to
create a float named program. The package float is your friend for this
task. All commands to set up the new float must be placed in the preamble, and
not within the document.
An example document using a new program float type:
Float styles can also be customized as the second example below illustrates.
3. The default name that appears at the start of the caption is the type. If
you wish to alter this, use \floatname{type}{floatname}
4. Changing float style can be issued with \floatstyle{style}
(Works on all subsequent \newfloat commands, therefore, must
be inserted before \newfloat to be effective).
plain - the normal style for Latex floats, but the caption is always
below the content.
plaintop - the normal style for Latex floats, but the caption is
always above the content.
boxed - a box is drawn that surrounds the float, and the caption is
printed below.
ruled - the caption appears above the float, with rules immediately
above and below. Then the float contents, followed by a final horizontal rule.
\end{document}
class HelloWorldApp {
public static void main(String[] args) {
//Display the string
System.out.println("Hello World!");
}
}
\end{verbatim}
\caption{The Hello World! program in Java.}
\end{program}
\begin{program}
\begin{verbatim}
\begin{document}
\floatstyle{ruled}
\newfloat{program}{thp}{lop}
\floatname{program}{Program}
\usepackage{float}
15
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/LaTeX%2FPackages%2FListings
Newly created floats with newfloat can also be used in combination with the
wrapfig package from above. E.g. the following code creates a floating text
box, which floats in the text on the right side of the page and is complete with
caption, numbering, an index file with the extension .lob and a customization
of the float's visual layout:
While this is useful, one should be careful when embedding the float within
another float. In particular, the error not in outer par mode may
occur. One solution might be to use the [H] option (not any other) on the inner
float, as this option "pins" the inner float to the outer one.
The verbatim environment is an environment that is already part of Latex.

Although not introduced so far, its name is fairly intuitive! Latex will reproduce
everything you give it, including new lines, spaces, etc. It is good for source
code, but if you want to introduce a lot of code you might consider using the
listings15 package, that was made just for it.
% this code block defines the new and custom floatbox float
environment
\floatstyle{simplerule}
\newfloat{floatbox}{thp}{lob}[section]
% this creates a custom and simpler ruled box style

\newcommand\floatc@simplerule[2]{{\@fs@cfont #1 #2}\par}
\newcommand\f
s@simplerule{\def\@fs@cfont{\bfseries}\let\@fs@capt\floatc@simplerule
\def\@fs@pre{\hrule height.8pt depth0pt \kern4pt}%
\def\@fs@post{\kern4pt\hrule height.8pt depth0pt \kern4pt \relax}%
\def\@fs@mid{\kern8pt}%
\let\@fs@iftopcapt\iftrue}
%allows use of "@" before \begin{document}

\makeatletter
\usepackage{float}
% have hyperref package before float in order to get strange errors

with .\theHfloatbox
\usepackage[pdftex]{hyperref}
\end{document}
\begin{floatbox}{r}{}
\textit{Bootstrapping} is a resampling technique used
for robustly estimating statistical quantities, such as
the model fit $R^2$. It offers some protection against
the sampling bias.
\caption{Bootstrapping}
\end{floatbox}
\begin{document}
\floatname{floatbox}{Text Box}
17
16
http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/
caption-eng.pdf
http://www.komascript.de/
Alternatively, you can redefine the \thefigure command:
The KOMA script packages http://www.komascript.de/17 have their own caption customizing features with e.g. \captionabove, \captionformat
and \setcapwidth. However these definitions have limited effect on newly
created float environments with the wrapfig package.
\usepackage[font=small,labelfont=bf]{caption}
To change the appearance of captions, use the caption

http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf16
package. For example, to make all caption labels small and bold:
13.2.9. Caption Styles
18
19

http://www.math.uni-leipzig.de/~matveyev/lpic/
There is a LaTeX package lpic19 to put LaTeX on top of included graphics, thus
allowing to add TeX annotations to imported graphics. It defines a convenient
interface to put TeX over included graphics, and allows for drawing a white
background under the typeset material to overshadow the graphics. It is a
better alternative for labels inside of graphics; you do not have to change text
size when rescaling pictures, and all LaTeX power is available for labels.
13.3. Labels in the figures
See this page18 for more information on counters.
\renewcommand{\thefigure}{\arabic{section}.\arabic{figure}}
21
20
pinlabel.html
http://www.ctan.org/pkg/pgf
That concludes all the fundamentals of floats. You will hopefully see how
much easier it is to let Latex do all the hard work and tweak the page layouts
in order to get your figures in the best place. As always, the fact that LaTeX
takes care of all caption and reference numbering is a great time saver.
13.3.1. Summary
A much more complicated package which can be used in the same way is
tikz21 . tikz is a front-end to a drawing library called pgf (which is used to
make beamer). It can be used to label figures by adding text nodes on top of
an image node.
A very similar package, with somewhat different syntax, is pinlabel20 . The

link given also points to the packages psfrag and overpic.
13.4. References
The package hyperref provides LaTeX the ability to create hyperlinks

within the document. It works with pdflatex and also with standard "latex"
used with dvips and ghostscript or dvipdfm to build a PDF file. If you load it,
14.1. Hyperref
LaTeX enables typesetting of hyperlinks, useful when the resulting format

is PDF, and the hyperlinks can be followed. It does so using the package
hyperref.
14. Hyperlinks
\usepackage{hyperref}
The basic usage with the standard settings is straightforward. Just load the
package in the preamble, at the end of all the other packages but prior to other
settings:
14.2. Usage
you will have the possibility to include interactive external links and all your
internal references will be turned to hyperlinks. The compiler pdflatex makes it
possible to create PDF files directly from the LaTeX source, and PDF supports
more features than DVI. In particular PDF supports hyperlinks, and the only
way to introduce them in LaTeX is using hyperref. Moreover, PDF can
contain other information about a document such as the title, the author, etc.,
and you can edit those using this same package.
The package provides three useful commands for inserting links pointing
outside the document.
14.2.1. Commands
system (discussed in the chapter on Labels and Cross-referencing1 ); with

hyperref those "connections" will become links and you will be able to
click on them to be redirected to the right page. Moreover the table of contents,
list of figures/tables and index will be made of hyperlinks, too.
\ref
\label
This will automatically turn all your internal references into hyperlinks. It
won't affect the way to write your documents: just keep on using the standard
If the lemma labelled as "mainlemma" was number 4.1.1, then the outputted
text would be "we use lemma 4.1.1" with the hyperlink as expected.
for avoiding nested hyperlinks.
\ref
Note the * after
we use \hyperref[mainlemma]{lemma \ref*{mainlemma}}
but will make the text link text a full link, instead. The two can be combined,
for example in
\ref{label_name}
This will have the same effect as
\hyperref[label_name]{''link text''}
Usage:
\hyperref
It will show the string "description" using standard document font but, if you
click on it, your browser will be opened pointing at "my_url". Here is an
example:
\href{''my_url''}{''description''}
Usage:
\href
It will show the URL using a mono-spaced font and, if you click on it, your
browser will be opened pointing at it.
\url{''my_url''}
Usage:
\url
Apart from linking to websites discussed above, hyperref can be used to

provide mailto links, links to local files, and links to anywhere within the
PDF output file.
14.2.2. Other possibilities
will not be shown anywhere in the document.
\href
Both point at the same page, but in the first case the URL will be shown,
while in the second case the URL will be hidden. Note that, if you print your
document, the link stored using
\url{http://www.wikibooks.org}
\href{http://www.wikibooks.org}{wikibooks home}
Email link with hyperref, url packages 3 . . Retrieved
command is fragile and if the hyperlink is inside of a moving argument, it must

be preceeded by a
\nolinkurl
When using this form, note that the
\href{m
ailto:my_address@wikibooks.org}{\nolinkurl{my_address@wikibooks.org}}
it just shows your email address (so people can know it even if the document
is printed on paper) but, if the reader clicks on it, (s)he can easily send you
an email. Or, to incorporate the url package's formatting and line breaking
abilities into the displayed text, use2
\href{mailto:my_address@wikibooks.org}{my\_address@wikibooks.org}
A possible way to insert email links is by
Mail address
You can use relative paths to link documents near the location of your current
document; in order to do so, use the standard Unix-like notation (./ is the
current directory, ../ is the previous directory, etc.)
\url{run:/path/to/my/file.ext}
\href{run:/path/to/my/file.ext}{text displayed}
Files can also be linked using the url or the href commands. You simply have
to add the string run: at the beginning of the link string:
Local file
command.
\protect
The standard settings should be fine for most users, but if you want to change
something, you can easily do it. There are several variables you can change
and there are two methods to pass those to the package. You can pass the
options as an argument of the package when you load it (that's the standard
way packages work), or you can use the \hypersetup command:
14.3. Customization
\hypertarget{label}{link caption}
and
\hyperlink{label}{anchor caption}
It is also possible to create an anchor anywhere in the document (with or

without caption) and to link to it, with:
14.2.3. Hyperlink and Hypertarget
http://www.tug.org/applications/hyperref/manual.html#
x1-120003.8
Checkout 3.8 Big list at hyperref-manual at tug.org 4
Here is a list of the possible variables you can change (for the complete list,
see the official documentation). The default values are written in an upright
font:
\usepackage[''option1, option2'']{hyperref}
exactly the same format has to be used if you pass those options to the package
while loading it, like this:
variable_name=new_value
you can pass as many options as you want; separate them with a comma.
Options have to be in the form:
\hypersetup{''option1'' [, ...]}
values
=true,false
=false,true
variable
bookmarks
unicode
comment
show or hide the bookmarks bar when displaying the document
allows to use characters of non-Latin
based languages in
Acrobats bookmarks
variable
pdfborder
values
={RadiusH
RadiusV Width
[Dash-Pattern]}
comment
set the style of the border around a link. The
first two parameters
(RadiusH, RadiusV)
have no effect in most
pdf viewers. Width
defines the thickness
of the border. DashPattern is a series of
numbers separated by
space and enclosed
by box-brackets. It is
an optional parameter
to specify the length
of each line & gap in
the dash pattern. For
example, {0 0 0.5 [3
comment
show or hide Acrobats toolbar
=true,false
show or hide Acrobats menu
=true,false
resize document window to fit document
size
. width of the
={FitH},{FitV},etc
fit5the
page to the window
={text}
define the title that
gets displayed in the
"Document Info" window of Acrobat
values
=true,false
Other possible values are defined in the hyperref manual {http://mirror.switch.

ch/ftp/mirror/tex/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.
html#TBL-7-40-1}
pdftitle
pdfstartview
pdffitwindow
pdfmenubar
variable
pdftoolbar
values
={text}
={text}
={text}
={text}
={text}
variable
pdfauthor
pdfsubject
pdfcreator
pdfproducer
pdfkeywords
comment
the name of the PDFs
author, it works like
the one above
subject of the document, it works like the
one above
creator of the document, it works like the
one above
producer of the document, it works like the
one above
list of keywords, separated by brackets,
example below
values
(=true,false)
(=false,true)
variable
pdfnewwindow
pagebackref
comment
define if a new window should get
opened when a link
leads out of the current document
activate back references inside bibliography. Must be
specified as part of the
\usepackage{} statement.
linkcolor
hidelinks
variable
colorlinks
=red
values
(=false,true)
comment
surround the links by
color frames (false)
or colors the text of
the links (true). The
color of these links
can be configured
using the following
options (default colors
are shown):
hide links (removing
color and border)
color of internal links
(sections, pages, etc.)
urlbordercolor
citebordercolor
linkbordercolor
filecolor
urlcolor
citecolor
variable
linktoc
values
comment
=none,section,page,all
defines which part of
an entry in the table of
contents is made into
a link
=green
color of citation links
(bibliography)
=magenta
color of file links
=cyan
color of URL links
(mail, web)
={1 0 0}
color of frame around
internal links (if
colorlinks=false)
={0 1 0}
citations
={0 1 1}
URL links
\hypersetup{
bookmarks=true,
unicode=false,
bookmarks
pdftoolbar=true,
pdfmenubar=true,
pdffitwindow=false,
pdfstartview={FitH},
window
pdftitle={My title},
pdfauthor={Author},
pdfsubject={Subject},
pdfcreator={Creator},
show Acrobats toolbar?

show Acrobats menu?
window fit to page when opened
fits the width of the page to the
title
author
subject of the document
creator of the document
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
% show bookmarks bar?

% non-Latin characters in Acrobats
Please note, that explicite RGB specification is only allowed for the border
colors (like linkbordercolor etc.), while the others may only assigned to named
colors (which you can define your own, see Colors6 ). In order to speed up
your customization process, here is a list with the variables with their default
value. Copy it in your document and make the changes you want. Next to the
variables, there is a short explanations of their meaning:
or make links black:
\hypersetup{colorlinks=false}
If you don't need such a high customization, here are some smaller but useful
examples. When creating PDFs destined for printing, colored links are not a
good thing as they end up in gray in the final output, making it difficult to read.
You can use color frames, which are not printed:
pdfproducer={Producer}, % producer of the document

pdfkeywords={keyword1} {key2} {key3}, % list of keywords
pdfnewwindow=true,
% links in new window
colorlinks=false,
% false: boxed links; true: colored links
linkcolor=red,
% color of internal links
citecolor=green,
% color of links to bibliography
filecolor=magenta,
% color of file links
urlcolor=cyan
% color of external links
\urlstyle{same}
By default, URLs are printed using mono-spaced fonts. If you don't like it and
you want them to be printed with the same style of the rest of the text, you can
use this:
\usepackage[pdfauthor={Author's name},%
pdftitle={Document Title},%
pagebackref=true,%
pdftex]{hyperref}
When you just want to provide information for the Document Info section of
the PDF file, as well as enabling back references inside bibliography:
\hypersetup{
colorlinks,%
citecolor=black,%
filecolor=black,%
linkcolor=black,%
urlcolor=black
}
Beware that the shown line number is often completely different from the
erroneous line.
\begin{eqnarray*}a=b\end{eqnarray*}
The error disappears, if you use instead this form:
\begin{eqnarray}a=b\nonumber\end{eqnarray}
appear, when you have made something like
! pdfTeX warning (ext4): destination with the same identifier (name{

equation.1.7.7.30}) has been already used, duplicate ignored
Messages like the following
14.4. Problems with Links and Equations
provided by the book document class. It resets the page number counter to
1 prior to the first chapter of the book. But as the preface of the book also
has a page number 1 all links to "page 1" would not be unique anymore,
hence the notice that "duplicate has been ignored." The counter measure
\mainmatter
appear when a counter gets reinitialized, for example by using the command
! pdfTeX warning (ext4): destination with the same

identifier (name{page.1}) has been already used,
duplicate ignored
Messages like the following:
14.5. Problems with Links and Pages
Possible solution: Place the amsmath package before the hyperref package.
before the command
\pagenumbering{alph}
Another solution is to use
\pagenumbering{alph}
% a, b, c, ...
... titlepage, other front matter ...
\pagenumbering{roman}
% i, ii, iii, iv, ...
... table of contents, table of figures, ...
\pagenumbering{arabic} % 1, 2, 3, 4, ...
... beginning of the main matter (chapter 1) ...
command:
\pagenumbering
The best solution is to give each page a unique name by using the
consists of putting plainpages=false into the hyperref options. This

unfortunately only helps with the page counter. An even more radical solution
is to use the option hypertexnames=false, but this will cause the page
links in the index to stop working.
\setcounter{page}{-100}
... titlepage, other front matter ...
% i, ii, iii, iv, ...
Another more flexible approach is to set the counter to something negative:
. The important point is that although the numbers are not visible, each page
will have a unique name.
\pagestyle{empty} ... \pagestyle{plain}
If you don't want the page numbers to be visible (for example, during the front
matter part), use
By changing the page numbering every time before the counter is reset, each
page gets a unique name. In this case, the pages would be numbered a, b, c, i,
ii, iii, iv, v, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, ...
, which will give the title page the label page.a. Since the page number is
suppressed, it won't make a difference to the output.
\maketitle
commands.
\nonumber
(which is an unnumbered equation array), and remove the now unnecessary
\begin{eqnarray*} ... \end{eqnarray*}
on every line of an eqnarray environment. In this case, use the *'ed form
instead, e.g.
\nonumber
The problem occurs with equation identifiers if you use
The problem can also occur with the algorithms package: because each
algorithm uses the same line-numbering scheme, the line identifiers for the
second and follow-on algorithms will be duplicates of the first.
which will give the first pages a unique negative number.
... table of contents, table of figures, ...

\pagenumbering{arabic} % 1, 2, 3, 4, ...
... beginning of the main matter (chapter 1) ...
You can now work around this problem by providing a text string for the
bookmarks, which replaces the offending text:
Package hyperref Warning:

Token not allowed in a PDFDocEncoded string:
The text displayed by bookmarks does not always look like you expect it to
look. Because bookmarks are "just text", much fewer characters are available
for bookmarks than for normal LaTeX text. Hyperref will normally notice
such problems and put up a warning:
14.6. Problems with Bookmarks
If your url's are too long and running off of the page, try using the breakurl
package to split the url over multiple lines. This is especially important in a
multicolumn environment where the line width is greatly shortened.
gets ignored but its argument (red) gets printed. If you use:
\textcolor
produces the string "redRed!". The command
\section{\textcolor{red}{Red !}}
to E=mc2 in the bookmark area. Color changes also do not travel well into
bookmarks:
\section{$E=mc^2$}
which turns
\section{\texorpdfstring{$E=mc^2$}{E=mc2}}
Math expressions are a prime candidate for this kind of problem:
\texorpdfstring{''TEX text''}{''Bookmark Text''}
The links created by hyperref point to the label created within the
float environment, which, as previously described7 , must always be set
after the caption. Since the caption is usually below a figure or table,
14.7. Problems with tables and figures
\texorpdfstring
If you write your document in unicode and use the unicode option for the
hyperref package you can use unicode characters in bookmarks. This will
give you a much larger selection of characters to pick from when using
the result will be much more legible.
\section{\texorpdfstring{\textcolor{red}{Red !}}{Red\ !}}
10
hyperref/README
oberdiek/hypcap.pdf
in those environments, e.g.:
\capstart
Be sure to call this package after loading hyperref, which should otherwise
be loaded last.
If you use the wrapfig package mentioned in the "Wrapping text around
figures10 " section of the "Floats, Figures and Captions" chapter, or other similar
packages that define their own environments, you will need to manually include
\usepackage[all]{hypcap}
the figure or table itself will not be visible upon clicking the link8 . A
workaround exists by using the package hypcap http://www.ctan.org/texarchive/macros/latex/contrib/oberdiek/hypcap.pdf9 with:
with hyperref for long captions or long titles. This happens when the captions (or the titles) are longer than the page width (about 7-9 words depending
on your settings). To fix this, you need to use the option breaklinks when first
declaring:
\listoffigures
There is an issue when using
14.8. Problems with long caption and \listoffigures or

long title
\begin{wrapfigure}{R}{0.5\textwidth}
\capstart
\begin{center}
\includegraphics[width=0.48\textwidth]{filename}
\end{center}
\caption{\label{labelname}a figure}
\end{wrapfigure}
The format of some of the auxilliary files generated by latex changes when you
include the hyperref package. One can therefore encounter errors like
! Argument of \Hy@setref@link has an extra }. when
the document is typeset with hyperref for the first time and these files
already exist. The solution to the problem is to delete all the files that latex
uses to get references right and typeset again.
14.9. Problems with already existing .toc, .lof and

similar files
to word wrap properly.
\listoffigures
This will then cause the links in the
\usepackage[breaklinks]{hyperref}
11
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/LaTeX%2FFormatting%23Common_
problems_and_workarounds
\phantomsection\label{some_label}
instead of using
is broken when pointed at a label. Instead of sending the user to the desired
label, upon clicking the user will be sent to the first frame. A simple work
around exists;
\hyperref[some_label]{some text}
Using the command
14.11. Problems with Beamer
See the relevant section11 .
14.10. Problems with footnotes and special characters
14.12. References
\hyperlink{some_label}{some text}
and reference it with
\hypertarget{some_label}{}
to label your frames, use
Adding colors to your text is supported by the color package. Using this
package, you can set the color of the font of the text, and set the background
color of the page. You can use one of the predefined colors such as white, red,
or yellow, or you can define your own named colors. It's also possible to color
formulas in math-environments.
15. Colors
The \usepackage is obvious, but the initialization of additional commands like

usenames allows you to use names of the default colors, the same 16 base
colors as used in HTML. The dvipsnames allows you access to more colors,
another 64, and svgnames allows access to about 150 colors. The initialization
of "table" allows colors to be added to tables by placing the color command
just before the table. The package loaded here is the "xcolor" package.
\usepackage[usenames,dvipsnames,svgnames,table]{xcolor}
You may also want to add to the preamble after the previous line:
\usepackage{color}
To make use of these color features the color package must be inserted into the
preamble.
15.1. Adding the color package
{\color{declared-color} text}
Another possible way is by
\definecolor
where declared-color is a color that was defined before by
\textcolor{declared-color}{text}
The simplest way to type colored text is by:
15.2. Entering colored text
If you need more colors, then you may also want to look at adding the x11names
to the initialization section as well, this offers more than 300 colors, but you
need to make sure your xcolor package is the most recent you can download.
\texttt
is the same as that between
\color
and
\textcolor
The difference between
Figure 51
\emph{some black text, \color{red} followed by a red fragment}, going

black again.
that will switch the standard text color to the color you want. It will work until
the end of the current TeX group. For example:
There is also \fcolorbox to make framed background color in yet another color:
\colorbox{declared-color1}{\color{declared-color2}{text}}
If the background color and the text color is changed, then:
\colorbox{declared-color}{text}
15.3. Entering colored background for the text
\pagecolor{declared-color}
You can change the background color of the whole page by:
, you can use the one you prefer.
\ttfamily
and
If you would like a color not pre-defined, you can use one of the 68 dvips
colors, or define your own. These options are discussed in the following
sections
The predefined color names are white, black, red, green, blue,
cyan, magenta, yellow. There may be other pre-defined colors on
your system, but these should be available on all systems.
15.4. Predefined colors
\fcolorbox{declared-color-frame}{declared-color-background}{text}
Aquamarine
BlueGreen
Apricot
Blue
BlueViolet
Bittersweet
\usepackage[usenames,dvipsnames]{xcolor}
BrickRed
Black
Invoke the package with the usenames and dvipsnames option. If you are using
TikZ package you must declare the color package before that, otherwise it will
not work.
15.5. The 68 standard colors known to dvips
Emerald
DarkOrchid
ForestGreen
CornflowerBlue Cyan
Cerulean
CadetBlue
BurntOrange
Brown
Fuchsia
Dandelion
CarnationPink
Gray
Lavender
Maroon
Goldenrod
JungleGreen
Mahogany
Melon
LimeGreen
Green
MidnightBlue
Magenta
GreenYellow
NavyBlue
Orchid
Plum
Mulberry
OrangeRed
PineGreen
ProcessBlue
Peach
OliveGreen
Purple
Periwinkle
Orange
Red
RoyalBlue
SeaGreen
RawSienna
Rhodamine
Salmon
Sepia
RoyalPurple
RedOrange
SkyBlue
RubineRed
RedViolet
Violet
Turquoise
WildStrawberry Yellow
Tan
SpringGreen
YellowGreen
VioletRed
TealBlue
YellowOrange
White
Thistle
Define the colors in the preamble of your document. (Reason: Do so in the

preamble, so that you can already refer to them in the preamble, which is
useful, for instance, in an argument of another package that supports colors as
arguments, such as listings1 package.)
15.6.1. Place
If the predefined colors are not adequate, you may wish to define your own.
15.6. Defining new colors
If you loaded the xcolor package, you can define colors upon previously
defined ones:
Trick : When surfing on the web, you can get hexadecimal code for each color
on a web page using the colorzilla extension to Firefox.
\definecolor{orange}{RGB}{255,127,0}
You can use small letters rgb and choose a value between 0 and 1 or use capital
letters RGB and choose a value between 0 and 255. The following code should
give a similar results to the last code chunk.
\definecolor{orange}{rgb}{1,0.5,0}
To define a new color, follow the following example, which defines orange for
you, by setting the red to the maximum, the green to one half (0.5), and the
blue to the minimum:
15.6.2. Method
name is the name of the color; you can call it as you like
model is the way you describe the color, and is one of gray, rgb and cmyk.
color-spec is the description of the color
where:
\definecolor{''name''}{''model''}{''color-spec''}
In the abstract, the colors are defined following this scheme:
\colorlet{notgreen}{blue!50!yellow}
Example
\definecolor{light-gray
Color Specification
just one number
between 0 (black)
and 1 (white), so
0.95 will be very
light gray, 0.30
will be dark gray
http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/xcolor/xcolor.
pdf
Color Models
Model Description
gray Shades
of gray.
Among the models you can use to describe the color are the following (several
more are described in the xcolor manual2 ):
15.6.3. Color Models
Color Models
Model Description
rgb Red,
Green,
Blue
Example
\definecolor{orange}{rg
Color Specification
three numbers
given in the form
red,green,blue;
the quantity of
each color is represented with a
number between 0
and 1
HTML Red,
Green,
Blue
Color Models
Model Description
RGB Red,
Green,
Blue
\definecolor{orange}{RG
three numbers
given in the form
red,green,blue;
the quantity of
each color is represented with a
number between 0
and 255
six hexadecimal
numbers given in
the form RRGGBB;
similar to what is
used in HTML
\definecolor{orange}{HT
Example
Color Specification
Example
four numbers
\definecolor{orange}{cm
given in the form
cyan,magenta,yellow,black;
the quantity of
each color is
represented with a
number between 0
and 1
Color Specification
The xcolor package provides extended versions of the described color related
commands. Tints can be defined as follow:
15.7. Advanced color settings
Color Models
Model Description
cmyk Cyan,
Magenta,
Yellow,
Black
http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/xcolor/xcolor.
pdf
The xcolor manual3
15.8. Sources
Other features include: support of hsb color model, html style notation, special
row coloring support in tables and more.
The first specifies 20 percent blue, the second is a mixture of 20 percent blue
and 80 percent black and the last one is a mixture of (20*0.3) percent blue,
(80*0.3) percent black and 70 percent green.
\color{blue!20}
\color{blue!20!black}
\color{blue!20!black!30!green}
\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
\usepackage[light,math]{iwona}
For example:
In order to select a font other than the default typeface in LaTeX environment,
it is necessary to include some commands in the preamble of the document.
16. Fonts
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/TrueType
Below is an example found at the Google discussion group latexlovers. The

example demonstrates how to select different fonts in a simple document.
16.0.1. Example
Important: This only works for fonts that are already prepared for use with
LaTeX. A Truetype1 font (ttf) or similar must first be converted and made
available to LaTeX. The external links section below has some useful resources.
Figure 52
% Iwona font
\renewcommand*\rmdefault{iwona}\normalfont\upshape
Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectitur adipiscing elit.
% Palatino font
\renewcommand*\rmdefault{ppl}\normalfont\upshape
% default font (\familydefault = \rmdefault = Computer Modern Roman)

5
6
2
3
4
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/LuaTeX
fontspec.html
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Opentype
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Unicode
\usepackage{fontspec}
To use the fonts, simply load the fontspec package and set the font:
If you use the XeTeX2 or LuaTeX3 engine and the fontspec4 package, you'll
be able to use any font installed in the system effortlessly. XeTeX also allows
using OpenType5 technology of modern fonts like specifying alternate glyphs
and optical size variants. XeTeX also uses Unicode6 by default, which might
be helpful for font issues.
16.1. XeTeX
http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/generic/ifxetex/
\ifxetex
\usepackage{fontspec}
\usepackage{xunicode}
\defaultfontfeatures{Mapping=tex-text} % To support LaTeX quoting
\usepackage{ifxetex}
Then compile the document with XeLateX or LuaLaTeX. Note that you can
only generate .pdf files, and that you need a sufficiently new TeX distribution
(TeX Live 2009 should work for XeTeX and Tex Live 2010 for LuaTeX). Also
you should NOT load the inputenc or fontenc package. To make support both
pdflatex and XeTeX you can use the \ifxetex macro from the ifxetex7
package.
\begin{document}
Lorem ipsum...
\end{document}
\setmainfont{Arial}
8
9
10
http://www.tug.dk/FontCatalogue/
http://www.cl.cam.ac.uk/~rf10/pstex/latexcommands.htm
http://www.ee.iitb.ac.in/~trivedi/LatexHelp/latexfont.htm
The Latex Font Catalogue8

LaTeX font commands9
How to change fonts in Latex10
16.2. Useful websites
\begin{document}
Lorem ipsum...
\end{document}
style
\setromanfont{Hoefler Text}
\else
\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
\fi
14
15
12
13
11
http://www.tug.org/TUGboat/Articles/tb27-1/
tb86kroonenberg-fonts.pdf
http://c.caignaert.free.fr/Install-ttf-Font.pdf
http://www.tex.ac.uk/ctan/support/installfont/installfont.
pdf
http://latex.josef-kleber.de/download/installfont-tl
http://latex.josef-kleber.de/download/installfont-tl
Step-by-step guide to manually install a ttf-font for PdfTeX12

A bash script for installing a LaTeX font family13 ( MikTeX14 / TeXLive15 )
16.2.1. TrueType (ttf) fonts
[ftp://tug.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/utilities/fontinst/doc/talks/et99-fonttutorial.pdf Understanding the world of TEX fonts and mastering the basics
of fontinst]
Font installation the shallow way11 "For one-off projects, you can cut corners
with font installation (i.e. fontinst) and end up with a more manageable set
of files and a cleaner TEX installation. This article shows how and why"
http://xpt.sourceforge.net/techdocs/language/latex/
latex33-LaTeXAndTrueTypeFont
http://fachschaft.physik.uni-greifswald.de/~stitch/ttf.
html
http://william.famille-blum.org/software/latexttf/index.
html
http://www.radamir.com/tex/ttf-tex.htm
16
19
18
17
LaTeX And TrueType Font16

True Type Fonts with LaTeX under Linux + MiKTeX 2.517
Unicode Truetype font installer for LaTeX under Windows + MikTeX18
Using TrueType fonts with TeX (LaTeX) and pdfTeX (pdfLaTeX)19 (for
MikTeX)
Technical Texts
Part III.
If your document requires only a few simple mathematical formulas, plain

LaTeX has most of the tools that you will need. If you are writing a scientific document that contains numerous complicated formulas, the amsmath
One of the greatest motivating forces for Donald Knuth when he began developing the original TeX system was to create something that allowed simple
construction of mathematical formulas, whilst looking professional when
printed. The fact that he succeeded was most probably why TeX (and later
on, LaTeX) became so popular within the scientific community. Typesetting
mathematics is one of LaTeX's greatest strengths. It is also a large topic due to
the existence of so much mathematical notation.
17. Mathematics
1
2
http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
http://www.tex.ac.uk/ctan/macros/latex/contrib/mh/
mathtools.pdf
in the preamble of the document. The mathtools package loads the

amsmath package and hence there is no need to \usepackage{amsmath}
in the preamble if mathtools is used.
\usepackage{mathtools}
or
\usepackage{amsmath}
package1 introduces several new commands that are more powerful and flexible than the ones provided by LaTeX. The mathtools package fixes some
amsmath quirks and adds some useful settings, symbols, and environments
to amsmath.2 To use either package, include:
As maths require special environments, there are naturally the appropriate

environment names you can use in the standard way. Unlike most other
environments, however, there are some handy shorthands to declaring your
formulas. The following table summarizes them:
text - text formulas are displayed in-line, that is, within the body of text
where it is declared. e.g., I can say that a + a = 2a within this sentence.
displayed - displayed formulas are separate from the main text.
LaTeX needs to know beforehand that the subsequent text does in fact contain
mathematical elements. This is because LaTeX typesets maths notation differently than normal text. Therefore, special environments have been declared
for this purpose. They can be distinguished into two categories depending on
how they are presented:
17.1. Mathematics environments
LaTeX
TeX
shortshorthand
hand
\begin{math}...\end{math} $...$ $...$
\begin{displaymath}...\end{displaymath}
\[...\] $$...$$
or
\begin{equation*}...\end{equation*}
Environment
requires the amsmath package
Additionally, there is a second possible environment for the displayed type of

formulas: equation. The difference between this and displaymath is
that equation also adds sequential equation numbers by the side.
Note: Using the $$...$$ should be avoided, as it may cause problems,

particularly with the AMS-LaTeX macros. Furthermore, should a problem
occur, the error messages may not be helpful.
Text
Displayed
Type
1. Most spaces and line breaks do not have any significance, as all spaces
are either derived logically from the mathematical expressions, or have
to be specified with special commands such as \quad
2. Empty lines are not allowed. Only one paragraph per formula.
3. Each letter is considered to be the name of a variable and will be typeset
as such. If you want to typeset normal text within a formula (normal
upright font and normal spacing) then you have to enter the text using
dedicated commands.4
If you are typing text normally, you are said to be in text mode, while you are
typing within one of those mathematical environments, you are said to be in
math mode, that has some differences compared to the text mode:
Mathematics has lots and lots of symbols! If there is one aspect of maths that
is difficult in LaTeX it is trying to remember how to produce them. There are
of course a set of symbols that can be accessed directly from the keyboard:
17.2. Symbols
In order for some operators, such as \lim or \sum to be displayed correctly

inside some math environments (read $......$), it might be convenient to
write the \displaystyle class inside the environment. Doing so might
cause the line to be taller, but will cause exponents and indices to be displayed
correctly for some math operators. For example, the $\sum$ will print a
smaller and $\displaystyle \sum$ will print a bigger one , like in
equations (This only works with AMSMATH package).
17.1.1. Inserting "Displayed" maths inside blocks of text
Fortunately, there's a tool that can greatly simplify the search for the command
for a specific symbol. Look for "Detexify" in the external links5 section below.
x X,
\[
\forall x \in X, \quad \exists y \leq \epsilon
\]
Beyond those listed above, distinct commands must be issued in order to

display the desired symbols. And there are a lot! of Greek letters, set and
relations symbols, arrows, binary operators, etc. For example:
+ - = ! / ( ) [ ] < > | ' :
Greek letters are commonly used in mathematics, and they are very easy to type
in math mode. You just have to type the name of the letter after a backslash: if
the first letter is lowercase, you will get a lowercase Greek letter, if the first
letter is uppercase (and only the first letter), then you will get an uppercase
letter. Note that some uppercase Greek letters look like Latin ones, so they are
not provided by LaTeX (e.g. uppercase Alpha and Beta are just "A" and "B"
respectively). Lowercase epsilon, theta, phi, pi, rho, and sigma are provided in
two different versions. The alternate, or variant, version is created by adding
"var" before the name of the letter:
17.3. Greek letters
Another option would be to look in the "The Comprehensive LaTeX Symbol

List" in the external links6 section below.
Scroll down to #List of Mathematical Symbols7 for a complete list of Greek

symbols.
, A, , B, , , , , , ,
\[
\alpha, \Alpha, \beta, \Beta, \gamma, \Gamma,
\pi, \Pi, \phi, \varphi, \Phi
\]
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Limit%20%28mathematics%29
For certain operators such as limits8 , the subscript is placed underneath the
operator:
cos(2 ) = cos2 sin2
\[
\cos (2\theta) = \cos^2 \theta - \sin^2 \theta
\]
An operator is a function that is written as a word: e.g. trigonometric functions

(sin, cos, tan), logarithms and exponentials (log, exp). LaTeX has many of
these defined as commands:
17.4. Operators
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Modular%20arithmetic
a mod b
\[
a \bmod b
\]
For the modular operator9 there are two commands: \bmod and \pmod:
limx exp(x) = 0
\[
\lim_{x \to \infty} \exp(-x) = 0
\]
10
11
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/argmax
Powers and indices are equivalent to superscripts and subscripts in normal text
mode. The caret () character is used to raise something, and the underscore
17.5. Powers and indices
To use operators which are not pre-defined, such as argmax10 , see custom
operators11
x a (mod b)
\[
x \equiv a \pmod b
\]
f (n) = n5 + 4n2 + 2|n=17
\[
f(n) = n^5 + 4n^2 + 2 _{n=17}
\]
An underscore (_) can be used with a vertical bar (|) to denote evaluation using
subscript notation in mathematics:
kn+1 = n2 + kn2 kn1
\[
k_{n+1} = n^2 + k_n^2 - k_{n-1}
\]
(_) is for lowering. If more than one expression is raised or lowered, they
should be grouped using curly braces ({ and }).
12
13
n
k
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Binomial%20coefficient
n!
k!(nk)!
\[
\frac{n!}{k!(n-k)!} = \binom{n}{k}
\]
A fraction is created using the \frac{numerator}{denominator}

command. (for those who need their memories refreshed, that's the top and
bottom respectively!). Likewise, the binomial coefficient12 (aka the Choose
function) may be written using the \binom command13 :
17.6. Fractions and Binomials
n
k
You can embed fractions within fractions:
n!
k!(nk)!
\[
\frac{n!}{k!(n-k)!} = {n \choose k}
\]
It is also possible to use the \choose command without the amsmath

package:
14
Another way to write fractions is to use the \over command without the
amsmath package:
Note that when appearing inside another fraction, or in inline text ab , a fraction is noticeably smaller than in displayed mathematics. The \tfrac and
\dfrac commands14 force the use of the respective styles, \textstyle
and \displaystyle. Similarly, the \tbinom and \dbinom commands
typeset the binomial coefficient.
yz
1 1
x+y
\[
\frac{\frac{1}{x}+\frac{1}{y}}{y-z}
\]
n
k
15
\[
^3/_7
\]
For relatively simple fractions, it may be more aesthetically pleasing to use

powers and indices15 :
n!
k!(nk)!
\[
{n! \over k!(n-k)!} = {n \choose k}
\]
Take ${}^1/_2$ cup of sugar, \dots

\[
3\times{}^1/_2=1{}^1/_2
\]
Take \sfrac{1}{2} cup of sugar, \dots

\[
3\times\sfrac{1}{2}=1\sfrac{1}{2}
\]
If you use them throughout the document, usage of xfrac package is recommended. This package provides \sfrac command to create slanted fractions.
Usage:
3/
Alternatively, the nicefrac package provides the \nicefrac command,

whose usage is similar to \sfrac.
Figure 53
16
a1 +
a2 +
1
1
a3 + a4
x = a0 +
\begin{equation}
x = a_0 + \cfrac{1}{a_1
+ \cfrac{1}{a_2
+ \cfrac{1}{a_3 + a_4}}}
\end{equation}
Continued fractions should be written using \cfrac command16 :
17.6.1. Continued fractions
\begin{equation}
\frac{
\begin{array}[b]{r}
\left( x_1 x_2 \right)\\
\times \left( x_1 x_2 \right)
\end{array}
}{
\left( y_1y_2y_3y_4 \right)
}
\end{equation}
To make multiplication visually similar to a fraction, a nested array can be

used, for example multiplication of numbers written one below the other.
17.6.2. Multiplication of two numbers
\[
\sqrt{\frac{a}{b}}
\]
The \sqrt command creates a square root surrounding an expression. It

accepts an optional argument specified in square brackets ([ and ]) to change
magnitude:
17.7. Roots
(y1 y2 y3 y4 )
(x1 x2 )
(x10 x20 )
Some people prefer writing the square root "closing" it over its content. This
method arguably makes it more clear what is in the scope of the root sign. This
habit is not normally used while writing with the computer, but if you still
want to change the output of the square root, LaTeX gives you this possibility.
Just add the following code in the preamble of your document:
n
1 + x + x2 + x3 + . . .
\[
\sqrt[n]{1+x+x^2+x^3+\ldots}
\]
pa
% New definition of square root:

% it renames \sqrt as \oldsqrt
\let\oldsqrt\sqrt
% it defines the new \sqrt in terms of the old one
\def\sqrt{\mathpalette\DHLhksqrt}
\def\DHLhksqrt#1#2{%
\setbox0=\hbox{$#1\oldsqrt{#2\,}$}\dimen0=\ht0
\advance\dimen0-0.2\ht0
\setbox2=\hbox{\vrule height\ht0 depth -\dimen0}%
{\box0\lower0.4pt\box2}}
An alternative piece of TeX code that does allow multiple roots is
This TeX code first renames the \sqrt command as \oldsqrt, then redefines \sqrt in terms of the old one, adding something more. The new square
root can be seen in the picture on the left, compared to the old one on the right.
Unfortunately this code won't work if you want to use multiple roots: if you
try to write b a as \sqrt[b]{a} after you used the code above, you'll just
get a wrong output. In other words, you can redefine the square root this way
only if you are not going to use multiple roots in the whole document.
Figure 54 The new style is on

left, the old one on right
$\sqrt[a]{b} \quad \oldsqrt[a]{b}$
\LetLtxMacro{\oldsqrt}{\sqrt} % makes all sqrts closed

\renewcommand{\sqrt}[1][]{%
\def\DHLindex{#1}\mathpalette\DHLhksqrt}
\def\DHLhksqrt#1#2{%
\setbox0=\hbox{$#1\oldsqrt[\DHLindex]{#2\,}$}\dimen0=\ht0
\advance\dimen0-0.2\ht0
\setbox2=\hbox{\vrule height\ht0 depth -\dimen0}%
{\box0\lower0.71pt\box2}}
The \sum and \int commands insert the sum and integral symbols respectively, with limits specified using the caret () and underscore (_). The typical
notation for sums is:
17.8. Sums and integrals
However this requires the \usepackage{letltxmacro} package
Figure 55
The limits for the integrals follow the same notation. It's also important to
represent the integration variables with an upright d, which in math mode is
obtained through the \mathrm{} command, and with a small space separating
it from the integrand, which is attained with the \, command.
10
i=1 ti
\[
\sum_{i=1}^{10} t_i
\]
17
\sum
L
\bigoplus
S
\bigcup
F
\bigsqcup
R
\int
\prod
N
\bigotimes
T
\bigcap
W
\bigvee H
\oint
\coprod
J
\bigodot
U
\biguplus
V
\bigwedge
s
\iint17
There are many other "big" commands which operate in a similar manner:
R x
0 e dx
\[
\int_0^\infty e^{-x}\,\mathrm{d}x
\]
t
RRRR
\iiiint19
R
\idotsint20
18
19
20
21

The \substack command21 allows the use of \\ to write the limits over
multiple lines:
For more integral symbols, including those not included by default in the
Computer Modern font, try the esint package.
\iiint18
If you want the limits of an integral to be specified above and below the symbol
(like the sum), use the \limits command:
0< j<n
0<i<m P(i, j)
\[
\sum_{\substack{
0<i<m \\
0<j<n
}}
P(i,j)
\]
22
Subscripts and superscripts in other contexts as well as other parameters to

amsmath package related to them are described in Advanced Mathematics22
chapter.
\usepackage[intlimits]{amsmath}
However if you want this to apply to ALL integrals, it is preferable to specify

the intlimits option when loading the amsmath package:
Rb
\[
\int\limits_a^b
\]
23
24
http://hdl.handle.net/2268/6219
There are a variety of delimiters available for use in LaTeX:
The use of delimiters such as brackets soon becomes important when dealing
with anything but the most trivial equations. Without them, formulas can
become ambiguous. Also, special types of mathematical structures, such as
matrices, typically rely on delimiters to enclose them.
How to use braces in multi line equations is described in the Advanced Mathematics24
chapter.
17.9. Brackets, braces and delimiters
For bigger integrals, you may use personal declarations, or the bigints
package 23 .
Very often mathematical features will differ in size, in which case the delimiters surrounding the expression should vary accordingly. This can be done
automatically using the \left and \right commands. Any of the previous
delimiters may be used in combination with these:
17.9.1. Automatic sizing
(a), [b], {c}, |d|, kek, h f i, bgc, dhe
\[
( a ), [ b ], \{ c \}, d , \ e \,
\langle f \rangle, \lfloor g \rfloor,
\lceil h \rceil
\]
x
y3
n 2o
\[
\left\{\frac{x^2}{y^3}\right\}
\]
Curly braces are defined differently by using \left\{ and \right\} ,
x
y3
2
\[
\left(\frac{x^2}{y^3}\right)
\]
In certain cases, the sizing produced by the \left and \right commands
may not be desirable, or you may simply want finer control over the delimiter
17.9.2. Manual sizing
1
x3
3 0
\[
\left.\frac{x^3}{3}\right_0^1
\]
If a delimiter on only one side of an expression is required, then an invisible

delimiter on the other side may be denoted using a period (.).

\[
( \big( \Big( \bigg( \Bigg(
\]
sizes. In this case, the \big, \Big, \bigg and \Bigg modifier commands
may be used:
25
\[
\begin{matrix}
a & b & c \\
d & e & f \\
g & h & i
\end{matrix}
\]
A basic matrix may be created using the matrix environment25 : in common

with other table-like structures, entries are specified by row, with columns
separated using an ampersand (&) and a new rows separated with a double
backslash (\\)
17.10. Matrices and arrays
26
requires the mathtools package
To specify alignment of columns in the table, use starred version26 :
a b c
d e f
g h i
The alignment by default is c but it can be any column type valid in array
environment.
1 3
1 3
=
2 4
2 4
\[
\begin{matrix}
-1 & 3 \\
2 & -4
\end{matrix}
=
\begin{matrix*}[r]
-1 & 3 \\
2 & -4
\end{matrix*}
\]
27
28
29
30
()
[]
pmatrix*29
bmatrix30

pmatrix28
Surrounding delimiter
()
Environment name
centers columns by
default
allows to specify
alignment of columns
in optional parameter
centers columns by
default
Notes
However matrices are usually enclosed in delimiters of some kind, and while
it is possible to use the \left and \right commands27 , there are various
other predefined environments which automatically include delimiters:
31
32
33
34
{}
{}
||
Bmatrix32
Bmatrix*33
vmatrix34

bmatrix*31
[]
Environment name
allows to specify
centers columns by
default
allows to specify
centers columns by
default
Notes
kk
kk
Vmatrix36
Vmatrix*37
allows to specify
centers columns by
default
allows to specify
alignment of colums
Notes
35
36
37
38

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ellipsis
When writing down arbitrary sized matrices, it is common to use horizontal,

vertical and diagonal triplets of dots (known as ellipses38 ) to fill in certain
vmatrix*35
||
Environment name
a1,2
a2,2
..
.
&
&
&
&
a1,n
a2,n
..
.
\cdots
\cdots
\ddots
\cdots
..
.
&
&
&
&
am,1 am,2 am,n
a1,1
a2,1
Am,n = .
..
\[
A_{m,n} =
\begin{pmatrix}
a_{1,1} & a_{1,2}
a_{2,1} & a_{2,2}
\vdots & \vdots
a_{m,1} & a_{m,2}
\end{pmatrix}
\]
a_{1,n} \\
a_{2,n} \\
\vdots \\
a_{m,n}
columns and rows. These can be specified using the \cdots, \vdots and
\ddots respectively:
39
1 2
3 4
\[
\begin{array}{cc}
1 & 2 \\
\hline
3 & 4
\end{array}
\]
In some cases you may want to have finer control of the alignment within
each column, or want to insert lines between columns or rows. This can be
achieved using the array environment, which is essentially a math-mode
version of the tabular environment39 , which requires that the columns be
pre-specified:
\[
M = \begin{bmatrix}
\frac{5}{6} & \frac{1}{6} & 0
\\[0.3em]
\frac{5}{6} & 0
& \frac{1}{6} \\[0.3em]
0
& \frac{5}{6} & \frac{1}{6}
\end{bmatrix}
\]
To counteract this problem, add additional leading space with the optional
parameter to the \\ command:
You may see that the AMS matrix class of environments doesn't leave enough
space when used together with fractions resulting in output similar to this:
5 1
6
6 0
M = 65 0 16
0 56 61
5
6
1
6
1
6
1
6
\[
M = \bordermatrix{~ & x & y \cr
A & 1 & 0 \cr
B & 0 & 1 \cr}
\]
If you need "border" or "indexes" on your matrix, plain TeX provides the
macro \bordermatrix
M=
6
5
6
A matrix in text must be set smaller:

$\bigl(\begin{smallmatrix}
a&b\\ c&d
\end{smallmatrix} \bigr)$
to not increase leading in a portion of text.
To insert a small matrix, and not increase leading in the line containing it, use
smallmatrix environment:
17.10.1. Matrices in running text
Figure 56
The math environment differs from the text environment in the representation of text. Here is an example of trying to represent text within the math
environment:
17.11. Adding text to equations
Figure 57
There are two noticeable problems: there are no spaces between words or
numbers, and the letters are italicized and more spaced out than normal. Both
issues are simply artifacts of the maths mode, in that it treats it as a mathematical expression: spaces are ignored (LaTeX spaces mathematics according to
its own rules), and each character is a separate element (so are not positioned
as closely as normal text).
50apples 100apples = lotso f apples2
\[
50 apples \times 100 apples = lots of apples^2
\]
40
50apples 100apples = lots of apples2
\[
50 \text{apples} \times 100 \text{apples}
= \text{lots of apples}^2
\]
There are a number of ways that text can be added properly. The typical way
is to wrap the text with the \text{...} command 40 (a similar command
is \mbox{...}, though this causes problems with subscripts, and has a less
descriptive name). Let's see what happens when the above equation code is
adapted:
50 apples 100 apples = lots of apples2
\[
50 \text{ apples} \times 100 \text{ apples}
= \text{lots of apples}^2
\]
The text looks better. However, there are no gaps between the numbers and the
words. Unfortunately, you are required to explicitly add these. There are many
ways to add spaces between maths elements, but for the sake of simplicity
you may literally add the space character in the affected \text(s) itself (just
before the text.)
41
\[
50 \textrm{ apples} \times 100
\textbf{ apples} = \textit{lots of apples}^2
\]
Using the \text is fine and gets the basic result. Yet, there is an alternative
that offers a little more flexibility. You may recall the introduction of font
formatting commands41 , such as \textrm, \textit, \textbf, etc. These
commands format the argument accordingly, e.g., \textbf{bold text}
gives bold text. These commands are equally valid within a maths environment
to include text. The added benefit here is that you can have better control over
the font formatting, rather than the standard text achieved with \text.
17.11.1. Formatted text
\mathit{...}ABCDEFabcdef123456
\mathbf{...}ABCDEFabcdef123456
\mathrm{...}ABCDEFabcdef123456
LaTeX
Sample
command
\mathnormal{...}
ABCDEFabcde f 123456
vectors
most mathematical
notation
units of measurement, one word
functions
the default math font

this is the default or
normal font, unitalicised
italicised font
bold font
Common use
Description
We can now format text; what about formatting mathematical expressions?

There are a set of formatting commands very similar to the font formatting
ones just used, except that they are specifically aimed at text in math mode
(requires amsfonts)
17.12. Formatting mathematics symbols
50 apples 100 apples = lots of apples2
42
43
Sans-serif42
Monospace (fixedwidth) font43
Description
Common use
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/sans-serif
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Monospace%20font
LaTeX
Sample
command
\mathsf{...}ABCDEFabcdef123456
\mathtt{...}ABCDEFabcdef123456
44
45
46
47
Common use
often used for
sheaves/schemes
and categories, used
to denote cryptological44 concepts like
an alphabet of definition (A ), message
space (M ), ciphertext space (C ) and
key space45 (K );
Kleene's O 46 ; naming convention in
description logic47
Description
Calligraphy (uppercase only)
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cryptography
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/key%20space
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Kleene%27s%20O
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Description%20logic%23Naming%
20Convention
LaTeX
Sample
command
\mathcal{...}
A BC DE F abcde{3456
Blackboard bold53
52
\mathbb{...}ABCDEFaf123456
51
52
53
requires amsfonts or amssymb packages

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Fraktur%20%28script%29
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List%20of%20New%20Testament%
20papyri
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ideal%20%28ring%20theory%29
requires amsfonts or amssymb packages
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Blackboard%20bold
Almost canonical
font for Lie algebras,
with superscript
used to denote New
Testament papyri50 ,
ideals51 in ring theory
Used to denote
special sets (e.g. real
numbers)
Fraktur49
48
49
50
Common use
Description
LaTeX
Sample
command
48
\mathfrak{...}
ABCDEFabcdef123456
Common use
An alternative font
for categories and
sheaves.
Description
Script55
54
55
56
57
require mathrsfs package

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Script%20%28typefaces%29
To bold lowercase Greek or other symbols use the \boldsymbol command56 ; this will only work if there exists a bold version of the symbol in the
current font. As a last resort there is the \pmb command57 (poor mans bold):
this prints multiple versions of the character slightly offset against each other
The maths formatting commands can be wrapped around the entire equation,
and not just on the textual elements: they only format letters, numbers, and
uppercase Greek, and the rest of the maths syntax is ignored.
LaTeX
Sample
command
\mathscr{...}54
58
So what to do when you run out of symbols and fonts? Well the next step is to
use accents:
17.12.1. Accents
To change the size of the fonts in math mode, see Changing font size58 .
= (1 , 2 , . . . , n )
\[
\boldsymbol{\beta} = (\beta_1,\beta_2,\ldots,\beta_n)
\]
59
60

a'
a0
\hat{a}
a
\grave{a}
a`
\dot{a}
a
\not{a}
6a
\overrightarrow{AB}
AB
a'''
a000
\overline{aaa}aaa
\breve{a}
a
59
\dddot{a}
d
\widehat{AAA} AAA
\tilde{a}
a
a''
a00
\bar{a}
a
\acute{a}
a
\ddot{a}
a
\mathring{a}
\overleftarrow{AB}
AB
a''''
a0000
\check{a}
a
\vec{a}
~a
\ddddot{a}60
\widetilde{AAA}
A plus-minus sign used for uncertainty is written as:
Latex deals with the + and signs in two possible ways. The most common is
as a binary operator. When two maths elements appear either side of the sign,
it is assumed to be a binary operator, and as such, allocates some space either
side of the sign. The alternative way is a sign designation. This is when you
state whether a mathematical quantity is either positive or negative. This is
common for the latter, as in maths, such elements are assumed to be positive
unless a is prefixed to it. In this instance, you want the sign to appear close
to the appropriate element to show their association. If you put a + or a with
nothing before it but you want it to be handled like a binary operator you can
add an invisible character before the operator using {}. This can be useful if
you are writing multiple-line formulas, and a new line could start with a = or a
+, for example, then you can fix some strange alignments adding the invisible
character where necessary.
17.13. Plus and minus signs
LaTeX is obviously pretty good at typesetting mathit was one of the chief
aims of the core Tex system that LaTeX extends. However, it can't always
be relied upon to accurately interpret formulas in the way you did. It has
to make certain assumptions when there are ambiguous expressions. The
result tends to be slightly incorrect horizontal spacing. In these events, the
output is still satisfactory, yet any perfectionists will no doubt wish to fine-tune
17.14. Controlling horizontal spacing
\[
\pm
\]
\[
f(n) = \left\{
\begin{array}{l l}
n/2 & \quad \text{if $n$ is even}\\
-(n+1)/2 & \quad \text{if $n$ is odd}\\
\end{array} \right.
\]
There are other occasions where LaTeX has done its job correctly, but you just
want to add some space, maybe to add a comment of some kind. For example,
in the following equation, it is preferable to ensure there is a decent amount of
space between the math and the text.
their formulas to ensure spacing is correct. These are generally very subtle
adjustments.
if n is even
if n is odd
61
A \quad is a space equal to the current font size. So, if you are using an 11pt
font, then the space provided by \quad will also be 11pt (horizontally, of
course.) The \qquad gives twice that amount. As you can see from the code
LaTeX has defined two commands that can be used anywhere in documents
(not just maths) to insert some horizontal space. They are \quad and \qquad
(Note that this particular example can be expressed in more elegant code by the
cases construct provided by the amsmath package described in Advanced
Mathematics61 chapter.)
This code produces errors with Miktex 2.9 and does not yield the results seen
on the right. Use \textrm instead of just \text.
(
n/2
f (n) =
(n + 1)/2
y dx
ydx
\[ \int y \mathrm{d}x \]
If you were to try this, you may write:
OK, so back to the fine tuning as mentioned at the beginning of the document.
A good example would be displaying the simple equation for the indefinite
integral of y with respect to x:
from the above example, \quads were used to add some separation between
the maths and the text.
Description
small space
medium space
large space
negative space
Size
3/18 of a quad
4/18 of a quad
5/18 of a quad
-3/18 of a quad
So, to rectify the current problem:
NB you can use more than one command in a sequence to achieve a greater
space if necessary.
Command
\,
\:
\;
\!
However, this doesn't give the correct result. LaTeX doesn't respect the whitespace left in the code to signify that the y and the dx are independent entities.
Instead, it lumps them altogether. A \quad would clearly be overkill in this
situationwhat is needed are some small spaces to be utilized in this type of
instance, and that's what LaTeX provides:
y dx
ydx
\[ \int y\: \mathrm{d}x \]
\[ \int y\, \mathrm{d}x \]
ydx
The negative space may seem like an odd thing to use, however, it wouldn't be
there if it didn't have some use! Take the following example:
\[ \int y\; \mathrm{d}x \]
n!
r!(nr)!
The matrix-like expression for representing binomial coefficients is too padded.

There is too much space between the brackets and the actual contents within.
This can easily be corrected by adding a few negative spaces after the left
bracket and before the right bracket.

n
=
r
\[
\left(
\begin{array}{c}
n \\
r
\end{array}
\right) = \frac{n!}{r!(n-r)!}
\]
n!
r!(nr)!
In any case, adding some spaces manually should be avoided whenever possible: it makes the source code more complex and it's against the basic principles
of a What You See is What You Mean approach. The best thing to do is to
define some commands using all the spaces you want and then, when you use
your command, you don't have to add any other space. Later, if you change
your mind about the length of the horizontal space, you can easily change it

n
=
r
\[
\left(\!
\begin{array}{c}
n \\
r
\end{array}
\!\right) = \frac{n!}{r!(n-r)!}
\]
in the preamble of your document. We have chosen \dd just because it

reminds the "d" it replaces and it is fast to type. Doing so, the code for your
integral becomes \int x \dd x. Now, whenever you write an integral,
you just have to use the \dd instead of the "d", and all your integrals will have
the same style. If you change your mind, you just have to change the definition
in the preamble, and all your integrals will be changed accordingly.
\newcommand{\dd}{\; \mathrm{d}}
modifying only the command you defined before. Let us use an example: you
want the d of a dx in an integral to be in roman font and a small space away
from the rest. If you want to type an integral like \int x \; \mathrm{d}
x, you can define a command like this:
62
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/American%20Mathematical%
20Society
The AMS (American Mathematical Society62 ) mathematics package is a powerful package that creates a higher layer of abstraction over mathematical
LaTeX language; if you use it it will make your life easier. Some commands
amsmath introduces will make other plain LaTeX commands obsolete: in
order to keep consistency in the final output you'd better use amsmath commands whenever possible. If you do so, you will get an elegant output without
worrying about alignment and other details, keeping your source code readable.
If you want to use it, you have to add this in the preamble:
17.15. Advanced Mathematics: AMS Math package
Code
Output
Comment
LaTeX gives you several commands to insert dots in your formulae. This can
be particularly useful if you have to type big matrices omitting elements. First
of all, here are the main dots-related commands LaTeX provides:
17.15.2. Dots
amsmath defines also the \dots command, that is a generalization of the

existing \ldots. You can use \dots in both text and math mode and LaTeX
will replace it with three dots ". . . " but it will decide according to the context
whether to put it on the bottom (like \ldots) or centered (like \cdots).
17.15.1. Introducing text and dots in formulas
Output
...
...
Code
\dots
\ldots
Comment
generic dots, to be
used in text (outside
formulae as well). It
automatically manages whitespaces before and after itself
according to the context, it's a higher level
command.
the output is similar to the previous
one, but there is no
automatic whitespace
management; it works
at a lower level.
\ddots
\iddots
\vdots
Code
\cdots
..
.
..
.
Output
diagonal dots
inverse diagonal dots
(requires the mathdots
package)
vertical dots
Comment
These dots are centered relative to the
height of a letter.
There is also the binary multiplication
operator, \cdot,
mentioned below.
Output
......
Comment
to be used in matrices, it creates a row
of dots spanning n
columns.
Code
A_1,A_2,\dotsc,
Figure 58
Output
Comment
for "dots with commas"
Instead of using \ldots and \cdots, you should use the semantically
oriented commands. It makes it possible to adapt your document to different
conventions on the fly, in case (for example) you have to submit it to a publisher
who insists on following house tradition in this respect. The default treatment
for the various kinds follows American Mathematical Society conventions.
Code
\hdotsfor{n}
A_1 \dotsm A_N
Code
A_1+\dotsb+A_N
Figure 60
Figure 59
Output
for "multiplication
dots"
Comment
for "dots with binary
operators/relations"
A_1\dotso A_N
Code
\int_ab
\dotsi
Figure 62
Figure 61
Output
for "other dots" (none

of the above)
Comment
for "dots with integrals"
Binary Operations
SymScript
bol
\pm
\mp
Relation Symbols
Sym- Script
bol
\leq

\succ
'
\simeq
k
\parallel
\subseteq
6=
\neq
_
\frown
`
\vdash
\cap
\cup
Script
\geq
\sim
\mid
\subset
\supseteq
\smile
\in
\dashv
Script
Symbol
Symbol
Symbol
=
v
3
<
Symbol

4
\models
\preceq
\gg
\approx
\sqsubset
\sqsupsete
\notin
>
Script
Symbol
\diamond
\bigtriangleup
Script
Symbol
\equiv
|=
\perp

\ll

\supset
\cong
<
\sqsubseteq w
\ni
/
<
>
Script
All the pre-defined mathematical symbols from the \TeX\ package are listed
below. More symbols are available from extra packages.
17.16. List of Mathematical Symbols
\ni
\land
>
5
/
.

\neg
\in
\notin
\uplus
\sqcap
\sqcup
\vee
\wedge
\cdot
]
u
t
Symbol
\times
\div
\ast
\star
\dagger
\ddagger
Set and/or Logic Notation

Symbol
Script
\exists
@
\nexists
\forall
Script
\rightarrow
\implies
\Rightarrow
(preferred for
implication)
\leftrightarro
\iff
\Leftrightarro
(preferred for
equivalence
(iff))
\top
\bot
\bigtriangledown
\triangleleft
\triangleright
\bigcirc
\bullet
\
\wr
\lor
and
and
B and
Greek Letters
Symbol
A and
Symbol
k
}
Script
\Alpha and
\alpha
\Beta and
\beta
\Gamma and
\gamma
\Delta and
\delta
Delimiters
SymScript
bol
|
|
{
\{
\uparrow
\downarrow
\|
\}
\Uparrow
\Downarrow
Script
\Omicron
and \omicron
\Pi, \pi and
\varpi
\Xi and \xi
Script
\Nu and \nu
Symbol
\
i
e
c
\emptyset
and
\varnothing
/
\langle
\lceil
\lfloor
Script
, and
and o
and
Symbol
N and
Symbol
/
h
d
b
0/ and
Other symbols
Sym- Script
bol
\partial
M and
and
K and
I and
, and
Symbol
\imath
Script
\Eta and
\eta
\Theta,
\theta and
\vartheta
\Iota and
\iota
\Kappa and
\kappa
\Lambda and
\lambda
\Mu and \mu
H and
Z and
\Epsilon,
\epsilon and
\varepsilon
\Zeta and
\zeta
E , and
Symbol
\Re
Script
and
and
X and
, , and
and
T and
, and
P , and
Symbol
\nabla
Script
\Phi, \phi
and \varphi
\Chi and
\chi
\Psi and
\psi
\Omega and
\omega
\Sigma,
\sigma and
\varsigma
\Tau and
\tau
\Upsilon
and \upsilon
\Rho, \rho
and \varrho
\eth
\hbar
`
Symbol
arcsin
arccos
arctan
\arcsin
\arccos
\arctan
\arccot
Script
\jmath
\ell
Symbol
sinh
cosh
tanh
coth
\Im
\wp
\sinh
\cosh
\tanh
\coth
Script
Symbol
sec
csc
\Box
\infty
As you begin to see, typesetting math can be tricky at times. However, because
Latex provides so much control, you can get professional quality mathematics
typesetting with relatively little effort (once you've had a bit of practice, of
course!). It would be possible to keep going and going with math topics
17.17. Summary
Trigonometric Functions
SymScript
bol
sin
\sin
cos
\cos
tan
\tan
cot
\cot
63
http://en.meta.org/wiki/Help%3ADisplaying%20a%20formula
meta:Help:Displaying a formula63 : Wikimedia uses a subset of LaTeX

commands.
17.19. Further reading
17.18. Notes
because it seems potentially limitless. However, with this tutorial, you should
be able to get along sufficiently.
68
65
66
67
64
http://www.artofproblemsolving.com/Wiki/index.php/LaTeX:
Symbols
http://detexify.kirelabs.org
http://www.thestudentroom.co.uk/wiki/LaTeX
http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/symbols/
comprehensive/symbols-letter.pdf
http://pl.wikibooks.org/wiki/LaTeX%2FMatematyka
pl:LaTeX/Matematyka68
LaTeX maths symbols64

detexify65 : applet for looking up LaTeX symbols by handwriting them
[ftp://ftp.ams.org/pub/tex/doc/amsmath/amsldoc.pdf
amsmath
documentation]
LaTeX - The Student Room66
The Comprehensive LaTeX Symbol List67
17.20. External links
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/American%20Mathematical%
20Society
This page outlines some more advanced uses of mathematics markup using
LaTeX. In particular it makes heavy use of the AMS-LaTeX packages supplied
by the American Mathematical Society1 .
18. Advanced Mathematics
You can also use the \label and \ref (or \eqref from the amsmath
package) commands to label and reference equations, respectively. For equation number 1, \ref results in 1 and \eqref results in (1) :
f (x) = (x + a)(x + b)ww(1)
\begin{equation}
f(x)=(x+a)(x+b)
\end{equation}
The equation environment automatically numbers your equation.
18.1. Equation numbering
(1)
this references the equation 1.
52 5 = 20
this references the equation \ref{eq:someequation}.
\begin{equation} \label{eq:someequation}
5^2 - 5 = 20
\end{equation}
(1)
Further information is provided in the labels and cross-referencing2 chapter.
where (1) is true if a and b

are integers with b 6= c.
a = bq + r
where \eqref{eq:erl} is true if $a$ and $b$ are integers with $b \neq
c$.
\begin{equation} \label{eq:erl}
a = bq + r
\end{equation}
to have the enumeration go to the subsection level.
\numberwithin{equation}{subsection}
to the preamble to get enumeration at the section level or
\numberwithin{equation}{section}
To have the enumeration follow from your section or subsection heading, you
must use the amsmath package or use AMS class documents. Then enter
q
2
1 cv2 ww(1.1.1)
If the style you follow requires putting dots after ordinals (as it is required at least in Polish typography) the
\numberwithin{equation}{subsection} command in preamble
will result in the equation number in the above example to be rendered in this
way: (1.1..1).
L0 = L
\subsection{A subsection}
\begin{equation}
L = {L}{\sqrt{1-\frac{v^2}{c^2}}}
\end{equation}
\end{document}
\documentclass[12pt]{article}
\numberwithin{equation}{subsection}
\begin{document}
\section{First Section}
To number subordinate equations in a numbered equation environment, place

the part of document containing them in a subequations environment:
18.1.1. Subordinate equation numbering
Note: Though it may look like the \renewcommand works by itself, it won't
reset the equation number with each new section. It must be used together
with manual equation number resetting after each new section beginning or
with the much cleaner \numberwithin.
in the preamble of the document.
\renewcommand{\theequation}{\thesubsection\arabic{equation}}
For numbering scheme using \numberwithin{equation}{subsectio

use:
\renewcommand{\theequation}{\thesection\arabic{equation}}
To remove the duplicate dot, add following command immediately after

\numberwithin{equation}{subsection} :
(1.1b)
Referencing of subordinate equations can be done in two methods. Adding

a label after the \begin{subequations} command, will reference to
the main equation (1.1 the case presented). Adding a label after at the end of
each line, before the \\ command, will reference to the sub-equation (1.1a or
E 0 = B 4 j,
Maxwell0 s equations:
B0 = E,
(1.1a)
\begin{subequations}
Maxwells equations:
\begin{align}
B&=-\nabla \times E,\\
E&=\nabla \times B - 4\pi j,
\end{align}
\end{subequations}
The \overset and \underset commands3 typeset symbols above and

below expressions. Without AmsTex the same result of \overset can be
18.2.1. Above and below
An often encountered problem with displayed environments (displaymath

and equation) is the lack of any ability to span multiple lines. While it is
possible to define lines individually, these will not be aligned.
18.2. Vertically aligning displayed mathematics
1.1b the case presented). It is possible to add both labels in case both types of
references are needed.
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/L%27H%F4pital%27s_rule
or to show usage of L'Hpital's rule4 :
A = B; A = B
\[
A \overset{!}{=} B; A \stackrel{!}{=} B
\]
obtained with \stackrel. This can be particularly useful for creating new
binary relations:
1
2
\[
to reduce above example to:
\newcom
mand{\Heq}[1]{\overset{\left[#1\right]}{\underset{\mathrm{H}}{=}}}
It's convenient to define a new operator that will set the equal sign with H and
provided fraction:
0
x 1 [ 0 ]
x
limx0 e 2x
= limx0 e2 =
\[
\lim_{x\to 0}{\frac{e^x-1}{2x}}
\overset{\left[\frac{0}{0}\right]}{\underset{\mathrm{H}}{=}<!
\lim_{x\to 0}{\frac{e^x}{2}}={\frac{1}{2}}
\]
real
imaginary
z
}|
{
z = |{z}
x + iy
|{z}
complex number
\[
z = \overbrace{
\underbrace{x}_\text{real} +
\underbrace{iy}_\text{imaginary}
}^\text{complex number}
\]
If the purpose is to make comments on particular parts of an equation, the

\overbrace and \underbrace commands may be more useful, however
they have a different syntax:
\lim_{x\to 0}{\frac{e^x-1}{2x}}

\Heq{\frac{0}{0}}
\lim_{x\to 0}{\frac{e^x}{2}}={\frac{1}{2}}
\]
Figure 63
\[
y = a + f(\underbrace{b x}_{
\ge 0 \text{ by assumption}})
= a + f(\underbrace{b x}_{
\mathclap{\ge 0 \text{ by assumption}}})
\]
Sometimes the comments are longer than the formula being commented
on, which can cause spacing problems. These can be removed using the
\mathclap command5 :
Figure 64
\[
z = \overbracket[3pt]{
\underbracket{x}_{\text{real}} +
\underbracket[0.5pt][7pt]{iy}_{\text{imaginary}}
}^{\text{complex number}}
\]
Alternatively, to use brackets instead of braces use \underbracket and

\overbracket commands6 :
or that way
A B C
this way
\[
A \xleftarrow{\text{this way}} B
\xrightarrow[\text{or that way}]{} C
\]
The \xleftarrow and \xrightarrow commands7 produce arrows

which extend to the length of the text. Yet again, the syntax is different:
the optional argument (using [ & ]) specifies the subscript, and the mandatory
argument (using { & }) specifies the superscript (this can be left empty).
\underbracket[rule thickness][bracket height]{argument}_{text below}
The optional arguments set the rule thickness and bracket height respectively:
\[
a
%
A
%
B
%
C
%
D
%
E
%
F
\]
\xmapsto[under]{over} G\\
\xhookrightarrow[under]{over} F\\
\xhookleftarrow[under]{over} E\\
\xLeftrightarrow[under]{over} D\\
\xRightarrow[under]{over} C\\
\xLeftarrow[under]{over} B\\
\xleftrightarrow[under]{over} b\\
For more extensible arrows, you must use mathtools package:
and for harpoons:
Figure 65
\[
H
%
I
%
J
%
K
%
L
%
M
\]
\xleftrightharpoons[under]{over} N
\xrightleftharpoons[under]{over} M\\
\xleftharpoonup[under]{over} L\\
\xleftharpoondown[under]{over} K\\
\xrightharpoonup[under]{over} J\\
\xrightharpoondown[under]{over} I\\
Figure 66
= x2 + (a + b)x + ab
f (x) = (x + a)(x + b)
\begin{align*}
f(x) &= (x+a)(x+b) \\
&= x^2 + (a+b)x + ab
\end{align*}
The align* environment is used like the displaymath or equation*

environment:
The align and align* environments8 are used for arranging equations of
multiple lines. As with matrices and tables, \\ specifies a line break, and & is
used to indicate the point at which the lines should be aligned.
18.2.2. align and align*
+ 10x + 12
f (x) = x4 + 7x3 + 2x2

(3)
\begin{align}
f(x) &= x^4 + 7x^3 + 2x^2 \nonumber \\
&\qquad {} + 10x + 12
\end{align}
The align is similar, but automatically numbers each line like the
equation environment. Individual lines may be referred to by placing
a \label{...} before the linebreak. The \nonumber or \notag command can be used to suppress the number for a given line:
To force numbering on a specific line, use the \tag{...} command before

the linebreak.
ab cd e f
gh i j
\begin{align*}
a & b & c & d & e & f & g & h & i & j
\end{align*}
More complicated alignments are possible. The following example illustrates

the alignment rule of align*:
Notice that we've added some indenting on the second line. Also, we need to
insert the double braces {} before the + sign because otherwise latex won't
create the correct spacing after the + sign. The reason for this is that without
the braces, latex interprets the + sign as a unary operator, instead of the binary
operator that it really is.
(4)
In this construction, the sizes of the left and right braces are not automatically
equal, in spite of the use of \left\{ and \right\}. This is because each
+ 10x + 12}

f (x) = x4 + 7x3 + 2x2
\begin{align}
f(x) &= \pi \left\{ x^4 + 7x^3 + 2x^2 \right.\nonumber\\
&\qquad \left. {} + 10x + 12 \right\}
\end{align}
Additional &'s on a single line will specify multiple "equation columns", each
of which is aligned. If you want a brace to continue across a new line, do the
following:
18.2.3. Braces spanning multiple lines
A=
XXX
YYY . . .
Z

(5)
\begin{align}
A &=
\left(\int_t XXX
\right.\nonumber\\
&\qquad \left.\vphantom{\int_t} YYY \dots \right)
\end{align}
Or you can replicate the height of the taller equation in the other using the
\vphantom command:
line is typeset as a completely separate equation notice the use of \right.

and \left. so there are no unpaired \left and \right commands within
a line. (These aren't needed if the formula is on one line.) You can control the
size of the braces manually with the \big, \Big, \bigg, \Bigg commands.
if x 0
if x < 0
(
exp x
u(x) =
1
\[
u(x) =
\begin{cases}
\exp{x} & \text{if } x \geq 0 \\
1
& \text{if } x < 0
\end{cases}
\]
The cases environment9 allows the writing of piecewise functions:
18.2.4. The cases environment
10
To force display style for equations inside this construct, use dcases environment10 :
Unfortunately, it sets the internal math environment to text style, leading to

such result:
(R
x dx
a=
2
b
Just like before, you don't have to take care of definition or alignment of
columns, LaTeX will do it for you.
11
Often the second column consists mostly of normal text, to set it in normal
roman font of the document use dcases* environment11 :
Z
x dx
a=
b2
\[
a =
\begin{dcases}
\int x\, dx\\
b^2
\end{dcases}
\]
when x is even
when x is odd
Environment name
Description
Notes
Although align and align* are the most useful, there are several other
environments which may also be of interest:
18.2.5. Other environments
(
x
f (x) =
x
\[
f(x) = \begin{dcases*}
x & when $x$ is even\\
-x & when $x$ is odd
\end{dcases*}
\]
Consecutive equations without alignment
gather and
gather*13

First line left aligned,

last line right aligned
multline and
multline*12
12
13
Description
Similar to align
and align*
Environment name
eqnarray and
eqnarray*
Notes
Not recommended
since spacing is inconsistent
Equation number
aligned vertically
with first line and not
centered as with other
other environments.
Description
Similar to align,
but left aligns first
equation column, and
right aligns last column
Takes an argument
specifying number
of columns. Allows
to control explicitly
the horizontal space
between equations
You can calculate the
number of columns by
counting & characters
in a line, adding 1 and
dividing the result by
2
Notes
14
15

There are also few environments that don't form a math environment by themselves and can be used as building blocks for more elaborate structures:
alignat and
alignat*15
Environment name
flalign and
flalign*14
16
17
18

aligned18
split17
Math environment name

gathered16
Description
Allows to gather few equations
to be set under each other and assigned a single equation number
Similar to align*, but used inside another displayed mathematics environment
Similar to align, to be used inside another mathematics environment.
Description
Similar to alignat, and just as
it, takes an additional argument
specifying number of columns of
equations to set.
19
\begin{equation}
\left.\begin{aligned}
B&=-\partial \times E,\\
E&=\partial \times B - 4\pi j,
\end{aligned}
\right\}
\qquad \text{Maxwells equations}
\end{equation}
For example:
Math environment name

alignedat19
)
Maxwell0 s equations
(1.1)
10 =
x+y
x
1 = x + y
20 =
2 =
x
y
xy
(2)
(1)
\begin{alignat}{2}
\sigma_1 &= x + y &\quad \sigma_2 &= \frac{x}{y} \\
\sigma_1 &= \frac{\partial x + y}{\partial x} & \sigma_2
&= \frac{\partial \frac{x}{y}}{\partial x}
\end{alignat}
E = B 4 j,
B0 = E,
\documentclass[a4paper,fleqn]{report}
\setlength{\mathindent}{1cm}
\begin{document}
\noindent Eulers formula is given below:
\begin{equation*}
e^{ix} = \cos{x} + i \sin{x}
\end{equation*}
\noindent This is a very important formula.
\end{document}
In order to indent an equation, you can set fleqn in the document class and
then specify a certain value for \mathindent variable:
18.3. Indented Equations
To suggest LaTeX a page break inside one of amsmath environments you

may use the \displaybreak command before line break. Just like with
18.4. Page breaks in math environments
Figure 67
Specific usage may look like this:
LaTeX will insert a page break into a long equation if it has additional text
added using \intertext{} without any additional commands though.
Alternatively, you may enable automatic page breaks in math environments

with \allowdisplaybreaks. It can too have an optional argument denoting permissiveness of page breaks in equations. Similarly, 1 means "allow
page breaks but avoid them" and 4 means "break whenever you want". You
can prohibit a page break after a given line using \\*.
\pagebreak, \displaybreak can take an optional argument between 0

and 4 denoting the level of desirability of a page break in specific break. While
0 means "it is permissible to break here", 4 forces a break. No argument means
the same as 4.
\begin{align*}
&\vdots\\
&=12+7 \int_0^2
\left(
-\frac{1}{4}\left(e^{-4t_1}+e^{4t_1-8}\right)
\right)\,dt_1\displaybreak[3]\\
&= 12-\frac{7}{4}\int_0^2 e^{-4t_1}+e^{4t_1-8}\,dt_1\\
&\vdots %
\end{align*}
Figure 68
If you want the entire line or several equations to be boxed, use a minipage
inside an \fbox{}:
Figure 69
\begin{equation}
\boxed{x^2+y^2 = z^2}
\end{equation}
For a single equation or alignment building block, with the tag outside the box,
use \boxed{}:
18.5. Boxed Equations
There is also the mathtools \Aboxed{} which is able to box across alignment
marks
Figure 70
\fbox{
\addtolength{\linewidth}{-2\fboxsep}%
\addtolength{\linewidth}{-2\fboxrule}%
\begin{minipage}{\linewidth}
\begin{equation}
x^2+y^2=z^2
\end{equation}
\end{minipage}
}
Figure 71
\begin{align*}
\Aboxed{ f(x) & = \int h(x)\, dx} \\
& = g(x)
\end{align*}
20
21
22

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Arg%20max
\[
\operatorname{arg\,max}_a f(a)
= \operatorname*{arg\,max}_b f(b)
\]
Although many common operators20 are available in LaTeX, sometimes you

will need to write your own, for example to typeset the argmax21 operator. The
\operatorname and \operatorname* commands22 display a custom
operators, the * version sets the underscored option underneath like the \lim
operator:
18.6. Custom operators
23
\[
\argmax_c f(c)
\]
This defines a new command which may be referred to in the body:
\DeclareMathOperator*{\argmax}{arg\,max}
However if the operator is frequently used, it is preferable to

keep within the LaTeX ideal of markup to define a new operator.
The \DeclareMathOperator and \DeclareMathOperator* commands23 are specified in the header of the document:
arg maxa f (a) = arg maxb f (b)
\begin{equation}
\lim_{a\to \infty} \tfrac{1}{a}
\end{equation}
There are defaults for placement of subscripts and superscripts. For example,
limits for the lim operator are usually placed below the symbol, like this:
18.7.1. Limits
18.7. Advanced formatting
arg max f (c)
A lim in running text (inside $...$) will have its limits placed on the side,
so that additional leading won't be required. To override this behavior use
\limits command.
lima a1
\begin{equation}
\lim\nolimits_{a\to \infty} \tfrac{1}{a}
\end{equation}
To override this behavior use the \nolimits operator:
lima a1
Limits below and under:
Rb 2
x
\begin{equation}
\int_a^b x^2
\end{equation}
Similarly one can put subscripts under a symbol that usually have them on the
side:
To change default placement in all instances of summation-type symbol to the

side add nosumlimits option to amsmath package. To change placement
for integral symbols add intlimits to options and nonamelimits to
change the default for named operators like det, min, lim...
Rb 2
x
\begin{equation}
\int\limits_a^b x^2
\end{equation}
It's impossible to mix them with typical usage of such symbols:
0 Cn
\begin{equation}
\sum\nolimits C_n
\end{equation}
While you can place symbols in sub- or superscript in summation style symbols
with the above introduced \nolimits:
18.7.2. Subscripts and superscripts
\begin{equation}
\sideset{}{}\sum_{n=1}C_n
\end{equation}
To add both prime and a limit to a symbol, one have to use \sideset
command:
0n=1 Cn
\begin{equation}
\sum_{n=1}\nolimits C_n
\end{equation}
If you wish to place them on the corners of an arbitrary symbol, you should
use \fourIdx from the fouridx package.
b
a
\begin{equation}
\sideset{_a^b}{_c^d}\sum
\end{equation}
It's very flexible, for example, to put letters in each corner of the symbol use
this command:
n=1 Cn
1in
1 jm
Mi, j
\begin{equation}
\prod_{\substack{
1\le i \le n\\
1\le j \le m}}
M_{i,j}
\end{equation}
To produce multiline subscript use \substack command:
18.7.3. Multiline subscripts
\begin{minipage}{3in}
\begin{align*}
\intertext{If}
A &= \sigma_1+\sigma_2\\
B &= \rho_1+\rho_2\\
\intertext{then}
C(x) &= e^{Ax^2+\pi}+B
\end{align*}
\end{minipage}
To add small interjections in math environments use \intertext command:
18.8. Text in aligned math display
Also in this example, the command \shortintertext{} from the

mathtools package could have been used instead of intertext to reduce
the amount of vertical whitespace added between the lines.
Note that usage of this command doesn't change alignment, as would stopping
and restarting the align environment.
Figure 72
Size command
\displaystyle
\textstyle
\scriptstyle
\scriptscriptstyle
Description
Size for equations in display mode
Size for equations in text mode
Size for first sub/superscripts
Size for subsequent sub/superscripts
Probably a rare event, but there may be a time when you would prefer to have
some control of the size. For example, using text-mode maths, by default
a simple fraction will look like this: ab where as you may prefer to have it
displayed larger, like when in display mode, but still keeping it in-line, like
a
this: .
b
A simple approach is to utilize the predefined sizes for maths elements:
18.9. Changing font size
1
1
a2 + a +a
3 4
24
25

As you can see, as the fractions continue, they get smaller (although they will
not get any smaller as in this example, they have reached the \scriptstyle
1+
x = a0 + a
\begin{equation}
x = a_0 + \frac{1}{a_1 + \frac{1}{a_2 + \frac{1}{a_3 + a_4}}<
\end{equation}
A classic example to see this in use is typesetting continued fractions (though

it's better to use the \cfrac command24 described in the Mathematics25
chapter over the method provided below). The following code provides an
example.
a1 +
a2 +
1
a3 + a4
Another approach is to use the \DeclareMathSizes command to select your preferred sizes. You can only define sizes for \displaystyle,
x = a0 +
\begin{equation}
x = a_0 + \frac{1}{\displaystyle a_1
+ \frac{1}{\displaystyle a_2
+ \frac{1}{\displaystyle a_3 + a_4}}}
\end{equation}
limit). If you wanted to keep the size consistent, you could declare each fraction
to use the display style instead, e.g.:
% For size 10 text

% For size 11 text
% For size 12 text
Put
18.10. Forcing \displaystyle for all math in a document
\DeclareMathSizes{10}{18}{12}{8}
NB the changes only take place if the value in the first argument matches the
current document text size. It is therefore common to see a set of declarations
in the preamble, in the event of the main font being changed. E.g.,
However, it's fairly easy to use: \DeclareMathSizes{ds}{ts}{ss}{s

where ds is the display size, ts is the text size, etc. The values you input are
assumed to be point (pt) size.
\textstyle, etc. One potential downside is that this command sets the
global maths sizes, as it can only be used in the document preamble.
Short skips are used if the preceding line ends, horizontally, before the formula.
These parameters must be set after \begin{document}.
\abovedisplayskip=12pt
\belowdisplayskip=12pt
\abovedisplayshortskip=0pt
\belowdisplayshortskip=7pt
There are four parameters which control the vertical whitespace around displayed math:
18.11. Adjusting vertical whitespace around displayed

math
before \begin{document} to force all math to \displaystyle.
\everymath{\displaystyle}
18.12. Notes
\label{marker}
Another good point of LaTeX is that you can easily reference almost anything
that is numbered (sections, figures, formulas), and LaTeX will take care of
numbering, updating it whenever necessary. The commands to be used do not
depend on what you are referencing, and they are:
19.1. Introduction
19. Labels and Cross-referencing
LaTeX will calculate the right numbering for the objects in the document; the
marker you have used to label the object will not be shown anywhere in the
document. Then LaTeX will replace the string "\ref{marker}" with the
right number that was assigned to the object. If you reference a marker that
does not exist, the compilation of the document will be successful but LaTeX
will return a warning:
It will print the number of the page where the object is.
\pageref{marker}
you can reference the object you have marked before. This prints the number
that was assigned to the object.
\ref{marker}
you give the object you want to reference a marker, you can see it like a
name.
LaTeX Warning: Label(s) may have changed.

to get cross-references right.
Rerun
As you may have noticed reading how it works, it is a two-step process: first the
compiler has to store the labels with the right number to be used for referencing,
then it has to replace the \ref with the right number. That is why, when you
use references, you have to compile your document twice to see the proper
output. If you compile it only once, LaTeX will use the older information it
collected in previous compilations (that might be outdated), but the compiler
will inform you printing on the screen at the end of the compilation:
and it will replace "\ref{unknown-marker}" with "??" (so it will be easy

to find in the document).
LaTeX Warning: There were undefined references.
chap:
sec:
fig:
tab:
eq:
lst:
chapter
section
figure
table
equation
code listing
Since you can use exactly the same commands to reference almost anything,
you might get a bit confused after you have introduced a lot of references. It
is common practice among LaTeX users to add a few letters to the label to
describe what you are referencing. Here is an example:
See figure~\ref{fig:test} on page~\pageref{fig:test}.
Using the command \pageref{} you can help the reader to find the referenced object by providing also the page number where it can be found. You
could write something like:
If you want to be able to see the markers you are using in the output document
as well, you can use the showkeys package; this can be very useful while
developing your document. For more information see the Packages1 section.
Another suggestion: try to avoid using numbers within labels. You are better
off describing what the object is about. This way, if you change the order of
the objects, you will not have to rename all your labels and their references.
Following this convention, the label of a figure will look like

\label{fig:my_figure}, etc. You are not obligated to use these prefixes. You can use any string as argument of \label{...}, but these
prefixes become increasingly useful as your document grows in size.
Figure
I greeted in section~\ref{sec:greetings}.
\section{Referencing}
Hello!
\section{Greetings}
\label{sec:greetings}
19.2.1. Sections
73
Here are some practical examples, but you will notice that they are all the same
because they all use the same commands.
19.2. Examples
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/non-breaking%20space
You can reference a picture by inserting it in the figure floating environment.
19.2.2. Pictures
You could place the label anywhere in the section; however, in order to avoid
confusion, it is better to place it immediately after the beginning of the section.
Note how the marker starts with sec:, as suggested before. The label is then
referenced in a different section. The tilde () indicates a non-breaking space2 .
When a label is declared within a float environment, the \ref{...} will

return the respective fig/table number, but it must occur after the caption.
When declared outside, it will give the section number. To be completely safe,
the label for any picture or table can go within the \caption{} command,
as in
Figure 74
\begin{figure}
\centering
\caption{Close-up of a gull}
\label{gull}
\end{figure}
Figure~\ref{gull} shows a photograph of a gull.
\begin{figure}
\centering
\caption{Close-up of a gull} \label{fig:gull}
\end{figure}
The command \label must appear after (or inside) \caption. Otherwise,
it will pick up the current section or list number instead of what you intended.
Fixing wrong labels
See the Floats, Figures and Captions3 section for more about the figure and
related environments.
\caption{Close-up of a gull\label{gull}}
hyperref/README
Here is an example showing how to reference formulas:
19.2.3. Formulas
\usepackage[hypcap]{caption}
In case you use the package hyperref to create a PDF, the links to tables or
figures will point to the caption of the table or figure, which is always below
the table or figure itself4 . Therefore the table or figure will not be visible, if
it is above the pointer and one has to scroll up in order to see it. If you want
the link point to the top of the image you can give the option hypcap to the
caption package:
Issues with links to tables and figures handled by hyperref
Figure 75
As you can see, the label is placed soon after the beginning of the math mode.
In order to reference a formula, you have to use an environment that adds
numbers. Most of the times you will be using the equation environment;
and so we have solved equation \ref{eq:solve}
\begin{equation}
x_2 = \frac{5 - \sqrt{25 - 4 \times 6}}{2} = 2
\end{equation}
\begin{equation}
x_1 = \frac{5 + \sqrt{25 - 4 \times 6}}{2} = 3
\end{equation}
\begin{equation} \label{eq:solve}
x^2 - 5 x + 6 = 0
\end{equation}
The \tag{label} command allows replacing the labelnumber by the arbitrary text string label.
tag
The amsmath package adds a new command for referencing formulas; it

is \eqref{}. It works exactly like \ref{}, but it adds brackets so that,
instead of printing a plain number as 5, it will print (5). This can be useful
to help the reader distinguish between formulas and other things, without the
need to repeat the word "formula" before any reference. Its output can be
changed as desired; for more information see the amsmath documentation.
eqref
that is the best choice for one-line formulas, whether you are using amsmath
or not. Note also the eq: prefix in the label.
The cases package adds the \numcases and the \subnumcases commands, which produce multi-case equations with a separate equation number
and a separate equation number plus a letter, respectively, for each case.
cases
The amsmath package adds the \numberwithin{countera}{counte

command
which
replaces
the
simple
countera
by
a
more sophisticated counterb.countera.
For example
\numberwithin{equation}{section} in the preamble will
prepend the section number to all equation numbers.
numberwithin
This command has to be used very carefully. It outputs more than one word, so
it may happen its output falls on two different pages. In this case, the algorithm
can get confused and cause a loop. Let's make an example. You label an object
on page 23 and the \vref output happens to stay between page 23 and 24. If
it were on page 23, it would print like the basic ref, if it were on page 24, it
would print "on the previous page", but it is on both, and this may cause some
strange errors at compiling time that are very hard to be fixed. You could think
that this happens very rarely; unfortunately, if you write a long document it
The varioref package introduces a new command called \vref{}. This

command is used exactly like the basic \ref, but it has a different output
according to the context. If the object to be referenced is in the same page, it
works just like \ref; if the object is far away it will print something like "5
on page 25", i.e. it adds the page number automatically. If the object is close,
it can use more refined sentences like "on the next page" or "on the facing
page" automatically, according to the context and the document class.
19.3. The varioref package
5
6
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/LaTeX%2FPackages%2FHyperref
http://www.tug.org/applications/hyperref/manual.html#
TBL-23
The hyperref5 package introduces another useful command;

\autoref{}.
This command creates a reference with additional
text corresponding to the target's type, all of which will be a hyperlink. For
example, the command \autoref{sec:intro} would create a hyperlink
to the \label{sec:intro} command, wherever it is. Assuming that this
label is pointing to a section, the hyperlink would contain the text "section
3.4", or similar (the full list of default names can be found here6 ). Note that,
while there's an
19.4. The hyperref package and \autoref{}
is not uncommon to have hundreds of references, so situations like these are

likely to happen. One way to avoid problems during development is to use the
standard ref all the time, and convert it to vref when the document is close
to its final version, and then making adjustments to fix possible problems.
If you would like a hyperlink reference, but do not want the predefined
text that \autoref{} provides, you can do this with a command such
as \hyperref[sec:intro]{Appendix\ref*{sec:intro}}.
Note that you can disable the creation of hyperlinks in hyperref, and
just use these commands for automatic text.
This renaming trick can, of course, be used for other purposes as well.
\def\sectionautorefname{Section}
command is defined to produce capitalized versions (useful, for instance, when

starting sentences); but since the capitalization or autoref names was chosen
by the package author, you can customize the prefixed text by redefining
\typeautorefname to the prefix you want, as in:
\Autoref
command that produces an unlinked prefix (useful if the label is on the same
page as the reference), no alternative
\autoref*
Input:
The hyperref package also automatically includes the nameref package,

and a similarly named command. It is similar to \autoref{}, but inserts
text corresponding to the section name, for example.
19.5. The hyperref package and \nameref{}
Keep in mind that the \label must be placed inside an environment with a
counter, such as a table or a figure. Otherwise, not only the number will refer
to the current section, as mentioned above7 , but the name will refer to the
previous environment with a counter. For example, if you put a label after
closing a figure, the label will still say "figure n", on which n is the current
section number.
When you define a \label outside a figure, a table, or other floating objects, the label points to the current section. In some case, this behavior
is not what you'd like and you'd prefer the generated link to point to the
line where the \label is defined. This can be achieved with the command
\phantomsection as in this example:
19.6. The hyperref package and

\phantomsection
In section MyFirstSection we defined...
Output:
\section{MyFirstSection} \label{sec:marker}
\section{MySecondSection}
In section~\nameref{sec:marker} we defined...
19.7. References
%The link location will be placed on the line below.

\phantomsection
\label{the_label}
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Theorem
With "theorem1 " we can mean any kind of labelled enunciation that we want
to look separated from the rest of the text and with sequential numbers next to
it. This approach is commonly used for theorems in mathematics, but can be
used for anything. LaTeX provides a command that will let you easily define
any theorem-like enunciation.
20. Theorems
will define the mydef environment; if you use it like this:
\newtheorem{mydef}{Definition}
put it in the preamble. The first argument is the name you will use to reference
it, the second argument is the output LaTeX will print whenever you use it.
For example:
\newtheorem{name}{Printed output}
The easiest is the following:
\usepackage{amsthm}
First of all, make sure you have the amsthm package enabled:
20.1. Basic theorems
\newtheorem{name}{Printed output}[numberby]
Often the counters are determined by section, for example "Theorem 2.3"
refers to the 3rd theorem in the 2nd section of a document. In this case, specify
the theorem as follows:
20.2. Theorem counters
with line breaks separating it from the rest of the text.
Definition 3 Here is a new definition
It will look like this:
\begin{mydef}
Here is a new definition
\end{mydef}
2
3

Requires the amsthm package
\newtheorem*{mydef}{Definition}
You can also create a theorem environment that is not numbered by using the
newtheorem* command3 . For instance,
where counter is the name of the counter to be used. Usually this will be the
name of the master theorem.
\newtheorem{name}[counter]{Printed output}
By default, each theorem uses its own counter. However it is common for
similar types of theorems (e.g. Theorems, Lemmas and Corollaries) to share a
counter. In this case, define subsequent theorems as:
where numberby is the name of the section level2 (section/subsection/etc.) at

which the numbering is to take place.
4
5
6

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Q.E.D
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tombstone%20%28typography%29
It just adds Proof in italics at the beginning of the text given as argument and
a white square (Q.E.D5 symbol, also known as a tombstone6 ) at the end of
\begin{proof}
Here is my proof
\end{proof}
The proof environment4 can be used for adding the proof of a theorem. The
basic usage is:
20.3. Proofs
defines the mydef environment, which will generate definitions without numbering. This requires amsthm package.
\begin{proof}
Here is my proof:
If the last line of the proof is displayed math then the Q.E.D. symbol will
appear on a subsequent empty line. To put the Q.E.D. symbol at the end of the
last line, use the \qedhere command:
\begin{proof}[Proof of important theorem]

Here is my important proof
\end{proof}
If you would like to manually name the proof, include the name in square
brackets:
it. If you are writing in another language than English, just use babel7 with
the right argument and the word Proof printed in the output will be translated
accordingly; anyway, in the source the name of the environment remains
proof.
\renewcommand{\qedsymbol}{}
To use a custom Q.E.D. symbol, redefine the \qedsymbol command. To

hide the Q.E.D. symbol altogether, redefine it to be blank:
The method above does not work with the deprecated environment
eqnarray*. Use align* instead.
\[
a^2 + b^2 = c^2 \qedhere
\]
\end{proof}
definition
remark
stylename
plain
Description
Used for theorems, lemmas,
propositions, etc. (default)
Used for definitions and examples
Used for remarks and notes
the argument is the style you want to use. All subsequently defined theorems
will use this style. Here is a list of the possible pre-defined styles:
\theoremstyle{stylename}
It adds the possibility to change the output of the environments defined by

\newtheorem using the \theoremstyle command8 command in the
header:
20.4. Theorem styles
\thmname{#1}\thmnumber{ #2}:\thmnote{ #3}
(Any arguments that are left blank will assume their default value). Here is an
example headspec:
\newtheoremstyle{stylename}% name of the style to be used

{spaceabove}% measure of space to leave above the theorem. E.g.:
3pt
{spacebelow}% measure of space to leave below the theorem. E.g.:
3pt
{bodyfont}% name of font to use in the body of the theorem
{indent}% measure of space to indent
{headfont}% name of head font
{headpunctuation}% punctuation between head and body
{headspace}% space after theorem head; " " = normal interword space
{headspec}% Manually specify head
To define your own style, use the \newtheoremstyle command9 :
20.4.1. Custom styles
(The note argument, which in this case is Topology, is always optional, but
will not appear by default unless you specify it as above in the head spec).
\begin{definition}[Topology]...
for the following:
Definition 2: Topology
which would look something like:
% Hand made theorem

\newcounter{thm}[section]
\renewcommand{\thethm}{\thesection.\arabic{thm}}
\def\claim#1{\par\medskip\noindent\refstepcounter{thm}\hbox{\bf
\arabic{chapter}.\arabic{section}.\arabic{thm}. #1.}
\it\ %\ignorespaces
}
\def\endclaim{
\par\medskip}
\newenvironment{thm}{\claim}{\endclaim}
% Fix latex
\def\smallskip{\vskip\smallskipamount}
\def\medskip{\vskip\medskipamount}
\def\bigskip{\vskip\bigskipamount}
The theorem environment conflicts with other environments, for example

wrapfigure. A work around is to redefine theorem, for example the following
way:
20.5. Conflicts
[ftp://ftp.ams.org/pub/tex/doc/amscls/amsthdoc.pdf
documentation]
20.6. Notes
\begin{thm}{Claim}\label{lyt-prob}
Let it be.
Then you know.
\end{thm}
In this case theorem looks like:
amsthm
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/pseudocode
LaTeX has a variety of packages that can help to format algorithms, code, and
"pseudocode1 ". These packages provide stylistic enhancements over a uniform
style (i.e., typewriter fonts) so that constructs such as loops or conditionals are
visually separated from other text.
21. Algorithms and Pseudocode
\ForAll{<condition>} <text> \EndFor
\For{<condition>} <text> \EndFor
\If{<condition>} <text> \EndIf
\State <text>
The algorithmic package uses a different set of commands than the

algorithmicx package. Basic commands are:
22.1. Typesetting using the algorithmic package
22. Typesetting Algorithms
http://www.tug.org/texlive/Contents/live/texmf-dist/doc/
latex/algorithms/algorithms.pdf
Complete documentation is listed at http://www.tug.org/texlive/Contents/live/tex

dist/doc/latex/algorithms/algorithms.pdf1 . Most commands are similar to the
algorithmicx equivalents, but with different capitalization.
\Comment{<text>}
\Return <text>
\Require <text>
\Repeat <text> \Until{<condition>}
\While{<condition>} <text> \EndWhile
Below is an example of typesetting a basic

ing the algorithmicx package (remember
algorithm usto add the
The command \begin{algorithmic} can be given the optional argument

of a positive integer, which if given will cause line numbering to occur at
multiples of that integer. E.g. \begin{algorithmic}[5] will enter the
algorithmic environment and number every fifth line.
The algorithmicx package provides a number of popular constructs

for algorithm designs. Put \usepackage{algpseudocode} in the
preamble to use the algorithmic environment to write algorithm pseudocode
(\begin{algorithmic}...\end{algorithmic}). You might want
to use the algorithm environment (\usepackage{algorithm})
to wrap your algorithmic code in an algorithm environment
(\begin{algorithm}...\end{algorithm}) to produce a floating
environment with numbered algorithms.
22.2. Typesetting using the algorithmicx package
The LaTeX source can be written to a format familiar to programmers so that it

is easy to read. This will not, however, affect the final layout in the document.
\begin{algorithmic}
\If {$i\geq maxval$}
\State $i\gets 0$
\Else
\If {$i+k\leq maxval$}
\State $i\gets i+k$
\EndIf
\EndIf
\end{algorithmic}
\usepackage{algpseudocode} statement to your document preamble):
There are three forms of this construct
22.2.1. If-statements
There are several constructs provided by algorithmicx detailed below.
Figure 76
A traditional "for" loop. The method of iteration is usually described in the

first argument,
\ForAll{<condition>} <text> \EndFor
\For{<condition>} <text> \EndFor
There are two forms
22.2.2. For-loops
The third form accepts as many \ElsIf{} clauses as required. Note that it
is \ElsIf and not \ElseIf.
\If{<condition>} <text> \ElsIf{<condition>} <text> \Else <text>

\EndIf
\If{<condition>} <text> \Else <text> \EndIf
\If{<condition>} <text> \EndIf
\Repeat <text> \Until{<condition>}
22.2.4. Repeat until condition
\While{$i \leq 10$}

\State i=i+1;
\EndWhile
\While{<condition>} <text> \EndWhile
22.2.3. While-loops
\For{$i = 1 \to 10$}

\State $i \gets i + 1$
\EndFor
e.g.
\Function{<name>}{<params>} <body> \EndFunction
22.2.8. Functions
\Ensure <text>
22.2.7. Postcondition
\Require <text>
22.2.6. Precondition
\Loop <text> \EndLoop
22.2.5. Infinite loops
Note to users who switched from the old algorithmic package: comments
may be placed everywhere in the source; there are no limitations as in the old
algorithmic package.
\Comment{<text>}
22.2.10. Comments
\Function{Increment}{$a$}
\State $a \gets a+1$
\State \Return $a$
\EndFunction
This command will usually be used in conjunction with a \State command

as follows:
\Return <text>
22.2.9. Returning variables
This defines two commands \<start> and \<end> which have no

parameters. The text displayed by them is \textbf{<start>} and
\textbf{<end>}.
\algblock[<block>]{<start>}{<end>}
To define blocks beginning with a starting command and ending with an ending
command, use
The algorithmicx package allows you to define your own environments.
22.2.12. Custom algorithmic blocks
\floatname{algorithm}{Procedure}
\renewcommand{\algorithmicrequire}{\textbf{Input:}}
\renewcommand{\algorithmicensure}{\textbf{Output:}}
22.2.11. Renaming things: algorithm to procedure,

require/ensure to input/output
\algblock[Name]{Start}{End}
\algblockdefx[NAME]{START}{END}%
[2][Unknown]{Start #1(#2)}%
{Ending}
\algblockdefx[NAME]{}{OTHEREND}%
[1]{Until (#1)}
\begin{algorithmic}
\Start
\Start
\START[One]{x}
\END
\START{0}
Example:
\algblockdefx[<block>]{<start>}{<end>}
[<startparamcount>][<default value>]{<start text>}
[<endparamcount>][<default value>]{<end text>}
With \algblockdefx you can give the text to be output by the starting and
ending command and the number of parameters for these commands. In the
text the n-th parameter is referenced by #n.
It is often useful for the algorithm produced by algorithmic to be "floated"

to the optimal point in the document to avoid it being split across pages.
The algorithm environment provides this and a few other useful features.
Include it by adding the
22.3. The algorithm environment
More
advanced
customization
and
other
constructions
are
described
in
the
algorithmicx
manual:
http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/algorithmicx/algorithmicx.pdf
\End
\end{algorithmic}
\OTHEREND{\texttt{True}}
\End
\Start
\End
The default numbering system for the algorithm package is to number

algorithms sequentially. This is often not desirable, particularly in large
documents where numbering according to chapter is more appropriate. The
numbering of algorithms can be influenced by providing the name of the
document component within which numbering should be recommenced. The
22.3.1. Algorithm numbering
\begin{algorithm}
\caption{<your caption for this algorithm>}
\label{<your label for references later in your document>}
\begin{algorithmic}
<algorithmic environment>
\end{algorithmic}
\end{algorithm}
\usepackage{algorithm} to your document's preamble. It is entered

into by
anywhere in the document, and LaTeX will print a list of the "algorithm"
environments in the document with the corresponding page and the caption.
\listofalgorithms
When you use figures or tables, you can add a list of them close to the table of
contents; the algorithm package provides a similar command. Just put
22.3.2. List of algorithms
\usepackage[chapter]{algorithm}
legal values for this option are: part, chapter, section, subsection, subsubsection
or nothing (default). For example:
\begin{algorithm}
environment
\caption{Calculate $y = x^n$}
\label{alg1}
commands later in the document
\begin{algorithmic}
environment
\Require $n \geq 0 \vee x \neq 0$
\Ensure $y = x^n$
\State $y \Leftarrow 1$
\If{$n < 0$}
\State $X \Leftarrow 1 / x$
\State $N \Leftarrow -n$
\Else
\State $X \Leftarrow x$
\State $N \Leftarrow n$
\EndIf
% enter the algorithmic
% give the algorithm a caption

% and a label for \ref{}
% enter the algorithm
This is an example taken from the manual (official manual, p.142 )
22.3.3. An example from the manual
y \times X$
N - 1$
X \times X$
N / 2$
http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/algorithms/algorithms.pdf
The official manual is located at
http://developer.berlios.de/docman/?group_id=3442
More information about all possible commands available at the project

page
\While{$N \neq 0$}

\If{$N$ is even}
\State $X \Leftarrow
\State $N \Leftarrow
\Else[$N$ is odd]
\State $y \Leftarrow
\State $N \Leftarrow
\EndIf
\EndWhile
\end{algorithmic}
\end{algorithm}
\begin{program}
\mbox{A fast exponentiation procedure:}
\BEGIN %
\FOR i:=1 \TO 10 \STEP 1 \DO
Below is an example of typesetting a basic algorithm using the program

package (remember to add the \usepackage{program} statement to
your document preamble):
The program package provides macros for typesetting algorithms. Each line
is set in math mode, so all the indentation and spacing is done automatically.
The notation |variable_name| can be used within normal text, maths
expressions or programs to indicate a variable name. Use \origbar to get
a normal | symbol in a program. The commands \A, \B, \P, \Q, \R, \S,
\T and \Z typeset the corresponding bold letter with the next object as a
subscript (eg \S1 typesets {\bf S$_1$} etc). Primes work normally, eg
\S.
22.4. Typesetting using the program package
|expt|(2,i); \\ |newline|() \OD %

\rcomment{This text will be set flush to the right margin}
\WHERE
\PROC |expt|(x,n) \BODY
z:=1;
\DO \IF n=0 \THEN \EXIT \FI;
\DO \IF |odd|(n) \THEN \EXIT \FI;
\COMMENT{This is a comment statement};
n:=n/2; x:=x*x \OD;
\{ n>0 \};
n:=n-1; z:=z*x \OD;
|print|(z) \ENDPROC
\END
\end{program}
The commands $ and $ are redefined to typeset an algorithm in a minipage,

so an algorithm can appear as a single box in a formula. For example, to state
that a particular action system is equivalent to a WHILE loop you can write:
Figure 77
Loops with multiple exits:
\DO 2 \origbar x \AND x>0 \AR x:= x/2

\BAR \NOT 2 \origbar x
\AR x:= \modbar{x+3} \OD
\end{program}
\begin{program}
\IF x = 1 \AR y:=y+1
\BAR x = 2 \AR y:=y^2
\utdots
\BAR x = n \AR y:=\displaystyle\sum_{i=1}^n y_i \FI
Dijkstra conditionals and loops:
\[
$ \ACTIONS A:
A \EQ \IF \B{} \THEN \S{}; \CALL A
\ELSE \CALL Z \FI \QE
\ENDACTIONS $
\EQT
$ \WHILE \B{} \DO \S{} \OD $
\]
\begin{program}
\VAR \seq{m := 0, p := 0, |last| := ''};
\ACTIONS |prog|:
|prog| \ACTIONEQ %
\seq{|line| := '', m := 0, i := 1};
\CALL |inhere| \ENDACTION
l \ACTIONEQ %
i := i+1;
\IF (i=(n+1)) \THEN \CALL |alldone| \FI ;
m := 1;
\IF |item|[i] \neq |last|
\THEN |write|(|line|); |line| := ''; m := 0;
Here's the original program:
A Reverse Engineering Example.
\begin{program}
\DO \DO \IF \B1 \THEN \EXIT \FI;
\S1;
\IF \B2 \THEN \EXIT(2) \FI \OD;
\IF \B1 \THEN \EXIT \FI \OD
\end{program}
\begin{program}
\seq{|line| := '', i := 1};
\WHILE i \neq n+1 \DO
|line| := |item|[i] \concat '' \concat |number|[i];
i := i+1;
\WHILE i \neq n+1 \AND |item|[i] = |item|[i-1] \DO
|line| := |line| \concat , '' \concat |number|[i]);
And here's the transformed and corrected version:
\CALL |inhere| \FI ;

\CALL |more| \ENDACTION
|inhere| \ACTIONEQ %
p := |number|[i]; |line| := |item|[i];
|line| := |line| \concat '' \concat p;
\CALL |more| \ENDACTION
|more| \ACTIONEQ %
\IF (m=1) \THEN p := |number|[i];
|line| := |line| \concat , '' \concat p \FI ;
|last| := |item|[i];
\CALL l \ENDACTION
|alldone| \ACTIONEQ |write|(|line|); \CALL Z \ENDACTION \ENDACTIONS
\END
\end{program}
3
4
http://www.ctan.org/pkg/program
http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/program/
program-doc.pdf
Package documentation4
Package page3
Lines can be numbered by setting \NumberProgramstrue and numbering

turned off with \NumberProgramsfalse
The package also provides a macro for typesetting a set like this: \set{x
\in N | x > 0}.
i := i+1 \OD ;
|write|(|line|) \OD
\end{program}
% Start your
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/LaTeX%2FPackages%2FListings%
20
\begin{lstlisting}[frame=single]
code-block
\usepackage{listings}
% Include the listings-package
\begin{document}
\lstset{language=Pascal}
% Set your language (you can change
the language for each code-block optionally)
This is a basic example for some Pascal code:
A complete reference manual can be found at http://tug.ctan.org/texarchive/macros/latex/contrib/listings/listings.pdf
(See the Listings package reference page5 for more information.)
22.5. Source Code Formatting using the Listings

package
Figure 78
\end{document}
for i:=maxint to 0 do
begin
{ do nothing }
end;
Write(Case insensitive );
Write(Pascal keywords.);
\end{lstlisting}
PACKAGE ,
OFFICIAL
ROGRIO
MANUAL
FOR
B RITO
THE
(2009),
ALGO -
http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/algorithms/
algorithms.pdf
HTTP :// MIRRORS . CTAN . ORG / MACROS / LATEX / CONTRIB / ALGORITHMS / AL
RITHMS
T HE
23. References
package are effectively standard within the field, while others will vary by
author preference.
tipa
There are a number of LaTeX packages available for writing linguistics papers.
Various packages have been created for enumerated examples, sytactic trees,
OT tableaux, feature matrices, IPA fonts, and many other applications. Some
packages such as the
24. Linguistics
Alternatively, xyling is very powerful but not as user friendly as qtree;

The xy2 package itself has a steep learning curve, but allows a lot of
control; for simplest trees use the xymatrix feature and arrows;
tikz-qtree3 has the same syntax as qtree, but uses PGF/TikZ, which allows
more options for drawing arrows, etc.
Glosses: gb4e;
IPA symbols: tipa;
OT Tableaux: OTtablx;
Syntactic trees: qtree + tree-dvips (for drawing arrows);
http://jones.ling.indiana.edu/~mdickinson/08/latex/slides.
pdf LaTeX for Linguists presentation
http://ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/generic/diagrams/xypic/
xy
http://ctan.org/pkg/tikz-qtree
Depdency trees and bubble parses:
Some recommended packages1 :
4
5
6
http://sourceforge.net/projects/tikz-dependency/
http://nlp.stanford.edu/~manning/tex/avm.sty
http://www.math.neu.edu/ling/tex/
There are several commonly used packages for creating the kinds of numbered
examples that are used in linguistics publications.
24.1. Enumerated examples
Attribute-Value Matrices (AVMs): avm5

John Frampton's expex: expex6
The TikZ-depdendency4 package provides a high-level, convenient interface to draw dependency graphs. It is based on PGF/TikZ but does not
require prior knowledge of TikZ in order to be used productively.
http://ctan.mines-albi.fr/help/Catalogue/entries/gb4e.
html/ The gb4e package on CTAN
\begin{exe}
\ex This is an example.
\end{exe}
environment, and each example is introduced with the \ex command.
exe
Examples for this package are placed within the
\usepackage{gb4e}
package7 is called with:
gb4e
The
24.1.1. gb4e
produces:
\begin{exe}
\ex This is the first example.
\ex This is the second example.
\ex This is the third.
\end{exe}
Multiple examples can be included within the environment, and each will have
its own number.
Figure 79
produces:
\begin{exe}
\ex
\ex
\ex
\ex
\begin{xlist}
This is a sub-example.
This is a second sub-example.
\begin{xlist}
\ex This is a sub-sub-example.
\ex This is a second sub-sub-example.
\end{xlist}
enviroment is used.
xlist
To create nested lists of examples, the
Figure 80
\begin{exe}
\ex This sentence is grammatical English.
For notating acceptability judgments, the \ex command can take an optional
argument. When including a judgment marker, the corresponding sentence
must be surrounded by braces.
Figure 81
produces:
\end{xlist}
\end{exe}
\begin{exe}
\ex\label{ex1} Gozilla destroyed the city.
\ex\label{ex2} Godzilla roared.
\end{exe}
Referencing examples in text works as it does in normal LaTeX documents.

See the labeling and cross-referencing8 section for more details.
Figure 82
produces:
\ex[*] {This sentence English in ungrammatical is.}

\end{exe}
10
http://ctan.mackichan.com/macros/latex/contrib/gb4e/
gb4e-doc.pdf
http://ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex209/contrib/trees/
tree-dvips The lingmacros package on CTAN
package10 created by Emma Pease is an alternate method for example numbering. This package uses two main commands \enumsentence and
\eenumsentence. The former is used for singleton examples,
lingmacros
The
24.1.2. lingmacros
Further details can be found in the full documentation available here9 .
Sentence (\ref{ex1}) contains two arguments, but (\ref{ex2}) contains

only one.
Figure 84
\eenumsentence{\item This is the first example.

\item This is the second example.
\item This is the third.
}
while the latter command is used for nested examples.
Figure 83
\enumsentence{This is an example.}
11
Figure 85
produces:
\eenumsentence{\item This is a sub-example.

\item This is a second sub-example.
\item \begin{enumerate}
\item This is sub-sub-example.
\item This is a second sub-sub-example.
\end{enumerate}
}
Multiply nested examples make use of the normal LaTeX list environments11 .
12
http://mirrors.ibiblio.org/pub/mirrors/CTAN/macros/
latex209/contrib/trees/tree-dvips/lingmacros-manual.pdf
While there are several packages for drawing syntactic trees available for
LaTeX, this article focuses on the qtree and xyling packages.
24.2.1. Constituent trees
Often, linguists will have to illustrate the syntactic structure of a sentence.

One device for doing this are syntactic trees. Unfortunately, trees look very
different in different grammar formalisms, and different LaTeX packages are
suited for different formalisms.
24.2. Syntactic trees
Full documentation can be found here12 .
produces this syntactic tree as output:
\Tree [.S [.NP LaTeX ] [.VP [.V is ] [.NP fun ] ] ]
For example, the following code
A new tree is started using the \Tree command, each (sub-)tree is indicated by
brackets [ ]. The root of a (sub-)tree is always preceded by a ., leaf nodes are
simply expressed by their labels.
\usepackage{qtree}
Drawing trees with qtree is relatively straightforward. First, the qtree package has to be included in the document's preamble:
qtree
Note that the spaces before the closing brackets, as well as the space between
\Tree and the first opening bracket are mandatory.
Figure 86
Using the same syntax as qtree, tikz-qtree is another easy-to-use alternative for
drawing syntactic trees.
tikz-qtree
\qtreecentertrue % center trees from here on
anywhere in the document. The effect of the latter can be undone by using the
command
\qtreecenterfalse % do not center trees from here on
or via the command
\usepackage[nocenter]{qtree} % do not center trees
By default, qtree centers syntactic trees on the page. This behaviour can be
turned off by either specifying the behaviour when loading the package
The syntax of tikz-qtree and result when drawing a simple tree is the
same as for qtree.
\usepackage{tikz}
\usepackage{tikz-qtree}
To use the tikz-qtree package for drawing trees, put the following into
the document's preamble:
For simple trees, tikz-qtree is completely interchangable with qtree. However,

some of qtree's advanced features are implemented in a different way, or not at
all. On the other hand, tikz-qtree provides other features such as controlling
the direction of the tree's growth (top to bottom, left to right etc.) or different
styles for edges.
\begin{center}
Note that, other than for qtree, trees are not centered by default. To center
them, put them into a centered environment:
Figure 87
\tikzset{grow'=right} % make trees grow from left to right

\tikzset{every tree node/.style={anchor=base west}} % allign nodes of
the tree to the left (west)
For setting the style of trees, tikz-qtree provides the \tikzset command. For
example, to make a tree grow from left to right instead of from top to bottom,
use the following code:

\end{center}
The above code changes the default orientation for all trees that are defined
after \tikzset commands. To only change the direction of a single tree, it has
to be put into a \tikzpicture environment:
Figure 88
Dependency trees can take multiple visual forms. Commonly, they quite
resemble phrase structure trees. Alternatively, they can be captured by brackets
drawn above running text.
24.2.2. Dependency Trees
\begin{tikzpicture} % all changes only affect trees within this

environment
\tikzset{grow'=right} % make trees grow from left to right
\tikzset{every tree node/.style={anchor=base west}} % allign nodes of
the tree to the left (west)
\end{tikzpicture}
% In the document:
\begin{tikzpicture}
\node (is-root) {is}
[sibling distance=3cm]
child { node {this} }
child {
node {tree}
[sibling distance=1.5cm]
child { node {an} }
child { node {example} }
child { node {.} }
child[missing]
};
\path (is-root) +(0,-2.5\tikzleveldistance)
% In the preamble:
\usepackage{tikz}
These can be either achieved using the fairly universal drawing package TikZ,
like so:
Two-dimensional Dependency Trees
Figure 89
A dependency tree created using TikZ
which gives you the following drawing:
node {\textit{This is an example tree.}};

\end{tikzpicture}
which gives you a drawing like this:
\medskip
\textit{This is an example tree.}
% In the document:
\Tree{
& \K{is}\B{dl}\B{drr} \\
\K{this} &&& \K{tree}\B{dll}\B{dl}\B{dr} \\
& \K{an} & \K{example} && \K{.} }
% In the preamble:
\usepackage{xytree}
The code for a similar tree using xyling might look like:
TikZ has the advantage that it allows for generating PDF directly from the
LaTeX source, without need for any detour of compiling to DVI using latex,
and then converting to PDF probably via PS using tools such as dvips and
ps2pdf. Latter is the case of another package based on the package xy,
namely xyling.
Figure 90
A dependency tree created using xyling
% In the document:
\xytext{
\xybarnode{Peter} &~~~&
\xybarnode{and}
\xybarconnect(UL,U){-2}"_{\small conj}"
\xybarconnect(UR,U){2}"^{\small conj}"
&~~~&
\xybarnode{Mary} &~~~&
\xybarnode{bought}
\xybarconnect[8](UL,U){-4}"_{\small subj}"
% In the preamble:
\usepackage{xytree}
An example code:
One way to typeset dependency brackets above running text is using the
package xytree. It gives you fairly good control of how the brackets are
typeset but requires compiling the LaTeX code to DVI (and perhaps converting
to PDF using the tools dvips and ps2pdf later).
Dependency Trees as Brackets above Text
Figure 91
results in:
A dependency tree above running text created using xytree
\xybarconnect[13]{6}"^{\small punct}"
\xybarconnect[8](UR,U){4}"^{\small obj}"
&~~~&
\xybarnode{a} &~~~&
\xybarnode{car}
\xybarconnect(UL,U){-2}"_{\small det}"
&~~~&
\xybarnode{.}
% In the document:
\begin{dependency}[theme = simple]
\begin{deptext}[column sep=1em]
A \& hearing \& is \& scheduled \& on \& the \& issue \& today
\& . \\
\end{deptext}
\deproot{3}{ROOT}
\depedge{2}{1}{ATT}
\depedge[edge start x offset=-6pt]{2}{5}{ATT}
% In the preamble:
\usepackage{tikz-dependency}
The package provides high level commands to design and style dependency
graphs. To draw a graph, you only need to create a dependency environment,
write the text of the sentence within the deptext environment and use
depedge commands to draw the edges. Global and local optional parameters
can be used to style and fine tune the looks of the graph, as shown in the
following example:
Dependency Trees using TikZ-dependency
Figure 92
A dependency tree drawn with TikZ-dependency.
This code snippet would produce the following result:
\depedge{3}{2}{SBJ}
\depedge{3}{9}{PU}
\depedge{3}{4}{VC}
\depedge{4}{8}{TMP}
\depedge{5}{7}{PC}
\depedge[arc angle=50]{7}{6}{ATT}
\end{dependency}
\begin{exe}
\ex
\gll \\
cat.NOM eat.3.SG.PRS sour-cream.ACC\\
environment. But after the \ex tag, introduce the example and its gloss using
\gll and the translation after it with \trans tag.
exe
.
To create a glossed example, use the normal
gb4e
Below, it is explained how to a glossed example in your document using

package
24.3.1. With gb4e
24.3. Glosses
\begin{exe}
\ex
Vertically aligned glosses are separated by spaces, so if it's necessary to include

a space in part the gloss, simply enclose the connected parts inside braces.
Figure 93
The code will produce the following output:
\trans The cat eats sour cream'

\end{exe}
13
package uses the \shortex command to introduce glossed examples inside

the \enumsentence and \eenumsentence commands. This command
takes four arguments and builds off the normal tabular13 environment. Its
first argument specifies the number of columns in the gloss. The second and
third arguments give the text and its gloss respectively, and items within each
column are divided by the usual & tabular separator. The fourth argument is
the translation.
lingmacros
The
24.3.2. With lingmacros
\gll Pekka pel\"astyi karhusta.\\

Pekka {became afraid} bear.ELA\\
\trans Pekka became afraid because of the/a bear.'
\end{exe}
There are two methods for getting IPA symbols into a document. The first way
is to use the
\usepackage{tipa}
package is the standard LaTeX package for International Phonetic Alphabet

symbols.
tipa
The
24.4. IPA characters
\enumsentence{\shortex{3}
{Pekka & pel\"astyi & karhu-sta.}
{Pekka & became afraid & bear.ELA}
{Pekka became afraid because of the/a bear.'}
}
14
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/LaTeX%2FFormatting%23Fonts
\textipa{text in IPA format here}
This method is useful for long stretches of text that need to be in IPA. Alternatively, there is the \textipa command that will format the text in its
argument into IPA. This command is similar to other font typesetting commands14 .
\begin{IPA}
text in IPA format here
\end{IPA}
environment.
IPA
produces:
\textipa{ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ}
however capital letters are rendered differently.
Figure 94
\textipa{abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz}
The IPA format works by translating ASCII characters into corresponding IPA
symbols. Lower case letters are rendered as usual,
24.4.1. Basic symbols
Numerals and @ also have variants in the
Figure 96
produces:
\textipa{! * + = ? . , / [ ] ( ) ' | ||}
environment.
IPA
Punctuation marks that are normally used in LaTeX are also rendered faithfully
in the
Figure 95
15
http://uit.no/getfile.php?PageId=874&FileId=165 TIPA manual
The \; macro preceding a capital letter produces a small caps version of the
letter.
In addition, there are a number of special macros for representing symbols that
don't have other associations, some of which are listed here. For a complete
list see the official TIPA Manual15 .
Figure 97
produces:
\textipa{1234567890 @}
environment.
tipa
Figure 99
gets you:
\textipa{\:d \:l \:n \:r \:s \:t \:z}
The \: macro produces retroflex symbols.
Figure 98
produces:
\textipa{\;A \;B \;E \;G \;H \;I \;L \;R \;Y}
Figure 100
gets you:
\textipa{\!b \!d \!g \!j \!G \!o}
The \! macro produces implosive symbols and the bilabial click.
25. References
2
3
http://www.essex.ac.uk/linguistics/external/clmt/
latex4ling/
http://www.ling.upenn.edu/advice/latex/qtree/
http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/gb4e/
LaTeX for Linguists1

The qtree package for drawing syntactic trees.2
The gb4e package page on CTAN. 3
26. External links
Special Documents and Pages
Part IV.
To enable the indexing feature of LaTeX, the makeidx package must be

loaded in the preamble with:
27.1. Using makeidx
Especially useful in printed books, an index is an alphabetical list of words

and expressions with the pages of the book upon which they are to be found.
LaTeX supports the creation of indices with its package makeidx, and its
support program makeindex, called on some systems makeidx.
27. Indexing
can be re-written as
To solve various problems in physics, it can be advantageous

to express any arbitrary piecewise-smooth function as a
Fourier Series composed of multiples of sine and cosine functions.
where key is the index entry and does not appear in the final layout. You enter
the index commands at the points in the text that you want to be referenced in
the index, likely near the reason for the key. For example, the text
\index{key}
command into the input file preamble. This should be done within the preamble,
since it tells LaTeX to create the files needed for indexing. To tell LaTeX what
to index, use
\makeindex
and the special indexing commands must be enabled by putting the
\usepackage{makeidx}
The showidx package that comes with LaTeX prints out all index entries in
the left margin of the text. This is quite useful for proofreading a document
and verifying the index.
It is common to place it at the end of the document. The default index format
is two columns.
\printindex
To show the index within the document, merely use the command
to create an entry called 'Fourier Series' with a reference to the target page.
Multiple uses of \index with the same key on different pages will add those
target pages to the same index entry.
To solve various problems in physics, it can be advantageous

to express any arbitrary piecewise-smooth function as a Fourier
Series
\index{Fourier Series}
composed of multiples of sine and cosine functions.
Note that filename is without extension: the program will look for filename.idx
and use that. You can optionally pass filename.idx directly to the program as
an argument. The makeindex program generates a sorted index with the
same base file name, but this time with the extension .ind. If now the LaTeX
input file is processed again, this sorted index gets included into the document
at the point where LaTeX finds \printindex.
makeindex filename
When the input file is processed with LaTeX, each \index command
writes an appropriate index entry, together with the current page number,
to a special file. The file has the same name as the LaTeX input file, but a
different extension (.idx). This .idx file can then be processed with the
makeindex program. Type in the command line:
27.1.1. Compiling indices
It replaces the glossary package and can be used instead of the nomencl
package.
The glossaries package was created to assist users in creating glossaries.

It supports multiple glossaries, acronyms and symbols.
Many technical documents use terms or acronyms unknown to the general

population. It's common practice to add glossaries to make those works more
understandable.
makeindex -s
The index created by latex with the default options may not look as nice or as
suitable as you would like it. To improve the looks of the index makeindex
comes with a set of style files, usually located somewhere in the tex directory
structure, usually below the makeindex subdirectory. To tell makeindex
to use a specific style file, run it with the command line option:
Chapter ?? on page ??
The glossary index won't be generated until you place the following command
in document preamble:
See also #Custom_TOC-Entry1 at the bottom of this page.
\usepackage[toc]{glossaries}
For the glossary to show up in Table of Contents you need to additionally add
toc option:
\usepackage[xindy]{glossaries}
if you will be using xindy (highly recommended) rather than makeindex

you need to specify xindy option:
\usepackage{glossaries}
To enable the use of glossaries package, you have to load the package:
27.2. Using glossaries
Note that a defined entry won't be included in the printed glossary unless it is
used in the document. This enables you to create a glossary of general terms
and just \include it in all your documents.
To use an entry from glossary you first need to define it. There are few ways to
define an entry depending on what you define and how it is going to be used.
27.3. Defining glossary entries
Windows users will need to install Perl for makeglossaries to work.
Note that the links in generated glossary won't be clickable unless you load
this package after the hyperref package.
\makeglossaries
When you define terms, you need to remember that they will be sorted
by or .
While is a bit more LaTeX aware, it does it by ommiting latex
macros () thus incorrectly sorting the above example as .
wont fare much better, because it doesnt understand TeX macros,
it will interpret the word exactly as it was defined, putting it
inside symbol class, before words beginning with .
Therefore its needed to extend our example and specify how to sort
The above example defines an entry that has the same label and entry
name.
This is not always the case as the next entry will show:
For example, to define a computer entry:
\newglossaryentry{ is a unique label used to identify an entry in

glossary, <settings> are comma separated pairs used to define an
entry.
To define a term in glossary you use \newglossaryentry macro:
27.4. Defining terms
macro:
Sometimes the mundane things are the most painful. However, it doesn't have
to be that way because of evolved, user-friendly templates. Thankfully, LaTeX
allows for very quick letter writing, with little hassle.
To define a new acronym you use the
Note that not all glossary styles show defined symbols.
You can also define both a name and a symbol:
Defined entries can also be symbols:
You can also specify plural forms, if they are not formed by adding
s (we will learn how to use them in next section):
the word:
If you want your name, address and telephone number to appear in the letter,
you have to declare them first signature, address and telephone.
4. additional elements: post scripta, carbon copy and list of enclosures
LaTeX will leave some space after closing for your hand-written signature; then it will put your name and surname, if you have declared
them.
1. opening (like \opening{Dear Sir or Madam,} or \opening{Dear Kate,}

2. main body - written as usual in LaTeX
3. closing (like \closing{Yours sincerely,}
You can write multiple letters in one LaTeX file - start each one with \begin{letter}{recipient} and end with \end{letter}. You can leave recipient blank.
Each letter consists of four parts:
To write letters use the standard document class letter.
27.5. The letter class
\documentclass{letter}
Here is the example's code:
Figure 101 A
sample letter.
The output letter will look like this:
That said, allow me to reiterate that your material will be used to

the noble end of
providing a free collection of knowledge for everyone; naturally
enough, only if you
agree. If that is the case, could you kindly fill in the attached
form and post it
% The \ldots command produces dots in a way that will not upset
% the typesetting of the document.
\ldots
I am writing to you on behalf of the Wikipedia project

(http://www.wikipedia.org/),
an endeavour to build a fully-fledged multilingual encyclopaedia in
an entirely
open manner, to ask for permission to use your copyrighted material.
\begin{letter}{Director \\ Doe \& Co \\ 35 Anthony Road

\\ Newport \\ Ipswich IP3 5RT}
\opening{Dear Sir or Madam:}
\signature{Joe Bloggs}
\address{21 Bridge Street \\ Smallville \\ Dunwich DU3 4WE}
\begin{document}
The amount of space to the left can be adjusted by increasing the 0pt.
\longindentation=0pt
To move the closing and signature parts to the left, insert the following before
\begin{document}:
\end{document}
\end{letter}
\ps{P.S. You can find the full text of GFDL license at

\url{http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/fdl.html}.}
\encl{Copyright permission form}
\closing{Yours Faithfully,}
I look forward to your reply.
Thank you for your time and consideration.
back to me? We shall greatly appreciate it.
http://mirror.hmc.edu/ctan/macros/latex/contrib/envlab/
elguide.pdf
Refer to the envlab user guide2 for more information about this capable
package.
\usepackage[businessenvelope]{envlab}
\makelabels
The envlab package provides customization to the \makelabels command, allowing the user to print on any of an assortment of labels or envelope
sizes. For example, beginning your LaTeX file the following way produces a
document which includes the letter and a business-size (#10) envelope on the
following page.
27.6.1. Using the envlab package
27.6. Envelopes
\vspace{1.0in}\large
FROM-CITY, STATE, \ ZIP
FROM-STREET ADDRESS
FROM-NAME
\begin{document}
% envelope.tex
\usepackage[left=1in,to
p=0.15in,papersize={4.125in,9.5in},landscape,twoside=false]{geometry}
\setlength\parskip{0pt}
\pagestyle{empty}
Here is a relatively simple envelope which uses the geometry package which
is used because it vastly simplifies the task of rearranging things on the page
(and the page itself).
27.6.2. Using the geometry package
Figure 102
A sample
envelope to
be printed in
landscape
mode.
\end{document}
TO-CITY, STATE, \ ZIP
TO-STREET ADDRESS
TO-NAME
\setlength\parindent{3.6in}
$ latex envelope.tex && dvips -t unknown -T 9.5in,4.125in

envelope.dvi
$ lpr -o landscape envelope.ps
In the first line, dvips command converts the .dvi file produced by latex into a
.ps (PostScript) file. In the second line, the PostScript file is sent to the printer.
Alternatively, you can use the latex dvi output driver.
$ pdflatex envelope.tex
$ pdf2ps envelope.pdf
$ lpr -o landscape envelope.ps
The above will certainly take care of the spacing but the actual printing is
between you and your printer. One user reports that printing envelopes created
with envlab is relatively painless. If you use the geometry package, you
may find the following commands useful for printing the envelope.
27.6.3. Printing
% koma_env.tex
\documentclass[a4paper]{scrlttr2}
\usepackage{lmodern}
An alternative to separately printing addresses on envelopes is to use the letter

class from the KOMA package. It supports additional features like folding
marks and the correct address placement for windowed envelopes. Using the
scrlttr2 document class from the KOMA package the example letter code is:
27.7. Windowed envelopes
It is reported that pdflatex creates the right page size but not dvips despite
what it says in the geometry manual. It will never work though unless your
printer settings are adjusted to the correct page style. These settings depend
on the printer filter you are using and in CUPS might be available on the lpr
command line if you are masochistic.
I am writing to you on behalf of the Wikipedia project

(\url{http://www.wikipedia.org/}), an endeavour to build a
fully-fledged multilingual encyclopaedia in an entirely open
manner, to ask for permission to use your copyrighted material.
\KOMAoptions{fromphone=true,fromfax=false}
\setkomavar{subject}{Wikipedia}
\setkomavar{customer}{2342}
\opening{Dear Sir or Madam,}
\begin{letter}{Director \\ Doe \& Co \\ 35 Anthony Road

\\ Newport \\ Ipswich IP3 5RT}
\begin{document}
\setkomavar{fromname}{Joe Bloggs}
\setkomavar{fromaddress}{21 Bridge Street \\ Smallville \\ Dunwich
DU3 4WE}
\setkomavar{fromphone}{0123 45679}
\usepackage{url}
The output is generated via
\end{document}
\end{letter}
\closing{Yours Faithfully,}
\ps{P.S. You can find the full text of GFDL license at
\url{http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/fdl.html}.}
\encl{Copyright permission form}
I look forward to your reply.
Thank you for your time and consideration.
That said, allow me to reiterate that your material will be used

to the noble end of providing a free collection of knowledge for
everyone; naturally enough, only if you agree. If that is the
case, could you kindly fill in the attached form and post it back
to me? We shall greatly appreciate it.
\ldots
Figure 103 A
sample letter with
folding marks ready
for standardized
windowed envelopes.
$ pdflatex koma_env
command
\name{}
\signature{}
\address{}
\location{}
\telephone{}
\makelabels
description
27.8. Reference: letter.cls commands
In addition to the default, the KOMA-package includes predefined format

definitions for different standardized Swiss and Japanese letter formats.
Folding the print of the resulting file koma_env.pdf according the folding
marks it can be placed into standardized windowed envelopes DIN C6/5, DL,
C4, C5 or C6.
\stopletter
\returnaddress
\startlabels
\mlabel{}{}
\descriptionlabel{}
\ccname
\ps
\encl{}
command
\stopbreaks
\startbreaks
\opening{}
\closing{}
\cc{}
"cc"
Start a parbox introduced with

\ccname:
Start a parbox introduced with
\enclname:
Begins a new paragraph, normally
at the close of the letter
(empty)
(empty)
description
description
"encl"
"Page"
"To"
Long form date
Description
See main article
command
\enclname
\pagename
\headtoname
\today
environment
letter{}
description
verse
quotation
quote
4
5
koma-script/scrguien.pdf
http://pl.wikibooks.org/wiki/LaTeX%2FPisanie%20list%F3w
http://fr.wikibooks.org/wiki/LaTeX%2FLettre
pl:LaTeX/Pisanie listw4 fr:LaTeX/Lettre5
KOMA-Script - The Guide3
27.9. Sources
LaTeX can be used for creating presentations. There are several packages for
the task, including the Beamer package.
28. Presentations
beamer/
beamer/doc/beameruserguide.pdf
Andrew Mertz and William Slough Beamer by Example
The beamer package is loaded by calling the beamer class:
28.1.1. Introductory example
The beamer package is provided with most LaTeX distributions, but is also
available from CTAN1 . If you use MikTeX, all you have to do is to include the
beamer package and let LaTeX download all wanted packages automatically.
The documentation2 explains the features in great detail. You can also have a
look at the PracTex article Beamer by example3
28.1. The Beamer package
\begin{document}
\begin{frame}
\frametitle{This is the first slide}
%Content goes here
\end{frame}
\begin{frame}
\frametitle{This is the second slide}
\framesubtitle{A bit more information about this}
%More content goes here
Inside the usual document environment, multiple frame environments

specify the content to be put on each slide. The frametitle command
specifies the title for each slide (See image):
\documentclass[xetex,mathserif,serif]{beamer}
The usual header information may then be specified. Note that if you are
compiling with XeTeX then you should use
\documentclass{beamer}
Figure 104
\end{frame}
% etc
\end{document}
For the actual talk, if you can compile it with pdfLaTeX then you could use
Adobe Reader with its fullscreen mode. If you want to navigate in your
presentation, you can use the almost invisible links in the bottom right corner
without leaving the fullscreen mode.
Trick : Instead of using \begin{frame}. . . \end{frame}, you can also use

\frame{. . . }.
Inside of frames, you can use environments like block, theorem, proof,
... Also, \maketitle is possible to create the frontpage, if title and
author is set.
Usual environments (itemize,enumerate, equation, etc.) may be used

as usual.
\title[Crisis]%(optional, only for long titles)

{The Economics of Financial Crisis}
\subtitle{Evidence from India}
\author[Author, Anders] % (optional, for multiple authors)
{F.~Author\inst{1} \and S.~Anders\inst{2}}
\institute[Universitten Hier und Dort] % (optional)
{
\inst{1}%
Institut fr Informatik\\
Universitt Hier
\and
\inst{2}%
Institut fr theoretische Philosophie\\
Universitt Dort
}
\date[KPT 2004] % (optional)
You give information about authors, titles and dates in the preamble
Title page and information
28.1.2. Document Structure
You can automatically print the table of contents at the beginning of each
section by adding in the preamble the following line.
\begin{frame}
\frametitle{Table of Contents}
\tableofcontents[currentsection]
\end{frame}
You can print the table of contents and highlight the current section/subsection
by typing :
Table of Contents
\frame{\titlepage}
In the document, you add the title page :
{Konferenz ber Prsentationstechniken, 2004}

\subject{Informatik}
\AtBeginSubsection[]
{
\begin{frame}
\tableofcontents[currentsection,currentsubsection]
\end{frame}
}
You can do the same for subsections :
\AtBeginSection[]
{
\begin{frame}
\tableofcontents[currentsection]
\end{frame}
}
\begin{frame}[allowframebreaks]
\frametitle<presentation>{Weiterfhrende Literatur}
\beamertemplatebookbibitems
\bibitem{Autor1990}
A.~Autor.
\newblock {\em Einfhrung in das Pr% sentationswesen}.
\newblock Klein-Verlag, 1990.
\beamertemplatearticlebibitems
\bibitem{Jemand2000}
S.~Jemand.
\newblock On this and that.
\newblock {\em Journal of This and That}, 2(1):50--100, 2000.
\end{frame}
References (Beamer)
to use the "Warsaw" theme. Beamer has several themes, many of which
are named after cities (e.g. Barcelona, Madrid, Berlin, etc.). Color themes,
typically with animal names, can be specified with
\usetheme{Warsaw}
To the preamble you can add the following line:
The Built-in solution
The first solution is to use a built-in theme such as Warsaw, Berlin, etc. The
second solution is to specify colors, inner themes and outer themes.
Themes
28.1.3. Style
http://www.hartwork.org/beamer-theme-matrix/
The do it yourself solution
The list of all themes : Antibes, Bergen, Berkeley, Berlin, Boadilla, Copenhagen, Darmstadt, Dresden, Frankfurt, Goettingen, Hannover, Ilmenau, JuanLesPins, Luebeck, Madrid, Malmoe, Marburg, Montpellier, PaloAlto, Pittsburgh, Rochester, Singapore, Szeged, Warsaw, boxes, default
This Theme Matrix4 contains the various theme and color combinations
included with beamer. For more customizing options, have a look to the
official documentation included in your distribution of beamer, particularly
the part Change the way it looks.
\usecolortheme{beaver}
infolines
miniframes
shadow
sidebar
smoothbars
smoothtree
split
tree
\useinnertheme{rectangles}
Then you can add the innertheme :
Here is a list of all available outer themes
\useoutertheme{infolines}
First you can specify the outertheme. The outertheme defines the head and the
footline of each slide.
rectangles
circles
inmargin
rounded
\setbeamercolor{alerted text}{fg=orange}
\setbeamercolor{background canvas}{bg=white}
\setbeamercolor{block body alerted}{bg=normal text.bg!90!black}
\setbeamercolor{block body}{bg=normal text.bg!90!black}
\setbeamercolor{block body example}{bg=normal text.bg!90!black}
\setbeamercolor{block title alerted}{use={normal text,alerted
text},fg=alerted text.fg!75!normal text.fg,bg=normal
text.bg!75!black}
\setbeamercolor{block title}{bg=blue}
\setbeamercolor{block title example}{use={normal text,example
text},fg=example text.fg!75!normal text.fg,bg=normal
text.bg!75!black}
\setbeamercolor{fine separation line}{}
\setbeamercolor{frametitle}{fg=brown}
You can define the color of every element :
Here is a list of all available inner themes :
\setbeamercolor{item projected}{fg=black}
\setbeamercolor{normal text}{bg=black,fg=yellow}
\setbeamercolor{palette sidebar primary}{use=normal text,fg=normal
text.fg}
\setbeamercolor{palette sidebar
quaternary}{use=structure,fg=structure.fg}
\setbeamercolor{palette sidebar
secondary}{use=structure,fg=structure.fg}
\setbeamercolor{palette sidebar tertiary}{use=normal text,fg=normal
text.fg}
\setbeamercolor{section in sidebar}{fg=brown}
\setbeamercolor{section in sidebar shaded}{fg= grey}
\setbeamercolor{separation line}{}
\setbeamercolor{sidebar}{bg=red}
\setbeamercolor{sidebar}{parent=palette primary}
\setbeamercolor{structure}{bg=black, fg=green}
\setbeamercolor{subsection in sidebar}{fg=brown}
\setbeamercolor{subsection in sidebar shaded}{fg= grey}
\setbeamercolor{title}{fg=brown}
\setbeamercolor{titlelike}{fg=brown}
\beamertemplatenavigationsymbolsempty
You can also suppress the navigation bar:
\setbeamertemplate{blocks}[rounded][shadow=true]
\setbeamertemplate{background canvas}[vertical
shading][bottom=white,top=structure.fg!25]
\setbeamertemplate{sidebar canvas left}[horizontal
shading][left=white!40!black,right=black]
You can also define the style of blocks :
\definecolor{chocolate}{RGB}{33,33,33}
Remember that you can define your own colors :
Math Fonts
The default settings for beamer use a different set of math fonts than one
\setbeamerfont{title}{family=\rm\addfontfeatures{Scale=1.18,
Numbers={Lining, Proportional}}}
You could take this a step further if you are using OpenType fonts with
Xe(La)TeX and specify a serif font with increased size and oldstyle proportional alternate number glyphs:
\setbeamerfont{title}{family=\rm}
You may also change the fonts for particular elements. If you wanted the title
of the presentation as rendered by \frame{\titlepage} to occur in a
serif font instead of the default sanserif, you would use:
Fonts
\frame[plain]{
The plain option. Sometimes you need to include a large figure or a large table
and you don't want to have the bottom and the top of the slides. In that case,
use the plain option :
28.1.4. Frames Options
but it is not clear if this works for absolutely every math character.
\usefonttheme[onlymath]{serif}
Others have proposed to use the command
\documentclass[mathserif]{beamer}
would expect from creating a simple math article. One quick fix for this is to
use at the beginning of the file the option mathserif
\begin{lstlisting}[caption=First C example]
int main()
{
printf("Hello World!");
return 0;
}
\frame[containsverbatim]{
\frametitle{Source code}
Before using any verbatim environment (like listings), you should pass
the option containsverbatim to the \frame command.
\frame[shrink]{
...
}
If you want to include lots of text on a slide, use the shrink option.
...
}
\begin{itemize}
\item This one is always shown
\item<1-> The first time
\item<2-> The second time
For text animations, for example in the itemize environment, you can write:
\begin{frame}
\frametitle{Some background}
We start our discussion with some concepts.
\pause
The first concept we introduce originates with Erd\H os.
\end{frame}
You can simply use the \pause statement :
28.1.5. Text animations
\end{lstlisting}
}
\begin{frame}
\frametitle{Hidden higher-order concepts?'}
\begin{itemize}[<+->]
\item The truths of arithmetic which are independent of PA in
some
sense themselves {contain} essentially {\color{blue}{hidden
higher-order}},
or infinitary, concepts'???
\item Truths in the language of arithmetic which \ldots
\item
That suggests stronger version of Isaacson's thesi
\end{itemize}
\end{frame}
\item<1-> Also the first time

\only<1-> This one is shown at the first time, but it will hide
soon.
\end{itemize}
If you want to solve this, you can add a statement to precise the behavior it
must have when dealing with only commands in handout mode. Suppose you
have a code like this
This mode is useful to see each slide only one time with all its stuff on it,
making the itemize<+-> to be there all at once (for instance, printable version).
Nevertheless, this makes an issue when working with the only command,
because its purpose is to have only some text or figures at a time and not all of
them together.
\documentclass[12pt,handout]{beamer}
In beamer class, the default mode is presentation which makes the slides.
However, you can work in a different mode that is called handout by setting
this option when calling the class:
28.1.6. Handout mode
\only<1| handout:0>{\includegraphics{pic1.eps}}
\only<2>{\includegraphics{pic2.eps}}
Now imagine you still have your two pictures with the only statements, but the
second one show the first one plus some other graphs and you don't need the
first one to appear in the handout. You can thus precise the handout mode not
to include some only commands by:
This will ensure the handout will make a slide for each picture.
These pictures being completely different, you want them both in the handout,
but they cannot be both on the same slide since they are large. The solution is
to add the handout statement to have the following:
\begin{frame}
...
\end{frame}
\note{...}
A last word about the handout mode is about the notes. Actually, the full
syntax for a frame is
and this will hide your slide in both modes. (The order matters. Don't put
handout:0|beamer:0 or it won't work.)
\begin{frame}<0| handout:0>
or even, if you have written a frame that you don't want anymore but maybe
you will need it later, you can write
\begin{frame}<handout:0>
The command can also be used to hide frames, e.g.
Note that the 'handout' option in the \documentclass line suppress all the
animations.
The first one is useful when you make a presentation to have only the notes
you need, while the second one could be given to those who have followed
your presentation or those who missed it, for them to have both the slides with
what you said.
\documentclass[12pt,handout,notes=show]{beamer}
or
\documentclass[12pt,handout,notes=only]{beamer}
and you can write your notes about a frame in the field note (many of them if
needed). Using this, you can add an option to the class calling, either
\note{...}
...
Example
Columns
There are two handy environments for structuring a slide: "blocks", which
divide the slide (horizontally) into headed sections, and "columns" which
divides a slide (vertically) into columns.
28.1.7. Columns and Blocks
Important: the notes=only mode is literally doing only the notes. This means
there will be no output file but the DVI. Thus it requires you to have run the
compilation in another mode before. If you use separate files for a better
distinction between the modes, you may need to copy the .aux file from the
handout compilation with the slides (w/o the notes).
\begin{frame}
\begin{columns}[t] % contents are top vertically aligned
\begin{column}[T]{5cm} % each column can also be its own
environment
Contents of first column \\ split into two lines
\end{column}
\begin{column}[T]{5cm} % alternative top-align that's better for
graphics
\includegraphics[height=3cm]{graphic.png}
\end{column}
\end{columns}
\end{frame}
\begin{frame}
\begin{columns}[c] % the "c" option specifies center vertical
alignment
\column{.5\textwidth} % column designated by a command
Contents of the first column
\column{.5\textwidth}
Contents split \\ into two lines
\end{columns}
\end{frame}
\begin{exampleblock}{This is an Example block}

This is an example
\end{exampleblock}
\begin{alertblock}{This is an Alert block}

This is an important alert
\end{alertblock}
\begin{block}{This is a Block}
This is important information
\end{block}
\begin{frame}
Simple
Enclosing text in the block environment creates a distinct, headed block of text.
This allows to visually distinguish parts of a slide easily. There are three basic
types of block. Their formating depends on the theme being used.
Blocks
\hypersetup{pdfstartview={FitH}} % By default the pdf fit the width

of the screen.
You can specify the default options of your PDF.
28.1.8. PDF options
\end{frame}
powerdot/
http://www.bitlib.net/mirror/ctan/macros/latex/contrib/
powerdot/docs/powerdot.pdf
\begin{document}
Inside the usual document environment, multiple slide environments

specify the content to be put on each slide.
The usual header information may then be specified.
\documentclass{powerdot}
The powerdot package is loaded by calling the powerdot class:
The powerdot package is available from CTAN5 . The documentation6 explains

the features in great detail.
28.2. The powerdot package
7
8
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Beamer%20%28LaTeX%29
beamer/doc/beameruserguide.pdf
Wikipedia:Beamer (LaTeX)7
Beamer user guide8 (pdf) from CTAN
28.4. Links
28.3. References
\begin{slide}{This is the first slide}

%Content goes here
\end{slide}
\begin{slide}{This is the second slide}
%More content goes here
\end{slide}
% etc
\end{document}
10
11
http://www.ctan.org/get/macros/latex/contrib/powerdot/doc/
powerdot.pdf
http://www.math-linux.com/spip.php?article77
http://fr.wikibooks.org/wiki/LaTeX%2FFaire%20des%20pr%
E9sentations
fr:LaTeX/Faire des prsentations11
The powerdot class9 (pdf) from CTAN

A tutorial for creating presentations using beamer10
examdoc {http://www-math.mit.edu/~psh/exam/examdoc.pdf} Using

the exam document class
LaTeX has specific features for teachers. We present the exam class1 which
is useful for designing exams and exercises with solutions. Interested people
29.1. Intro
29. Teacher's Corner
Probsoln
{http://www.tex.ac.uk/tex-archive/macros/latex/
contrib/probsoln/probsoln.pdf} creating problem sheets optionally with
solutions
http://mat140.bham.ac.uk/~richard/programming/tex/exams/
msexdoc.pdf
We present the exam class. The exam class is well suited to design exams with
solutions. You just have to specify in the preamble if you want the solutions to
be printed or not. You can also count the number of points.
29.2. The exam class
could also have a look at the probsoln package2 or the mathexm document
class3 .
\documentclass[a4paper,11pt,answers,addpoints]{exam}
You can replace the 3 first lines with the following :
\documentclass[a4paper,11pt]{exam}
\printanswers % If you want to print answers
% \noprintanswers % If you dont want to print answers
\addpoints % if you want to count the points
% \noaddpoints % if you dont want to count the points
% Specifies the way question are displayed:
\qformat{\textbf{Question\thequestion}\quad(\thepoints)\hfill}
\usepackage{color} % defines a new color
\definecolor{SolutionColor}{rgb}{0.8,0.9,1} % light blue
\shadedsolutions % defines the style of the solution environment
% \framedsolutions % defines the style of the solution environment
% Defines the title of the solution environment:
\r
enewcommand{\solutiontitle}{\noindent\textbf{Solution:}\par\noindent}
In the preamble you can specify the following lines :
29.2.1. Preamble
The exam is included in the questions environment.

The command \question introduces a new question.
The number of points is specified in squared brackets.
The solution is given in the solution environment. It appears only if \printanswers or answers as an option of the \documentclass are specified in the
preamble.
\begin{questions} % Begins the questions environment

\question[2] What is the solution? % Introduces a new question which
is worth 2 points
\begin{solution}
Here is the solution
\end{solution}
\question[5] What is your opinion?
\begin{solution}
This is my opinion
Here is an example :
29.2.2. Document
\begin{minipage}{.8\textwidth}
This exam includes \numquestions\ questions. The total number of
The macro \numquestions gives the total number of questions. The macro
\numpoints gives the total number of points.
29.2.3. Introduction
\ifprintanswers
Only if answers are printed
\else
Only if answers are not printed
\fi
It is also possible to add stuff only if answers are printed using the \ifprintanswers command.
\end{solution}
\end{questions}
29.3. References
The backslash after \numquestion prevents the macro from gobbling the
following whitespace as it normally would.
points is \numpoints.
\end{minipage}
Advanced Topics
Part V.
During this guide we have seen what it is possible to do and how this can be
achieved, but the question is: I want to write a proper text with LaTeX, what to
do then? Where should I start from? This is a short step-by-step guide about
how to start a document properly, keeping a good high-level structure. This
way it will be very easy to make modifications even when the document is
almost finished. These are all just suggestions, but you might take inspiration
from that to create your own document.
30. General Guidelines
./document.tex
./mystyle.sty
If you followed all those steps, these files should be in your root directory,
using "/" for each directory:
1. create a directory only for the project. We'll refer to that in the following
parts as the root directory
2. create two other directories inside the root, one for LaTeX documents,
the other one for images. Since you'll have to write their name quite
often, choose short names. A suggestion would be simply tex and img.
3. create your document (we'll call it document.tex, but you can use the
name you prefer) and your own package (for example mystyle.sty); this
second file will help you to keep the code cleaner.
Create a clear structure of the whole project this way:
30.1. Project structure
\input{filename}
As your work grows, your LaTeX file can become unwieldy and confusing,
especially if you are writing a long article with substantial, discrete sections,
or a full-length book. In such cases it is good practice to split your work into
several files. For example, if you are writing a book, it makes a lot of sense to
write each chapter in a separate .tex file. LaTeX makes this very easy thanks
to two commands:
30.2. Getting LaTeX to process multiple files
nothing else.
./tex/
./img/
The differences between these files will be explained below but what they
have in common is that they process the contents of filename.tex before continuing with the rest of the base file. When the compiler processes
your base file and reaches the command \input or \include, it reads
filename.tex and processes its content in accordance with the formatting
commands specified in the base file. This way you can put all the formatting
options in your base file and then input or include the files which contain
the actual content of your work. This means that the important part of your
working process, i.e. writing, is kept largely separate from formatting choices
(which is one of the main reasons why LaTeX is so good for serious writing!).
You will thus be dealing solely with text and very basic commands such as
\section, \emph etc. Your document will be uncluttered and much easier
to work with.
\include{filename}
and
Working on discrete parts of your documents has consequences for how the
base file is compiled; these will be dealt with below.
A further important difference is that using \include will force a page break
(which makes it ideal for a book's chapters), whereas the input command
does not (which in turn makes it ideal for, say, a long article with discrete
sections, which of course are not normally set on a new page).
The second method of including a file, \include{filename}, differs

from the first in some important ways. You cannot nest \include statements
within a file added via \include; \input, on the other hand, allows you
to call files which themselves call other files, ad infinitum (well, nearly!).
You can, however, \include a file which contains one or more \input
commands. Please resist the temptation to nest files in this way simply because
the system can do it: you will end up with just another kind of complexity!
Obviously, using absolute paths is inefficient if you are referring to a file in the
current directory. If, however, you need to include a file which is always kept
\input{/home/user/texfiles/myfiles/filename.tex}
If you had created the directory myfiles for your writing project, in your
texfiles directory, its full path would be,
\input{/home/user/texfiles/filename.tex}
An absolute path is a full path- and filename with every element specified. So,
filename.tex might have the full path,
When the LaTeX compiler finds a reference to an external file in the base file,
it will look for it in the same directory. However, you can in principle refer to
any file on your system, using both absolute and relative paths.
30.2.1. Using different paths
You may, however, need to make your source portable (to another computer or
to a different location of your harddisk), in which case relative paths should be
used if you wish to avoid unnecessary re-writing of path names. Or, a relative
path may simply be a more efficient and elegant way of referring to a file. A
relative path is one which is defined in relation to the current directory, in our
case the one which contains the base file. LaTeX uses the standard UNIX
notation: with a simple dot . you refer to the current directory, and by two
In practice, an absolute file path is generally used when one has to refer to
a file which is quite some way away in the file system (or perhaps even on
a different server!). One word of warning: do not leave empty spaces in the
filenames, they can cause ambiguous behaviour. Either leave no spaces or use
underscores _ instead.
\input{/home/user/documents/useful/foo.tex}
at a specific place in your system, you may refer to it with an absolute path,
for example,
\input{./myfiles/filename.tex}
but if you found it more convenient to put all your files in a sub-directory
of your current directory, called myfiles, you would refer to that file by
specifying
\input{filename.tex}
will have exactly the same effect as writing
\input{./filename.tex}
dots .. you refer to the previous directory, that is the one above the current
directory in the file system tree. The slash / is used to separate the different
components of a pathname: directories and filenames. So by ./ you refer to the
current directory, by ../ you refer to the previous directory, by ../../ you refer to
a directory which is two steps upwards in the filesystem tree. Writing
This flexibility, inherent in the way in which LaTeX is integrated with modern
file systems, lets you input files in a way which suits your particular set-up.
Of course, all commonly used file systems Linux, Mac OS X and Windows
also feature the UNIX ./, ../ facility outlined above. Do note, however, that
LaTeX uses forward slashes / even on Microsoft Windows platforms, which
use backslashes \ in pathnames. LaTeX implementations for Windows systems
perform this conversion for you, which ensures that your document will be
valid across all installations.
\input{../../documents/useful/foo.tex}
Indeed, in our example of the absolute path above, you could refer to that file
relatively, too:
\begin{document}
%\input{Section_1}
%\input{Section_2}
The simplest way to check that one or more of the various components of your
work is syntactically robust, is to comment out the command with a percentage
sign, for example:
When you compile your document, page references and the like will change
according to your use of the \input and \include commands. Normally
LaTeX users only run the compiler on parts of the document to check that
an individual chapter is syntactically correct and looks as the writer intended.
A full run is generally only performed for producing a full draft or the final
version. In such cases, it is invariably necessary to run LaTeX twice or more
to resolve all the page numbers, references, etc. (especially if you are using
bibliographic software such as BiBTeX, too).
30.2.2. Compiling the base file
Using this command provides more complex, and hence more useful possibilities. If you include the following command in your preamble, i.e. before
\begin{document},
30.2.3. Using \includeonly
This code will process your base file with the article conventions but only
the material in the file Section_4.tex will be processed. If that was, say,
the last thing you needed to check before sending off to that major journal,
you would then simply remove all the percentage signs and re-run LaTeX,
repeating the compiling process as necessary to resolve all references, page
numbers and so on.
%\input{Section_3}
\input{Section_4}
%\input{Section_5}
\end{document}
\documentclass{book}
\includeonly{Chapter_1,Chapter_4}
\begin{document}
\include{Chapter_1} %Note that we are using Chapter_1 and not
Chapter_1.tex
\include{Chapter_2}
\include{Chapter_3}
\include{Chapter_4}
\end{document}
This requires that there are \include commands in the document which
specify these files. The filename should be written without the .tex file
extension:
only the files specified between the curly braces will be included. Note that
you can have one or more files as the argument to this command: separate
them with a comma, no spaces.
\includeonly{filename1,filename2,...}
http://ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/subfiles
\usepackage{subfiles}
In the "root" document the package must be loaded as:
A disadvantage of using \input and \include is that only the "root"

document can be compiled and not the "child" documents individually. The
package subfiles1 resolves this problem.
30.2.4. Subfiles package
This code would process the base file but only include the content of the author's first and fourth chapters (Chapter_1.tex and Chapter_4.tex).
Importantly, this alternative retains as much of the .aux information as possible from the previous run, so messes up your cross-references much less than
the makeshift suggestion above.
\documentclass{book}
\usepackage{subfiles}
\begin{document}
In summary, root document (main.tex) looks like:
\end{document}
and end with:
\documentclass[rootdocument.tex]{subfiles}
\begin{document}
The "child" documents must start with the following statements:
\subfile{filename}
Instead of using \input and \include, "child" documents must be loaded

as follows:
http://tezcatl.fciencias.unam.mx/tex-archive/macros/latex/
contrib/subfiles.zip
Some linux distributions, don't have subfiles package in their latex distributions. You can download subfiles.zip2 to generate subfiles.cls and
subfiles.sty files:
\documentclass[main.tex]{subfiles}
\begin{document}
%% my chapter 1 content
%%
%% more of my chapter 1 content
\end{document}
and chapter 1 (chapter1.tex) looks like:
%% my document content
\subfile{chapter1}
%% more of my document content
\end{document}
pdfpages/
\usepackage[final]{pdfpages}
If you need to insert an existing, possibly multi-page, PDF file into your
LaTeX document, whether or not the included PDF was compiled with LaTeX
or another tool, consider using the pdfpages package3 . In the preamble,
include the package:
30.2.5. Inserting PDF files
wget http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/subfiles.zip
unzip subfiles.zip
cd subfiles
latex subfiles.dtx
latex subfiles.ins
Instead of putting all the packages you need at the beginning of your document as you could, the best way is to load all the packages you need inside
another dummy package called mystyle you will create just for your document. The good point of doing this is that you will just have to add one single
30.3. The file mystyle.sty
For full functionality, compile the output with pdflatex.
\includepdf[pages=-]{insertme.pdf}
To insert the whole of insertme.pdf:
\includepdf[pages=3-6]{insertme.pdf}
This package also allows you to specify which pages you wish to include: for
example, to insert pages 3 to 6 from some file insertme.pdf, use:
For a list of several packages you can use, see the List of Packages4 section.
Then add all the packages you want with the standard command
\usepackage{...} as you would do normally, change the value of all
the variables you want, etc. It will work like the code you put here would be
copied and pasted within your document.
\ProvidesPackage{mystyle}
Creating your own style is very simple: create a file called mystyle.sty
(you could name it as you wish, but it has to end with ".sty"). Write at the
beginning:
\usepackage in your document, keeping your code much cleaner. Moreover, all the info about your style will be within one file, so when you will start
another document you'll just have to copy that file and include it properly, so
you'll have exactly the same style you have used.
\usepackage{mystyle}
% put all the other packages here:
\documentclass[12pt,a4paper]{report}
\usepackage{ifpdf}
\ifpdf
% put here packages only for the PDF:
\DeclareGraphicsExtensions{.pdf,.png,.jpg,.mps}
\else
% put here packages only for the DVI:
\fi
Then create a file called document.tex; this will be the main file, the one
you will compile, even if you shouldn't need to edit it very often because you
will be working on other files. It should look like this (it's the sample code for
a report, but you might easily change it for an article or whatever else):
30.4. The main document document.tex
\end{document}
% Bibliography:
\clearpage
\input{./tex/mybibliography.tex}
\appendix
\input{./tex/myappendix.tex}
\input{./tex/intro.tex}
\input{./tex/main_part.tex}
\input{./tex/conclusions.tex}
\input{./tex/title.tex}
%\maketitle
\tableofcontents
\listoffigures
\listoftables
\begin{document}
5
6

Here a lot of code expressed in previous sections has been used. At the
beginning there is the header discussed in the Tips & Tricks5 section, so
you will be able to compile in both DVI and PDF. Then you import the only
package you need, that is your mystyle.sty (note that in the code it has to be
imported without the extension), then your document starts. Then it inserts
the title: we don't like the output of \maketitle so we created our own,
the code for it will be in a file called title.tex in the folder called tex
we created before. How to write it is explained in the Title Creation6 section.
Then tables of contents, figure and tables are inserted. If you don't want them,
just comment out those lines. Then the main part of the document in inserted.
As you can see, there is no text in document.tex: everything is in other
files in the tex directory so that you can easily edit them. We are separating
our text from the structural code, so we are improving the "What You See is
What You Mean" nature of LaTeX. Then we can see the appendix and finally
A suggestion: do not call your files like "chapter_01.tex" or "figure_03.png",

i.e. try to avoid using numbers in file-names: if the numbering LaTeX gives
them automatically is different from the one you gave (and this will likely
happen) you will get really confused. When naming a file, stop for a second,
think about a short name that can fully explain what is inside the file without
being ambiguous, it will let you save a lot of time as soon as the document
gets larger.
Once you created your document.tex you won't need to edit it anymore,
unless you want to add other files in the tex directory, but this is not going to
happen very often. Now you can write your document separating it in as many
files as you want and adding many pictures without getting confused: thanks
to the rigid structure you gave to the project, you will be able to keep track of
all your edits clearly.
the Bibliography. It is in a separated file and it is manually added to the table

of contents using a tip suggested in the Tips & Tricks7 .
and write your vectors inside the new \myvec{...} command. You can
call it as you wish, but you'd better choose a short name because you will
probably write it very often. Then, if you change your mind and you want
your vectors to look differently you just have to change the definition of your
\newcommand{\myvec}[1]{\vec{#1}}
While writing, whenever you have to take a decision about formatting, define
your own command for it and add it to your mystyle.sty:let LaTeX work
for you. If you do so, it will be very easy to change it if you change your mind.
Here is an example: if you are writing a book about Mathematics and you
have to use vectors, you have to decide how they will look. There are several
different standards, used in many books. If a is a vector, some people like to
add an arrow over it (~a), other people write it underlined (a); another common
version is to write it bold (a). Let us assume you want to write your vectors
with an arrow over them; then add the following line in your mystyle.sty.
30.5. Writing your document
http://tug.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/
subfiles/subfiles.pdf
http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/pdfpages/
pdfpages.pdf
Subfiles package documentation8

pdfpages package documentation9
30.6. External Links
\myvec{...}. Use this approach whenever you can: this will save you a lot
of time.
In this chapter, I will try to give some hints on how to teach LaTeX new tricks
and how to make it produce output that looks different from what is provided
by default.
Documents produced with the commands you have learned up to this point will
look acceptable to a large audience. While they are not fancy-looking, they
obey all the established rules of good typesetting, which will make them easy
to read and pleasant to look at. However, there are situations where LaTeX
does not provide a command or environment that matches your needs, or the
output produced by some existing command may not meet your requirements.
31. Customizing LaTeX
The following two examples should help you to get the idea. The first example
defines a new command called \wbal that will print "The Wikibook about
LaTeX". Such a command could come in handy if you had to write the title of
this book over and over again.
command. Basically, the command requires two arguments: the name of the
command you want to create, and the definition of the command. The num
argument in square brackets is optional and specifies the number of arguments
the new command takes (up to 9 are possible). If missing it defaults to 0, i.e.
no argument allowed.
\newcommand{name}[num]{definition}
To add your own commands, use the
31.1. New commands
The next example illustrates how to define a new command that takes one
argument. The #1 tag gets replaced by the argument you specify. If you
wanted to use more than one argument, use #2 and so on, these arguments are
added in an extra set of brackets.
\newcommand{\wbal}{The Wikibook
This is \wbal'' \ldots{} \wbal''
This is The Wikibook about LaTeX . . . The Wikibook about

LaTeX
about
\LaTeX}
LaTeX will not allow you to create a new command that would overwrite an
existing one. But there is a special command in case you explicitly want this:
\renewcommand. It uses the same syntax as the \newcommand command.
Note: use \wbalTwo, not \wbal2 (error on compiling)
\newcommand{\wbalsup}[1] {
This is the Wikibook about LaTeX
supported by #1}
\newcommand{\wbalTwo}[2] {
supported by #1 #2}
% in the document body:
\begin{itemize}
\item \wbalsup{Wikimedia}
\item \wbalsup{lots of users!}
\item \wbalTwo{John}{Doe}
\end{itemize}
This is the Wikibook about LaTeX supported by Wikimedia

This is the Wikibook about LaTeX supported by lots of users!
This is the Wikibook about LaTeX supported by John Doe
If the default parameter of \newcommand is present, then the first of the

number of arguments specified by num is optional with a default value of
default; if absent, then all of the arguments are required.
\newcommand{name}[num][default]{definition}
With LaTex2e, it is also possible to add a default parameter to a command with

the following syntax:
In certain cases you might also want to use the \providecommand command. It works like \newcommand, but if the command is already defined,
LaTeX will silently ignore the new command.
NOTE: when the command is used with an explicit first parameter it is given
enclosed with brackets ( "[lots of users]" ).
\end{itemize}
This is the Wikibook about La\newcommand{\wbalTwo}[2][Wikimedia]{ TeX supported by Wikimedia

and John Doe!
supported by {#1} and {#2}!}
This is the Wikibook about La% in the document body:

\begin{itemize}
TeX supported by lots of users
\item \wbalTwo{John Doe}
and John Doe!
\item \wbalTwo[lots of users]{John Doe}
The num argument is used the same way as in the \newcommand command. LaTeX makes sure that you do not define an environment that already exists. If you ever want to change an existing command, you can
use the \renewenvironment command. It uses the same syntax as the
\newenvironment command.
Again \newenvironment can have an optional argument. The material

specified in the before argument is processed before the text in the environment
gets processed. The material in the after argument gets processed when the
\end{name} command is encountered.
\newenvironment{name}[num]{before}{after}
Just as with the \newcommand command, there is a command to create your

own environments. The \newenvironment command uses the following
syntax:
31.2. New Environments
105
When creating a new environment you may easily get bitten by extra spaces
creeping in, which can potentially have fatal effects. For example when you
want to create a title environment which suppresses its own indentation as well
31.2.1. Extra space
\begin{king}
My humble subjects \ldots
\end{king}
\newenvironment{king}
{\rule{1ex}{1ex}\hspace{\stretch{1}}}
Figure
{\hspace{\stretch{1}}\rule{1ex}{1ex}}
The example below illustrates the usage of the \newenvironment command:
\begin{simple}
See the space\\to the left.
\end{simple}
Same\\here.
\newenvironment{simple}%
{\noindent}%
{\par\noindent}
Same
here.
See the space

to the left.
as the one on the following paragraph. The \ignorespaces command in

the begin block of the environment will make it ignore any space after executing
the begin block. The end block is a bit more tricky as special processing
occurs at the end of an environment. With the \ignorespacesafterend
LaTeX will issue an \ignorespaces after the special end processing has
occurred.
Same
here.
\begin{correct}\input{somefile.tex}\end{correct}
Also, if you're still having problems with extra space being appended at the end
of your environment when using the \input for external source, make sure
there is no space between the beginning, sourcing, and end of the environment,
such as:
\begin{correct}
No space\\to the left.
\end{correct}
Same\\here.
\newenvironment{correct}%
{\noindent\ignorespaces}%
{\par\noindent%
\ignorespacesafterend}
No space
to the left.
Now you can call LaTeX like this:
\usepackage{ifthen}
\ifthenelse{\equal{\blackandwhite}{true}}{
% "black and white" mode; do something..
}{
% "color" mode; do something different..
}
If you work on a Unix-like OS, you might be using Makefiles or any kind
of script to build your LaTeX projects. In that connection it might be interesting to produce different versions of the same document by calling LaTeX
with command-line parameters. If you add the following structure to your
document:
31.3. Command-line LaTeX
It is very simple, just follow the steps:
If you define a lot of new environments and commands, the preamble of your
document will get quite long. In this situation, it is a good idea to create a
LaTeX package containing all your command and environment definitions.
You can then use the \usepackage command to make the package available
in your document. Writing a package basically consists of copying the contents
of your document preamble into a separate file with a name ending in .sty.
31.4. Creating your own package
First the command \blackandwhite gets defined and then the actual file
is read with input. By setting \blackandwhite to false the color version
of the document would be produced.
latex '\newcommand{\blackandwhite}{true}\input{test.tex}'
\RequirePackage{mypack}
5. or
\usepackage{mypack}
3. write whatever you want in it using all the LaTeX commands you know.
Normally you should define new commands or import other packages.
4. import your new package with the known command
note: it has to have the same name of the file without the extension.
It tells LaTeX the name of the package and will allow it to issue a
sensible error message when you try to include a package twice.
\ProvidesPackage{mypack}
1. create a simple text file called mypack.sty (or any other name you like)
and open it with any text editor
2. at the very beginning of the text document just write
\documentclass{mystyle}
It is also possible to create your own style file. The process is similar to the
creation of your own package, you can call your own style file in the preamble
of any document by the command:
31.5. Creating your own style
Alternatively, it is possible to place the package within /texmf/tex/latex/mypack/mypack.sty where '' is your home directory (On Windows this is often
C:\Users\username) and where mypack is the name of your package. Running
texhash or equivalent will allow you to use your package as detailed above,
but without it needing to be in the same directory as your document.
the file mypack.sty and the LaTeX source you are compiling must be in the
same directory. It will be as though all you have written within your package
is within the document itself.
again, within the style files other files or packages are imported by the requirepackage command.
\ProvidesClass{mystyle}
The name of the style file is then mystyle.cls and can be opened with any text
editor. At the beginning of this file, the following line has to be provided:
http://tug.ctan.org/search.html
Add-on features for LaTeX are known as packages. Dozens of these are preinstalled with LaTeX and can be used in your documents immediately. They
should all be stored in subdirectories of texmf/tex/latex named after
each package. To find out what other packages are available and what they
do, you should use the CTAN search page1 which includes a link to Graham
Williams' comprehensive package catalogue. A package is a file or collection
of files containing extra LaTeX commands and programming which add new
styling features or modify those already existing. Installed package files all
end with .sty (there may be ancillary files as well). When you try to typeset
32. Packages
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/LaTeX%2FPackages%
2FInstalling%20Extra%20Packages
a document which requires a package which is not installed on your system,

LaTeX will warn you with an error message that it is missing, and you can then
download the package and install it using the instructions in the installing extra
packages2 section. You can also download updates to packages you already
have (both the ones that were installed along with your version of LaTeX as
well as ones you added). There is no limit to the number of packages you can
have installed on your computer (apart from disk space!), but there is probably
a physical limit to the number that can be used inside any one LaTeX document
at the same time, although it depends on how big each package is. In practice
there is no problem in having even a couple of dozen packages active.
You can include several package names in one \usepackage command by

separating the names with commas, like this:
\begin{document}
...
\end{document}
\usepackage{color}
For example, to use the color package, which lets you typeset in colors, you
would type:
\usepackage{package_name}
To use a package already installed on your system, insert a \usepackage

command in your document preamble with the package name in curly braces:
32.1. Using an existing package
Many packages can have additional formatting specifications in optional arguments in square brackets, in the same way as geometry does. Read the
\end{document}
\begin{document}
\title{\color{red}Practical Typesetting}
\author{\color{blue}Name\\ Work}
\date{\color{green}December 2005}
\maketitle
\usepackage{pslatex,palatino,avant,graphicx,color}
\usepackage[margin=2cm]{geometry}
and you can have more than one \usepackage command. Some packages
allow optional settings in square brackets. If you use these, you must give the
package its own separate \usepackage command, like geometry shown below:
\usepackage{package1,package2,package3}
teTeX
Distribution
MiKTeX
Path
C:\Program Files\MiKTeX
2.7\doc\latex
/usr/share/texmf-tetex/do
To find out what commands a package provides (and thus how to use it), you
need to read the documentation. In the texmf/doc subdirectory of your
installation there should be directories full of .dvi files, one for every package
installed. This location is distribution-specific, but is typically found in:
32.2. Package documentation
\usepackage[option1,option2,option3]{''package_name''}
documentation for the package concerned to find out what can be done. You
can pass several options together separated by a comma:
texdoc <package-name>
On most Linux machines, you can usually automatically open any installed
package documentation with the texdoc command:
Generally, most of the packages are in the latex subdirectory, although other
packages (such as BibTeX and font packages) are found in other subdirectories
in doc. The documentation directories have the same name of the package
(e.g. amsmath), which generally have one or more relevant documents in
a variety of formats (dvi, txt, pdf, etc.). The documents generally have
the same name as the package, but there are exceptions (for example, the
documentation for amsmath is found at latex/amsmath/amsdoc.dvi).
If your installation procedure has not installed the documentation, the DVI files
can all be downloaded from CTAN. Before using a package, you should read
the documentation carefully, especially the subsection usually called "User
Interface", which describes the commands the package makes available. You
cannot just guess and hope it will work: you have to read it and find out.
Here is a (not complete) list of useful packages that can be used for a wide
range of different kind of documents. Each package has a short description
next to it and, when available, there is a link to a section describing such
package in detail. All of them (unless stated) should be included in your
LaTeX distribution as package_name.sty. For more information, refer to the
documentation of the single packages, as described in the previous section.
The list is in alphabetical order.
32.3. Packages list
3
4

amsthm
amssymb
amsmath
it contains the advanced math

extensions for LaTeX. The complete documentation should be in
your LaTeX distribution; the file is
called amsdoc, and can be dvi or
pdf. For more information, see the
chapter about Mathematics3
it adds new symbols in to be used
in math mode.
it introduces the proof environment and the theoremstyle
command. For more information
see the Theorems4 section.
array
it extends the possibility of LaTeX

to handle tables, fixing some bugs
and adding new features. Using it,
you can create very complicated
and customized tables. For more
information, see the Tables5 section.
bm
babel
it provides the internationalization of LaTeX. It has to be loaded

in any document, and you have
to give as an option the main language you are going to use in the
document. For more information
see the Internationalization6 section.
allows use of bold greek letters in
math mode using the \bm{...}
command. This supersedes the
amsbsy package.
caption
boxedminipage
it introduces the
boxedminipage environment,
that works exactly like minipage
but adds a frame around it
allows customization of appearance and placement of captions for
figures, tables, etc.
cancel
\cancelto{0}{x}
or
\cancel{x}
provides commands for striking

out mathematical expressions. The
syntax is
cite
changepage
All the arguments can be both

positive and negative numbers;
they will be added (keeping the
sign) to the relative variable.
assists in citation management
\changepage{textheight}{textwidth}%
{evensidemargin}{oddsidemargin}%
{columnsep}{topmargin}%
{headheight}{headsep}%
{footskip}
to easily change the margins of

pages. The syntax is
7
8
it adds support for colored text.

For more information, see the relevant section7
adds support for arbitrarily-deep
nested lists (useful for outlines).
adds additional integral symbols,
for integrals over squares, clockwise integrals over sets, etc.
other mathematical symbols
to change header and footer of
any page of the document. It is
described in the Page Layout8
section
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/LaTeX%2FPackages%2FColor
eucal
fancyhdr
esint
easylist
color
9
10

graphicx
glossaries
geometry
fontenc
to choose the font encoding of

the output text. You might need
it if you are writing documents
in a language other than English.
Check in the Internationalization9
section.
for easy management of document
margins and the document page
size
for creation of glossaries and list of
acronyms. For more information,
see relevant chapter10 .
to manage external pictures
11
12
it gives LaTeX the possibility to

manage links within the document
or to any URL when you compile
in PDF. For more information, see
the relevant section11
once loaded, the beginning of any
chapter/section is indented by the
usual paragraph indentation.
to choose the encoding of the input
text. You might need it if you are
writing documents in a language
other than English. Check in the
Internationalization12 section.
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/LaTeX%2FPackages%2FHyperref
latexsym
inputenc
indentfirst
hyperref
13
to insert programming code within

the document. Many languages are
supported and the output can be
customized. For more information,
see the relevant section13
gives additional citation options
and styles
This package simplifies the insertion of external multi-page PDF or
PS documents.
pdfpages
mathrsfs
natbib
listings
14
15
It lets you rotate any kind of object.

It is particularly useful for rotating
tables. For more information, see
the relevant section14
Lets you change line spacing, e.g.
provides the \doublespacing
command for making double
spaced documents. For more information, see the relevant section15
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/LaTeX%2FPackages%2FRotating
setspace
rotating
showkeys
it is very useful while writing

any document. If you want to
reference an image or a formula,
you have to give it a name using
\label{...} and then you can
recall it using \ref{...}. When
you compile the document these
will be replaced only with numbers, and you can't know which
label you had used unless you take
a look at the source. If you have
loaded the showkeys package,
you will see the label just next or
above the relevant number in the
compiled version. An example of a
reference to a section is
16
17
it prints out all index entries in

the left margin of the text. This
is quite useful for proofreading
a document and verifying the index. For more information, see the
Indexing16 section.
the "root" and "child" document
can be compiled at the same time
without making changes to the
"child" document. For more information, see the Subfile package17
section.

http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/LaTeX%2FMultiple_files%
23Subfiles_package
subfiles
showidx
subfig
it allows to define multiple floats

(figures, tables) within one environment giving individual captions
and labels in the form 1a, 1b.
syntonly
LaTeX skims through your document only checking for proper

syntax and usage of the commands,
but doesnt produce any (DVI or
PDF) output. As LaTeX runs faster
in this mode you may save yourself valuable time. If you want
to get the output, you can simply
comment out the second line.
\usepackage{syntonly}
\syntaxonly
if you add the following code in

your preamble:
18
todonotes
theorem
textcomp
provides extra symbols, e.g. arrows like

\textrightarrow, various currencies (\texteuro,...), things
like \textcelsius and many
other
you can change the style of newly
defined theorems. For more information see the Theorems18 section.
lets you insert notes of stuff to
do with the syntax \todo{Add
details.}
19
20
helps you typeset of SIunits correctly. For example

\SI{12}{\mega\hertz}. Automatically handles the correct
spacing between the number and
the unit. Note that even non-SIunits are set, like dB, rad, ...
it allows to underline text (either
with straight or wavy line). Few
examples of usage are added to the
Formatting20 chapter.
http://ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/siunitx
ulem
siunitx19
url
it defines the \url{...} command. URLs often contain special

character such as _ and &, in order
to write them you should escape
them inserting a backslash, but if
you write them as an argument of
\url{...}, you don't need to
escape any special character and
it will take care of proper formatting for you. If you are using the
hyperref, you don't need to load
url because it already provides
the \url{...} command.
21
xypic
wrapfig
verbatim
it improves the verbatim environment, fixing some bugs. Moreover, it provides the comment
environment, that lets you add
multiple-line comments or easily
comment out big parts of the code.
to insert images surrounded by
text. It was discussed in section
Floats, Figures and Captions21
is used to create trees, graphs,
(commutative) diagrams, and similar things.
25
22
23
24

http://tug.ctan.org/search.html
http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/catalogue.
html
http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/alpha.html
Alphabetic catalogue25
The best way to look for LaTeX packages is the already mentioned CTAN:
Search23 . Additional resources form The TeX Catalogue Online24 :
32.5. External resources
LaTeX/Customizing LaTeX#Creating your own package22
See
32.4. Creating packages
28
26
27
http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/brief.html
http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/bytopic.
html
http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/hier.html
With brief descriptions26

Topical catalogue27 with packages sorted systematically
Hierarchical28 mirroring the CTAN folder hierarchy
__FORCETOC__
Here are some topics that are not really necessary to write a proper document,
but could help you making your life easier and giving you some details to
modify.
33. Advanced Topics
or
\stepcounter{NameOfTheNewCounter}
To increase the counter, either use
\newcounter{NameOfTheNewCounter}[NameOfTheOtherCounter]
you create a new counter that is automatically set to zero. If you want the
counter to be reset to zero every time another counter is increased, use:
\newcounter{NameOfTheNewCounter}
In LaTeX it is fairly easy to create new counters and even counters that reset
automatically when another counter is increased (think subsection in a section
for example). With the command
33.1. Adding your own counters
\theNameOfTheNewCounter will print the formatted string related to

the counter.
There is several way to get access to a counter.
\setcounter{NameOfTheNewCounter}{number}
To set the counter value explicitly, use
here the number can also be negative. For automatic reseting you need to use
\stepcounter.
\addtocounter{NameOfTheNewCounter}{number}
or
\refstepcounter{NameOfTheNewCounter} % used for labels and cross

referencing
\section{My Section}
\subsection{My Subsection}
\part{My Part}
\renewcommand{\thesection}{\thepart .\arabic{section}}
Here follows an example where we want to use parts and sections, but no
chapters in the book class :
Instead of \arabic you could also use \alph, \Alph, \roman, or

\Roman. Note that \arabic{NameOfTheNewCounter} may be used
as a value too, but not the others.
\value{NameOfTheNewCounter} will return the counter value

which can be used by other counter, or for calculus. It is not a formatted string, so it cannot be used in text.
\arabic{NameOfTheNewCounter} will print the formatted counter
using arabic numbers.
\addtocounter{mysubsection}{25}
\arabic{mysection}.\arabic{mysubsection}
bla bla and more bla bla
\stepcounter{mysubsection}
bla bla
\stepcounter{mysection}
bla bla
\newcounter{mysection}
\newcounter{mysubsection}[mysection]
\addtocounter{mysection}{2} % set them to some other numbers than 0
\addtocounter{mysubsection}{10} % same
%
bla bla
Here is an example for recreating something similar to a section and subsection

counter that already exist in LaTeX:
You can also pack a paragraph of your choice into a box with either the
The past chapters have already dealt with some boxes, although they weren't
described as such. The tabular environment and the \includegraphics,
for example, both produce a box. This means that one can easily arrange two
tables or images side by side. You just have to make sure that their combined
width is not larger than the \textwidth.
Admittedly, this is a very simplistic description of what really happens, but the
point is that TeX operates with glue and boxes. Letters are not the only things
that can be boxes. One can put virtually everything into a box, including other
boxes. Each box will then be handled by LaTeX as if it were a single letter.
LaTeX builds up its pages by pushing around boxes. At first, each letter is a
little box, which is then glued to other letters to form words. These are again
glued to other words, but with special glue, which is elastic so that a series of
words can be squeezed or stretched as to exactly fill a line on the page.
33.2. Boxes
While \parbox packs up a whole paragraph doing line breaking and everything, there is also a class of boxing commands that operates only on horizontally aligned material. We already know one of them; its called \mbox. It
simply packs up a series of boxes into another one, and can be used to prevent
LaTeX from breaking two words. As you can put boxes inside boxes, these
horizontal box packers give you ultimate flexibility.
environment. The pos parameter can take one of the letters c, t or b to control
the vertical alignment of the box, relative to the baseline of the surrounding
text. width takes a length argument specifying the width of the box. The
main difference between a minipage and a \parbox is that you cannot
use all commands and environments inside a parbox, while almost anything is
possible in a minipage.
\begin{minipage}[pos]{width} text \end{minipage}
command or the
\parbox[pos]{width}{text}
The following example shows you some things you could do with the
\makebox and \framebox commands:
The command \framebox works exactly the same as \makebox, but it

draws a box around the text.
width defines the width of the resulting box as seen from the outside (This
means it can be smaller than the material inside the box. You can even
set the width to 0pt so that the text inside the box will be typeset without
influencing the surrounding boxes). Besides the length expressions, you
can also use \width, \height, \depth, and \totalheight in the
width parameter. They are set from values obtained by measuring the typeset
text. The pos parameter takes a one letter value: center, flushleft, flushright, or
spread the text to fill the box.
\makebox[width][pos]{text}
Figure 107
\raisebox{lift}[extend-above-baseline][extend-below-baseline]{text}
Now that we control the horizontal, the obvious next step is to go for the
vertical. No problem for LaTeX. The
\makebox[\textwidth]{%
c e n t r a l}\par
\makebox[\textwidth][s]{%
s p r e a d}\par
\framebox[1.1\width]{Guess Im
framed now!} \par
\framebox[0.8\width][r]{Bummer,
I am too wide} \par
\framebox[1cm][l]{never
mind, so am I}
Can you read this?
Figure 108
An alternative to these approaches is the usage of the framed environment

(you will need to include the "framed" package to use it). This provides an
easy way to box a paragraph within a document:
\raisebox{0pt}[0pt][0pt]{\Large%
\textbf{Aaaa\raisebox{-0.3ex}{a}%
\raisebox{-0.7ex}{aa}%
\raisebox{-1.2ex}{r}%
\raisebox{-2.2ex}{g}%
\raisebox{-4.5ex}{h}}}
he shouted but not even the next
one in line noticed that something
terrible had happened to him.
command lets you define the vertical properties of a box. You can use
\width, \height, \depth, and \totalheight in the first three parameters, in order to act upon the size of the box inside the text argument:
Here is an example:
\rule[lift]{width}{height}
The \rule command in normal use produces a simple black box:
33.3. Rules and Struts
\begin{framed}
This is an easy way to box text within a document!
\end{framed}
Figure 109
A special case is a rule with no width but a certain height. In professional

typesetting, this is called a strut. It is used to guarantee that an element on a
page has a certain minimal height. You could use it in a tabular environment
to make sure a row has a certain minimum height.
This is useful for drawing vertical and horizontal lines.
\rule{3mm}{.1pt}%
\rule[-1mm]{5mm}{1cm}%
\rule{3mm}{.1pt}%
\rule[1mm]{1cm}{5mm}%
\rule{3mm}{.1pt}
1
2
http://tug.org/pracjourn/2007-3/henningsen/
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User%3AArnehe
Note: This Wikibook is based on the article Tools for Collaborative Writing
of Scientific LaTeX Documents1 by Arne Henningsen2 that is published in The
PracTeX Journal 2007, number 3 (http://www.tug.org/pracjourn/).
34. Collaborative Writing of LaTeX

Documents
http://www.limsup.com
Online LaTeX editor LIMSUP3 allowing real time collaboration of LaTeX

documents.
34.1.1. Other Methods
Collaborative writing of documents requires a strong synchronisation among

authors. This Wikibook describes a possible way to organise the collaborative
preparation of LaTeX documents. The presented solution is primarily based
on the version control system Subversion (http://subversion.apache.org/). The
Wikibook describes how Subversion can be used together with several other
software tools and LaTeX packages to organise the collaborative preparation
of LaTeX documents.
34.1. Abstract
4
5
6
7
8
http://www.scribtex.com
https://www.sharelatex.com
http://writelatex.com
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Etherpad
http://www.publications.li
The online LaTeX editor ScribTeX4 makes sharing your document with
others very easy. It provides a full LaTeX environment, with all the usual
features of LaTeX like bibtex, images and custom style files. It also provides
full version histories of your files, essential for collaborating. The free
account allows only 3 projects and only one collaborator per project.
ShareLaTeX.com5 is a new cloud based LaTeX editor designed to making
working collaboratively as easy as possible. With real time collaborative
editing similar to google documents it is currently in public beta.
writelatex.com6 is like EtherPad7 for LaTeX. Start writing with one click
and share the link. It supports real time preview, figures, bibliographies and
custom styles. Currently in beta.
publications.li8 is a real-time collaborative LaTeX editor.
9
10
11
12
http://www.verbosus.com
http://monkeytex.bradcater.webfactional.com
http://www.getdropbox.com
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Gobby
Verbosus9 is a professional Online LaTeX Editor that supports collaboration

with other users and is free to use. Merge conflicts can easily resolved by
using a built-in merge tool that uses an implementation of the diff-algorithm
to generate information required for a successful merge.
The Monkey TeX10 is free and allows team sharing.
Another option for collaboration is dropbox11 . It has 2Gb free storage
and versioning system. Works like SVN, but more automated and therefore
especially useful for beginning latex users.
As the LaTeX system uses plain text, you can use synchronous collaborative
editors like Gobby12 . In Gobby you can write your documents in collaboration with anyone in real time. It is strongly recommended that you use
utf8 encoding (especially if there are users on multiple operating systems
collaborating) and a stable network (typically wired networks).
13
14
15
16
17
http://docs.google.com
http://docs.latexlab.org
http://titanpad.com
http://etherpad.org/etherpadsites.html
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/EtherPad
where 'xxxx' should be replaced by the pad number (something like

'z7rSrfrYcH').
wget -O filename.tex
"http://titanpad.com/ep/pad/export/xxxx/latest?format=txt" && (latex
filename.tex)
Google Documents13 or LaTeX Lab14 also allows real-time simultaneous

collaborative editing of text files for anyone with a Google account (and its
option to make the document available through a URL makes local download
and compilation easily scriptable).
TitanPad15 (or other clones16 of EtherPad17 ). To compile use the command
line :
18
19
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mercurial
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/Git
In this Wikibook, I describe how the collaborative writing of LaTeX documents

is organised at our department (Division of Agricultural Policy, Department of
Agricultural Economics, University of Kiel, Germany). I present our software
tools, and describe how we use them. Thus, this Wikibook provides some ideas
and hints that will be useful for other LaTeX users who prepare documents
together with their co-authors.
The collaborative preparation of documents requires a considerable amount of

coordination among the authors. This coordination can be organised in many
different ways, where the best way depends on the specific circumstances.
34.2. Introduction
You could use more modern distributed version control systems like Mercurial18 or Git19 .
A second possibility is to provide the document on a common file server, which

is available in most departments. The risk of overwriting each others' modifications can be eliminated by locking files that are currently edited. However,
generally the file server can be only accessed from within a department. Hence,
authors who are out of the building cannot use this method to update/commit
their changes. In this case, they will have to use another way to overcome this
problem. So, how can authors access these files?
There are many ways to interchange documents among authors. One possibility
is to compose documents by interchanging e-mail messages. This method has
the advantage that common users generally do not have to install and learn
the usage of any extra software, because virtually all authors have an e-mail
account. Furthermore, the author who has modified the document can easily
attach the document and explain the changes by e-mail as well. Unfortunately,
there is a problem when two or more authors are working at the same time on
the same document. So, how can authors synchronise these files?
34.3. Interchanging Documents
20
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_revision_control_
software
A third possibility is to use a version control system. A comprehensive list

of version control systems can be found at Wikipedia20 . Version control
systems keep track of all changes in files in a project. If many authors modify
a document at the same time, the version control system tries to merge all
modifications automatically. However, if multiple authors have modified the
same line, the modifications cannot be merged automatically, and the user has
to resolve the conflict by deciding manually which of the changes should be
kept. Authors can also comment their modifications so that the co-authors can
easily understand the workflow of this file. As version control systems generally communicate over the internet (e.g. through TCP/IP connections), they
can be used from different computers with internet connections. A restrictive
firewall policy might prevent the version control system from connecting to
the internet. In this case, the network administrator has to be asked to open the
appropriate port. The internet is only used for synchronising the files. Hence, a
21
http://subversion.apache.org/
Subversion (SVN)21 comes as a successor to the popular version control system

CVS. SVN operates on a client-server model in which a central server hosts a
project repository that users copy and modify locally. A repository functions
similarly to a library in that it permits users to check out the current project,
34.4. The Version Control System Subversion
Moreover, a version control system is useful even if a single user is working

on a project. First, the user can track (and possibly revoke) all previous
modifications. Second, this is a convenient way to have a backup of the files
on other computers (e.g. on the version control server). Third, this allows the
user to easily switch between different computers (e.g. office, laptop, home).
permanent internet connection is not required. The only drawback of a version

control system could be that it has to be installed and configured.
22
http://www.dyndns.com/
Users do not have to install the SVN server software, but a SVN "client"
software. This is the unique way to access the repositories on the server.
Besides the basic SVN command-line client, there are several Graphical
To set up a SVN version control system, the SVN server software has to
be installed on a (single) computer with permanent internet access. (If this
computer has no static IP address, one can use a service like DynDNS22 to
be able to access the server with a static hostname.) It can run on many Unix,
modern MS Windows, and Mac OS X platforms.
Each user has a local working copy of a remote repository. For instance, users
can update changes from the repository to their working copy, commit changes
from their own working copy to the repository, or (re)view the differences
between working copy and repository.
make changes, and then check it back in. The server records all changes a user
checks in (usually with a message summarizing what changes the user made)
so that other users can easily apply those changes to their own local files.
23
24
25
26
http://subversion.tigris.org/links.html).
http://tortoisesvn.tigris.org/
http://zoneit.free.fr/esvn/
http://kdiff3.sourceforge.net/
Most MS Windows users access the SVN server by the TortoiseSVN24 client,
because it provides the most usual interface for common users. Linux users
usually use SVN utilities from the command-line, or eSvn25 --a GUI frontend-with KDiff326 for showing complex differences.
At our department, we run the SVN server on a GNU-Linux system, because

most Linux distributions include it. In this sense, installing, configuring, and
maintaining SVN is a very simple task.
User Interface Tools (GUIs) and plug-ins for accessing the SVN server (see
http://subversion.tigris.org/links.html).23 Additionally, there are very good
manuals about SVN freely available on the internet (e.g. http://svnbook.redbean.com).
Figure 110 Figure 1: Common texmf tree shown in eSvns Repository

Browser
34.5. Hosting LaTeX files in Subversion
27
28
http://www.tug.org/tetex/)
http://www.miktex.org/)
If a new class or style file has been added (but not if these files have been
modified), the users have to update their 'file name data base' (FNDB) before
On our Subversion server, we have one repository for a common texmf tree.
Its structure complies with the TeX Directory Structure guidelines (TDS,
http://www.tug.org/tds/tds.html, see figure 1). This repository provides LaTeX
classes, LaTeX styles, and BibTeX styles that are not available in the LaTeX
distributions of the users, e.g. because they were bought or developed for the
internal use at our department. All users have a working copy of this repository
and have configured LaTeX to use this as their personal texmf tree. For
instance, teTeX (http://www.tug.org/tetex/)27 users can edit their TeX configuration file (e.g. /etc/texmf/web2c/texmf.cnf) and set the variable
TEXMFHOME to the path of the working copy of the common texmf tree (e.g.
by TEXMFHOME = $HOME/texmf); MiKTeX (http://www.miktex.org/)28
users can add the path of the working copy of the common texmf tree in the
'Roots' tab of the MiKTeX Options.
The most important directory is /trunk. If a single text document belongs to

the project, all files and subdirectories of this text document are in /trunk.
If the project yields two or more different text documents, /trunk contains a
subdirectory for each text document. A slightly different version (a branch)
of a text document (e.g. for presentation at a conference) can be prepared
The Subversion server hosts a separate repository for each project of our department. Although branching, merging, and tagging is less important for writing
text documents than for writing source code for software, our repository layouts follow the recommendations of the 'Subversion book' (http://svnbook.redbean.com). In this sense, each repository has the three directories /trunk,
/branches, and /tags.
Furthermore, the repository contains manuals explaining the specific LaTeX

software solution at our department (e.g. this document).
they can use these classes and styles. For instance, teTeX users have to execute
texhash; MiKTeX users have to click on the button 'Refresh FNDB' in the
'General' tab of the MiKTeX Options.
Often the question arises, which files should be put under version control.
Generally, all files that are directly modified by the user and that are necessary
for compiling the document should be included in the version control system.
Typically, these are the LaTeX source code (*.tex) files (the main document
and possibly some subdocuments) and all pictures that are inserted in the
document (*.eps, *.jpg, *.png, and *.pdf files). All LaTeX classes
(*.cls), LaTeX styles (*.sty), BibTeX data bases (*.bib), and BibTeX
styles (*.bst) generally should be hosted in the repository of the common
texmf tree, but they could be included in the respective repository, if some
either in an additional subdirectory of /trunk or in a new subdirectory of

/branches. When a text document is submitted to a journal or a conference,
we create a tag in the directory /tags so that it is easy to identify the
submitted version of the document at a later date. This feature has been
proven very useful. When creating branches and tags, it is important always to
use the Subversion client (and not the tools of the local file system) for these
actions, because this saves disk space on the server and it preserves information
about the same history of these documents.
A great feature of a version control system is that all authors can easily trace
the workflow of a project by viewing the differences between arbitrary versions
of the files. Authors are primarily interested in 'effective' modifications of
34.6. Subversion really makes the difference
(external) co-authors do not have access to the common texmf tree. On

the other hand, all files that are automatically created or modified during the
compilation process (e.g. *.aut, *.aux, *.bbl, *.bix, *.blg, *.dvi,
*.glo, *.gls, *.idx, *.ilg, *.ind, *.ist, *.lof, *.log, *.lot,
*.nav, *.nlo, *.out, *.pdf, *.ps, *.snm, and *.toc files) or by
the (LaTeX or BibTeX) editor (e.g. *.bak, *.bib, *.kilepr, *.prj,
*.sav, *.tcp, *.tmp, *.tps, and *.tex files) generally should be not
under version control, because these files are not necessary for compilation
and generally do not include additional information. Furthermore, these files
are regularly modified so that conflicts are very likely.
In this sense, it is very important not to change the positions of line breaks
without cause. Hence, automatic line wrapping of the users' LaTeX editors should be turned off and line breaks should be added manually. Otherwise, if a single word in the beginning of a paragraph is added or removed, all line breaks of this paragraph might change so that most diff
tools indicate the entire paragraph as modified, because they compare the
files line by line. The diff tools wdiff (http://www.gnu.org/software/wdiff/)
and dwdiff (http://os.ghalkes.nl/dwdiff.html) are not affected by the positions of line breaks, because they compare documents word by word. However, their output is less clear so that modifications are more difficult to
the source code that change the compiled document, but not in 'ineffective'
modifications that have no impact on the compiled document (e.g. the position
of line breaks). Software tools for comparing text documents ('diff tools')
generally cannot differentiate between 'effective' and 'ineffective' modifications;
they highlight both types of modifications. This considerably increases the
effort to find and review the 'effective' modifications. Therefore, 'ineffective'
modifications should be avoided.
Furthermore, we split long sentences into several lines so that each line
has at most 80 characters, because it is rather inconvenient to search for
(small) differences in long lines. (Note: For instance, the LaTeX editor Kile
(http://kile.sourceforge.net/) can assist the user in this task when it is configured to add a vertical line that marks the 80th column.) We find it very useful
to introduce the additional line breaks at logical breaks of the sentence, e.g.
before a relative clause or a new part of the sentence starts. An example LaTeX
code that is formatted according to these guidelines is the source code of the
A reasonable convention is to add a line break after each sentence and start
each new sentence in a new line. Note that this has an advantage also beyond
version control: if you want to find a sentence in your LaTeX code that you
have seen in a compiled (DVI, PS, or PDF) file or on a printout, you can easily
identify the first few words of this sentence and screen for these words on the
left border of your editor window.
track. Moreover, these tools cannot be used directly with the Subversion
command-line switch --diff-cmd, but a small wrapper script has to be
used (http://textsnippets.com/posts/show/1033).
29
30
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User%3AArnehe
http://svnbook.red-bean.com/en/1.4/svn.advanced.props.
file-portability.html#svn.advanced.props.special.
eol-style).
If the authors work on different operating systems, their LaTeX editors

will probably save the files with different newline (end-of-line) characters (http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Newline). To avoid this type of 'ineffective' modifications, all users can agree on a specific newline character and configure their editor to use this newline character. Another alternative is to add the subversion property 'svn:eol-style' and set it to 'native'. In this case, Subversion automatically converts all newline characters of this file to the native newline character of the author's operating system (http://svnbook.red-bean.com/en/1.4/svn.advanced.props.fileportability.html#svn.advanced.props.special.eol-style).30
article Tools for Collaborative Writing of Scientific LaTeX Documents by Arne

Henningsen29 that is published (including the source code) in The PracTeX
Journal 2007, Number 3 (http://www.tug.org/pracjourn/2007-3/henningsen/).
31
There is also another important reason for reducing the number of 'ineffective'
modifications: if several authors work on the same file, the probability that the
same line is modified by two or more authors at the same time increases with
the number of modified lines. Hence, 'ineffective' modifications unnecessarily
increase the risk of conflicts (see section Interchanging Documents31 ).
Furthermore, version control systems allow a very effective quality assurance

measure: all authors should critically review their own modifications before
they commit them to the repository (see figure 2). The differences between the
user's working copy and the repository can be easily inspected with a single
Figure 111 Figure 2: Reviewing modifications in KDiff3
32
http://svnbook.red-bean.com,
Subversion has a feature called 'Keyword Substitution' that includes dynamic version information about a file (e.g. the revision number or the
last author) into the contents of the file itself (see e.g. http://svnbook.redbean.com,32 chapter 3). Sometimes, it is useful to include these information
not only as a comment in the LaTeX source code, but also in the (compiled)
DVI, PS, or PDF document. This can be achieved with the LaTeX packages svn (http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/svn/), svninfo
(http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/svninfo/), or (preferably) svn-multi (http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/svnmulti/).
Subversion command or with one or two clicks in a graphical Subversion

client. Furthermore, authors should verify that their code can be compiled
flawlessly before they commit their modifications to the repository. Otherwise,
the co-authors have to pay for these mistakes when they want to compile the
document. However, this directive is not only reasonable for version control
systems but also for all other ways to interchange documents among authors.
9.
8.
7.
6.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Avoid 'ineffective' modifications.

Do not change line breaks without good reason.
Turn off automatic line wrapping of your LaTeX editor.
Start each new sentence in a new line.
Split long sentences into several lines so that each line has at most 80
characters.
Put only those files under version control that are directly modified by
the user.
Verify that your code can be compiled flawlessly before committing
your modifications to the repository.
Use Subversions diff feature to critically review your modifications
before committing them to the repository.
Add a meaningful and descriptive comment when committing your
modifications to the repository.
Directives for using LaTeX with version control systems
The most important directives for collaborative writing of LaTeX documents

with version control systems are summarised in the following box.
If the users are willing to let go of the built-in diff utility of SVN and use diff
tools that are local on their workstations, they can put to use such tools that
are more tailored to text documents. The diff tool that comes with SVN was
designed with source code in mind. As such, it is built to be more useful for
files of short lines. Other tools, such as Compare It! allows to conveniently
compare text files where each line can span hundreds of characters (such as
when each line represents a paragraph). When using a diff tool that allows
convenient views of files with long lines, the users can author the TeX files
without a strict line-breaking policy.
10. Use the Subversion client for copying, moving, or renaming files and
folders that are under revision control.
33
34
http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/support/latexdiff/
changebar/
An example on how to use Latexdiff in the Terminal.
The tools latexdiff33 and changebar34 can visualize differences of two LaTeX
files inside a generated document. This makes it easier to see impact of certain
changes or discuss changes with people not custom to LaTeX. Changebar
comes with a script chbar.sh which inserts a bar in the margin indicating
parts that have changed. Latexdiff allows different styles of visualization. The
default is that discarded text is marked as red and added text is marked as blue.
It also supports a mode similar to Changebar which adds a bar in the margin.
Latexdiff comes with a script latexrevise which can be used to accept or
decline changes. It also has a wrapper script to support version control systems
such as the discussed Subversion.
34.6.1. Visualizing diffs in LaTeX: latexdiff and changebar
35
36
http://www.qtrac.eu/diffpdf.html
http://www.qtrac.eu/comparepdf.html
Writing of scientific articles, reports, and books requires the citation of all
relevant sources. BibTeX is an excellent tool for citing references and creating
bibliographies (Markey 2005, Fenn 2006). Many different BibTeX styles can
34.7. Managing collaborative bibliographies
The program DiffPDF35 can be used to compare two existing PDFs visually.
There is also a command line tool comparepdf36 based on DiffPDF.
latexdiff old.tex new.tex > diff.tex

# Files
old.tex and new.tex are compared and the file visualizing the change
is written to diff.tex
pdflatex diff.tex
# Create a PDF
showing the changes
All users edit our bibliographic data base with the graphical BibTeX editor
JabRef (http://jabref.sourceforge.net/). As JabRef is written in Java, it runs on
all major operating systems. As different versions of JabRef generally save
files in a slightly different way (e.g. by introducing line breaks at different
At our department, we have a common bibliographic data base in the BibTeX

format (.bib file). It resides in our common texmf tree (see section 'Hosting
LaTeX files in Subversion) in the subdirectory /bibtex/bib/ (see figure
1). Hence, all users can specify this bibliography by only using the file name
(without the full path) --- no matter where the user's working copy of the
common texmf tree is located.
be found on CTAN (http://www.ctan.org) and on the LaTeX Bibliography

Styles Database (http://jo.irisson.free.fr/bstdatabase/). If no suitable BibTeX
style can be found, most desired styles can be conveniently assembled with custombib/makebst (http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/custombib/). Furthermore, BibTeX style files can be created or modified manually;
however this action requires knowledge of the (unnamed) postfix stack language that is used in BibTeX style files (Patashnik 1988).
positions), all users should use the same (e.g. last stable) version of JabRef.
Otherwise, there would be many differences between different versions of
.bib files that solely originate from using different version of JabRef. Hence,
it would be hard to find the real differences between the compared documents.
Furthermore, the probability of conflicts would be much higher (see section
'Subversion really makes the difference'). As JabRef saves the BibTeX data
base with the native newline character of the author's operating system, it is
recommended to add the Subversion property 'svn:eol-style' and set it to 'native'
(see section 'Subversion really makes the difference').
JabRef is highly flexible and can be configured in many details. We make

the following changes to the default configuration of JabRef to simplify our
work. First, we specify the default pattern for BibTeX keys so that JabRef
can automatically generate keys in our desired format. This can be done by
Figure 112 Figure 3: Specify default key pattern in JabRef
Figure 113 Figure 4: Set up general fields in JabRef
selecting Options Preferences Key pattern and modifying

the desired pattern in the field Default pattern. For instance, we use
[auth:lower][shortyear] to get the last name of the first author in
lower case and the last two digits of the year of the publication (see figure 3).
Second, we add the BibTeX field location for information about the location, where the publication is available as hard copy (e.g. a book or a copy
of an article). This field can contain the name of the user who has the hard
copy and where he has it or the name of a library and the shelf-mark. This
field can be added in JabRef by selecting Options Set up general
fields and adding the word location (using the semicolon (;) as delimiter) somewhere in the line that starts with General: (see figure 4).
Third, we put all PDF files of publications in a specific subdirectory in our file
server, where we use the BibTeX key as file name. We inform JabRef about
this subdirectory by selecting Options Preferences External
programs and adding the path of the this subdirectory in the field Main
Figure 114 Figure 5: Specify 'Main PDF directory' in JabRef
This wikibook describes a possible way to efficiently organise the collaborative

preparation of LaTeX documents. The presented solution is based on the
34.8. Conclusion
If we send the LaTeX source code of a project to a journal, publisher, or somebody else who has no access to our common texmf
tree, we do not include our entire bibliographic data base, but extract
the relevant entries with the Perl script aux2bib (http://www.ctan.org/texarchive/biblio/bibtex/utils/bibtools/aux2bib).
PDF directory (see figure 5). If a PDF file of a publication is available,

the user can push the Auto button left of JabRefs Pdf field to automatically
add the file name of the PDF file. Now, all users who have access to the file
server can open the PDF file of a publication by simply clicking on JabRefs
PDF icon.
Second, we consider to simplify the solution for a common bibliographic

data base. Currently it is based on the version control system Subversion,
the graphical BibTeX editor JabRef, and a file server for the PDF files of
publications in the data base. The usage of three different tools for one
task is rather challenging for infrequent users and users that are not familiar
with these tools. Furthermore, the file server can be only accessed by local
users. Therefore, we consider to implement an integrated server solution like
WIKINDX (http://wikindx.sourceforge.net/), Aigaion (http://www.aigaion.nl/),
First, we plan that all users install the same LaTeX distribution. As the TeX
Live distribution (http://www.tug.org/texlive/) is available both for Unix and
MS Windows operating systems, we might recommend our users to switch
to this LaTeX distribution in the future. (Currently, our users have different
LaTeX distributions that provide a different selection of LaTeX packages and
different versions of some packages. We solve this problem by providing some
packages on our common texmf tree.)
Subversion version control system and several other software tools and LaTeX
packages. However, there are still a few issues that can be improved.
All readers are encouraged to contribute to this wikibook by adding further

hints or ideas or by providing further solutions to the problem of collaborative
writing of LaTeX documents.
or refBASE (http://refbase.sourceforge.net/). Using this solution only requires

a computer with internet access and a web browser, which makes the usage of
our data base considerably easier for infrequent users. Moreover, the stored
PDF files are available not only from within the department, but throughout
the world. (Depending on the copy rights of the stored PDF files, the access
to the server --- or least the access to the PDF files --- has to be restricted to
members of the department.) Even Non-LaTeX users of our department might
benefit from a server-based solution, because it should be easier to use this
bibliographic data base in (other) word processing software packages, because
these servers provide the data not only in BibTeX format, but also in other
formats.
Fenn, Jrgen (2006): Managing citations and your bibliography with BibTeX.
The PracTEX Journal, 4. http://www.tug.org/pracjourn/2006-4/fenn/.
34.10. References
Arne Henningsen thanks Francisco Reinaldo and Graldine Henningsen for

comments and suggestions that helped him to improve and clarify this paper,
Karsten Heymann for many hints and advices regarding LaTeX, BibTeX, and
Subversion, and Christian Henning as well as his colleagues for supporting his
intention to establish LaTeX and Subversion at their department.
34.9. Acknowledgements
38
37
http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/
ttb_en.pdf.
http://mathoverflow.net/questions/3044/
tools-for-collaborative-paper-writing
Tools for collaborative paper-writing38
Oren Patashnik. Designing BibTeX styles. http://www.ctan.org/texarchive/info/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf.
Markey, Nicolas (2005): Tame the BeaST. The B to X of BibTeX.

http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf.37 Version 1.3.
Using other software freely available on Internet, you can easily convert DVI
and PDF to other document formats. In particular, you can obtain the PostScript
version using software which is included in your LaTeX distribution. Some
LaTeX IDE will give you the possibility to generate the PostScript version
directly (even if it uses internally a DVI mid-step, e.g. LaTeX DVI PS).
It is also possible to create PDF from DVI and vice versa. It doesn't seem
DVI using latex, the first one to be supported

PDF using pdflatex, more recent
Strictly speaking, LaTeX source can be used to directly generate two formats:
35. Export To Other Formats
Other formats can be produced, such as RTF (which can be used in Microsoft
Word) and HTML. However, these documents are produced from software that
parses and interprets the LaTeX files, and do not implement all the features
available for the primary DVI and PDF outputs. Nonetheless, they do work,
and can be crucial tools for collaboration with colleagues who do not edit
documents with LaTeX.
logical to create a file with two steps when you can create it straight away, but
some users might need it because, as you remember from the first chapters,
the format you can generate depends upon the formats of the images you want
to include (EPS for DVI, PNG and JPG for PDF). Here you will find sections
about different formats with description about how to get it.
you will get also a file called my_file.ps that you can delete.
dvi2ps myfile.dvi
ps2pdf myfile.ps
will create my_file.pdf. Another way is to pass through PS generation:
dvipdfm my_file.dvi
35.1.2. DVI to PDF
pdflatex my_file
35.1.1. Directly
35.1. Convert to PDF
gs -dNOPAUSE -sDEVICE=pdfwrite -sOUTPUTFILE=Merged.pdf -dBATCH 1.pdf

2.pdf 3.pdf
For Linux:
gswin32 -dNOPAUSE -sDEVICE=pdfwrite -sOUTPUTFILE=Merged.pdf -dBATCH

1.pdf 2.pdf 3.pdf
For Windows:
If you have created different PDF documents and you want to merge them into
one single PDF file you can use the following command-line command. You
need to have Ghostscript installed:
35.1.3. Merging PDF
1
2
http://pdfshuffler.sourceforge.net/
http://www.accesspdf.com/
Note: If you are merging external PDF documents into a Latex document which
is compiled with pdflatex, a much simpler option is to use the pdfpages
package, e.g.:
pdftk 1.pdf 2.pdf 3.pdf cat output 123.pdf
Another option to check out is pdftk2 (or PDF toolkit), which is a commandline tool that can manipulate PDFs in many ways. To merge one or more files,
use:
Alternatively, PDF-Shuffler1 is a small python-gtk application, which helps

the user to merge or split pdf documents and rotate, crop and rearrange their
pages using an interactive and intuitive graphical interface. This program may
be avaliable in your Linux distribution's repository.
3
4
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Shell%20%28computing%29
http://www2.warwick.ac.uk/fac/sci/statistics/staff/
academic/firth/software/pdfjam
You can also use XeTeX (or, more precisely, XeLaTeX), which works in the
same way as pdflatex: it creates a PDF file directly from LaTeX source. One
35.1.4. XeTeX
Three simple shell3 scripts using the pdfpages package are provided in the
pdfjam bundle4 by D. Firth. They include options for merge several pdf
(pdfjoin), put several pages in one physical sheet (pdfnup) and rotate pages
(pdf90).
\usepackage{pdfpages}
...
\includepdf[pages=-]{Document1.pdf}
\includepdf[pages=-]{Document2.pdf}
...
5
6
from DVI
pdf2ps my_file.pdf
from PDF
35.2. Convert to PostScript
Customization of PDF output in XeTeX (setting document title, author, keywords etc.) is done using the configuration of hyperref6 package.
advantage of XeTeX over standard LaTeX is support for Unicode and modern
typography. See its Wikipedia entry5 for more details.
7
8
9
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OpenOffice.org%20Writer
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Microsoft%20Word
http://latex2rtf.sourceforge.net/
LaTeX can be converted into an RTF file, which in turn can be opened by
a word processor such as OpenOffice.org Writer7 or Microsoft Word8 . This
conversion is done through latex2rtf9 , which can run on any computer platform. The program operates by reading the LaTeX source, and mimicking the
behaviour of the LaTeX program. latex2rtf supports most of the standard
implementations of LaTeX, such as standard formatting, some math typesetting, inclusion of EPS, PNG or JPG graphics, and tables. As well, it has some
35.3. Convert to RTF
dvi2ps my_file.dvi
Both latex and (if needed) bibtex commands need to be run before
latex2rtf, because the .aux and .bbl files are needed to produce the
proper output. The result of this conversion will create myfile.rtf, which
you may open in many modern word processors such as Microsoft word or
Open Office.
latex mypaper
bibtex mypaper # if you use bibtex
latex2rtf mypaper
latex2rtf is simple to use. The Windows version has a GUI (l2rshell.exe),

which is straightforward to use. The command-line version is offered for all
platforms, and can be used on an example mypaper.tex file:
limited support for packages, such as varioref, and natbib. However, many
other packages are not supported.
10
http://hevea.inria.fr
TeX4ht
latex2html -html_version 4.0,latin1,unicode -split 1 -nonavigation

-noinfo -title "MyDocument" MyDocument.tex
latex2html
hevea mylatexfile
One option is the HEVEA10 program:
hevea
There are many converters to HTML.
35.4. Convert to HTML
11
http://www.cse.ohio-state.edu/~gurari/TeX4ht/
In some cases it may be sufficient to simply copy a region of a PDF (or PS) file
using the tools available in a PDF viewer (for example using LaTeX to typeset
35.5. Convert to image formats
bibtex2html mybibtexfile
for BibTeX
bibtex2html
TeX4ht11 is a very powerful conversion program, but its configuration is not

straightforward. Basically a configuration file has to be prepared, and then the
program is called.
12
13

http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/GIMP
To convert from PDF, open your file with GIMP13 . It will ask you which page
you want to convert, whether you want to use anti-aliasing (choose strong if
you want to get something similar to what you see on the screen). Try different
resolutions to fit your needs, but 100 dpi should be enough. Once you have
the image within GIMP, you can post-process it as you like and save it to any
35.5.1. PNG
On *nix the LaTeX package preview and the tool dvipng may be used to
generate png output for small amounts of LaTeX code, for example to render
equations for use in presentations. See LaTeX/Tips_and_Tricks#Generate_png_screenshots12 for more details.
a formula for pasting into a presentation). This however will not generally
have sufficient resolution for whole pages or large areas.
14
15
16
17
http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/dvipng/
http://www.imagemagick.org/
http://optipng.sourceforge.net/
http://www.cityinthesky.co.uk/pdf2svg.html
Direct conversion from PDF to SVG can be done using the command line tool
pdf2svg17 . (If you are using Linux or FreeBSD or MacPorts, pdf2svg might
also be installable via the package installer.)
35.5.2. SVG
You can optimize the resulting image using optipng16 so that it will take up
less space.
format supported by GIMP, as PNG for example. A method for DVI files is
dvipng14 (usage is the same as dvipdfm). Also, the "convert" command from
the ImageMagick15 suite can convert both DVI and PDF files to PNG.
19
18
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:WikiProject_
Electronics/Ps2svg.sh
http://dvisvgm.sourceforge.net/
One can also use dvisvgm19 , an open source utility that converts from DVI to
SVG.
Alternatively DVI or PDF can be converted to PS as described before, then the

bash script ps2svg.sh18 can be used (as all the software used by this script is
multiplatform, this is also possible in Windows, a step-by-step guide could be
written).
pdf2svg file.pdf file.svg
20
(note the omission of .tex extension). This will output result to standard output.
If you want the plain text go to a file, use
detex yourfile
Most LaTeX distributions come with detex program, which strips LaTeX
commands. It can handle multi-file projects, so all you need is to give one
command:
If you are thinking of converting to plain text for spell-checking or to count

words, there may be an easier way -- read Tips and Tricks20 first.
35.6. Convert to plain text
21
http://code.google.com/p/opendetex/
If the output from detex does not satisfy you, you can try a newer version
available on Google Code21 , or use HTML conversion first and then copy text
from your browser.
detex yourfile > yourfile.txt
1. LaTeX needs to know how to hyphenate the language(s) you are using.
2. You need to use language-specific typographic rules. In French for
example, there is a mandatory space before each colon character (:).
3. You want to be able to insert all the language-specific special characters
directly from your keyboard instead of using cumbersome coding (for
example, type instead of \"{a}).
When you write documents in languages other than English, areas where
LaTeX has to be configured appropriately:
36. Internationalization
You should place it soon after the \documentclass command, so that all
the other packages you load afterwards will know the language you are using.
A list of the languages built into your LaTeX system will be displayed every
time the compiler is started. Babel will automatically activate the appropriate
\usepackage[language]{babel}
The babel package by Johannes Braams will take care of everything. You
can load it in your preamble, providing as an argument the language you want
to use:
36.1. Hyphenating
If you simply need to add a few words from another language, you may find
LaTeX/Accents1 an easier way.
to change the active language. You can also add short pieces of text in another
language using the command
\selectlanguage{languageA}
then the last language in the option list will be active (i.e. languageB), and you
can use the command
\usepackage[languageA,languageB]{babel}
If you call babel with multiple languages:
hyphenation rules for the language you choose. If your LaTeX format does not
support hyphenation in the language of your choice, babel will still work but
will disable hyphenation, which has quite a negative effect on the appearance of
the typeset document. Babel also specifies new commands for some languages,
which simplify the input of special characters. See the sections about languages
below for more information.
The [ftp://ftp.tex.ac.uk/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/babel/babel.pdf babel manual] provides much more information on these and many other options.
The starred version of this environment typesets the main text according to the
rules of the other language, but keeps the language specific string for ancillary
things like figures, in the main language of the document. The environment
hyphenrules switches only the hyphenation patterns used; it can also be
used to disallow hyphenation by using the language name 'nohyphenation'.
\begin{otherlanguage}{languageB}
Text in language B. This environment switches all language-related
definitions, like the language
specific names for figures, tables etc. to the other language.
\end{otherlanguage}
Babel also offers various environments for entering larger pieces of text in
another language:
\foreignlanguage{languageB}{Text in another language}
2
3
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/PuTTY
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Texmaker
inputenc package tells LaTeX what the text encoding format of your .tex
files is. The encoding depends on your operating system but often a software's
encoding can be changed from the settings (this happens at least with some
editors, the PuTTY2 terminal and TeXmaker3 ). You may choose whichever
encoding you like, but you must say so in the preamble, so for example, if you
prefer to use the ISO-8859-1, write
\usepackage[encoding]{inputenc}
Most of the modern computer systems allow you to input letters of national
alphabets directly from the keyboard. In order to handle variety of input
encoding used for different groups of languages and/or on different computer
platforms LaTeX employs the inputenc package:
36.2. Text encoding
using
! Package inputenc Error: Unicode char \u8: not set up for use with
LaTeX.
You
might
encounter
a
situation
where
\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc} might result in error:
The supported encoding by the LaTeX team is utf8 and covers a fairly specific/limited range of unicode input characters. It only defines those symbols
that are known to be available with the current font encoding. utf8x is not
officially supported, but covers a much broader range of input symbols.
Most modern operating systems use Unicode (utf-8) as a default encoding for
text. On such system (for example Ubuntu) you can use:
\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
Mac
Unix
Operating system
Encodings
Western Latin
applemac
latin1
Cyrillic
maccyr
koi8-ru
When using the inputenc package, you should consider that other people
might not be able to display your input files on their computer, because they use
a different encoding. For example, the German umlaut on OS/2 is encoded
as 132, on Unix systems using ISO-LATIN 1 it is encoded as 228, while in
Cyrillic encoding cp1251 for Windows this letter does not exist at all; therefore
you should use this feature with care. The following encodings may come in
handy, depending on the type of system you are working on:
This is due to the utf8 definition not necessarily having a mapping of all the
character glyphs you are able to enter on your keyboard. Such characters are
for example . In such case, you need to use the utf8x option
to define more character combinations. This might break up compatibility with
some packages like csquotes.
Encodings
Western Latin
ansinew
cp850
Cyrillic
cp1251
cp866nav
Font encoding is set with:
fontenc package tells LaTeX how to output the text you have produced.
It defines at which position inside a TeX-font each letter is stored. Multiple
input encodings could be mapped into one font encoding, which reduces
number of required font sets. LaTeX can produce either bitmap-fonts (usually
rasterized to 300 or 600 ppi) or scalable vector fonts (such as Type 1 fonts).
There are many different font sets available containing different sets of glyphs
(characters).
36.3. Output encoding
Windows
DOS, OS/2
Operating system
To overcome these shortcomings, several 8-bit CM-like font sets were created.
Extended Cork (EC) fonts in T1 encoding contains letters and punctuation
characters for most of the European languages based on Latin script. The
The default LaTeX font encoding is OT1, the encoding of the original Computer
Modern TeX text fonts. It contains only 128 characters, many from ASCII,
but leaving out some others and including a number that are not in ASCII.
When accented characters are required, TeX creates them by combining a
normal character with an accent. While the resulting output looks perfect,
this approach stops the automatic hyphenation from working inside words
containing accented characters. Besides, some of Latin letters could not be
created by combining a normal character with an accent, to say nothing about
letters of non-Latin alphabets, such as Greek or Cyrillic.
where encoding is font encoding. It is possible to load several encodings

simultaneously.
\usepackage[encoding]{fontenc}
Here is a collection of suggestions about writing a LaTeX document in a

language other than English. If you have experience in a language not listed
below, please add some notes about it.
LH font set contains letters necessary to typeset documents in languages

using Cyrillic script. Because of the large number of Cyrillic glyphs, they are
arranged into four font encodingsT2A, T2B, T2C, and X2. The CB bundle
contains fonts in LGR encoding for the composition of Greek text. By using
these fonts you can improve/enable hyphenation in non-English documents.
Another advantage of using new CM-like fonts is that they provide fonts of
CM families in all weights, shapes, and optically scaled font sizes
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ArabTeX
See the ArabTeX4 Wikipedia article for further details.
\< ... >

\RL{ ... }
\begin{arabtext} ... \end{arabtext}.
You can input text in either romanized characters or native Arabic script
encodings. Use any of the following commands/environment to enter in text:
\usepackage{arabtex}
For languages which use the Arabic script, including Arabic, Persian, Urdu,
Pashto, Kurdish, Uyghur, etc., add the following code to your preamble:
36.4.1. Arabic script
36.4. Hyphenating languages
http://tug.ctan.org/tex-archive/language/arabic/arabi/
For Persian language, there is a dedicated package called XePersian which

uses XeLaTeX as the typesetting engine. Just add the following code to your
preamble:
36.4.2. Persian script
See Arabi page on CTAN5
You may use Arabi with Lyx, or with tex4ht to produce HTML. You may also
copy and paste from PDF files produced with Arabi thanks to the support of
the cmap package.
\usepackage[LAE,LFE]{fontenc}
\usepackage[farsi,arabic]{babel}
You may also use the Arabi package within babel to typeset Arabic and Persian
http://tug.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/xetex/latex/
xepersian/
http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/lshort/english/lshort.
pdf
See also the Bulgarian translation of the "Not so Short Introduction to LaTeX
2e from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/lshort/bulgarian/lshort-bg.pdf
Please add the section "Writing in Cyrillic" from http://www.ctan.org/texarchive/info/lshort/english/lshort.pdf7 . You are allowed to copy it.
36.4.3. Cyrillic script
Moreover, Arabic script can be used to type Persian as illustrated in the

previous subsection.
See XePersian page on CTAN6
\usepackage{xepersian}
You may use different encoding, but UTF-8 is becoming standard and it allows
you to have czech quotation marks directly in your text. Otherwise, there
are macros \glqq and \grqq to produce left and right quote or place quotated
text "\uv{here}".
\usepackage[czech]{babel}
Czech is fine using
36.4.4. Czech
This enables you to type cyrillic letters directly via your keyboard,
but with a different distribution than a standard cyrillic keyboard! To
get the standard distribution, only include: \usepackage[OT1]{fontenc}
\usepackage[russian]{babel}
8
9
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Operating%20system
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/PuTTY
The default encoding system can oftenly be changed regardless of the operating
system8 (this happens at least with some editors, the PuTTY9 terminal and
Remember to use Unicode encoding for Finnish if you're using an editor in

utf8 mode:
This will also automatically change document language (section names, etc.)
to Finnish.
\usepackage[finnish]{babel}
Finnish language hyphenation is enabled with:
36.4.5. Finnish
10
11
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Texmaker
If you want to use European Computer Modern fonts, you should use:
to get the letter . Actually letters like work as well so the same idea
applies also to other European languages like Spanish11 .
\"{a}
The encoding is important and makes sure you can simply write the kkset
as such, which is less cumbersome than having to write
TeXmaker10 ). You may choose whichever encoding you like, but you must say
so in the preamble, so for example, if you prefer to use the ISO-8859-1, write
instead
\usepackage[french]{babel}
Some hints for those creating French documents with LaTeX: you can load
French language support with the following command:
36.4.6. French
The ae-package changes encoding to T1 and also loads the scalable version of
Almost European Computer Modern fonts.
\usepackage{ae}
For creating scalable (vector) Type1 fonts instead of bitmapped fonts, you can
substitute the line above with:
input code
\og guillemets \fg{}
M\up{me}, D\up{r}
1\ier{}, 1\iere{},
1\ieres{}
2\ieme{} 4\iemes{}
\No 1, \no 2
20\degres C, 45\degres
M. \bsc{Durand}
2e 4es
N 1, n 2
20 C, 45
M. Durand
rendered output
guillemets
Mme , Dr
1er , 1re , 1res
There are multiple options for typesetting French documents, depending on the
flavor of French: french, frenchb, and francais for Parisian French,
and acadian and canadien for new-world French. All enable French
hyphenation, if you have configured your LaTeX system accordingly. All of
these also change all automatic text into French: \chapter prints Chapitre,
\today prints the current date in French and so on. A set of new commands
also becomes available, which allows you to write French input files more
easily. Check out the following table for inspiration:
hrosme
reoivent
rendered output
1 234,567 89
uvre et uvre
You can load German language support using either one of the two following
commands.
36.4.7. German
You will also notice that the layout of lists changes when switching to the
French language. For more information on what the french option of babel
does and how you can customize its behavior, run LaTeX on file frenchb.dtx
and read the produced file frenchb.pdf or frenchb.dvi.
input code
\nombre{1234,56789}
\OE uvre or \OE{}uvre
and \oe uvre
re\c coivent or
re\c{c}oivent
hro\"isme
German Special Characters.

"a
This enables German hyphenation, if you have configured your LaTeX system
accordingly. It also changes all automatic text into German. Eg. Chapter
becomes Kapitel. A set of new commands also becomes available, which
allows you to write German input files more quickly even when you dont
use the inputenc package. Check out the table below for inspiration. With
inputenc, all this becomes moot, but your text also is locked in a particular
encoding world.
\usepackage[ngerman]{babel}
or for new German orthography use
\usepackage[german]{babel}
For old German orthography use
"
In German books you often find French quotation marks (guillemets). German typesetters, however, use them differently. A quote in a German book
would look like this. In the German speaking part of Switzerland, typesetters use guillemets the same way the French do. A major problem arises
from the use of commands like \flq: If you use the OT1 font (which is the
default font) the guillemets will look like the math symbol "", which turns
a typesetters stomach. T1 encoded fonts, on the other hand, do contain the
German Special Characters.

"s
" or \glqq
"' or \grqq
"< or \flqq
"> or \frqq
\flq
\frq
\dq
This preamble enables hyphenation and changes all automatic text to Greek.
A set of new commands also becomes available, which allows you to write
Greek input files more easily. In order to temporarily switch to English and
vice versa, one can use the commands \textlatin{english text}
and \textgreek{greek text} that both take one argument which is
then typeset using the requested font encoding. Otherwise you can use the
command \selectlanguage{...} described in a previous section. Use
\euro for the Euro symbol.
\usepackage[english,greek]{babel}
\usepackage[iso-8859-7]{inputenc}
This is the preamble you need to write in the Greek language.
36.4.8. Greek
required symbols. So if you are using this type of quote, make sure you use
the T1 encoding. (\usepackage[T1]{fontenc})
12
http://www.math.bme.hu/latex/
The following lines can be added to write Icelandic text:
36.4.10. Icelandic / Faroese
The Hungarian version of BaBeL included with standard LaTeX distribution is

not perfect, a much better version can be downloaded from the previous page.
More information in hungarian12 .
\usepackage[magyar]{babel}
Similar to Italian, but use the following lines:
36.4.9. Hungarian
Icelandic Special Characters.

" or \glqq
\grqq
into "tdrttur" and turns Partinto "Hluti".
\begin{abstract}
etta er tdrttur.
\end{abstract}
is needed. This allows the user to write with Icelandic characters and changes
text like the Abstract in
and for some users
\usepackage[icelandic]{babel}
Italian is well supported by LaTeX. Just add \usepackage[italian]{babel} at

the beginning of your document and the output of all the commands will be
translated properly. You can add letters with accents without any particular
setting, just write \a \e \'e \i \o \u and you will get
(NB: the symbol changes if the inclination of the accent changes). Anyway,
36.4.11. Italian
Icelandic Special Characters.

\TH
\th
\"{O}
\"{o}
\AE
\ae
\DH
\dh
at the beginning of your document and you can write in Italian without being
worried of translations and fonts. If you are writing your document without
getting any error, then don't worry about anything else. If you start getting
some unknown errors whenever you use an Italian letter, then you have to
worry about the encoding of your files. As known, any LaTeX source is just
plain text, so you'll have to insert accented letters properly within the text
file. If you write your document using always the same program on the same
computer, you should not have any problem. If you are writing your document
using different programs, if could start getting some strange errors from the
\usepackage[italian]{babel}
if you do so, it could be quite annoying since it's time-wasting. Moreover,

if you are using any spell-checking program, "citt" is correct, but "citt\a"
will be seen as a mistake. If you add \usepackage[latin1]{inputenc} at the
beginning of your document, LaTeX will include correctly all your accented
letters. To sum up, just add
1. We must be able to edit Korean input files. Korean input files must be in
plain text format
a) Korean using Unicode. These days all three major operating systems (Mac OS, Unix, Windows) come equipped with pretty decent
To use LaTeX for typesetting Korean, we need to solve three problems:
36.4.12. Korean
compiler. The reason could be that the accented letters were not included
properly within your source file and LaTeX can't recognize them. The reason
is that an editor modified your document with a different encoding from the one
that was used when creating it. Most of the operating systems use UTF-8 as
default, but this could create problems if are using programs based on different
libraries or different operating systems. The best way to solve this problem is
to change the encoding to ISO-8859-1, that includes all the letters you need.
Some text editors let you change the encoding in the settings.
multilingual support and internationalization features so that editing Korean text file is not so much of a problem anymore, even on
non-Korean operating systems. In your text editor (not your word
processor), go to "Settings" and choose UTF-8. Set the preamble
in latex to UTF-8 as well (usepackage with values ucs and utf8x).
Open your Korean keyboard from the keyboard menu, and start
writing.
b) Korean using older formats. The two most widely used encodings
for Korean text files are EUC-KR and its upward compatible extension used in Korean MS-Windows, CP949/Windows-949/UHC.
In these encodings each US-ASCII character represents its normal
ASCII character similar to other ASCII compatible encodings such
as ISO-8859-x, EUC-JP, Big5, or Shift_JIS. On the other hand,
Hangul syllables, Hanjas (Chinese characters as used in Korea),
Hangul Jamos, Hiraganas, Katakanas, Greek and Cyrillic characters and other symbols and letters drawn from KS X 1001 are
represented by two consecutive octets. The first has its MSB set.
Until the mid-1990s, it took a considerable amount of time and ef-
13
http://jshin.net/faq
fort to set up a Korean-capable environment under a non-localized

(non-Korean) operating system. You can skim through the now
much-outdated http://jshin.net/faq13 to get a glimpse of what it
was like to use Korean under non-Korean OS in mid-1990s.
2. TEX and LATEX were originally written for scripts with no more than
256 characters in their alphabet. To make them work for languages
with considerably more characters such as Korean or Chinese, a subfont
mechanism was developed. It divides a single CJK font with thousands
or tens of thousands of glyphs into a set of subfonts with 256 glyphs
each. For Korean, there are three widely used packages; HLATEX
by UN Koaunghi, hLATEXp by CHA Jaechoon and the CJK package
byWerner Lemberg. HLATEX and hLATEXp are specific to Korean
and provide Korean localization on top of the font support. They both
can process Korean input text files encoded in EUC-KR. HLATEX
can even process input files encoded in CP949/Windows-949/UHC and
UTF-8 when used along with , . The CJK package is not specific to
\usepackage{hangul}
To use the HLATEX package for typesetting your Korean text, put the following declaration into the preamble of your document:
Korean. It can process input files in UTF-8 as well as in various CJK

encodings including EUC-KR and CP949/Windows-949/UHC, it can be
used to typeset documents with multilingual content (especially Chinese,
Japanese and Korean). The CJK package has no Korean localization
such as the one offered by HLATEX and it does not come with as many
special Korean fonts as HLATEX.
3. The ultimate purpose of using typesetting programs like TEX and LATEX is to get documents typeset in an aesthetically satisfying way.
Arguably the most important element in typesetting is a set of welldesigned fonts. The HLATEX distribution includes UHC PostScript fonts
of 10 different families and Munhwabu fonts (TrueType) of 5 different
families. The CJK package works with a set of fonts used by earlier
versions of HLATEX and it can use Bitstreams cyberbit True-Type font.
In case you dont need Korean localization features but just want to typeset
Korean text, you can put the following line in the preamble, instead.
This command turns the Korean localization on. The headings of chapters,
sections, subsections, table of content and table of figures are all translated
into Korean and the formatting of the document is changed to follow Korean
conventions. The package also provides automatic particle selection. In
Korean, there are pairs of post-fix particles grammatically equivalent but
different in form. Which of any given pair is correct depends on whether
the preceding syllable ends with a vowel or a consonant. (It is a bit more
complex than this, but this should give you a good picture.) Native Korean
speakers have no problem picking the right particle, but it cannot be determined
which particle to use for references and other automatic text that will change
while you edit the document. It takes a painstaking effort to place appropriate
particles manually every time you add/remove references or simply shuffle
parts of your document around. HLATEX relieves its users from this boring
and error-prone process.
The above code merely allows to use polish letters and translates the automatic
text to polish, so that "chapter" becomes "rozdzia". There are a few additional
things one must remember about.
\usepackage{polski}
\usepackage[polish]{babel}
If you plan to use Polish in your utf-8 encoded document, use the following
code
36.4.13. Polish
For more details on typesetting Korean with HLATEX, refer to the HLATEX
Guide. Check out the web site of the Korean TEX User Group (KTUG) at
http://www.ktug.or.kr/.
\usepackage{hfont}
According to polish grammar rules, you have to put dots after numerals in
chapter, section, subsection, etc. headers.
Numerals
yc o
Noc bya sierpniowa, ciepa i~sodka, Ksi
ez
swieca srebrnem
swiatem wg
ebienie, tak,
ze twarze maego rycerza i~Basi byy skapane
w blasku.
Poni
zej, na podwrzu zamkowem, wida
c byo u
spione kupy
zonierzy,
a~tak
ze i~ciaa zabitych
podczas dziennej strzelaniny, bo nie znaleziono dotad
czasu na ich
pogrzebanie.
Polish has many single letter connectives: "a", "o", "w", "i", etc., grammar
and typography rules don't allow for them to end a printed line. To ensure that
LaTeX won't set them as last letter in the line, you have to use non breakable
space:
Connectives
\renewcommand\thesection{\arabic{section}.}
\renewcommand\thesubsection{\arabic{section}.\arabic{subsection}.}
\renewcommand\thesubsub
section{\arabic{section}.\arabic{subsection}.\arabic{subsubsection}.}
For articles:
\arabic{subsubsection}.}
\renewcommand\thechapter{\arabic{chapter}.}
\renewcommand\thesection{\arabic{chapter}.\arabic{section}.}
\renewcommand\
thesubsection{\arabic{chapter}.\arabic{section}.\arabic{subsection}.}
\renewcommand\the
subsubsection{\arabic{chapter}.\arabic{section}.\arabic{subsection}.%
For books:
This is achieved by redefining few LaTeX macros.
14
http://www.ci.pwr.wroc.pl/~pmazur/LaTeX/mwclsdoc.pdf
Full
documentation
for
those
classes
is
available
http://www.ci.pwr.wroc.pl/ pmazur/LaTeX/mwclsdoc.pdf14 (polish)
\documentclass{mwart}
\usepackage[polish]{babel}
\usepackage{polski}
\begin{document}
Pjd
z ki
n
ze t
e chmurno
s
c w gab
flaszy.
\end{document}
Simple usage:
at
mwcls
Alternatively you can use the mwart class instead of article, mwbk
instead of book and mwrep instead of report (those classes have much
more European typography settings but do not require the use of polish babel
settings or character encoding).
To adjust penalties for leaving widows and orphans (clubs in TeX nomenclature) use those commands:
\brokenpenalty=1000
To adjust penalties for hyphenation spanning pages, use this command:
It's much more frowned upon to set pages with hyphenation between pages
than it is customary in American typesetting.
Hyphenation and typography
\usepackage{indentfirst}
It may be customary (depending on publisher) to indent the first paragraph in

sections and chapters:
Indentation
Unfortunately, it is partially incompatible with the dcolumn package. One

needs to either use dots in columns with numerical data in the source file and
make dcolumn switch them to commas for display or define the column as
follows:
\usepackage{icomma}
According to Polish typography rules, fractional parts of numbers should be

delimited by a comma, not a dot. To make LaTeX not insert additional space
in math mode after a comma (unless there is a space after the comma), use the
icomma package.
Commas in math
\clubpenalty=1000
\widowpenalty=1000
15
16
http://so.pwn.pl/zasady.php
http://dtp.msstudio.com.pl/typo.html
Good extract is available at Zasady Typograficzne Skadania Tekstu16 (in

Polish)
Refer the Sownik Ortograficzny15 (in Polish) for additional information on

polish grammar and typography rules.
Further information
The alternative is to use the numprint package, but it is much less convenient.
\begin{tabular}{... D{,}{\mathord\mathcomma}{2} ...}
if you are in Brazil, you can substitute the language for brazilian portuguese by
choosing: brazilian. The first line is to get everything translated properly,
the second is for being able to input text correctly and the third one to get the
hyphenation of words with diacritics right. Note that we are using the latin1
input encoding here, so this will not work on a Mac or on DOS. Just use the
appropriate encoding for your system. If you are using Linux, use
\usepackage[portuguese]{babel}
Add the following code to your preamble:
36.4.14. Portuguese
\usepackage[spanish]{babel}
To enable Spanish writing, besides installing the appropriate hyphenation

patterns, you type:
36.4.16. Spanish
\usepackage[slovak]{babel}
\usepackage[IL2]{fontenc}
Basic settings are fine when left the same as Czech, but Slovak needs special
signs for d,t,l. To be able to type them from keyboard use the following
settings
36.4.15. Slovak
Two particularly useful options are es-noquoting,es-nolists: some

packages and classes are known to collide with Spanish in the way they handle
active characters, and these options disable the internal workings of Spanish to
allow you to overcome these common pitfalls. Moreover, these options may
On average, the former syntax should be preferred, as the latter is a deviation

from standard Babel behavior, and thus may break other programs (LyX,
latex2rtf2e) interacting with LaTeX.
\usepackage[spanish,mexico]{babel}
\def\spanishoptions{mexico}
\usepackage[spanish]{babel}
The trick is that Spanish has several options and commands to control the
layout. The options may be loaded either at the call to Babel, or before,
by defining the command \spanishoptions. Therefore, the following
commands are roughly equivalent:
The macro \spanishoperators{list of operators} contains a list of spanish mathematical operators, and may be redefined at will. For instance, the
command \def\spanishoperators{sen} only defines sen, overriding
all other definitions; the command \let\spanishoperators\relax
disables them all. This command supports accented or spaced operators: the
The other commands modify the spanish layout after loading babel. Two particularly useful commands are \spanishoperators and
\spanishdeactivate.
The options mexico,mexico-com provide support for local custom in

Mexico: the former using decimal dot, as customary, and the latter allowing
decimal comma, as required by the Mexican Official Norm (NOM) of the
Department of Economy for labels in foods and goods. More localizations are
in the making.
simplify the way LyX customizes some features of the Spanish layout from
inside the GUI.
Please check the documentation for Babel or spanish.dtx for further details.
Finally, the macro \spanishdeactivate{list of characters} disables

some active characters, to keep you out of trouble if they are redefined
by other packages. The candidates for deactivation are the set <>."'.
Please, beware that some option preempty the availability of some active characters. In particular, you should not combine the es-noquoting
option with \spanishdeactivate{<>}, or the es-noshorthands with
\spanishdeactivate{<>."}.
l\acute{i}m l\acute{i}m\,sup l\acute{i}m\,inf m\acute{a}x

\acute{i}nf m\acute{i}n sen tg arc\,sen arc\,cos arc\,tg
cotg cosec senh tgh
\acute{<letter>} command puts an accent, and the \, command adds a

small space. For instance, the following operators are defined by default.
However, by using latin1 or UTF8-encoding it is possible to use nearly all

characters without special commands, like: , , , , , , , , , , , , ,
and .
Spanish with inputenc package
The rules for producing characters with diacritical marks, such as accents,
differ somewhat depending whether you are in text mode, math mode, or the
tabbing environment.
37. Accents
\usepackage{lmodern}
Of course, the encoding in the text editor needs to be set to utf8, as well.
Depending on the used UTF8 characters, one needs to specify a font that
actually includes them (and supports the T1 font enconding). E.g. for German
related special characters:
The Unicode character encoding UTF8 includes several special characters and
characters with accents. The following code specifies that the encoding of
the LaTeX document source file is UTF8. Font encoding is specified as T1,
because it supports the encoding of extended character sets in fonts.
37.1.1. Direct input
37.1. Text mode
The following accents may be placed on letters. Although "o" is used in most
of the examples, the accents may be placed on any letter. Accents may even
be placed above a "missing" letter; for example, \{} produces a tilde over a
blank space.
In addition to direct UTF8 input, LaTeX supports the composition of special

characters.
37.1.2. Escaped codes
With XeTeX and LuaTeX the inputenc and fontenc package are no longer
needed and replaced by the fontspec package. Both engines support UTF-8
directly and allow the use of TTF and OpenType fonts to support Unicode
characters. See the XeTeX section1 in the Fonts chapter of this book for more
information.
Sample
LaTeX command
\{o}
\'{o}
\{o}
\"{o}
\H{o}
\{o}
\c{c}
\k{a}
\l
\={o}
\b{o}
Description
grave accent
acute accent
circumflex
umlaut or dieresis
long Hungarian umlaut (double acute)
tilde
cedilla
ogonek
l with stroke
macron accent (a bar
over the letter)
bar under the letter
The following commands may be used only in paragraph (default) or LR

(left-right) mode.
oo
Description
dot over the letter
dot under the letter
ring over the letter
(for there is also
the special command
\{aa})
breve over the letter
caron/hacek ("v")
over the letter
"tie" (inverted u) over
the two letters
and
\i
To place a diacritic on top of an i or a j, its dot has to be removed. The dotless

version of these letters is accomplished by typing
\t{oo}
\u{o}
\v{s}
Sample
LaTeX command
\.{o}
\d{u}
\r{a}
More information regarding language configuration can be found in the Internationalization2 section.
. This provides the short hand "o for \"{o}. This is very useful if one
needs to use some text accents in a label, since no backslash will be accepted
otherwise.
\usepackage[ngerman]{babel}
If a document is to be written completely in a language that requires particular

diacritics several times, then using the right configuration allows those characters to be written directly in the document. For example, to achieve easier
coding of umlauts, the babel package can be configured as
\{\i} should be used for i, circumflex,

\"{\i} should be used for i, umlaut,
. For example:
\j
\acute{o}
\check{o}
o
\tilde{o}
o
e
\widetilde{oo}
oo
LaTeX comSample
mand
\hat{o}
o
b
\widehat{oo} oo
circumflex
wide version
of \hat over
several letters
vee or check
tilde
wide version of
\tilde over
several letters
acute accent
Description
\'
\v
\
Text-mode
equivalence
\
Several of the above and some similar accents can also be produced in math
mode. The following commands may be used only in math mode.
37.2. Math mode
grave accent
dot over the
letter
two dots over
the letter (umlaut in textmode)
breve
macron
vector (arrow)
over the letter
o`
o
o
o
o
~o
\ddot{o}
\breve{o}
\bar{o}
\vec{o}
\u
\=
\"
Text-mode
equivalence
\
\.
When applying accents to letters i and j, you can use \imath and \jmath to
keep the dots from interfering with the accents:
Description
Sample
LaTeX command
\grave{o}
\dot{o}
Sample with
upper dot
i
circumflex on
letter i without
upper dot
~j
vector (arrow)
on letter j without upper dot
Description
\a' for an acute accent

\a for a grave accent
\a= for a macron accent
Some of the accent marks used in running text have other uses in the tabbing
environment. In that case they can be created with the following command:
37.3. Tabbing environment
\vec{\jmath}~
LaTeX comSample
mand
\hat{\imath}
The actual entering of special characters is system dependent. For example

under X-Windows umlauts are entered via compose+caps+" o, when the
keyboard layout does not directly includes them.
37.5. Related issues
If you find it awkward, you can use the gensymb package which provides a
\degree command.
$90^\circ{}$
The basic trick is to use the \circ command:
37.4. Degree symbol for temperature and math
The package ae (almost european) is obsolete. It provided some workarounds

for hyphenation of words with special characters. These are not necessary any
The usage of the T1 font encoding influences the usability of pdf output
(generated via pdflatex). For example without specifying T1, extracting the
umlaut via a PDF viewer actually extracts the two characters "A. Analog
to that, a PDF viewer cannot find words with umlauts in a PDF document
which was generated via pdflatex without the T1 font enconding. With T1 font
enconding (and even with composed special characters) the PDF contains the
correct text information.
Using the package textcomp sets this and other characters up.
Package inputenc Error: Unicode char \u8: C not set up for use with
LaTeX.
Whether LaTeX is actually able to typeset certain UTF8 characters depends

on the loaded packages. For example trying to typeset the euro sign ( C) may
yield following error message:
http://spectroscopy.mps.ohio-state.edu/symposium_53/
latexinstruct.html
http://www.giss.nasa.gov/tools/latex/ltx-401.html
A few other LaTeX accents and symbols3

NASA GISS: Accents4
more with fonts like lmodern. Using the ae package leads to text encoding
problems in PDF files generated via pdflatex (e.g. text extraction and
searching), besides typographic issues.
will output:
\renewcommand{\LaTeX}{{\rm \LaTeX}}
If you insert the \LaTeX command in an area with a non-default font, it will
be formatted accordingly. If you want to keep LaTeX written in Computer
Modern roman shape, you must redefine the function. However, the naive
38.1. Always writing LaTeX in roman
38. Tips and Tricks
\let\LaTeXtemp\LaTeX
\renewcommand{\LaTeX}{{\rm \LaTeXtemp }}
We must use the TeX primitive \let instead.
does not work as well.
\newcommand{\LaTeXtemp}{\LaTeX}
\renewcommand{\LaTeX}{{\rm \LaTeXtemp}}
Sadly,
So you need to create a temporary variable.
TeX capacity exceeded , sorry [ grouping levels =255].
1
2
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Full%20stop
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/The%20Chicago%20Manual%20of%
20Style
If the command \frenchspacing is used in the preamble, the space between sentences is always consistent.
Depending on style (e.g., The Chicago Manual of Style2 ), a comma can be

used afterwards, which is interpreted by LaTeX as part of a sentence, since the
period is not followed by any space. In this case, "i.e.," and "e.g.," do
not need any special attention.
If you simply use the forms "i.e." or "e.g.", LaTeX will treat the periods
as end of sentence periods (i.e. full stop1 ) since they are followed by a space,
and add more space before the next "sentence". To prevent LaTeX from adding
space after the last period, the correct syntax is either "i.e.\ " or "e.g.\
".
38.2. id est and exempli gratia (i.e. and e.g.)
The same can be done with similar counter types and document units such as
"subsection".
\numberwithin{equation}{section}
\numberwithin{figure}{section}
For long documents the numbering can become cumbersome as the numbers
reach into double and triple digits. To reset the counters at the start of each
section and prefix the numbers by the section number, include the following in
the preamble.
38.3. Grouping Figure/Equation Numbering by

Section
or, if you don't have this package, you can add the following text just after
\documentclass[...]{...} :
\usepackage{ifpdf}
As explained in the previous sections, a LaTeX source can be used to generate

both a DVI and a PDF file. For very basic documents the source is the same
but, if the documents gets more complicated, it could be necessary to make
some changes in the source so that it will work for a format but it will not
for the other. For example, all that is related to graphics has to be adapted
according to the final format. As discussed in the section about floating objects,
even if you should use different pictures according to the final format, you
can override this limit putting in the same folder pictures in different formats
(e.g., EPS and PNG) with the same name and link them without writing the
extension. There is a simple way to solve this problem:
38.4. Generic header
\ifpdf
% we are running pdflatex
\else
% we are running latex
\fi
this is plain TeX code. The ifpdf package and this code, both define a new
if-else you can use to change your code according to the compiler you are
using. After you have used this code, you can use whenever you want in your
document the following syntax:
\newif\ifpdf
\ifx\pdfoutput\undefined
\pdffalse
\else
\ifnum\pdfoutput=1
\pdftrue
\else
\pdffalse
\fi
\fi
It is often preferable to use the same font and font size in your images as in
the document. Moreover, for scientific images, you may need mathematical
formulae or special characters (such as Greek letters). Both things can be
achieved easily if the image editor allows you to use LaTeX code in your
image. Most vector image editors do not offer this option. There are, however,
a few exceptions.
38.5.1. Vector image editors with LaTeX support
38.5. Graphics and Graph editors
place after \ifpdf the code you want to insert if you are compiling with
pdflatex, place after \else the code you want to insert if you are compiling
with latex. For example, you can use this syntax to load different packages or
different graphic file formats3 according to the compiler.
4
5
6
7
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Xfig
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ipe_%28program%29
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Inkscape
http://pav.iki.fi/software/textext/
A very versatile vector image editor is Inkscape6 . It does not support LaTeX
text by itself, but you can use the plugin Textext7 for that. This allows you to
A newer and easier-to-use vector image editor specially tailored to LaTeX

use is IPE5 . It allows any LaTeX command, including but not limited to
mathematical formulae in the image. The program saves its files as editable
.eps or .pdf files, which eliminates the need of exporting your image each time
you have edited it.
In early days, LaTeX users used Xfig4 for their drawings. The editor is still
used by quite a few people nowadays because it has special 'export to LaTeX'
features. It also gives you some very basic ways of encapsulating LaTeX text
and math in the image (setting the text's 'special flag' to 'special' instead of
'normal'). When exporting, all LaTeX text will be put in a .tex-file, separately
from the rest of the image (which is put in a .ps file).
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Asymptote_%28vector_graphics_
language%29
Another way to generate vectorgraphics is using the Asymptote8 language. It

is a programming language which produces vector images in encapsulated
postscript format and supports LaTeX syntax in any textlabels.
LaTeXDraw is a free and open source graphical PSTricks generator and editor.
It allows you to draw basic geometric objects and save the result in a variety
of formats including .jpg, .png, .eps, .bmp as well as .tex. In the last case the
saved file contains PSTricks/LaTeX code only. Owing to that you can include
any possible LaTeX code in the picture, since the file is rendered by your
LaTeX environment directly.
put any block of LaTeX code in your image. Additionally since version 0.48
you can export to vectorgraphics with texts separated in a .tex file. Using this
way text is rendered by the latex compiler itself.
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/gnuplot
An excellent method to render graphs is through gnuplot9 , a free and versatile

plotting software, that has a special output filter directly for exporting files to
LaTeX. We assume, that the data is in a CSV file (comma separated text) in
the first and third column. A simple gnuplot script to plot the data can look
like this:
Using Microsoft Excel 2010, charts can be copied directly to Microsoft Expression Design 4, where they can be saved as PDF files. These PDF files can
be included in LaTeX. This method produces high quality vectorized images.
A simple method to include graphs and charts in LaTeX documents is to create

it within a common spreadsheet software (OpenOffice Calc or MS Office Excel
etc.) and include it in the document as a cropped screenshot. However, this
produces poor quality rasterized images. Calc also allows you to copy-paste
the charts into OpenOffice Draw and save them as PDF files.
38.5.2. Graphs with gnuplot
-1
-0.5
0 0
0.5
0.5
1.5
1.5
2.5
set format "$%g$"

set title "Graph 3: Dependence of $V_p$ on $R_0$"
set xlabel "Resistance $R_0$ [$\Omega$]"
Figure 115 gnuplot can plot various numerical data, functions, error
distribution as well as 3D graphs and surfaces
-1.5
The above steps can be automated by the package gnuplottex. By placing

gnuplot commands inside \begin{gnuplot}\end{gnuplot}, and compiling with
latex -shell-escape, the graphs are created and added into your document.
\input{graph1.tex}
Now gnuplot produces two files: the graph drawing in graph.eps and the
text in graph.tex. The second includes the EPS image, so that we only
need to include the file graph.tex in our document:
set ylabel "Voltage $V_p$ [V]"

set border 3
set xtics nomirror
set ytics nomirror
set terminal epslatex
set output "graph1.eps"
plot "graph1.csv" using 1:3
#Plot the data
Some editors will think of all following text as part of a formular and highlight
it as such (because of the '$' that is interpreted as part of the latex code). This
can be avoided by ending with:
(2*($1)):2
Using gnuplottex can cause fraudulent text-highlighting in some editors when

using algebraic functions on imported data, such as:
\begin{gnuplot}[terminal=epslatex, terminaloptions=color,
scale=0.9, linewidth=2 ]
...
\end{gnuplot}
When you are using gnuplottex it is also possible to directly pass the terminal
settings as an argument to the environment
Instead of calling eps2pdf directly, we can also include the epstopdf

package that automates the process. If we include a graphics now and leave
out the file extension, epstopdf will automatically transform the .eps-file to
With the included tex file we can work as with an ordinary image.
eps2pdf graph1.eps
sed -i s/".eps"/".pdf"/g graph1.tex
When using pdfLaTeX instead of simple LaTeX, we must convert the EPS
image to PDF and to substitute the name in the graph1.tex file. If we are
working with a Unix-like shell, it is simply done using:
As it uncomments the dollar sign for the gnuplot interpreter, but is not affecting
the interpretation of the .tex by the editor.
#$
\end{gnuplot}
10
http://cars9.uchicago.edu/~ravel/software/gnuplot-mode.
html
This section describes how to generate a png screenshot of a LaTeX page using
the *nix tool dvipng and the LaTeX package preview. This screenshots
are useful, for example, if you want to include a LaTeX generated formula
38.5.3. Generate png screenshots
Note: Emacs AucTex users might want to check out Gnuplot-mode10 .
This way, if we choose to output to PS or DVI, the EPS version is used and if
we output to PDF directly, the converted PDF graphics is used. Please note
that usage of epstopdf requires compiling with latex -shell-escape.
\includegraphics{graph1}
PDF and insert it in the text.
(3)k
12
.
k=0 2k + 1
Write this formula on a TeX file name foo.tex in this way:
to see if you have dvipng installed on your machine and ready to use. Again,
if you get a directory, you are ready to start doing screenshot of LaTeX pages.
Say you want to take a screenshot of
which dvipng
on a console and if locate returns a directory, then you are good. Next, type
locate preview.sty
on a presentation using you favorite slideware like Powerpoint, Keynote or

OpenOffice Impress. First, start by making sure you have the two required
tools dvipng and preview. To check for the LaTeX package type
dvipng -T tight -D 231.26 -o foo.png foo.dvi
Run LaTeX as usual to generate the dvi file foo.dvi. Note the active
option in the package declaration and the preview environment around the
equation's code. Without any of these two, you won't get an dvi output. Now,
we want an X font size formula, where X is measure in pixels. You need
to convert this, to dots per inch (dpi). The formula is: <dpi> = <font_px>*72.27/10. If you want, for instance, X = 32, then the size in dpi
corresponds to 231.26. This value will be passed to dvipng using the flag
D. To generate the desired png file run the command as follows:
\usepackage[active]{preview}
\begin{document}
\begin{preview}
\[
\pi = \sqrt{12}\sum^\infty_{k=0} \frac{(-3)^{-k}}{2k+1}
\]
\end{preview}
\end{document}
ispell yourfile.tex
aspell -c yourfile.tex
hunspell -l -t -i utf-8 yourfile.tex
If you want to spell-check your document, you can use command-line

aspell hunspell (preferably) or ispell programs.
38.6. Spell-checking and Word Counting
The flag -T sets the size of the image. The option tight will only include
all ink put on the page. The option -o sends the output to the file name
foo.png.
11
12
13
14
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/LyX
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Kile
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Emacs
An alternative to the detex command is the pdftotext command which

extracts an ASCII text file from PDF:
detex yourfile | wc
If you want to count words you can, again, use LyX or convert your LaTeX
source to plain text and use, for example, UNIX wc command:
Both understand LaTeX and will skip LaTeX commands. You can also use a
LaTeX editor with built-in spell checking, such as LyX11 , Kile12 , or Emacs13 .
Last another option is to convert LaTeX source to plain text14 and open resulting file in a word processor like OpenOffice.org or KOffice.
\usepackage{ifthen}
The following must be put in your document preamble:
However, LaTeX doesn't give you the ability to get a new even-side page. The
following method opens up this;
\cleardoublepage
In the twoside-mode you have the ability to get a new odd-side page by:
38.7. New even page
1. pdflatex yourfile.tex
2. pdftotext yourfile.pdf
3. wc yourfile.txt
If the given page is an odd-side page, the next new page is subsequently an
even-side page, and LaTeX will do nothing more than a regular \newpage.
However, if the given page is an even page, LaTeX will make a new (odd)
page, put in a placeholder, and make another new (even) page. A crude but
effective method.
\newevenside
To active the new even-side page, type the following where you want the new
even-side:
\newcommand{\newevenside}{
\ifthenelse{\isodd{\thepage}}{\newpage}{
\newpage
\phantom{placeholder} % doesn't appear on page
\thispagestyle{empty} % if want no header/footer
\newpage
}
}
If you want it on one page only, use the starred version of

the AddToShipoutPicture command at the page you want it.
(\AddToShipoutPicture*{...})
\usepackage{eso-pic}
...
\AddToShipoutPicture{%
\AtPageLowerLeft{%
\rotatebox{90}{%
\begin{minipage}{\paperheight}
\centering\textcopyright~\today{} Humble me
\end{minipage} %
}
} %
}%
If you want to put a sidebar with information like copyright and author, you
might want to use the eso-pic package. Example:
38.8. Sidebar with information
" use pdflatex

let g:Tex_DefaultTargetFormat='pdf'
let g:Tex_MultipleCompileFormats='pdf,dvi'
let g:Tex_CompileRule_pdf = 'mkdir -p tmp; pdflatex -output-directory
Or for vim modify your .vimrc:
alias pdflatex='mkdir -p tmp; pdflatex -output-directory tmp'
Please note that the folder tmp should exist. However if you're using linux you
can do something like this:
pdflatex -output-directory tmp
If you're using pdflatex you can create a folder in which all the output files will
be stored, so your top directory looks cleaner.
38.9. Hide auxiliary files
tmp
-interaction=nonstopmode $*; cp tmp/*.pdf .'
Appendix
Part VI.
http://www.andy-roberts.net/misc/latex/index.html
Andy Roberts' Getting to grips with Latex1 . (Done!)
The following books have been included in this wikibook (or we are working
on it!), with permission of the author:
39.1. Included books
39. Authors
3
4
5
pdf
http://it.oetiker.ch/
http://homepage.boku.ac.at/partl/
http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/beginlatex/
beginlatex-3.6.pdf
Not So Short Introduction to LaTex2e2 by Tobias Oetiker, Hubert Partl and

Irene Hyna. We have contacted the authors by email asking for permission:
they allowed us to use their material, but they never edited directly this
wikibook. That book is released under the GPL, that is not compatible with
the GFDL used here in Wikibooks. Anyway, we have the permission of the
authors to use their work. You can freely copy text from that guide to here.
If you find text on both the original book and here on Wikibooks, then that
text is double licensed under GPL and GFDL. For more information about
Tobias Oetiker and Hubert Partl, their websites are http://it.oetiker.ch/3 and
http://homepage.boku.ac.at/partl/4 respectively. (Done!)
Peter Flynn's Formatting information, a beginner's guide to typesetting with
LaTeX5 . We have contacted him by email asking for permission to use his
6
7
8
http://silmaril.ie/cgi-bin/blog
http://sarovar.org/projects/ltxprimer/
http://www.maths.tcd.ie/~dwilkins/LaTeXPrimer/
work. The original book is released under the GNU Free Documentation
License, the same as Wikibooks. For more information, his personal website
is http://silmaril.ie/cgi-bin/blog6 (Working...)
LaTeX Primer7 from the Indian TeX Users Group. Their document is released under the GNU Free Documentation License, the same as Wikibooks,
so we can include parts of their document as we wish. In any case, we have
contacted Indian TeX Users Group and they allowed us to do it. (Working...)
David Wilkins' Getting started with LaTeX8 . The book is not released
under any free license, but we have contacted the author asking him for the
permission to use parts of his book on Wikibooks. He agreed: his work
is still protected but you are allowed to copy the parts you want on this
Wikibook. If you see text on both the original work and here, then that part
(and only that part) is released under the terms of GFDL, like any other text
here on Wikibooks. (Working...)
9
10
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User%3AAlejo2083
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User%3AJtwdog
Alessio Damato9
Jtwdog10
Major contributors to the book on Wikibooks are:
39.2. Wiki users
1
2
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/TeX
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/LaTeX
Here are some other online resources available:
w:TeX1 w:LaTeX2
40. Links
3
4
5
6
http://www.tug.org/
http://uk.tug.org/
http://www.tug.org.in/
http://www.ctan.org/
The TeX Users Group3 Includes links to free versions of (La)TeX for many
kinds of computer.
UK-TUG4 The UK TeX Users' Group
TUGIndia5 The Indian TeX Users Group
[news:comp.text.tex comp.text.tex] Newsgroup for (La)TeX related questions
CTAN6 hundreds of add-on packages and programs
40.0.1. Community
pdf
http://www.ams.org/tex/amslatex.html
Tobias Oetiker's Not So Short Introduction to LaTex2e:

http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/lshort/english/lshort.pdf7 also at
http://people.ee.ethz.ch/oetiker/lshort/lshort.pdf
Vel's introduction to LaTeX: What is it, why should you use it, who should
use it and how to get started:
http://www.vel.co.nz/vel.co.nz/Blog/Entries/2009/11/4_LaTeX_Document_Preparation_System.html
Peter Flynn's beginner's guide (formatting):
http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/beginlatex/beginlatex-3.6.pdf
The AMS Short Math Guide for LaTeX, a concise summary of math formula
typesetting features
http://www.ams.org/tex/amslatex.html8
40.0.2. Tutorials/FAQs
amsmath users guide (PDF) and related files:

http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/amslatex/math/
LaTeX Primer from the Indian TeX Users Group:
http://sarovar.org/projects/ltxprimer/
LaTeX Primer
http://www.maths.tcd.ie/dwilkins/LaTeXPrimer/
PSTricks--fancy graphics exploiting PDF capabilities
http://sarovar.org/projects/pstricks/
PDFScreen--create LaTeX PDF files that have navigation buttons used for
presentations:
http://sarovar.org/projects/pdfscreen/
David Bausum's list of TeX primitives (these are the fundamental commands
used in TeX):
http://www.tug.org/utilities/plain/cseq.html
Leslie Lamport's manual for the commands that are unique to LaTeX (commands not used in plain TeX):
http://www.tex.uniyar.ac.ru/doc/latex2e.pdf
http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/epslatex.pdf
The UK TeX FAQ List of questions and answers that are frequently posted
at comp.text.tex
http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq
TeX on Mac OS X: Guide to using TeX and LaTeX on a Mac
http://www.rna.nl/tex.html
Text Processing using LaTeX
http://www-h.eng.cam.ac.uk/help/tpl/textprocessing/
The (La)TeX encyclopaedia
http://tex.loria.fr/index.html
Hypertext Help with LaTeX
http://www.giss.nasa.gov/latex/
EpsLatex: a very comprehensive guide to images, figures and graphics
http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/epslatex.pdf9
The Comprehensive LaTeX Symbol List (in PDF)
http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/symbols/comprehensive/symbolsa4.pdf
10
11
12
http://www.latex-project.org/
http://www.ctan.org
http://www.tug.org/tds/
LaTeX Project Site10

The Comprehensive TeX Archive Network11 Latest (La)TeX-related packages and software
TeX Directory Structure12 , used by many (La)TeX distributions
40.0.3. Reference
Getting to Grips with LaTeX (HTML) Collection of Latex tutorials taking

you from the very basics towards more advanced topics
http://www.andy-roberts.net/misc/latex/index.html
Chapter 8 (about typesetting mathematics) of the LaTeX companion
http://www.macrotex.net/texbooks/latexcomp-ch8.pdf
15
16
17
13
14
http://www.math.missouri.edu/~stephen/naturalmath/
http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/l2tabu/english/
l2tabuen.pdf
http://www.LaTeXTemplates.com
http://openwetware.org/wiki/LaTeX_template_for_PhD_thesis
http://www.cs.ucl.ac.uk/research/students/Latexforthesis.
htm
A resource for free high quality LaTeX templates for a variety of applications15
LaTeX template for writing PhD thesis16 , 2007
UCL computer department thesis template17
40.0.4. Templates
Natural Math13 converts natural language math formulas to LaTeX representation

Obsolete packages and commands14
Lamport's book LaTeX: A Document Preparation System
18
http://www.cs.utexas.edu/users/jbednar/latex/
UT thesis template18 , 2006
Installing "LaTeX" is not a simple one-click download and install. Multiple

programs often need to be downloaded and installed in order to have a suitable
computer system that can be used to create publishable output, such as PDFs.
The basic requirement is to have TeX and LaTeX. Optional, and recommended
installations include an attractive editor to write LaTeX source documents
(this is probably where you will spend most of your time), and a bibliographic
management program to manage references.
41. Installation
UNIX and Linux users have a wide choice of distributions; the most common
are teTeX and TeX Live. As of May 2006 teTeX is no longer actively maintained and its former maintainer Thomas Esser recommended TeX Live as the
41.1.1. UNIX/Linux
TeX and LaTeX are available for most computer platforms, since they were
programed to be very portable. They are most commonly installed using a
distribution, such as teTeX, MiKTeX, or MacTeX. This, however, does not
include any editor or advanced graphical user interface. Other programs, that
are not part of the distribution, are used to write and prepare TeX and LaTeX
files.
41.1. TeX and LaTeX
3
4
5
6
7
teTeX Home Page {http://www.tug.org/tetex/} (Retrieved January 31,

2007)
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ubuntu%20%28Linux%
20distribution%29
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Debian
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Advanced%20Packaging%20Tool
http://tug.org/mactex/
http://www.macports.org/
http://www.finkproject.org/
TeX Live is also available through MacPorts6 and Fink7 .
Mac OS X users may use MacTeX5 , supporting TeX, LaTeX, AMSTeX,

ConTeXt, XeTeX and many other core packages.
41.1.2. Mac OS X
replacement.1 Ubuntu2 and Debian3 users can install one (not both!) of these
systems using the system's apt4 package manager.
8
9
http://miktex.org/
http://www.scribtex.com/
To get started without needing to install anything, users can use ScribTeX9
which is a completely online LaTeX compiler, based on the TeX Live distribution.
41.1.4. Online
Microsoft Windows users can install MiKTeX8 onto their computer. This
distribution has advanced features, such as automatic installation of packages,
and simple interfaces to modify settings, such as default paper sizes.
41.1.3. Microsoft Windows
10
11
12
13
14
15
http://texstudio.sourceforge.net/
http://www.xm1math.net/texmaker/
http://www.vim.org/
http://vim-latex.sourceforge.net/
http://www.gnu.org/software/emacs/
http://www.gnu.org/software/auctex/
TexStudio10
Texmaker11
Vim12 with Vim-LaTeX13 Vimscript plugin
Emacs14 with AUCTeX15
Cross-platform
TeX and LaTeX source documents (as well as related files) are all text files,
and can be opened and modified in almost any text editor. A few recommended
editors include:
41.2. Editors
ScribTeX16 (browser based)

Verbosus17 (browser based)
TeXworks18
Gummi19
16
17
18
19
20
21
http://www.scribtex.com/
http://www.verbosus.com/
http://www.tug.org/texworks/
http://gummi.midnightcoding.org/
http://kile.sourceforge.net/
http://www.uoregon.edu/~koch/texshop/
Windows-only
TeXShop21
Mac OS X-only
Kile20
Linux-only
LEd22
TeXnicCenter23
WinEdt24
WinShell25
22
23
24
25
http://www.latexeditor.org/
http://www.texniccenter.org/
http://www.winedt.com/
http://www.winshell.de/
Cross-platform
Bibliography files (*.bib) are most easily edited and modified using a management system. These graphical user interfaces all feature a database form,
where information is entered for each reference item, and the resulting text file
can be used directly by BibTeX.
41.3. Bibliography management
26
27
28
http://jabref.sourceforge.net/
http://www.mendeley.com//
http://bibdesk.sourceforge.net/
BibDesk28
Mac OS X-only
JabRef26
Mendeley27
29
30
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Xfig
http://www.cygwin.com/
On Microsoft Windows systems, Xfig can only be installed using Cygwin-X30 ;

however, this will require a fast internet connection and about 2 gigabytes of
space on your computer. With Cygwin, to run Xfig, you need to first start the
"Start X - Server", then launch "xterm" to bring up a terminal. In this terminal
type "xfig" (without the quotation marks) and press return.
Xfig29 is a basic program that can produce vector graphics, which can be
exported to PSTEX. It can be installed on UNIX/Linux platforms. With
Ubuntu or Debian distributions, it can be easily installed using apt.
41.4.1. Xfig
41.4. Graphics tools
31
32
33
34
35
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Inkscape
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Encapsulated%20PostScript
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Portable%20Document%20Format
http://www.elisanet.fi/ptvirtan/software/textext/index.
html
An extremely useful plug-in is textext35 , which can import LaTeX objects.

This can be used for inserting mathematical notation or LaTeX fonts into
graphics (which may then be imported into LaTeX documents).
Inkscape31 is an open source vector graphics editor, which can export images to
EPS32 or PDF33 files, which may then be imported into LaTeX (see ../Importing
Graphics34 ). It can run natively under Windows, Linux or Mac OS.
41.4.2. Inkscape
36
37
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OpenOffice.org
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/LaTeX%2FPackages%
2FInstalling%20Extra%20Packages
41.6. References
Installing Extra Packages37
41.5. See also
It is also possible to export vector graphics to EPS format using OpenOffice.org36 Draw, which is an open source office suite available for Windows,
Linux and Mac.
41.4.3. OpenOffice.org
http://www.uz.ac.zw/science/maths/latex/ltx-86.html
First, we introduce the LaTeX measurement units. All LaTeX units are twoletter abbreviations. You can choose from a variety of units. Here are the most
common ones.1
42.1. Units
A list of macros and their values
42. Useful Measurement Macros
Definition
a point is 1/72.27
inch, that means about
0.0138 inch or 0.3515
mm.
a millimeter
a centimeter
inch
roughly the height of
an 'x' in the current
font
roughly the width of
an 'M' (uppercase) in
the current font
undefined, depends
on the font used
2.84
28.4
72.27
undefined, depends
on the font used
Value in points (pt)

1
http://www.uz.ac.zw/science/maths/latex/ltx-86.html
And here are some less common units.2
em
mm
cm
in
ex
Abbreviation
pt
Definition
a big point is 1/72
inch, that means about
0.0139 inch or 0.3527
mm.
pica
didt (1157 didt =
1238 points)
ccero (12 didt)
scaled point (65536sp
per point)
\baselineskip
Some length commands are;
42.2. Length 'macros'
cc
sp
pc
dd
Abbreviation
bp
12.84
0.000015
12
1.07
Value in points (pt)

1.00375
\oddsidemargin
The width of a line in the local environment
\linewidth
The margin for 'even' pages (think of a printed booklet)
\evensidemargin
The width of the column
\columnwidth
The distance between columns
\columnsep
Multiplies \baselineskip
\baselinestretch
The normal vertical distance between lines in a paragraph
\textheight
The default separation between columns in a tabular environment
\tabcolsep
The extra vertical space between paragraphs
\parskip
The normal paragraph indentation
\parindent
The height of the page
\paperheight
The width of the page
\paperwidth
The margin for 'odd' pages (think of a printed booklet)
You can change the values of the variables defining the page layout with two
commands. With this one you can set a new value:
42.3. Length manipulation macros
Units of length in Picture Environment
\unitlength
The size of the top margin
\topmargin
The width of the text on the page
\textwidth
The height of text on the page
When using these commands, you may duplicate the text that you want to use
as reference if you plan to also display it. But LaTeX also provides a set of
commands to avoid this duplication:
\settowidth{parameter}{some text}
\settoheight{parameter}{some text}
\settodepth{parameter}{some text}
You may also set a length from the size of a text with one of these commands:
\newlength{parameter}
You can create your own length with the command:
\addtolength{parameter}{length}
with this other one, you can add a value to the existing one:
\setlength{parameter}{length}
Resize an image to take exactly half the text width :
42.4. Samples
See LaTeX/Page_Layout3 for samples using these.
You may wish to look at the example below to see how you can use these.
The command \newsavebox creates a placeholder for storing a text; the
command \savebox stores the specified text in this placeholder, and does
not display anything in the document; and \usebox recalls the content of the
placeholder into the document.
\newsavebox{boxname}
\savebox{boxname}{some text}
\usebox{boxname}
% Create the holders we will need for our work

\newlength{\mytitleheight}
\newsavebox{\mytitletext}
% Create the reference text for measures
\savebox{\mytitletext}{%
\Large\bfseries This is our title%
}
\settoheight{\mytitleheight}{\usebox{\mytitletext}}
% Now creates the actual object in our document
\framebox[\textwidth][l]{%
\includegraphics[height=\mytitleheight]{my_image}%
\hspace{2mm}%
\usebox{\mytitletext}%
}
Use of savebox to resize an image to the height of the text:
\addtolength{\itemsep}{0.5\baselineskip}
Make distance between items larger (inside an itemize environment) :
\includegraphics[width=0.5\textwidth]{mygraphic}
http://www-h.eng.cam.ac.uk/help/tpl/textprocessing/squeeze.
html
University of Cambridge > Engineering Department > computing help >

LaTeX > Squeezing Space in LaTeX4
42.6. See also
42.5. References
A lot of the formatting techniques are required to differentiate certain elements

from the rest of the text. It is often necessary to add emphasis to key words or
phrases. Footnotes are useful for providing extra information or clarification
without interrupting the main flow of text. So, for these reasons, formatting is
very important. However, it is also very easy to abuse, and a document that
has been over-done can look and read worse than one with none at all.
This section will guide you through the various text, paragraph, and page
formatting techniques. Formatting tends to refer to most things to do with
appearance, so it makes the list of possible topics quite eclectic: text style,
font, size, etc.
43. Text Formatting
command into the preamble of your document. Use \linespread{1.3}

for "one and a half" line spacing, and \linespread{1.6} for "double"
\linespread{factor}
If you want to use larger inter-line spacing in a document, you can change its
value by putting the
43.1.1. Line Spacing
43.1. Spacing
LaTeX is so flexible that we will actually only skim the surface, as you can
have much more control over the presentation of your document if you wish.
Having said that, one of the purposes of LaTeX is to take away the stress of
having to deal with the physical presentation yourself, so you need not get too
carried away!
\begin{doublespace}
This paragraph has \\ default \\ line spacing.
To change line spacing within the document, the setspace package provides
the environments singlespace, onehalfspace, doublespace and
spacing:
\usepackage{setspace}
%\singlespacing
\onehalfspacing
%\doublespacing
%\setstretch{1.1}
The setspace package allows more fine-grained control over line spacing.
To set "one and a half" line spacing document-wide, but not where it is usually
unnecessary (e.g. footnotes, captions):
line spacing. Normally the lines are not spread, so the default line spread factor
is 1.
If such a space should be kept even if it falls at the end or the start of a line,
use \hspace* instead of \hspace. The length in the simplest case is just a
\hspace{length}
LaTeX determines the spaces between words and sentences automatically. To

add horizontal space, use:
43.1.2. Horizontal Space
\begin{spacing}{2.5}
This paragraph has \\ huge gaps \\ between lines.
\end{spacing}
This paragraph has \\ double \\ line spacing.

\end{doublespace}
x\hspace{\stretch{1}}
x\hspace{\stretch{3}} x
generates a special rubber space. It stretches until all the remaining space on
a line is filled up. If two \hspace{\stretch{n}} commands are issued
on the same line, they grow according to the stretch factor.
\stretch{n}
The command:
number plus a unit, e.g. \hspace{1.5 cm}. For a list of the possible units,
see the Useful Measurement Macros1 appendix.
This command should normally be used between two empty lines. If the space
should be preserved at the top or at the bottom of a page, use the starred
version of the command, \vspace*, instead of \vspace. The \stretch
\vspace{length}
If necessary, additional vertical space between two paragraphs can be added

with the command:
\parskip 7.2pt
The space between paragraphs, sections, subsections, etc. is determined

automatically by LaTeX. If you want to customize the default paragraph
spacing, it can be achieved with the following command in the preamble of
your document:
43.1.3. Vertical Space
It's important you use the \vspace* command instead of \vspace, otherwise LaTeX can silently ignore the extra space.
{ \vspace*{length} }
If you want to add space at the beginning of the document, without anything
else written before, then you may use
command.
\\[length]
Additional space between two lines of the same paragraph or within a table is
specified with the
command, in connection with \pagebreak, can be used to typeset text on

the last line of a page, or to center text vertically on a page.
causes the words listed in the argument to be hyphenated only at the points
marked by -. The argument of the command should only contain words
\hyphenation{word list}
LaTeX hyphenates words whenever necessary. If the hyphenation algorithm

does not find the correct hyphenation points, you can remedy the situation by
using the following commands to tell TeX about the exception. The command
43.2. Hyphenation
\hfill will produce spaces.

\dotfill will produce dots.
\hrulefill will produce a rule.
Several macros allow filling the rest of the line -- or stretching parts of the line
-- in different manners:
43.1.4. Fill the rest of the line
The command \- inserts a discretionary hyphen into a word. This also

becomes the only point where hyphenation is allowed in this word. This
\hyphenation{FORTRAN Hy-phen-a-tion}
The hyphenation hints are stored for the language that is active when the
hyphenation command occurs. This means that if you place a hyphenation
command into the preamble of your document it will influence the English language hyphenation. If you place the command after the \begin{document}
and you are using some package for national language support like babel, then
the hyphenation hints will be active in the language activated through babel.
The example below will allow hyphenation to be hyphenated as well as
Hyphenation, and it prevents FORTRAN, Fortran and fortran from
being hyphenated at all. No special characters or symbols are allowed in the
argument. Example:
built from normal letters, or rather characters that are considered to be normal
letters by LaTeX. It is known that the hyphenation algorithm does not find
all correct American English hyphenation points for several words. A log of
known exceptions is published periodically in the TUGboat journal. (See a
2008 list: http://www.tug.org/TUGboat/Articles/tb29-2/tb92hyf.pdf)
This can be quite cumbersome if one has many words that contain a dash
like electromagnetic-endioscopy. One alternative to this is using the \hyp
command of the hyphenat package. This command typesets a hyphen and
I think this is: supercalifragilisticexpialidocious
\begin{minipage}{2in}
I think this is: su\-per\-cal\-%
i\-frag\-i\-lis\-tic\-ex\-pi\-%
al\-i\-do\-cious
\end{minipage}
command is especially useful for words containing special characters (e.g.,

accented characters), because LaTeX does not automatically hyphenate words
containing special characters.
\hyphenpenalty=100000
\fbox is similar to \mbox, but in addition there will be a visible box drawn
around the content.
To avoid hyphenation altogether, the penalty for hyphenation can be set to an
extreme value:
My phone number will change soon. It will be \mbox{0116 291 2319}.
It causes its argument to be kept together under all circumstances. Example:
\mbox{text}
Several words can be kept together on one line with the command
electromagnetic\hyp{}endioscopy
allows full automatic hyphenation of the other words forming the compound
word. One would thus write
LaTeX treats left and right quotes as different entities. For single quotes,
(on American keyboards, this symbol is found on the tilde key (adjacent to
the number 1 key on most) gives a left quote mark, and ' is the right. For
double quotes, simply double the symbols, and LaTeX will interpret them
43.3. Quote-marks
will widen the text width and reduce the amount of margin overruns.
\usepackage{geometry}
You can change the degree to which LaTeX will hyphenate by changing the
value of \tolerance=1000 and \hyphenpenalty=1000. You'll have
to experiment with the values to achieve the desired effect. A document which
has a low tolerance value will cause LaTeX not to tolerate uneven spacing
between words, hyphenating words more frequently than in documents with
higher tolerances. Also note that using a higher text width will decrease the
probability of encountering badly hyphenated word. For example adding
To quote" in Latex
To quote'' in Latex
To quote' in Latex
Figure 118
Figure 117
Figure 116
accordingly. (Although, you can use the " for right double quotes if you wish).
On British keyboards, ' ' is left of the ' 1 ' key and shares the key with '
', and sometimes ' ' or ' | '. The apostrophe (' ' ') key is to the right of the
colon/semicolon key and shares it with the ' @ ' symbol.
Figure 119
For left bottom quote and European quoting style you need to use T1 font
encoding enabled by:
The right quote is also used for apostrophe in LaTeX without trouble.
Figure 121
,,Prosz
e, naci
snij klawisz <<x>>''.
Please press the x' key.''
To ,,quote'' in Latex
Diacritics may be added to letters by placing special escaped metacharacters

before the letter that requires the diacritic. For a list of diacritic metacharacters,
see LaTeX/Accents2 .
43.4. Diacritics and accents
The package csquotes offers a multi-lingual solution to quotations, with integration to citation mechanisms offered by BibTeX. This package allows one for
example to switch languages and quotation styles according to babel language
selections.
\nonfrenchspacing
which tells LaTeX not to insert more space after a period than after ordinary
character. Frenchspacing can be turned off later in your document via the
\frenchspacing
To get a straight right margin in the output, LaTeX inserts varying amounts
of space between the words. By default, It also inserts slightly more space at
the end of a sentence. However, the extra space added at the end of sentences
is generally considered typographically old-fashioned in English language
printing. (The practice is found in nineteenth century design and in twentieth
century typewriter styles.) Most modern typesetters treat the end of sentence
space the same as the interword space. (See for example, Bringhurst's Elements
of Typographic Style.) The additional space after periods can be disabled with
the command
43.5. Space between Words and Sentences
, then none of these exceptions need be specified.)
\frenchspacing
in front of a period specifies that this period terminates a sentence even when
it follows an uppercase letter. (If you are using
\@
character generates a space that cannot be enlarged and additionally prohibits

a line break. The command
command.
If an author wishes to use the wider end-of-sentence spacing, care must be
exercised so that punctuation marks are not misinterpreted as ends of sentences.
TeX assumes that sentences end with periods, question marks or exclamation
marks. Although if a period follows an uppercase letter, this is not taken
as a sentence ending, since periods after uppercase letters normally occur in
abbreviations. Any exception from these assumptions has to be specified by
the author. A backslash in front of a space generates a space that will not be
enlarged. A tilde
Some very long words, numbers or URLs may not be hyphenated properly
and move far beyond the side margin. One solution for this problem is to
use sloppypar environment, which tells LaTeX to adjust word spacing less
strictly. As a result, some spaces between words may be a bit too large, but
long words will be placed properly.
43.5.1. Margin misalignment and interword spacing
\begin{sloppypar}
This is a paragraph with
a very long word ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPRST;
then we have an another bad thing
--- a long number 1234567890123456789.
\end{sloppypar}
This is a paragraph with

a very long word ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPRST;
Figure
then we have another bad thing
--- a long number 1234567890123456789.
122 border
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Typographical%20ligature
between the two letters in question. This might be necessary with words built
from two words. Here is an example:
{\kern0pt}
or, if this does not work,
{}
Some letter combinations are typeset not just by setting the different letters
one after the other, but by actually using special symbols (like " "), called
ligatures3 . Ligatures can be prohibited by inserting
43.6. Ligatures
Figure 123
microtype/
from the microtype package4 can be used:
\DisableLigatures
Some tools are unable to perform search in documents that contain ligatures (a
search for "finally" wouldn't find the string " nally"). If one desires,
for greater accessibility, to disable ligatures altogether in the whole document,
the
\Large Not shelfful\\

but shelf{}ful
The normal typesetting of the
43.7. Slash marks
\usepackage[resetfonts]{cmap}
Another solution is to use the cmap package, which will help the reader to
interpret the ligatures:
If you are using XeLaTeX and OpenType fonts, the fontspec package allows
for standard ligatures to be turned off as well as fancy swash ligatures to be
turned on.
Note that this will also disable ligatures such as -- , --- , etc.
\usepackage{microtype}
\DisableLigatures{encoding = *, family = *}
", which should not be broken over multiple lines.
mm/year
character in LaTeX should be restricted to units, such as "
", which allow the line to "break" after the slash mark (if needed). The use of
the
input\slash output
character in LaTeX does not allow following characters to be "broken" on to

new lines, which often create "overfull" errors in output (where letters push
off the margin). Words that use slash marks, such as "input/output" should be
typeset as "
I want to \emph{emphasize} a word.
command.
\emph{text}
Figure 124
In order to add some emphasis to a word or phrase, the simplest way is to use
the
43.8. Emphasizing Text
command, like in the following example:
\familydefault
There are three main font families: roman (e.g., Times), sans serif (e.g., Arial)
and monospace (e.g., Courier). You can also specify styles such as italic and
bold. To change the default family for the rest of the document, change the
43.9.1. Font Styles
In LaTeX, there are many ways to specify and control font, and this section is
only intended to serve as a brief overview of the topic.
See also: LaTeX/Fonts5 .
43.9. Fonts
\emph{...}
{\em ...}
\textrm{...} {\rmfamily
...}
\textsf{...} {\sffamily
...}
emphasis
roman font
family
sans serif font
family
LaTeX comEquivalent to
Output style
mand
\textnormal{...}
{\normalfont document font
family
...}
this is the default or normal

font
typically italics
Remarks
The following table lists the commands you will need to access the typical font
styles:
\renewcommand{\familydefault}{\sfdefault}
\textup{...} {\upshape
...}
\textit{...} {\itshape
...}
\textsl{...} {\slshape
...}
mand
\texttt{...} {\ttfamily
...}
slanted shape
italic shape
a skewed version of the normal typeface
(similar to, but
slightly different from,
italics)
this is a
fixed-width
or monospace
font
the same as the
normal typeface
teletypefont
family
upright shape
Remarks
Output style
medium
weight
bold
uppercase (all
caps)
Small Capitals
Output style
a font weight
in between normal and bold
Also
\lowercase.
There are some
caveats, though;
see here6 .
Remarks
http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=casechange
\textbf{...} {\bfseries
...}
\textmd{...} {\mdseries
...}
mand
\textsc{...} {\scshape
...}
\uppercase{...}
and simply call the underline command as and when it is needed.
\emph
command with the underline rather than the italic style. It is unlikely that you
wish this to be the desired effect, so it is better to stop ulem taking over
\emph
in your preamble. By default, this overrides the
\usepackage{ulem}
command, text underlined in this way will not break properly. This functionality has to be added with the ulem (underline emphasis) package. Stick
\underline{...}
You may have noticed the absence of underline. This is because underlining
is not recommended for typographic reasons (it weighs the text down). You
should use emph instead. Although this is available via the
The commands in column two are not entirely equivalent to the commands
in column one: They do not correct spacing after the selected font style has
ended. The commands in column one are therefore in general recommended.
Some font styles are not compatible one with the other. But some extra
packages will fill this hole. For bold small capitals, you might want to use:
\sout{...}
.
And for a strike-out
\uwave{...}
.
To add a wavy underline, use
\uline{...}
.
To underline, use
\usepackage[normalem]{ulem}
straight after the document environment begins. Alternatively, use
\normalem
To restore the usual em formatting, add
To apply different font sizes, simply follow the commands on this table:
43.9.2. Sizing text
\usepackage{bold-extra}
...
\textsc{\textbf{This is bold small capitals}}
Note that the font size definitions are set by the document class. Depending on
the document style the actual font size may differ from that listed above. And
not every document class has unique sizes for all 10 size commands.
Figure 125
[12pt]
7.33325
8.50012
10.00002
10.95003
11.74988
14.09984
15.84985
19.02350
22.82086
22.82086
[10pt]
7.33325
7.97224
8.50012
9.24994
10.00002
10.95003
11.74988
14.09984
15.84985
19.02350
[11pt]
7.97224
8.50012
9.24994
10.00002
10.95003
11.74988
14.09984
15.84985
19.02350
22.82086
AMS classes, memoir
[12pt]
8.50012
9.24994
10.00002
10.95003
11.74988
14.09984
15.84985
19.02350
22.82086
22.82086
17.27505
20.73755
20.73755
20.73755
24.88382
29.86258
35.82510
43.00012
51.60014
51.60014
slides
[10pt]
5.31258
7.43760
8.50012
9.24994
10.00002
11.74988
14.09984
16.24988
19.50362
23.39682
beamer
[11pt]
6.37509
8.50012
9.24994
10.00002
10.95003
11.74988
14.09984
16.24988
19.50362
23.39682
As a technical note, points in TeX follow the standard American point size
in which 1 pt is approximately 0.3513_6 mm. The standard point size used
in most modern computer programs (known as the desktop publishing point
or PostScript point) has 1 pt equal to approximately 0.352_7 mm while the
Absolute standard classes,

Point
proc
Sizes,
[10pt]
being
default
size
[10pt]
[11pt]
\tiny 6.80565 7.33325
\scriptsize
7.97224 8.50012
\footnotesize
8.50012 9.24994
\small 9.24994 10.00002
\normalsize
10.00002 10.95003
\large 11.74988 11.74988
\Large 14.09984 14.09984
\LARGE 15.84985 15.84985
\huge 19.02350 19.02350
\Huge 22.82086 22.82086
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Point_%28typography%29
These commands change the size within a given scope, so for instance
\Large some words} will change the size of only some words, and
does not affect the font in the rest of the document. These commands cannot
be used in math mode. However, part of a formula may be set in a different
size by using an \mbox command containing the size command.
The new size takes effect immediately after the size command; if an entire
paragraph or unit is set in a certain size, the size command should include the
blank line or the \end{} which delimites the unit. (See Declarations.)
The default for \normalsize is 10-point, but it may differ for some Document
Styles or their options. The actual size produced by these commands also
depends on the Document Style and, in some styles, more than one of these
size commands may produce the same actual size.
standard European point size (known as the Didot point) had 1 pt equal to
approximately 0.37597151 mm. (See: w:Point_(typography)7 .)
to define a "logical wrapper command" for the font changing command.
\newcommand
Even if you can easily change the output of your fonts using those commands,
you're better off not using explicit commands like this, because they work in
opposition to the basic idea of LaTeX, which is to separate the logical and
visual markup of your document. This means that if you use the same font
changing command in several places in order to typeset a special kind of
information, you should use
43.9.3. Formatting Macros
Another use for size commands is to embed a single command inside the size-syntax, which affects all things within this command, e.g.
\Large{\tableofcontents}.
and then figuring out for each one whether it was used for pointing out danger
or for some other reason.
\textbf
, without having to wade through your document, identifying all the occurrences of
\textbf
This approach has the advantage that you can decide at some later stage that
you want to use some visual representation of danger other than
Do not \oops{enter} this room,

its occupied by \oops{machines}
of unknown origin and purpose.
\newcommand{\oops}[1]{\textbf{#1}}
Do not enter this room, its occupied by machines of unknown

origin and purpose.
mhchem/
with the text-equivalent formula, for example:
\ce{}
A very common use of subscripts within the text environment is to typeset

chemical formulae. For this purposes, a highly recommended package is
mhchem8 . This package is easy to use, and works with your text fonts (rather
than math fonts). To insert a chemical formula, use
Michelangelo was born on March 6\textsuperscript{th}, 1475.
command. This allows you to, for instance, typeset 6th as 6th :
\textsuperscript{}
To superscript text in text-mode, you can use the
43.9.4. Text mode superscript and subscript
Figure 126
\textsubscript{}
Subscripting in text-mode is not supported by LaTeX alone; however, several

packages allow the use of the
% In your document:
Ammonium sulphate is \ce{(NH4)2SO4}.
% In your preamble, add:

\usepackage[version=3]{mhchem}
...
11
12
10
bpchem/
koma-script/
http://tug.ctan.org/pkg/fixltx2e
http://tug.ctan.org/pkg/fixltx2e
command. For instance, bpchem9 , KOMA-Script210 , and fixltx2e11 all

support this command. Of these, fixltx2e12 is perhaps the most universal
option since it is distributed with LaTeX and requires no additional packages
to be implemented.
_{}
symbol. In math mode subscripting is done using the underscore:
, the math mode must be used. This is easily accomplished in running text by
bracketing your text with the
\textsubscript{}
If you do not load a package that supports
% In your document:
It is found that height\textsubscript{apple tree} is
different than height\textsubscript{orange tree}.
% In your preamble, add:

\usepackage{fixltx2e}
...
It is found that heightapple tree is differe
command:
\mathrm
See also the above mentioned package mhchem for chemical symbols and
formulas.
Note that in math mode text will appear in a font suitable for mathematical
variables. In math mode, to generate roman text, for example, one would use
the
H$_2$O is the formula for water
H2 O is the formula for water
For example, the formula for water is written as:
This is normal roman andsuperscript roma
This is $\mathrm{normal\ roman\ and}^\mathrm{superscript\ roman}$

text
Similarly, you can superscript using:
Note the use of \<space> to insert a space in math mode.
This is $\mathrm{normal\ roman\ and}_\mathrm{subscript\ roman}$ text
This is normal roman andsubscript roman
13
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Text%20figures
in your preamble. textcomp also allows you to use decimal points, properly
formatted dollar signs, etc. within
\usepackage{textcomp}
Some fonts do not have text figures built in; the textcomp package attempts
to remedy this by effectively generating text figures from the currently-selected
font. Put
\oldstylenums{1234567890}
command:
\oldstylenums{}
Many typographers prefer to use titling figures, sometimes called lining figures,
when numerals are interspersed with full caps, when they appear in tables, and
when they appear in equations, using text figures13 elsewhere. LaTeX allows
this usage through the
43.9.5. Text figures ("old style" numerals)
% Make the page numbers in text figures

\let\myThePage\thepage
\renewcommand{\thepage}{\oldstylenums{\myThePage}}
% Make \paragraph{} use text figures

\let\myTheParagraph\theparagraph
\renewcommand{\theparagraph}{\oldstylenums{\myTheParagraph}}
% Enclose everything in an \AtBeginDocument{}

\AtBeginDocument{%
% Make \section{} use text figures
\let\myTheSection\thesection
\renewcommand{\thesection}{\oldstylenums{\myTheSection}}
One common use for text figures is in section, paragraph, and page numbers.
These can be set to use text figures by placing some code in your preamble:
\oldstylenums{}
...
from the code above:
\myThePage definition
command in your document, be sure to reinstate your
\pagenumbering
command back to the original. Thus, if you use the
\thepage
, will reset the
\pagenumbering{arabic}
command, e.g.,
\pagenumbering
NOTE: A subsequent use of the
Should you use additional sectioning or paragraphing commands, you may

adapt the previous code listing to include them as well.
\tableofcontents
\chapter{Preface}
...
\chapter{Introduction}
...
\pagenumbering{arabic}
% without this, the \thepage command will not be in oldstyle (e.g.,
in your Table of Contents}
\renewcommand{\thepage}{\oldstylenums{\myThePage}}
\Chapter{Foo}
...
14
15
16
17
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/hyphen
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash%23En%20dash
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash%23Em%20dash
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Plus%20and%20minus%20signs%
23Minus%20sign
LaTeX knows four kinds of dashes: a hyphen14 (-), en dash15 (), em dash16
(), or a minus sign17 (). You can access three of them with different
numbers of consecutive dashes. The fourth sign is actually not a dash at allit
is the mathematical minus sign:
43.10.1. Dashes and Hyphens
43.10. Symbols and special characters
Figure 127
The names for these dashes are: -(-) hyphen , --() en-dash , ---()
em-dash and () minus sign. They have different purposes:
Hyphen: daughter-in-law, X-rated\\

En dash: pages 13--67\\
Em dash: yes---or no? \\
Minus sign: $0$, $1$ and $-1$
macro from hyphenat package instead of hyphen if you want LaTeX to

break compound words between lines.
\hyp{}
Use
Figure 128
18
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/euro%20sign
\usepackage[official]{eurosym}
option in the preamble:
official
. If you want to use the official version of the euro symbol, then you have to
use eurosym, load it with the
\texteuro
then you can insert the euro symbol with the command
When writing about money these days, you need the euro sign18 . You have
several choices. If the fonts you are using have a euro symbol and you want to
use that one, first you have to load the textcomp package in the preamble:
43.10.2. Euro C currency symbol
19
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ellipsis
A sequence of three dots is known as an ellipsis19 , which is commonly used

to indicate omitted text. On a typewriter, a comma or a period takes the same
amount of space as any other letter. In book printing, these characters occupy
43.10.3. Ellipsis (. . . )
\euro
again you can insert the euro symbol with
\usepackage[gen]{eurosym}
command. Finally, if you want a euro symbol that matches with the current
font style (e.g., bold, italics, etc.) but your current font does not provide it, you
can use the eurosym package again but with a different option:
\euro
then you can insert it with the
Not like this ... but like this:\\

New York, Tokyo, Budapest, \ldots
Figure 129
command which allows the spacing between the dots to vary.
\textellipsis
Alternatively, you can use the
\ldots
only a little space and are set very close to the preceding letter. Therefore, you
cannot enter ellipsis by just typing three dots, as the spacing would be wrong.
Instead, there is a special command for these dots. It is called
LaTeX has lots of symbols at its disposal. The majority of them are within the
mathematical domain, and later chapters will cover how to get access to them.
For the more common text symbols, use the following commands:
43.10.5. Other symbols
Figure 130
There are some very simple LaTeX commands for typesetting special text
strings:
43.10.4. Ready-made strings
Figure 131
can be created with
20
21

\ding{number}
. Next, the command
\usepackage{pifont}
.
Of course, these are rather boring. For some more interesting symbols, the
Postscript ZipfDingbats font is available thanks to the pifont package. Hopefully you are beginning to notice now that when you want to use a package,
you need to add the declaration to your preamble; in this instance:
\textvisiblespace
. And a visible space
\~{}
Not mentioned in above table, tilde () is used in LaTeX code to produce

non-breakable space20 . To get printed tilde sign, either make it verbatim text21
or write
Figure 132 ZapfDingbats symbols
, will print the specified symbol. Here is a table of the available symbols:
This page uses material from Andy Roberts Getting to grips with LaTeX with
permission from the author.
43.11. Notes and References
Tutorial examples, books, and real world uses of LaTeX.
44.1. General examples
The easiest way to learn how to use latex is to look at how other people use it.
Here is a list of real world latex sources that are freely available on the internet.
The information here is sorted by application area, so that it is grouped by the
scientific communities that use similar notation and LaTeX constructs.
44. Sample LaTeX documents
1
2
3
4
5
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/LaTeX%2Fcaption.tex
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/LaTeX%2Fsimple.tex
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/LaTeX%2Fwrapped.tex
http://www.tug.org/pracjourn/2006-2/eglen/
http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/lshort/english/
caption.tex1 , simple.tex2 , wrapped.tex3

[ftp://tug.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/base/small2e.tex small2e.tex]
and
[ftp://tug.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/base/sample2e.tex
sample2e.tex]. The "official" sample documents...
A short example of how to use LaTeX for scientific reports4 by Stephen J.
Eglen.
The not so Short Introduction to LaTeX5 by Tobias Oetiker is distributed
with full latex sources.
6
7
8
9
http://www.ccs.neu.edu/course/csg264/latex/
http://cristal.inria.fr/~remy/latex/
http://svn.openfoundry.org/pugs/docs/talks/hw2005.tex
Pugs: Bootstrapping Perl 6 with Haskell8 . This paper by Audrey Tang

contains nice examples on configuring the listings package9 to format source
code.
Articles on programming language research, from syntax to semantics, including source code listings, type rules, proof trees, and even some category theory.
A good place to start is Mitchell Wand's Latex Resources6 , including a sample
file that also demonstrates Didier Remy's mathpartir7 package. The following
are latex sources of some articles, books, or presentations from this field:
44.2. Semantics of Programming Languages
45.1. #
This is a glossary of LaTeX commandsan alphabetical listing of LaTeX

commands with the summaries of their effects. (Brackets "[]" are optional
arguments and braces "{}" are required arguments.)
45. Command Glossary
\:
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/LaTeX%2FFormatting%23Slash%
20marks
thick space, math mode
\;
thin space, math and text mode
\,
new line. See Page Layout2 .
\\[*][extra-space]
following period ends sentence
\@
see slash marks1
\+
back tab, see tabbing
\<
tab, see tabbing
\>
set tab, see tabbing
\=
hyphenation; tabbing
\-
negative thin space, math mode
\!
medium space, math mode
double vertical lines, math mode
end math environment
\)
start math environment3
\(
\|
accent or tabbing
accent or tabbing
\'
see tabbing
\addtocounter{counter}{value}
adds text (or formatting commands) directly to the file that generates the
specified list or table
\addtocontents{file}{text}
adds an entry to the specified list or table
\addcontentsline{file}{sec_unit}{entry}
45.2. A
end displaymath environment
\]
begin displaymath environment
\[
changes the way sectional units are numbered so that information after the
command is considered part of the appendix
\appendix
causes the current value of a specified counter to be printed in alphabetic

characters
\alph
adds a vertical space of a specified height
\addvspace
increments a length command, see Useful Measurement Macros4
\addtolength{len-cmd}{len}
\address{Return address}
increments the counter
\baselineskip
prints a backslash
\backslash
45.3. B
declares the author(s). See Document Structure5
\author
causes the current value of a specified counter to be printed in Arabic numbers
\arabic
6
7

equivalent to \vspace{\bigskipamount}
\bigskip
\bigskipamount
generates a labeled entry for the bibliography7
\bibitem
Boldface typeface
\bf
scales the value of \baselineskip
\baselinestretch
a length command (see Useful Measurement Macros6 ), which specifies the

minimum space between the bottom of two successive lines in a paragraph
\centering
Centered dots
\cdots
generate caption for figures and tables
\caption
Calligraphic style in math mode
\cal
45.4. C
bold font in math mode
\boldmath
8
9
10

\cline
Ends the current page and causes any floats to be printed. See Page Layout10 .
\clearpage
\cleardoublepage
Used to make citations9 from the provided bibliography
\cite
\circle
Starts a new chapter. See Document Structure8 .
\chapter
Used to center align LaTeX environments
11
12
13
14

http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/..%2FFormatting%23Other%
20symbols
makes sign. See Formatting14 .
\copyright
Specifies color of the text. ../Colors13
\color
Inserts a closing phrase (e.g. \closing{yours sincerely}), leaves space for a

handwritten signature and inserts a signature specified by \signature{}. Used
in the Letter class.
\closing
Adds horizontal line in a table that spans only to a range of cells. See \hline11
and ../Tables/12 chapter.
\em
45.6. E
\dotfill
Used to begin a latex document
\documentclass[options]{style}
Inserts a diagonal ellipsis (3 diagonal dots) in math mode
\ddots
\date
\dashbox
45.5. D
\fbox
45.7. F
Prints euro symbol. Requires eurosym package.
\euro
\ensuremath (LaTeX2e)
Toggles italics on/off for the text in curly braces following the command e.g.
\emph{This is in italics \emph{but this isn't} and this is again}.
\emph
Toggles italics on/off for the text inside curly braces with the command.
Such as {\em This is in italics \em but this isn't \em and this is again}. This
command allows nesting.
16
15
23Footnotes
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/..%2FFormatting%23Font%
20Styles%20and%20size
\frac
\footnotetext
Sets font size. See Formatting16 .
\footnotesize
\footnotemark
Creates a footnote15 .
\footnote
\fnsymbol
\flushbottom
mode.
The
usage
is
17
18

Instructs LaTex to abstain from inserting more space after a period (.) than
is the case for an ordinary character. In order to untoggle this functionality
resort to the command \nonfrenchspacing18 .
\frenchspacing
Like \makebox but creates a frame around the box. See LaTeX/Advanced
Topics#Boxes17 .
\framebox
\frame
inserts a fraction in mathematics

\frac{numerator}{denominator}.
19
20
21

Add a link, or an anchor. See Hyperlinks21
\href
adds a horizontal line in a tabular environment. See also \cline19 , Tables20

chapter.
\hline
Abbreviation for \hspace{\fill}.
\hfill
45.9. H
45.8. G
23
22
\hyphenation{word list}
\Huge
\huge
Produces horizontal space.
\hspace
\hrulefill
24
25
26
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/..%2FFormatting%23Hyphenation
\includeonly
Inserts an image26 . Requires graphicx package.
\includegraphics
This command is different from \input in that it's the output that is added
instead of the commands from the other files. For more see LaTex/Basics25
\include
45.10. I
Overrides default hyphenation algorithm for specified words. See Hyphenation24
27
28

http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/LaTeX%2FFormatting%23List%
20Structures
Creates an item in a list. Used in list structures28 .
\item
Italicizes the text which is inside curly braces with the command. Such as
{\it This is in italics}. \em is generally preferred since this allows nesting.
\it
Used to read in LaTex files. For more see LaTex/Basics27 .
\input
\indent
29
30

\large
Used to create label which can be later referenced with \ref. See Labels
and Cross-referencing29 .
\label
45.12. L
\kill
45.11. K
33
32
31
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/..%2FFormatting%23Ready-made%
20strings
\LaTeXe
Prints LaTeX logo. See Formatting33 .
\LaTeX
\LARGE
\Large
36
35
34
20strings
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/..%2FFormatting%23Ellipsis%
20%28...%29
\linethickness
Suggests LaTeX to break line in this place. See Page Layout36 .
\linebreak
\line
\lefteqn
\left
Prints sequence of three dots. See Formatting35 .
\ldots
Prints current LaTeX version logo. See Formatting34 .
37
38

\makebox
45.13. M
\location
Inserts a list of the tables in the document. Similar to TOC38
\listoftables
Inserts a list of the figures in the document. Similar to TOC37
\listoffigures
\linewidth
39
\multicolumn
\medskip
Write a text in roman font inside a math part
\mbox
\mathop
\mathcal
\markboth \markright
Causes the title page to be typeset, using information provided by commands

such as \title{} and \author{}.
\maketitle
Defines a box that has a specified width, independent from its content. See
LaTeX/Advanced Topics#Boxes39 .
40
41

\newlength
\newfont
Defines a new environment. See New Environments41 .
\newenvironment
\newcounter
Defines a new command. See New Commands40 .
\newcommand
45.14. N
\multiput
42
43

\nolinebreak
\noindent
Adds a reference to the bibliography without an inline citation. \nocite{*}

causes all entries in a bibtex database to be added to the bibliography.
\nocite
\newtheorem
\newsavebox
Ends current page and starts a new one. See Page Layout43 .
\newpage
Ends current line and starts a new one. See Page Layout42 .
\newline
46
44
45
\not

Suggests LaTeX not to break page in this place. See Page Layout46 .
\nopagebreak
Sets default font size. See Formatting45 .
\normalsize
Setting the command untoggles the command \frenchspacing44 and activates

LaTeX standards to insert more space after a period (.) than after an ordinary
character.
\nonfrenchspacing
47
Draws a line over the argument.
\overline
Draws a brace over the argument. Can be used in displaystyle with superscript
to label formulae. See Advanced Mathematics47 .
\overbrace
\oval
Inserts an opening phrase when using the letter class, for example \opening{Dear Sir}
\opening
\onecolumn
45.15. O
48
49

\pagestyle
Used to reference to number of page where a previously declared \label is

located. See Floats, Figures and Captions49 .
\pageref
Defines the type of characters used for the page numbers. Options : arabic,
roman, Roman, alph, Alph, gobble (invisible).
\pagenumbering
Suggests LaTeX breaking page in this place. See Page Layout48 .
\pagebreak
45.16. P
50
51
52
53

Normal paragraph indentation. See Useful Measurement Macros53 .
\parindent
Defines a box whose contents are created in paragraph mode. See Advanced
Topics52 .
\parbox
Starts a new paragraph. See Document Structure51 .
\paragraph
Starts a new paragraph
\par
See Page Layout50 .
54
55

\raggedbottom
45.17. R
\put
See Customizing LaTeX55 .
\providecommand (LaTeX2e)
\protect
Starts a new part of a book. See Document Structure54 .
\part
\parskip
56
57

\renewcommand
Used to reference to number of previously declared \label. See Labels

and Cross-referencing57 .
\ref
Creates a box and raises its content. See LaTeX/Advanced Topics#Boxes56 .
\raisebox
Command used for left justified within other environments.
\raggedright
Command used for right justified within other environments.
\raggedleft
Command used for top justified within other environments.
58
\sbox
Makes a box and saves it in a named storage bin.
\savebox
45.18. S
Creates a line of specified width and height. See LaTeX/Advanced Topics#Rules and Struts58 .
\rule
\roman
\rm
\right
60
59
\sf
\settowidth
\setlength
\setcounter
Starts a new section. See Document Structure60 .
\section
\scriptsize
\sc
The short form of \savebox with no optional arguments.
62
61
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/LaTeX%2FFormatting%23Slash%
20marks
\smallskip
\small
See slash marks61
\slash
\sl
In the Letter class, specifies a signature for later insertion by \closing.
\signature
\shortstack
64
63
\subparagraph
Takes two arguments and stacks the first on top of the second.
\stackrel
Creates a root64 (default square, but magnitude can be given as an optional

parameter).
\sqrt
force ordinary space
\space
Strikes out text. Requires ulem package. See Formatting63 .
\sout
65
66
67

Inserts a table of contents (based on section headings) at the point where the
command appears.
\tableofcontents
45.19. T
Starts a new sub-subsection. See Document Structure67 .
\subsubsection
Starts a new subsection. See Document Structure66 .
\subsection
Starts a new subparagraph. See Document Structure65 .
70
69
68
20strings
\textit{}
Creates colored text. See Entering colored text70 .
\textcolor{}{}
Sets bold font style. See Formatting69 .
\textbf{}
Prints TeX logo. See Formatting68 .
\TeX
In the letter class, specifies the sender's telephone number.
\telephone
74
73
72
71
Sets roman font family. See Formatting74 .
\textrm{}
Sets normal font. See Formatting73 .
\textnormal{}
Sets medium weight of a font. See Formatting72 .
\textmd{}
Sets italic font style. See Formatting71 .
77
76
75
\texttt{}
Sets slanted font style. See Formatting77 .
\textsl{}
Sets sans serif font family. See Formatting76 .
\textsf{}
Sets font style to small caps. See Formatting75 .
\textsc{}
79
78
\tiny
\thispagestyle
\thanks
\textheight
\textwidth
Sets upright shape of a font. See Formatting79 .
\textup{}
Sets typewriter font family. See Formatting78 .
81
80
20strings
\typein
\typeout
\twocolumn
\tt
Writes current day. See Formatting81 .
\today
\title
82
\uwave
\usecounter
\usebox
\unitlength
\underline
\underbrace
Underlines text. Requires ulem package. See Formatting82 .
\uline
45.20. U
84
83
\vector
Creates vertical dots. See Mathematics84 .
\vdots
Encloses a paragraph's text to prevent it from running over a page break
\vbox{text}
\value
45.21. V
Creates wavy underline. Requires ulem package. See Formatting83 .
85
23Verbatim%20Text
This page uses material from Dr. Sheldon Greens Hypertext Help with LaTeX.
\vspace
\vphantom
\vline
\vfill
Creates inline verbatim text. See Formatting85 .
\verb
This is a gentle introduction to using some of the bibliography functionality

available to LaTeX users beyond the BibTeX basics. This introduction won't
be discussing how to create new styles or packages but rather how to use
some existing ones. It is worth noting that Harvard, for example, is a citation
style. It is associated with an alphabetical reference list secondarily ordered
on date, but the only strictly defined element of Harvard style is the citation in
author-date format.
46. More Bibliographies
Using cite.sty and BibTeX makes it very easy to produce some bibliography
styles. But author-date styles - for example the often mentioned, never defined
"Harvard" - are not so easy. It's true that you can download some .bst files
46.2. The limits of BibTeX styles
@article{erdos65,
title = {Some very hard sums},
journal={Difficult Maths Today},
author={Paul Erd\H{o}s and Arend Heyting and Luitzen Egbertus
Brouwer}
year={1930}
pages={30}
}
The database used for my examples contains just the following
46.1. The example data
plainnat
abbrvnat
unsrtnat
which correspond to the three styles available by default in BibTeX where you
have a plain numbered style, an abbreviated numbered style and an unsorted
Natbib is a package created by Patrick Daly as a replacement for the cite.sty

package when author-date citation styles are required. Natbib provides three
associated bibliography styles:
46.3. Natbib
from CTAN that will handle some variants but using them is not always
straightforward. This guide deals with Natbib a supplementary package that
can access .bib files and has sophisticated functionality for producing custom or
default author-year format citations and bibliographies as well as the numerical
styles handled by BibTeX.
\begin{document}
\documentclass[]{article}
\usepackage[round]{natbib}
All Natbib styles require that you load the package in your document preamble.
So, a skeleton LaTeX file with Natbib might look like this:
46.3.1. The Preamble
each of which has a number of variants.
\citep[]{}
and
\citet[]{}
numbered style. Alongside these new styles is an extended set of citation

commands to provide flexible citation formats. These are
Option
round
square
curly
angle
semicolon
colon
Effect
()
[]
{}
<>
separate citations with ;
as semicolon
Options available with Natbib can be specified in the brackets on the \usepackage command. Among them are:
Options
\end{document}
\bibliographystyle{plainnat}
\bibliography{myrefs}
Document body text with citations.
sectionbib
longnamesfirst
compress
sort&compress
Option
comma
authoryear
numbers
super
sort
Effect
separate with commas
author-year citations
numeric citations
superscript citations
multiple citations are ordered as in
bibliography
as sort but number ranges are compressed and hyphenated
number ranges are compressed
and hyphenated but only where the
'natural' sort produces a continuous
range
first citation is full author list and
subsequent citations are abbreviated
allows multiple bibliographies in
the same document
Effect
forces all author names onto one
line
merges a citation with a previous
citation
elides any repeated elements in
merged references
ignore merge
Clearly some of these options require explanation but that will be achieved
via examples below. For now, we just note that they can be passed through
\usepackage[]{} in the preamble of your LaTeX file.
mcite
elide
merge
Option
nonamebreak
\citet{Erdos65}
produces
Erdos et al. (1965)
The \citet command is used for textual citations, that is to say that author
names appear in the text outside of the parenthetical reference to the date of
publication. This command can take options for chapter, page numbers etc.
Here are examples
\citet and \citet*
To cite with Natbib, use the commands \citet or \citep in your document. The
"plain" versions of these commands produced abbreviated lists in the case of
multiple authors but both have * variants which result in full author listings. I
have assumed the use of the round option in these examples.
46.4.1. Basic Citation Commands
46.4. Citation
produces
produces
produces
produces
produces
produces
\citet*{Erdos65}
\citet*[chapter
2]{Erdos65}
\citet*[pp. 1012]{Erdos65}
Here are the \citet* versions
\citet[chapter
2]{Erdos65}
\citet[pp. 1012]{Erdos65}
\citet[see][chap.
2]{Erdos65}
Erdos, Heyting and

Brouwer (1965)
Erdos , Heyting and
Brouwer (1965, chapter 2)
Erdos , Heyting and
Brouwer (1965, pp.
10-12)
Erdos et al. (1965,

chapter 2)
Erdos et al. (1965, pp.
10-12)
Erdos et al. (see 1965,
chap. 2)
produces
Erdos , Heyting and

Brouwer (see 1965,
chap. 2)
\citep{Erdos65}
\citep[chapter
2]{Erdos65}
\citep[pp. 1012]{Erdos65}
produces
produces
produces
(Erdos et al. 1965)

(Erdos et al. 1965,
chapter 2)
(Erdos et al. 1965, pp.
10-12)
The \citep command is used where the author name is to appear inside the
parentheses alongside the date.
\citep and \citep*
\citet*[see][chap.
2]{Erdos65}
produces
produces
produces
produces
produces
\citep*{Erdos65}
\citep*[chapter
2]{Erdos65}
\citep*[pp. 1012]{Erdos65}
\citep*[see][chap.
2]{Erdos65}
Here are the \citep* versions
\citep[see][chap.
2]{Erdos65}
(Erdos, Heyting and

Brouwer 1965)
(Erdos, Heyting and
Brouwer 1965, chapter 2)
(Erdos , Heyting and
Brouwer 1965, pp.
10-12)
(Erdos , Heyting and
Brouwer see 1965,
chap. 2)
(Erdos et al. see 1965,

chap. 2)
which specifies how the data are to be presented. Above the three basic Natbib
styles were mentioned as analogues of the partially homonymous styles in
BibTeX. Let us imagine documents bearing citations as in the section about
citation above1 . Here is, approximately, how these citations would appear in
plainnat.
\bibliographystyle{plainnat}
which LaTeX interprets as an instruction to read a bibliographic database file

(eg myrefs.bib) and insert the relevant data here, and
\bibliography{mybibliographydatabase}
Having dealt with basic varieties of citation, we turn to the creation of the
bibliography or reference list. Inserting a correct and correctly formatted
bibliography when using Natbib is no different than when using plain BibTeX.
There are two essential commands -
46.4.2. The Reference List
This covers the basic functionality provided by the package Natbib. It may not,
ofcourse, provide what you are looking for. If you don't find what you want
here then you should probably next investigate harvard.sty which provides a
slighly different set of author-date citation functions. Providing a gentle guide
to harvard.sty is my next rainy day project.
46.4.3. What more is there?
Figure 133
1
2
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/LaTeX%2FAbsolute%20Beginners
23Abstracts
Absolute Beginners1
Abstract2
47.1. A
This is an alphabetical index of the book.
47. Index
Accents3
Advanced Topics4
Algorithms5
Arrays6
Authors7
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/LaTeX%2FFormatting%23Accents
babel8
Basics9
47.2. B
14
15
10
11
12
13

http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/LaTeX%2FFormatting%23Font%
beamer package10
Bibliography Management11
BibTeX12
Bold13
Bullets14
Bullet points15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22

Captions16
Collaborative Writing of LaTeX Documents17
Color18
color package19
Columns, see Multi-column Pages20
Cross-referencing21
Customizing LaTeX22
47.3. C
25
26
27
28
24
23
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/LaTeX%2FFormatting%23Dashes%
20and%20Hyphens
23Description
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/LaTeX%2FFormatting%23Accents
Dashes23
description environment24
Diactrical marks25
Document Classes26
Document Structure27
Drawings28
47.4. D
34
33
32
31
29
30

23Ellipsis_.28.E2.80.A6.29
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/LaTeX%2FFormatting%23Dashes_
and_Hyphens
and_Hyphens
23Enumerate
e.g. (exempli gratia)29

Ellipsis30
em-dash31
en-dash32
enumerate33
Errors and Warnings34
47.5. E
36
37
38
39
40
35
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/LaTeX%2FFormatting%23Euro_.E2.
82.AC_currency_symbol
Figures37
Floats38
Fonts39
Footer, Page40
47.6. F
Euro currency symbol35

Export To Other Formats36
42
43
44
45
46
41
23Footnotes
General Guidelines43
Graphics
Creating44
Embedding45
Importing46
47.7. G
Footnotes41
Formatting42
47
48
49
50
51
52

and_Hyphens
Header, Page48
HTML output49
Hyperlinks50
hyperref package51
hyphen52
47.8. H
graphicx package47
54
55
56
57
58
53
23Hyphenation
i.e. (id est)54

Images55
Importing Graphics56
Indexing57
Internationalization58
47.9. I
Hyphenation53
61
62
63
64
59
60
Chapter 1 on page 5
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/LaTeX%2FFormatting%23Font_
Styles_and_size
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/LaTeX%2FFormatting%23Itemize
Labels62
Letters63
Links64
47.10. L
Introduction59
Italics60
itemize61
70
69
65
66
67
68

http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/LaTeX%2FFormatting%23Margin%
20Notes
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/LaTeX%2FMathematical%
20Graphics
makeidx package66
\maketitle67
Margin Notes68
Creating Graphics69
Mathematics70
47.11. M
Lists65
71
72
73
74
75
76
77

Packages74
Creating 175 , Creating 276
Page Layout77
47.12. P
Matrices71
Minipage environment example72
Multi-column Pages73
PDF output78
picture79
Pictures80
PNG output81
Presentations82
Pseudocode83
78
79
80
81
82
83
84

http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/LaTeX%2FFormatting%23Quotes
Quotes84
47.13. Q
88
85
86
87

http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/LaTeX%2FFormatting%23Listing%
20Environment
Small Capitals87
Source Code Listings88
47.15. S
References85
RTF output86
47.14. R
Space Between Words89

Spell-checking90
Superscript and subscript: powers and indices91
Superscript and subscript: text mode92
SVG output93
93
94
90
91
92
89
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/LaTeX%2FFormatting%23The%
20Space%20Between%20Words
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/LaTeX%2FFormatting%23Text%
20mode%20superscript%20and%20subscript
Table of contents94
47.16. T
Tables95
Teletype text96
Text Size97
Theorems98
Tips and Tricks99
Title Creation100

97 Chapter 7.3.3 on page 259
98 Chapter 20 on page 667
100 Chapter 7.3.3 on page 259
95
96
101 http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/LaTeX%2FFormatting%
23Typesetting%20URLs
102 http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/LaTeX%2FFormatting%
23Verbatim%20Text
Verbatim Text102
47.18. V
URLs101
47.17. U
103
104
105
106

XeTeX104
XY-pic package105
xy package106
47.20. X
Word Counting103
47.19. W
1
2
3
4
User
3mta31
ABCD2
ATC23
Aadornellesf4
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:3mta3
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:ABCD
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:ATC2
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:
Aadornellesf
Edits
140
2
1
1
48. Contributors
11
12
7
8
9
10
5
6
Abonnema5
Adam majewski6
Adamcrume7
Adouglass8
Adrignola9
Akim Demaille10
Alejo208311
AllenZh12
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Abonnema
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Adam_
majewski
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Adamcrume
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Adouglass
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Adrignola
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Akim_
Demaille
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Alejo2083
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:AllenZh
2
1
1
1
47
1
122
2
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Alzahrawi13
Amamory14
Ambrevar15
Anarchyboy16
Andyr17
Ans18
Arided19
Arnehe20
Arthurvogel21
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Alzahrawi
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Amamory
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Ambrevar
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Anarchyboy
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Andyr
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Ans
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Arided
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Arnehe
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Arthurvogel
9
1
59
2
6
5
2
25
1
29
26
27
28
25
22
23
24
Asmeurer22
Astrophizz23
Atallcostsky24
Atiq ur Rehman25
Atulya198826
Avila.gas27
Bajrangkhichi9628
Bakken29
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Asmeurer
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Astrophizz
Atallcostsky
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Atiq_ur_
Rehman
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Atulya1988
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Avila.gas
Bajrangkhichi96
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Bakken
1
1
1
1
1
13
1
1
36
37
35
30
31
32
33
34
Bamgooly30
Barakafrit31
Basenga32
Bcmpinc33
Belteshazzar34
Benjaminevans8235
Benregn36
Bhanuvrat37
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Bamgooly
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Barakafrit
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Basenga
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Bcmpinc
Belteshazzar
Benjaminevans82
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Benregn
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Bhanuvrat
1
1
4
1
1
2
1
1
44
45
43
42
38
39
40
41
BiT38
Bianbum39
Bilbo150740
Billy the Goat II41
Blacktrumpeter42
Blaisorblade43
Bonuama44
Borgg45
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:BiT
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Bianbum
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Bilbo1507
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Billy_the_
Goat_II
Blacktrumpeter
Blaisorblade
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Bonuama
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Borgg
26
1
2
1
1
1
3
1
51
52
53
50
48
49
46
47
Bpsullivan46
Braindrain000047
Brammers48
Brendanarnold49
BrettMontgomery50
Brevity51
Bsander52
Bumbulski53
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Bpsullivan
Braindrain0000
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Brammers
Brendanarnold
BrettMontgomery
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Brevity
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Bsander
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Bumbulski
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
8
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
Byassine5254
Bytecrook55
C3l56
CD-Stevens57
Caesura58
Calimo59
Cameronc60
Canageek61
CarsracBot62
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Byassine52
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Bytecrook
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:C3l
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:CD-Stevens
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Caesura
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Calimo
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Cameronc
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Canageek
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:CarsracBot
1
1
1
7
1
1
3
1
2
66
67
68
69
70
63
64
65
Cdecoro63
Cengique64
Cerniagigante65
Cfailde66
Chafe6667
Chazz68
Chisophugis69
ChrisHodgesUK70
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Cdecoro
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Cengique
Cerniagigante
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Cfailde
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Chafe66
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Chazz
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Chisophugis
ChrisHodgesUK
2
3
5
1
1
1
2
61
74
75
76
77
78
72
73
71
ChristianGruen71
Chuaprap72
Chuckhoffmann73
Clebell74
Codairem75
Collinpark76
Comput2h77
ConditionalZenith78
ChristianGruen
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Chuaprap
Chuckhoffmann
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Clebell
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Codairem
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Collinpark
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Comput2h
ConditionalZenith
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
5
85
86
81
82
83
84
79
80
Conighion79
Conrad.Irwin80
Courcelles81
Crasic82
Crasshopper83
CrazyTerabyte84
Crissov85
Ccero86
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Conighion
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Conrad.
Irwin
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Courcelles
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Crasic
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Crasshopper
CrazyTerabyte
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Crissov
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:C%C3%ADcero
1
2
1
1
2
2
2
2
91
92
93
90
89
88
87
Dan Polansky87
Danielstrong5288
David.s.hollman89
DavidMcKenzie90
Debejyo91
Dendik92
Derbeth93
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Dan_
Polansky
Danielstrong52
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:David.s.
hollman
DavidMcKenzie
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Debejyo
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Dendik
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Derbeth
71
1
1
6
1
1
103
Derwaldrandfoerster94
Dilaudid95
Dirk Hnniger96
Dlituiev97
Dmb98
DmitriyZotikov99
Dncarley100
Dporter101
Derwaldrandfoerster
95 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Dilaudid
96 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Dirk_H%C3%
BCnniger
97 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Dlituiev
98 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Dmb
99 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:
DmitriyZotikov
100 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Dncarley
101 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Dporter
94
1
6
66
1
3
1
3
1
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
Dr0pi102
Dreaven3103
Drevicko104
Drewbie105
Dubbaluga106
E.lewis1107
Echeban108
Ediahist109
Edudobay110
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Dr0pi
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Dreaven3
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Drevicko
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Drewbie
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Dubbaluga
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:E.lewis1
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Echeban
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Ediahist
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Edudobay
1
1
4
3
1
3
1
6
1
Elliptic1111
Elwikipedista112
Emreg00113
Erylaos114
Eudoxos115
EvanKroske116
Everlong117
Eyliu118
Ffangs119
111 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Elliptic1
Elwikipedista
113 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Emreg00
114 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Erylaos
115 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Eudoxos
116 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:EvanKroske
117 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Everlong
118 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Eyliu
119 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Ffangs
3
1
1
16
1
2
1
5
3
Filip Dominec120
Fishix121
Fishpi122
Flal123
FlashSheridan124
Fmccown125
Fongs126
Franzl aus tirol127
120 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Filip_
Dominec
121 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Fishix
122 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Fishpi
123 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Flal
FlashSheridan
125 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Fmccown
126 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Fongs
127 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Franzl_aus_
tirol
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
4
Frap128
Fredmaranhao129
Fsart130
Ftravers131
GPHemsley132
Gallen01133
Garoth134
GavinMcGimpsey135
128 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Frap
Fredmaranhao
130 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Fsart
131 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Ftravers
132 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:GPHemsley
133 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Gallen01
134 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Garoth
GavinMcGimpsey
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
Geetha nitc136
Gelbukh137
Geminatea138
Germanzs139
Ghoti140
Gkc141
Glad142
Glosser.ca143
Gmh04144
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Geetha_nitc
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Gelbukh
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Geminatea
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Germanzs
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Ghoti
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Gkc
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Glad
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Glosser.ca
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Gmh04
3
2
1
1
2
4
1
3
1
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
Gms145
Go.pbam.146
Goodgerster147
Graemeg148
Greenbreen149
Grenouille150
Grj23151
Gronau152
Guyrobbie153
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Gms
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Go.pbam.
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Goodgerster
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Graemeg
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Greenbreen
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Grenouille
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Grj23
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Gronau
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Guyrobbie
7
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
Gwpl154
Gyro Copter155
Gtz156
HJMills157
Hagindaz158
Hankjones159
Hankwang160
Hannes Rst161
Hansfn162
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Gwpl
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Gyro_Copter
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:G%C3%B6tz
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:HJMills
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Hagindaz
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Hankjones
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Hankwang
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Hannes_R%
C3%B6st
162 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Hansfn
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
1
1
1
2
1
7
1
1
2
Harrikoo163
Harrywt164
Helder.wiki165
Helptry166
HenrikMidtiby167
Henry Tallboys168
Henrybissonnette169
Herbythyme170
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Harrikoo
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Harrywt
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Helder.wiki
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Helptry
HenrikMidtiby
168 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Henry_
Tallboys
Henrybissonnette
170 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Herbythyme
163
164
165
166
167
3
1
1
4
3
4
5
1
Hermine potter171
Hippasus172
Hjsb173
Hokiehead174
Hosszuka175
Hroobjartr176
ILubeMyCucumbers20177
Iamunknown178
171 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Hermine_
potter
172 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Hippasus
173 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Hjsb
174 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Hokiehead
175 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Hosszuka
176 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Hroobjartr
ILubeMyCucumbers20
178 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Iamunknown
2
1
1
1
6
3
1
1
186
185
183
184
179
180
181
182
Icc97179
Igjimh180
Immae181
Inductiveload182
Infenwe183
Insaneinside184
InverseHypercube185
IrfanAli186
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Icc97
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Igjimh
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Immae
Inductiveload
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Infenwe
Insaneinside
InverseHypercube
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:IrfanAli
1
26
1
1
1
2
5
1
Ish ishwar187
Itai188
JECompton189
JV190
Jacho191
JackPotte192
Jacobrothstein193
Jamoroch194
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Ish_ishwar
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Itai
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:JECompton
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:JV
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Jacho
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:JackPotte
Jacobrothstein
194 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Jamoroch
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
23
1
4
5
6
1
2
2
Jan Winnicki195
Janltx196
Janskalicky197
Jason barrington198
Jasu199
Javalenok200
Jayk201
Je ne dtiens pas la vrit universelle202
195 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Jan_
Winnicki
196 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Janltx
197 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Janskalicky
198 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Jason_
barrington
199 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Jasu
200 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Javalenok
201 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Jayk
202 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Je_ne_d%C3%
A9tiens_pas_la_v%C3%A9rit%C3%A9_universelle
1
9
1
2
1
1
1
1
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
JenVan203
Jer789204
Jevon205
Jflycn206
Jguk207
Jimbotyson208
Jld209
Jlrn210
Jmcdon10211
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:JenVan
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Jer789
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Jevon
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Jflycn
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Jguk
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Jimbotyson
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Jld
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Jlrn
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Jmcdon10
2
1
3
5
3
51
1
1
1
Joaospam212
Jodi.a.schneider213
Joe Schmedley214
Joeyboi215
John1923216
Jomegat217
Jonathan Webley218
Jotomicron219
212 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Joaospam
213 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Jodi.a.
schneider
214 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Joe_
Schmedley
215 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Joeyboi
216 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:John1923
217 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Jomegat
218 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Jonathan_
Webley
219 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Jotomicron
1
1
2
1
1
12
30
1
Jraregris220
Jtwdog221
Juliabackhausen222
Juliusross223
Justin W Smith224
Jwchong225
Karcih226
Karper227
220 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Jraregris
221 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Jtwdog
Juliabackhausen
223 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Juliusross
224 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Justin_W_
Smith
225 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Jwchong
226 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Karcih
227 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Karper
1
28
2
5
1
1
2
2
Karthicknainar228
Kazkaskazkasako229
Kcho230
Kejia231
Kenyon232
Keplerspeed233
Kernigh234
Kevang235
Karthicknainar
Kazkaskazkasako
230 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Kcho
231 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Kejia
232 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Kenyon
233 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Keplerspeed
234 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Kernigh
235 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Kevang
1
7
1
4
1
7
1
2
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
Kevinfiesta236
KlausFoehl237
Klusinyan238
Konteki239
Kovianyo240
Kpym241
Kri242
Krischik243
Krishnavedala244
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Kevinfiesta
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:KlausFoehl
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Klusinyan
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Konteki
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Kovianyo
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Kpym
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Kri
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Krischik
Krishnavedala
1
1
1
1
14
1
14
1
1
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
Krisrose245
Kroolik246
Krst247
Kubieziel248
Kwetal249
LQST250
LR251
LaTeX252
Latexing253
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Krisrose
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Kroolik
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Krst
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Kubieziel
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Kwetal
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:LQST
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:LR
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:LaTeX
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Latexing
3
2
4
1
2
1
8
1
2
261
260
258
259
254
255
256
257
Lavaka254
Lbailey45255
Leyo256
LinuxChristian257
Listdata258
Literaturgenerator259
Lnkbuildingservices4u260
Louabill261
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Lavaka
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Lbailey45
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Leyo
LinuxChristian
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Listdata
Literaturgenerator
Lnkbuildingservices4u
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Louabill
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
Louisix262
Lucasreddinger263
MER-C264
MaBoehm265
Maartenweyn266
Madskaddie267
MagnusPI268
MarSraM269
Maratonda270
262 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Louisix
Lucasreddinger
264 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:MER-C
265 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:MaBoehm
266 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Maartenweyn
267 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Madskaddie
268 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:MagnusPI
269 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:MarSraM
270 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Maratonda
3
3
1
1
3
1
2
1
1
Marozols271
Marra272
Martin scharrer273
Martin von Wittich274
MartinSpacek275
Martinkunev276
Masterpiga277
271 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Marozols
272 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Marra
273 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Martin_
scharrer
274 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Martin_von_
Wittich
MartinSpacek
276 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Martinkunev
277 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Masterpiga
4
2
1
1
6
1
2
Matej.korvas278
Mathieu Perrin279
Matthias M.280
Mckay281
Mcld282
Mecanismo283
Merciadriluca284
Mhue285
278 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Matej.
korvas
279 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Mathieu_
Perrin
280 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Matthias_M.
281 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Mckay
282 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Mcld
283 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Mecanismo
Merciadriluca
285 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Mhue
1
2
1
1
19
1
1
4
MichaelBueker286
Mietchen287
Mijikenda288
Mike.lifeguard289
Mikhail Ryazanov290
Mimo291
MoMaT292
MichaelBueker
287 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Mietchen
288 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Mijikenda
289 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Mike.
lifeguard
290 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Mikhail_
Ryazanov
291 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Mimo
292 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:MoMaT
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
Modest Genius293
Morelight294
Mouselb295
Mrt doulaty296
Ms2ger297
Mwtoews298
Naught101299
NavarroJ300
Nbrouard301
293 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Modest_
Genius
294 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Morelight
295 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Mouselb
296 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Mrt_doulaty
297 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Ms2ger
298 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Mwtoews
299 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Naught101
300 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:NavarroJ
301 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Nbrouard
1
3
1
1
1
84
2
1
3
Neet302
Nemoniac303
Nemti304
Neoptolemus305
Neoriddle306
Netheril96307
Niel.Bowerman308
Nigels309
Nixphoeni310
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Neet
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Nemoniac
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Nemti
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Neoptolemus
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Neoriddle
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Netheril96
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Niel.
Bowerman
309 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Nigels
310 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Nixphoeni
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
21
1
1
2
5
1
1
1
3
Nkour311
Norbert.beckers312
Nothing1212313
NqpZ314
Nsuwan315
Nux316
Obelyaev317
Oderbolz318
Ojan319
311 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Nkour
312 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Norbert.
beckers
313 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Nothing1212
314 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:NqpZ
315 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Nsuwan
316 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Nux
317 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Obelyaev
318 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Oderbolz
319 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Ojan
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
1
Olesh320
Olivier.descout321
Orderud322
Otec Stochastik323
PAC324
PAC2325
Pamputt326
Pandora85327
320 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Olesh
321 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Olivier.
descout
322 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Orderud
323 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Otec_
Stochastik
324 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:PAC
325 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:PAC2
326 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Pamputt
327 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Pandora85
2
1
22
1
29
25
1
1
Panic2k4328
PatrickDevlin21329
PatrickGalyon330
Paxinum331
Pdelong332
PeterAllen333
Petter Strandmark334
PhilJohnG335
328 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Panic2k4
PatrickDevlin21
PatrickGalyon
331 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Paxinum
332 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Pdelong
333 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:PeterAllen
334 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Petter_
Strandmark
335 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:PhilJohnG
3
3
1
4
2
1
2
2
Pi zero336
Piksi337
Pmillerrhodes338
Pmlineditor339
Polytropos Technikos340
Ppadmapriya341
Prawojazdy342
Prispartlow343
336 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Pi_zero
337 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Piksi
Pmillerrhodes
339 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Pmlineditor
340 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Polytropos_
Technikos
341 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Ppadmapriya
342 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Prawojazdy
343 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Prispartlow
82
11
13
1
1
1
1
1
Pstar344
PsyberS345
QUBot346
Qeny347
QuantumEleven348
Quaristice349
QuiteUnusual350
Qwertyus351
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Pstar
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:PsyberS
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:QUBot
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Qeny
QuantumEleven
349 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Quaristice
QuiteUnusual
351 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Qwertyus
344
345
346
347
348
7
1
2
1
1
1
8
3
Rafaelgr352
Rafopar353
Rajkiran g354
Ramac355
Raphael Ackermann356
Raylu357
RaymondSutanto358
Rbonvall359
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Rafaelgr
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Rafopar
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Rajkiran_g
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Ramac
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Raphael_
Ackermann
357 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Raylu
RaymondSutanto
359 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Rbonvall
352
353
354
355
356
1
1
3
3
1
1
1
3
Rdg nz360
RealSebix361
Recent Runes362
Redirect fixer363
Rehoot364
Ricordisamoa365
Risk366
Rnddim367
360 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Rdg_nz
361 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:RealSebix
362 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Recent_
Runes
363 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Redirect_
fixer
364 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Rehoot
Ricordisamoa
366 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Risk
367 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Rnddim
1
17
8
1
4
1
1
1
Roarbakk368
Robbiemorrison369
Robert Borkowski370
Robert Horning371
Robin372
Rogal373
Rogerbrent374
368 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Roarbakk
Robbiemorrison
370 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Robert_
Borkowski
371 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Robert_
Horning
372 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Robin
373 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Rogal
374 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Rogerbrent
1
5
1
4
3
1
1
Rondenaranja375
Rossdub376
Rror377
Sabalka378
SamuelLB379
Sanderd17380
Sandman10000381
Sandrobt382
Rondenaranja
376 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Rossdub
377 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Rror
378 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Sabalka
379 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:SamuelLB
380 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Sanderd17
Sandman10000
382 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Sandrobt
4
2
1
4
35
4
1
1
388
389
390
391
383
384
385
386
387
Sargas383
Sbeyer384
Schaber385
SciYann386
Scientific29387
Scorwin388
Scruss389
Semperos390
Sgenier391
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Sargas
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Sbeyer
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Schaber
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:SciYann
Scientific29
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Scorwin
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Scruss
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Semperos
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Sgenier
14
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
Shahbaz Youssefi392
Silca678393
Silverpie394
Simeon395
Simonjtyler396
SiriusB397
Sjlegg398
Skarakoleva399
Skou400
392 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Shahbaz_
Youssefi
393 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Silca678
394 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Silverpie
395 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Simeon
396 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Simonjtyler
397 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:SiriusB
398 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Sjlegg
399 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Skarakoleva
400 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Skou
1
4
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
Smobbl Bobbl401
Snaxe920402
Snoopy67403
Spag85404
Spelemann405
Spirosdenaxas406
Spook407
Steindani408
401 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Smobbl_
Bobbl
402 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Snaxe920
403 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Snoopy67
404 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Spag85
405 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Spelemann
Spirosdenaxas
407 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Spook
408 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Steindani
1
5
1
4
11
4
1
1
Stephan Schneider409
SteveM82410
StevenJohnston411
Stoettner412
Stuples413
Svick414
Swift415
TFTD416
409 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Stephan_
Schneider
410 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:SteveM82
StevenJohnston
412 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Stoettner
413 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Stuples
414 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Svick
415 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Swift
416 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:TFTD
3
1
1
7
1
1
1
1
TWiStErRob417
Tauriel-1418
Tazquebec419
Tdomhan420
Teles421
Tgwizard422
Thefrankinator423
Thenub314424
Thietkeweb425
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:TWiStErRob
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Tauriel-1
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Tazquebec
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Tdomhan
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Teles
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Tgwizard
Thefrankinator
424 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Thenub314
425 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Thietkeweb
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
1
1
3
1
1
1
5
21
2
TinyTimZamboni426
ToematoeAdmn427
Tom Morris428
Tom.marcik429
Tomato86430
Tomxlawson431
TomyDuby432
Topodelapradera433
TinyTimZamboni
ToematoeAdmn
428 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Tom_Morris
429 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Tom.marcik
430 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Tomato86
431 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Tomxlawson
432 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:TomyDuby
Topodelapradera
2
1
1
3
124
6
11
2
TorfusPolymorphus434
Tosha435
Towsonu2003436
Tpr437
Tualha438
Tuetschek439
Tuka440
Tully441
Tweenk442
TorfusPolymorphus
435 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Tosha
436 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Towsonu2003
437 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Tpr
438 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Tualha
439 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Tuetschek
440 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Tuka
441 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Tully
442 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Tweenk
5
14
2
1
1
1
1
8
1
Uluboz443
Unbitwise444
Unco445
Urhixidur446
Vadik wiki447
Vaffelkake448
Velociostrich449
Vesal450
Waldir451
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Uluboz
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Unbitwise
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Unco
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Urhixidur
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Vadik_wiki
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Vaffelkake
Velociostrich
450 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Vesal
451 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Waldir
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
1
1
1
3
6
3
3
10
70
Wdcf452
Webinn453
Wenzeslaus454
White gecko455
Whiteknight456
Wikieditoroftoday457
Willy james458
Winfree459
Winniehell460
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Wdcf
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Webinn
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Wenzeslaus
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:White_gecko
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Whiteknight
Wikieditoroftoday
458 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Willy_james
459 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Winfree
460 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Winniehell
452
453
454
455
456
457
4
1
1
1
1
9
1
1
1
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
Withinfocus461
Wkdurfee462
Wmheric463
Wn202464
Writalnaie465
Wxm29466
Wysinwygaa467
Xania468
Xeracles469
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Withinfocus
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Wkdurfee
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Wmheric
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Wn202
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Writalnaie
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Wxm29
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Wysinwygaa
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Xania
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Xeracles
28
1
1
1
2
2
1
5
1
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
Xnn470
Xonqnopp471
Yanuzz472
Yez473
Ynhockey474
Ypey475
Ysnikraz476
ZeroOne477
Zrisher478
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Xnn
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Xonqnopp
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Yanuzz
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Yez
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Ynhockey
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Ypey
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Ysnikraz
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:ZeroOne
http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Zrisher
1
12
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
485
Zvika479
Zwiebelleder480
Zxx117481
Zyqqh482
Zzo38483
var Arnfjr Bjarmason484
479 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Zvika
Zwiebelleder
481 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Zxx117
482 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Zyqqh
483 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:Zzo38
484 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:%C3%86var_
Arnfj%C3%B6r%C3%B0_Bjarmason
485 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:%D0%9F%D0%
B8%D0%BA%D0%B0_%D0%9F%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0
3
1
1
2
1
1
1
486
486 http://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php?title=User:%D8%A7%D9%
85%DB%8C%D8%B1_%D8%A7%D8%B9%D9%88%D8%A7%D9%86%DB%8C
cc-by-sa-2.0: Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike 2.0 License.

http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/2.0/


GFDL: Gnu Free Documentation License. http://www.gnu.org/

licenses/fdl.html
List of Figures
http://www.gnu.org/
LGPL: GNU Lesser General Public License. http://www.gnu.

org/licenses/lgpl.html
GPL: GNU General Public License.

licenses/gpl-2.0.txt
cc-by-3.0: Creative Commons Attribution 3.0 License. http://

creativecommons.org/licenses/by/3.0/deed.en



creativecommons.org/licenses/by/2.0/

EPL: Eclipse Public License. http://www.eclipse.org/org/

documents/epl-v10.php
CFR: Copyright free use.
LFK: Lizenz Freie Kunst. http://artlibre.org/licence/

lal/de
EURO: This is the common (reverse) face of a euro coin. The copyright
on the design of the common face of the euro coins belongs to the
European Commission. Authorised is reproduction in a format without
relief (drawings, paintings, films) provided they are not detrimental to
the image of the euro.
ATTR: The copyright holder of this file allows anyone to use it for
any purpose, provided that the copyright holder is properly attributed.
Redistribution, derivative work, commercial use, and all other use is
permitted.
PD: This image is in the public domain.
Copies of the GPL, the LGPL as well as a GFDL are included in chapter
Licenses487 . Please note that images in the public domain do not require
attribution. You may click on the image numbers in the following table to open
the webpage of the images in your webbrower.
488
489
490
491
492
Dirk Hnniger489
Dirk Hnniger490
Literaturgenerator491
5
6
7
8
GFDL
cc-by-sa3.0
cc-by-sa3.0
cc-by-sa3.0
GFDL
GFDL
PD
cc-by-sa3.0
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User%3ADirk%20H%FCnniger
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User%3ALiteraturgenerator
Mij
Dirk Hnniger492
Alessio Damato
Dirk Hnniger488
1
2
493
494
495
496
497
498
Dirk Hnniger494
Dirk Hnniger495
Dirk Hnniger496
Dirk Hnniger497
Dirk Hnniger498
10
11
12
13
14
cc-by-sa3.0
cc-by-sa3.0
cc-by-sa3.0
cc-by-sa3.0
cc-by-sa3.0
cc-by-sa3.0
Dirk Hnniger493
499
500
501
502
503
504
Dirk Hnniger500
Dirk Hnniger501
Dirk Hnniger502
Dirk Hnniger503
Dirk Hnniger504
16
17
18
19
20
cc-by-sa3.0
cc-by-sa3.0
cc-by-sa3.0
cc-by-sa3.0
cc-by-sa3.0
cc-by-sa3.0
Dirk Hnniger499
15
505
506
507
508
509
510
Dirk Hnniger506
Dirk Hnniger507
Dirk Hnniger508
Dirk Hnniger509
Dirk Hnniger510
22
23
24
25
26
cc-by-sa3.0
cc-by-sa3.0
cc-by-sa3.0
cc-by-sa3.0
cc-by-sa3.0
cc-by-sa3.0
Dirk Hnniger505
21
511
512
513
514
515
516
Dirk Hnniger512
Dirk Hnniger513
Dirk Hnniger514
Dirk Hnniger515
Dirk Hnniger516
28
29
30
31
32
cc-by-sa3.0
cc-by-sa3.0
cc-by-sa3.0
cc-by-sa3.0
cc-by-sa3.0
cc-by-sa3.0
Dirk Hnniger511
27
517
518
519
520
521
522
Dirk Hnniger518
Dirk Hnniger519
Alessio Damato520
Dirk Hnniger521
Dirk Hnniger522
34
35
36
37
38
cc-by-sa3.0
cc-by-sa3.0
cc-by-sa3.0
GFDL
cc-by-sa3.0
cc-by-sa3.0
Dirk Hnniger517
33
Original uploader was Jtwdog523 at

en.wikibooks524
en.wikibooks526
en.wikibooks528
GFDL
GFDL
GFDL
523 http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/%3Awikibooks%3Aen%3AUser%
3AJtwdog
524 http://en.wikibooks.org
3AJtwdog
3AJtwdog
41
40
39

en.wikibooks530
ChrisHodgesUK531
ChrisHodgesUK532
Alessio Damato533
Mwtoews534
User:Mwtoews535
Alessio Damato536
Alessio Damato537
GFDL
GFDL
GFDL
GFDL
GFDL
GFDL
3AJtwdog
531 http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User%3AChrisHodgesUK
532 http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User%3AChrisHodgesUK
533 http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User%3AAlejo2083
534 http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User%3AMwtoews
535 http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User%3AMwtoews
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
42
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
Alessio Damato538
ChrisHodgesUK539
ChrisHodgesUK540
Tomato86541
Alessio Damato542
ChrisHodgesUK543
Winfree544
Tomato86545
Neet546
PD
GFDL
PD
GFDL
GFDL
GFDL
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User%3AChrisHodgesUK
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User%3ATomato86
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User%3AWinfree
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User%3ANeet
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
Neet547
Neet548
Neet549
Neet550
Tomato86551
Tomato86552
Tomato86553
Tomato86554
Inductiveload555
PD
PD
PD
PD
GFDL
GFDL
GFDL
GFDL
PD
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User%3AInductiveload
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
Tomato86556
Tomato86557
Tomato86558
ChrisHodgesUK559
Tomato86560
Alessio Damato561
Alessio Damato562 13:31, 12 January
2007 (UTC)
Alessio Damato563
Nemti564
GFDL
PD
GFDL
GFDL
GFDL
GFDL
GFDL
GFDL
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User%3ANemti
75
76
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
565
566
567
568
569
570
Hankjones569
jeg
Hankjones570
82
83
84
GFDL
GFDL
cc-by-sa3.0
cc-by-sa3.0
GFDL
GPL
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User%3AGkc
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User%20talk%3AGkc
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User%3AHankjones
MyName (Gkc565 (talk566 ))

LaTeX
jeg
Hankjones567
Hankjones568
77
78
79
80
81
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
Philip John Gorinski572

Matej Korvas
Matej.korvas575
Matej.korvas576
Daniele Pighin
Olesh577
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
GFDL
cc-by-sa3.0
PD
PD
cc-by-sa3.0
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User%3APhilJohnG
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User%3AMatej.korvas
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User%3AMatej.korvas
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User%3AOlesh
Hankjones571
85
578
579
580
581
582
583
Hankjones579
ChrisHodgesUK580
Hankjones581
Hankjones582
Hankjones583
95
96
97
98
99
cc-by-sa3.0
cc-by-sa3.0
cc-by-sa3.0
cc-by-sa3.0
cc-by-sa3.0
Hankjones578
94
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
gms
Israel Buitron586
Alessio Damato587
Alessio Damato
Alessio Damato588
Alessio Damato589
Alessio Damato590
Derbeth585
cc-by-sa3.0
GFDL
PD
GFDL
GFDL
GFDL
GFDL
GFDL
GFDL
GFDL
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User%3ADerbeth
http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User%3ANeoriddle
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
100 Hankjones584
3AArnehe
3AArnehe
3AArnehe
110 Original uploader was Arnehe591 at

en.wikibooks592
en.wikibooks594
en.wikibooks596
GFDL
GFDL
GFDL
GFDL
GFDL
GFDL
3AArnehe
3AArnehe
602 http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User%3ATomato86
603 http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User%3AThenub314

en.wikibooks598
en.wikibooks600
115 Alessio Damato601
116
117
118
119 Tomato86602
120 Thenub314603
Andrew Roberts
Tobias Oetiker
Tobias Oetiker
Tobias Oetiker
Jtwdog606 at en.wikibooks607
Tomato86604
Derbeth605
Tobias Oetiker
GFDL
GFDL
GFDL
GFDL
GFDL
GFDL
GFDL
PD
GFDL
GFDL
GFDL
604 http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User%3ATomato86
605 http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User%3ADerbeth
3AJtwdog
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
GFDL
608 http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User%3AJimbotyson
133 Jimbotyson608
Free
Inc.
The GNU General Public License is a free, copyleft license

for software and other kinds of
works.
Everyone is permitted to copy

and distribute verbatim copies
of this license document, but
changing it is not allowed.
Preamble
Copyright 2007
Software Foundation,
<http://fsf.org/>
Version 3, 29 June 2007

The licenses for most software
and other practical works are designed to take away your freedom to share and change the
works. By contrast, the GNU
General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change all versions of a programto make sure
it remains free software for all
its users. We, the Free Software Foundation, use the GNU
General Public License for most
of our software; it applies also
to any other work released this
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General
Public Licenses are designed to
make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free
software (and charge for them
if you wish), that you receive
source code or can get it if you
want it, that you can change the
software or use pieces of it in
new free programs, and that you
know you can do these things.
way by its authors. You can apply it to your programs, too.
For example, if you distribute

copies of such a program,
whether gratis or for a fee, you
must pass on to the recipients
the same freedoms that you
received. You must make sure
To protect your rights, we need

to prevent others from denying
you these rights or asking you
to surrender the rights. Therefore, you have certain responsibilities if you distribute copies
of the software, or if you modify it: responsibilities to respect
the freedom of others.
49.1. GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
49. Licenses
Some devices are designed to

deny users access to install or
run modified versions of the
software inside them, although
the manufacturer can do so.
This is fundamentally incompatible with the aim of protecting
users freedom to change the
software. The systematic pattern of such abuse occurs in the
For the developers and authors

protection, the GPL clearly explains that there is no warranty
for this free software. For both
users and authors sake, the
GPL requires that modified versions be marked as changed,
so that their problems will not
be attributed erroneously to authors of previous versions.
Developers that use the GNU

GPL protect your rights with
two steps: (1) assert copyright
on the software, and (2) offer you this License giving you
legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify it.
that they, too, receive or can get

the source code. And you must
show them these terms so they
know their rights.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS 0.
Definitions.
Finally, every program is threatened constantly by software

patents. States should not allow
patents to restrict development
and use of software on generalpurpose computers, but in those
that do, we wish to avoid the
special danger that patents applied to a free program could
make it effectively proprietary.
To prevent this, the GPL assures
that patents cannot be used to
render the program non-free.
area of products for individuals

to use, which is precisely where
it is most unacceptable. Therefore, we have designed this version of the GPL to prohibit
the practice for those products.
If such problems arise substantially in other domains, we stand
ready to extend this provision to
those domains in future versions
of the GPL, as needed to protect
the freedom of users.
To propagate a work means to

do anything with it that, without
permission, would make you directly or secondarily liable for
A covered work means either

the unmodified Program or a
work based on the Program.
To modify a work means to

copy from or adapt all or part
of the work in a fashion requiring copyright permission, other
than the making of an exact
copy. The resulting work is
called a modified version of
the earlier work or a work
based on the earlier work.
The Program refers to any

copyrightable work licensed under this License. Each licensee
is addressed as you. Licensees and recipients may
be individuals or organizations.
Copyright
also
means
copyright-like laws that apply to other kinds of works,
such as semiconductor masks.
This License refers to version

3 of the GNU General Public License.
An interactive user interface displays Appropriate Legal Notices to the extent that it includes a convenient and prominently visible feature that (1)
displays an appropriate copyright notice, and (2) tells the
user that there is no warranty for
the work (except to the extent
that warranties are provided),
that licensees may convey the
work under this License, and
how to view a copy of this License. If the interface presents
a list of user commands or options, such as a menu, a promi-
To convey a work means any

kind of propagation that enables
other parties to make or receive
copies. Mere interaction with
a user through a computer network, with no transfer of a copy,
is not conveying.
infringement under applicable

copyright law, except executing
it on a computer or modifying a private copy. Propagation includes copying, distribution (with or without modification), making available to the
public, and in some countries
other activities as well.
The System Libraries of an executable work include anything,

other than the work as a whole,
that (a) is included in the normal form of packaging a Major Component, but which is not
part of that Major Component,
and (b) serves only to enable
use of the work with that Major
Component, or to implement a
Standard Interface for which an
implementation is available to
the public in source code form.
A Major Component, in this
context, means a major essen-
A Standard Interface means

an interface that either is an official standard defined by a recognized standards body, or, in the
case of interfaces specified for
a particular programming language, one that is widely used
among developers working in
that language.
The source code for a work

means the preferred form of the
work for making modifications
to it. Object code means any
non-source form of a work.
nent item in the list meets this

criterion. 1. Source Code.
The Corresponding Source

for a work in object code form
means all the source code
needed to generate, install, and
(for an executable work) run the
object code and to modify the
work, including scripts to control those activities. However,
it does not include the works
System Libraries, or generalpurpose tools or generally
available free programs which
are used unmodified in performing those activities but which
are not part of the work. For
example, Corresponding Source
includes interface definition
files associated with source files
for the work, and the source
code for shared libraries and dynamically linked subprograms
that the work is specifically
designed to require, such as by
intimate data communication
or control flow between those
tial component (kernel, window

system, and so on) of the specific operating system (if any)
on which the executable work
runs, or a compiler used to produce the work, or an object code
interpreter used to run it.
You may make, run and propagate covered works that you do
not convey, without conditions
All rights granted under this License are granted for the term
of copyright on the Program,
and are irrevocable provided the
stated conditions are met. This
License explicitly affirms your
unlimited permission to run the
unmodified Program. The output from running a covered
work is covered by this License
only if the output, given its
content, constitutes a covered
work. This License acknowledges your rights of fair use or
other equivalent, as provided by
copyright law.
The Corresponding Source for a

work in source code form is that
same work. 2. Basic Permissions.
The Corresponding Source

need not include anything that
users can regenerate automatically from other parts of the
Corresponding Source.
subprograms and other parts of

the work.
No covered work shall be

deemed part of an effective technological measure under any applicable law fulfilling obliga-
Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely

under the conditions stated below. Sublicensing is not allowed; section 10 makes it
unnecessary. 3. Protecting
Users Legal Rights From AntiCircumvention Law.
so long as your license otherwise remains in force. You may

convey covered works to others
for the sole purpose of having
them make modifications exclusively for you, or provide you
with facilities for running those
works, provided that you comply with the terms of this License in conveying all material
for which you do not control
copyright. Those thus making
or running the covered works
for you must do so exclusively
on your behalf, under your direction and control, on terms
that prohibit them from making
any copies of your copyrighted
material outside their relationship with you.
You may convey verbatim

copies of the Programs source
code as you receive it, in any
medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately
publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice; keep
intact all notices stating that this
License and any non-permissive
terms added in accord with sec-
When you convey a covered

work, you waive any legal
power to forbid circumvention
of technological measures to the
extent such circumvention is effected by exercising rights under this License with respect to
the covered work, and you disclaim any intention to limit operation or modification of the
work as a means of enforcing,
against the works users, your or
third parties legal rights to forbid circumvention of technological measures. 4. Conveying
Verbatim Copies.
tions under article 11 of the

WIPO copyright treaty adopted
on 20 December 1996, or similar laws prohibiting or restricting circumvention of such measures.
* a) The work must carry prominent notices stating that you

modified it, and giving a relevant date. * b) The work must
carry prominent notices stating
that it is released under this License and any conditions added
under section 7. This requirement modifies the requirement
in section 4 to keep intact all
notices. * c) You must license
the entire work, as a whole, under this License to anyone who
You may convey a work based

on the Program, or the modifications to produce it from the Program, in the form of source code
under the terms of section 4, provided that you also meet all of
these conditions:
You may charge any price or no

price for each copy that you convey, and you may offer support
or warranty protection for a fee.
5. Conveying Modified Source
Versions.
tion 7 apply to the code; keep

intact all notices of the absence
of any warranty; and give all
recipients a copy of this License
along with the Program.
A compilation of a covered
work with other separate and independent works, which are not
by their nature extensions of the
covered work, and which are
not combined with it such as to
form a larger program, in or on
a volume of a storage or distribution medium, is called an aggregate if the compilation and
its resulting copyright are not
used to limit the access or legal rights of the compilations
users beyond what the individ-
comes into possession of a copy.

This License will therefore apply, along with any applicable
section 7 additional terms, to
the whole of the work, and all
its parts, regardless of how they
are packaged. This License
gives no permission to license
the work in any other way, but
it does not invalidate such permission if you have separately
received it. * d) If the work has
interactive user interfaces, each
must display Appropriate Legal
Notices; however, if the Program has interactive interfaces
that do not display Appropriate
Legal Notices, your work need
not make them do so.
* a) Convey the object code

in, or embodied in, a physical
product (including a physical
distribution medium), accompanied by the Corresponding
Source fixed on a durable physical medium customarily used
for software interchange. * b)
Convey the object code in, or
embodied in, a physical product (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied
by a written offer, valid for at
least three years and valid for as
long as you offer spare parts or
customer support for that product model, to give anyone who
possesses the object code either
You may convey a covered

work in object code form under the terms of sections 4 and
5, provided that you also convey the machine-readable Corresponding Source under the
terms of this License, in one of
these ways:
ual works permit. Inclusion of

a covered work in an aggregate
does not cause this License to
apply to the other parts of the
aggregate. 6. Conveying NonSource Forms.
(1) a copy of the Corresponding Source for all the software

in the product that is covered by
this License, on a durable physical medium customarily used
for software interchange, for a
price no more than your reasonable cost of physically performing this conveying of source,
or (2) access to copy the Corresponding Source from a network server at no charge. * c)
Convey individual copies of the
object code with a copy of the
written offer to provide the Corresponding Source. This alternative is allowed only occasionally
and noncommercially, and only
if you received the object code
with such an offer, in accord
with subsection 6b. * d) Convey the object code by offering
access from a designated place
(gratis or for a charge), and offer equivalent access to the Corresponding Source in the same
way through the same place at
no further charge. You need
not require recipients to copy
the Corresponding Source along
with the object code. If the place
to copy the object code is a
network server, the Corresponding Source may be on a differA User Product is either (1)
a consumer product, which
means any tangible personal
property which is normally used
for personal, family, or household purposes, or (2) anything
designed or sold for incorpora-
A separable portion of the object code, whose source code is

excluded from the Corresponding Source as a System Library,
need not be included in conveying the object code work.
ent server (operated by you or a

third party) that supports equivalent copying facilities, provided
you maintain clear directions
next to the object code saying
where to find the Corresponding Source. Regardless of what
server hosts the Corresponding
Source, you remain obligated
to ensure that it is available
for as long as needed to satisfy
these requirements. * e) Convey the object code using peerto-peer transmission, provided
you inform other peers where
the object code and Corresponding Source of the work are being
offered to the general public at
no charge under subsection 6d.
Installation Information for a

User Product means any methods, procedures, authorization
keys, or other information required to install and execute
modified versions of a covered
work in that User Product from
a modified version of its Corresponding Source. The information must suffice to ensure
that the continued functioning
of the modified object code is
in no case prevented or inter-
tion into a dwelling. In determining whether a product is

a consumer product, doubtful
cases shall be resolved in favor
of coverage. For a particular
product received by a particular user, normally used refers
to a typical or common use of
that class of product, regardless
of the status of the particular
user or of the way in which the
particular user actually uses, or
expects or is expected to use,
the product. A product is a
consumer product regardless of
whether the product has substantial commercial, industrial or
non-consumer uses, unless such
uses represent the only significant mode of use of the product.
The requirement to provide Installation Information does not

include a requirement to continue to provide support service,
warranty, or updates for a work
that has been modified or installed by the recipient, or for
the User Product in which it has
been modified or installed. Ac-
If you convey an object code

work under this section in, or
with, or specifically for use in,
a User Product, and the conveying occurs as part of a transaction in which the right of possession and use of the User Product is transferred to the recipient
in perpetuity or for a fixed term
(regardless of how the transaction is characterized), the Corresponding Source conveyed under this section must be accompanied by the Installation Information. But this requirement
does not apply if neither you nor
any third party retains the ability
to install modified object code
on the User Product (for example, the work has been installed
in ROM).
fered with solely because modification has been made.
Additional permissions are

terms that supplement the terms
of this License by making
exceptions from one or more
of its conditions. Additional
permissions that are applicable
to the entire Program shall be
treated as though they were
included in this License, to the
extent that they are valid under
applicable law. If additional
permissions apply only to part
of the Program, that part may
be used separately under those
Corresponding Source conveyed, and Installation Information provided, in accord with

this section must be in a format
that is publicly documented
(and with an implementation
available to the public in source
code form), and must require
no special password or key for
unpacking, reading or copying.
7. Additional Terms.
cess to a network may be denied

when the modification itself materially and adversely affects the
operation of the network or violates the rules and protocols for
communication across the network.
* a) Disclaiming warranty or
limiting liability differently
from the terms of sections 15
and 16 of this License; or * b)
Requiring preservation of specified reasonable legal notices
Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, for material you add to a covered work,
you may (if authorized by the
copyright holders of that material) supplement the terms of
this License with terms:
When you convey a copy of a

covered work, you may at your
option remove any additional
permissions from that copy, or
from any part of it. (Additional permissions may be written to require their own removal
in certain cases when you modify the work.) You may place
additional permissions on material, added by you to a covered
work, for which you have or can
give appropriate copyright permission.
permissions, but the entire

Program remains governed by
this License without regard to
the additional permissions.
All other non-permissive additional terms are considered

further restrictions within the
meaning of section 10. If the
Program as you received it, or
any part of it, contains a notice
stating that it is governed by this
or author attributions in that

material or in the Appropriate
Legal Notices displayed by
works containing it; or * c)
Prohibiting misrepresentation
of the origin of that material, or
requiring that modified versions
of such material be marked in
reasonable ways as different
from the original version; or *
d) Limiting the use for publicity
purposes of names of licensors
or authors of the material; or
* e) Declining to grant rights
under trademark law for use of
some trade names, trademarks,
or service marks; or * f) Requiring indemnification of licensors
and authors of that material by
anyone who conveys the material (or modified versions of it)
with contractual assumptions of
liability to the recipient, for any
liability that these contractual
assumptions directly impose on
those licensors and authors.
You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise
Additional terms, permissive or

non-permissive, may be stated
in the form of a separately written license, or stated as exceptions; the above requirements
apply either way. 8. Termination.
If you add terms to a covered

work in accord with this section,
you must place, in the relevant
source files, a statement of the
additional terms that apply to
those files, or a notice indicating where to find the applicable
terms.
License along with a term that

is a further restriction, you may
remove that term. If a license
document contains a further restriction but permits relicensing
or conveying under this License,
you may add to a covered work
material governed by the terms
of that license document, provided that the further restriction
does not survive such relicensing or conveying.
Moreover, your license from a

particular copyright holder is reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the
violation by some reasonable
means, this is the first time you
have received notice of violation
of this License (for any work)
from that copyright holder, and
you cure the violation prior to
30 days after your receipt of the
notice.
However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your

license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a) provisionally, unless and until the
copyright holder explicitly and
finally terminates your license,
and (b) permanently, if the copyright holder fails to notify you
of the violation by some reasonable means prior to 60 days after
the cessation.
to propagate or modify it is
void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License (including any patent licenses granted under the third
paragraph of section 11).
You are not required to accept this License in order to

receive or run a copy of the
Program. Ancillary propagation of a covered work occurring solely as a consequence of
using peer-to-peer transmission
to receive a copy likewise does
not require acceptance. However, nothing other than this License grants you permission to
propagate or modify any covered work. These actions infringe copyright if you do not
accept this License. Therefore,
by modifying or propagating a
covered work, you indicate your
acceptance of this License to do
so. 10. Automatic Licensing of
Downstream Recipients.
Termination of your rights under

this section does not terminate
the licenses of parties who have
received copies or rights from
you under this License. If your
rights have been terminated and
not permanently reinstated, you
do not qualify to receive new
licenses for the same material
under section 10. 9. Acceptance Not Required for Having
Copies.
You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise

of the rights granted or affirmed
under this License. For ex-
An entity transaction is a
transaction transferring control
of an organization, or substantially all assets of one, or subdividing an organization, or merging organizations. If propagation of a covered work results
from an entity transaction, each
party to that transaction who receives a copy of the work also
receives whatever licenses to the
work the partys predecessor in
interest had or could give under
the previous paragraph, plus a
right to possession of the Corresponding Source of the work
from the predecessor in interest,
if the predecessor has it or can
get it with reasonable efforts.
Each time you convey a covered

work, the recipient automatically receives a license from the
original licensors, to run, modify and propagate that work, subject to this License. You are not
responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this
License.
A contributors essential patent

claims are all patent claims
owned or controlled by the contributor, whether already acquired or hereafter acquired,
that would be infringed by some
manner, permitted by this License, of making, using, or selling its contributor version, but
do not include claims that would
be infringed only as a consequence of further modification
of the contributor version. For
A contributor is a copyright
holder who authorizes use under
this License of the Program or
a work on which the Program is
based. The work thus licensed
is called the contributors contributor version.
ample, you may not impose a

license fee, royalty, or other
charge for exercise of rights
granted under this License, and
you may not initiate litigation (including a cross-claim or
counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that any patent claim is infringed by making, using, selling, offering for sale, or importing the Program or any portion
of it. 11. Patents.
If you convey a covered work,

knowingly relying on a patent
license, and the Corresponding
Source of the work is not avail-
In the following three paragraphs, a patent license is

any express agreement or commitment, however denominated,
not to enforce a patent (such as
an express permission to practice a patent or covenant not to
sue for patent infringement). To
grant such a patent license to
a party means to make such an
agreement or commitment not
to enforce a patent against the
party.
Each contributor grants you

a non-exclusive, worldwide,
royalty-free patent license under the contributors essential
patent claims, to make, use, sell,
offer for sale, import and otherwise run, modify and propagate
the contents of its contributor
version.
purposes of this definition, control includes the right to grant

patent sublicenses in a manner
consistent with the requirements
of this License.
If, pursuant to or in connection

with a single transaction or arrangement, you convey, or propagate by procuring conveyance
of, a covered work, and grant a
patent license to some of the parties receiving the covered work
authorizing them to use, prop-
able for anyone to copy, free

of charge and under the terms
of this License, through a publicly available network server or
other readily accessible means,
then you must either (1) cause
the Corresponding Source to be
so available, or (2) arrange to
deprive yourself of the benefit
of the patent license for this
particular work, or (3) arrange,
in a manner consistent with the
requirements of this License,
to extend the patent license to
downstream recipients. Knowingly relying means you have
actual knowledge that, but for
the patent license, your conveying the covered work in a country, or your recipients use of
the covered work in a country,
would infringe one or more identifiable patents in that country
that you have reason to believe
are valid.
A patent license is discriminatory if it does not include
within the scope of its coverage,
prohibits the exercise of, or is
conditioned on the non-exercise
of one or more of the rights that
are specifically granted under
this License. You may not convey a covered work if you are a
party to an arrangement with a
third party that is in the business
of distributing software, under
which you make payment to the
third party based on the extent
of your activity of conveying the
work, and under which the third
party grants, to any of the parties who would receive the covered work from you, a discriminatory patent license (a) in connection with copies of the covered work conveyed by you (or
copies made from those copies),
or (b) primarily for and in connection with specific products
or compilations that contain the
covered work, unless you en-
agate, modify or convey a specific copy of the covered work,

then the patent license you grant
is automatically extended to all
recipients of the covered work
and works based on it.
If conditions are imposed on

you (whether by court order,
agreement or otherwise) that
contradict the conditions of this
License, they do not excuse you
from the conditions of this License. If you cannot convey
a covered work so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any
other pertinent obligations, then
as a consequence you may not
convey it at all. For example,
if you agree to terms that obligate you to collect a royalty
for further conveying from those
to whom you convey the Program, the only way you could
satisfy both those terms and this
License would be to refrain entirely from conveying the Pro-
Nothing in this License shall

be construed as excluding or
limiting any implied license or
other defenses to infringement
that may otherwise be available
to you under applicable patent
law. 12. No Surrender of Others Freedom.
tered into that arrangement, or

that patent license was granted,
prior to 28 March 2007.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If
The Free Software Foundation

may publish revised and/or new
versions of the GNU General
Public License from time to
time. Such new versions will
be similar in spirit to the present
version, but may differ in detail
to address new problems or concerns.
Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, you have

permission to link or combine
any covered work with a work
licensed under version 3 of the
GNU Affero General Public License into a single combined
work, and to convey the resulting work. The terms of this License will continue to apply to
the part which is the covered
work, but the special requirements of the GNU Affero General Public License, section 13,
concerning interaction through
a network will apply to the combination as such. 14. Revised
Versions of this License.
gram. 13. Use with the GNU

Affero General Public License.
Later license versions may give

you additional or different permissions. However, no additional obligations are imposed
on any author or copyright
holder as a result of your choosing to follow a later version. 15.
Disclaimer of Warranty.
If the Program specifies that a

proxy can decide which future
versions of the GNU General
Public License can be used, that
proxys public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you to choose
that version for the Program.
the Program specifies that a certain numbered version of the

GNU General Public License
or any later version applies to
it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions
either of that numbered version
or of any later version published
by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not
specify a version number of the
GNU General Public License,
you may choose any version
ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
IN NO EVENT UNLESS
REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO
IN WRITING WILL ANY
COPYRIGHT
HOLDER,
THERE IS NO WARRANTY
FOR THE PROGRAM, TO
THE EXTENT PERMITTED
BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE
STATED IN WRITING THE
COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS
AND/OR OTHER PARTIES
PROVIDE THE PROGRAM
AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EITHER EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED
WARRANTIES
OF
MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE
ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE
QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM
IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE
PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE
COST OF ALL NECESSARY
SERVICING, REPAIR OR
CORRECTION. 16. Limitation
of Liability.
If the disclaimer of warranty

and limitation of liability provided above cannot be given
local legal effect according to
their terms, reviewing courts
shall apply local law that most
closely approximates an abso-
OR ANY OTHER PARTY

WHO MODIFIES AND/OR
CONVEYS THE PROGRAM
AS PERMITTED ABOVE,
BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR
DAMAGES,
INCLUDING
ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL,
INCIDENTAL
OR
CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF THE USE
OR INABILITY TO USE THE
PROGRAM
(INCLUDING
BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS
OF DATA OR DATA BEING
RENDERED INACCURATE
OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY
YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR
A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH
ANY OTHER PROGRAMS),
EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR
OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. 17.
Interpretation of Sections 15
and 16.
You should have received a

copy of the GNU General
Public License along with
This program is distributed

in the hope that it will be
useful, but WITHOUT ANY
WARRANTY; without even
the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General
Public License for more details.
This program is free software:

you can redistribute it and/or
modify it under the terms of the
GNU General Public License as
published by the Free Software
Foundation, either version 3 of
the License, or (at your option)
any later version.
<one line to give the programs

name and a brief idea of what
it does.> Copyright (C) <year>
<name of author>
The hypothetical commands

show w and show c should
show the appropriate parts of
the General Public License. Of
course, your programs commands might be different; for a
<program>
Copyright
(C)
<year> <name of author> This
program comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY;
for details type show w. This
is free software, and you are
welcome to redistribute it under
certain conditions; type show
c for details.
If the program does terminal interaction, make it output a short

notice like this when it starts in
an interactive mode:
Also add information on how to

contact you by electronic and
paper mail.
this program.
If not, see
<http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
49.2. GNU Free Documentation License
To do so, attach the following

notices to the program. It is
safest to attach them to the start
of each source file to most effectively state the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have
at least the copyright line and
a pointer to where the full notice
is found.
If you develop a new program,

and you want it to be of the
greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this
is to make it free software which
everyone can redistribute and
change under these terms.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These

Terms to Your New Programs
lute waiver of all civil liability

in connection with the Program,
unless a warranty or assumption
of liability accompanies a copy
of the Program in return for a
fee.
The GNU General Public

License does not permit incorporating your program into
proprietary programs. If your
program is a subroutine library,
you may consider it more useful
to permit linking proprietary
applications with the library.
If this is what you want to do,
use the GNU Lesser General
Public License instead of this
License. But first, please read
<http://www.gnu.org/philosophy/
not-lgpl.html>.
You should also get your

employer (if you work as a
programmer) or school, if
any, to sign a copyright disclaimer for the program, if
necessary. For more information on this, and how to apply
and follow the GNU GPL, see
<http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
GUI interface, you would use

an about box.
This License is a kind of "copyleft", which means that derivative works of the document must
themselves be free in the same
sense. It complements the GNU
General Public License, which
The purpose of this License is

to make a manual, textbook, or
other functional and useful document "free" in the sense of
freedom: to assure everyone
the effective freedom to copy
and redistribute it, with or without modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially.
Secondarily, this License preserves for the author and publisher a way to get credit for
their work, while not being considered responsible for modifications made by others.

changing it is not allowed. 0.
PREAMBLE
Copyright 2000, 2001, 2002,

2007, 2008 Free Software Foundation, Inc. <http://fsf.org/>
Version 1.3, 3 November 2008
This License applies to any

manual or other work, in any
medium, that contains a notice
placed by the copyright holder
saying it can be distributed under the terms of this License.
Such a notice grants a worldwide, royalty-free license, unlimited in duration, to use that
work under the conditions stated
herein. The "Document", below,
refers to any such manual or
We have designed this License

in order to use it for manuals
for free software, because free
software needs free documentation: a free program should
come with manuals providing
the same freedoms that the software does. But this License is
not limited to software manuals; it can be used for any textual work, regardless of subject
matter or whether it is published
as a printed book. We recommend this License principally
for works whose purpose is instruction or reference. 1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS
is a copyleft license designed

for free software.
A "Secondary Section" is a
named appendix or a frontmatter section of the Document
that deals exclusively with the
relationship of the publishers
or authors of the Document to
the Documents overall subject
(or to related matters) and contains nothing that could fall directly within that overall subject.
(Thus, if the Document is in
part a textbook of mathematics,
a Secondary Section may not explain any mathematics.) The
relationship could be a matter
of historical connection with the
subject or with related matters,
or of legal, commercial, philo-
A "Modified Version" of the

Document means any work containing the Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with modifications
and/or translated into another
language.
work. Any member of the public is a licensee, and is addressed

as "you". You accept the license
if you copy, modify or distribute
the work in a way requiring permission under copyright law.
A "Transparent" copy of the

Document means a machinereadable copy, represented in
a format whose specification is
available to the general pub-
The "Cover Texts" are certain

short passages of text that are
listed, as Front-Cover Texts or
Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says that the Document
is released under this License.
A Front-Cover Text may be at
most 5 words, and a Back-Cover
Text may be at most 25 words.
The "Invariant Sections" are certain Secondary Sections whose

titles are designated, as being
those of Invariant Sections, in
the notice that says that the Document is released under this License. If a section does not
fit the above definition of Secondary then it is not allowed to
be designated as Invariant. The
Document may contain zero Invariant Sections. If the Document does not identify any Invariant Sections then there are
none.
sophical, ethical or political position regarding them.
Examples of suitable formats

for Transparent copies include
plain ASCII without markup,
Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format, SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD,
and standard-conforming simple HTML, PostScript or PDF
designed for human modification.
Examples of transparent image formats include PNG,
lic, that is suitable for revising the document straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed
of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some
widely available drawing editor,
and that is suitable for input to
text formatters or for automatic
translation to a variety of formats suitable for input to text
formatters. A copy made in an
otherwise Transparent file format whose markup, or absence
of markup, has been arranged to
thwart or discourage subsequent
modification by readers is not
Transparent. An image format
is not Transparent if used for
any substantial amount of text.
A copy that is not "Transparent"
is called "Opaque".
A section "Entitled XYZ"

means a named subunit of the
Document whose title either
The "publisher" means any person or entity that distributes

copies of the Document to the
public.
The "Title Page" means, for a

printed book, the title page itself, plus such following pages
as are needed to hold, legibly, the material this License requires to appear in the title page.
For works in formats which do
not have any title page as such,
"Title Page" means the text near
the most prominent appearance
of the works title, preceding the
beginning of the body of the
text.
XCF and JPG. Opaque formats

include proprietary formats that
can be read and edited only
by proprietary word processors,
SGML or XML for which the
DTD and/or processing tools
are not generally available, and
the machine-generated HTML,
PostScript or PDF produced by
some word processors for output purposes only.
You may copy and distribute the

Document in any medium, either commercially or noncommercially, provided that this Li-
The Document may include

Warranty Disclaimers next to
the notice which states that this
License applies to the Document.
These Warranty Disclaimers are considered to be included by reference in this License, but only as regards disclaiming warranties: any other
implication that these Warranty
Disclaimers may have is void
and has no effect on the meaning of this License. 2. VERBATIM COPYING
is precisely XYZ or contains

XYZ in parentheses following
text that translates XYZ in
another language. (Here XYZ
stands for a specific section
name mentioned below, such
as "Acknowledgements", "Dedications", "Endorsements", or
"History".) To "Preserve the
Title" of such a section when
you modify the Document
means that it remains a section
"Entitled XYZ" according to
this definition.
If you publish printed copies (or

copies in media that commonly
have printed covers) of the Document, numbering more than
100, and the Documents license
notice requires Cover Texts, you
must enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these Cover Texts: FrontCover Texts on the front cover,
You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated
above, and you may publicly
display copies. 3. COPYING
IN QUANTITY
cense, the copyright notices,

and the license notice saying
this License applies to the Document are reproduced in all
copies, and that you add no
other conditions whatsoever to
those of this License. You may
not use technical measures to
obstruct or control the reading
or further copying of the copies
you make or distribute. However, you may accept compensation in exchange for copies.
If you distribute a large enough
number of copies you must also
follow the conditions in section
3.
If you publish or distribute

Opaque copies of the Document numbering more than
100, you must either include
a machine-readable Transparent
copy along with each Opaque
copy, or state in or with
each Opaque copy a computernetwork location from which
the general network-using pub-
If the required texts for either

cover are too voluminous to fit
legibly, you should put the first
ones listed (as many as fit reasonably) on the actual cover,
and continue the rest onto adjacent pages.
and Back-Cover Texts on the

back cover. Both covers must
also clearly and legibly identify
you as the publisher of these
copies. The front cover must
present the full title with all
words of the title equally prominent and visible. You may add
other material on the covers in
addition. Copying with changes
limited to the covers, as long
as they preserve the title of the
Document and satisfy these conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in other respects.
You may copy and distribute a

Modified Version of the Document under the conditions of
sections 2 and 3 above, provided
that you release the Modified
Version under precisely this License, with the Modified Ver-
It is requested, but not required,

that you contact the authors of
the Document well before redistributing any large number of
copies, to give them a chance to
provide you with an updated version of the Document. 4. MODIFICATIONS
lic has access to download using

public-standard network protocols a complete Transparent
copy of the Document, free
of added material.
If you
use the latter option, you must
take reasonably prudent steps,
when you begin distribution of
Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure that this Transparent copy
will remain thus accessible at
the stated location until at least
one year after the last time you
distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or
retailers) of that edition to the
public.
* A. Use in the Title Page (and
on the covers, if any) a title distinct from that of the Document,
and from those of previous versions (which should, if there
were any, be listed in the History section of the Document).
You may use the same title as a
previous version if the original
publisher of that version gives
permission. * B. List on the
Title Page, as authors, one or
more persons or entities responsible for authorship of the modifications in the Modified Version, together with at least five
of the principal authors of the
Document (all of its principal
authors, if it has fewer than five),
unless they release you from
this requirement. * C. State on
the Title page the name of the
publisher of the Modified Version, as the publisher. * D. Preserve all the copyright notices
of the Document. * E. Add
sion filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution

and modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy of it. In addition,
you must do these things in the
Modified Version:
an appropriate copyright notice

for your modifications adjacent
to the other copyright notices.
* F. Include, immediately after
the copyright notices, a license
notice giving the public permission to use the Modified Version
under the terms of this License,
in the form shown in the Addendum below. * G. Preserve in that
license notice the full lists of
Invariant Sections and required
Cover Texts given in the Documents license notice. * H. Include an unaltered copy of this
License. * I. Preserve the section Entitled "History", Preserve
its Title, and add to it an item
stating at least the title, year,
new authors, and publisher of
the Modified Version as given
on the Title Page. If there is
no section Entitled "History" in
the Document, create one stating the title, year, authors, and
publisher of the Document as
given on its Title Page, then add
an item describing the Modified
Version as stated in the previous sentence. * J. Preserve the
network location, if any, given
in the Document for public access to a Transparent copy of
the Document, and likewise the
network locations given in the

Document for previous versions
it was based on. These may
be placed in the "History" section. You may omit a network
location for a work that was
published at least four years before the Document itself, or if
the original publisher of the version it refers to gives permission.
* K. For any section Entitled
"Acknowledgements" or "Dedications", Preserve the Title of
the section, and preserve in the
section all the substance and
tone of each of the contributor
acknowledgements and/or dedications given therein. * L. Preserve all the Invariant Sections
of the Document, unaltered in
their text and in their titles. Section numbers or the equivalent
are not considered part of the
section titles.
* M. Delete
any section Entitled "Endorsements". Such a section may not
be included in the Modified Version. * N. Do not retitle any existing section to be Entitled "Endorsements" or to conflict in title with any Invariant Section. *
O. Preserve any Warranty Disclaimers.
You may add a passage of
up to five words as a FrontCover Text, and a passage of
up to 25 words as a Back-Cover
Text, to the end of the list of
Cover Texts in the Modified Version. Only one passage of FrontCover Text and one of BackCover Text may be added by
(or through arrangements made
You may add a section Entitled "Endorsements", provided

it contains nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version
by various partiesfor example, statements of peer review or
that the text has been approved
by an organization as the authoritative definition of a standard.
If the Modified Version includes

new front-matter sections or appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no
material copied from the Document, you may at your option
designate some or all of these
sections as invariant. To do this,
add their titles to the list of Invariant Sections in the Modified
Versions license notice. These
titles must be distinct from any
other section titles.
You may combine the Document with other documents released under this License, under the terms defined in section
4 above for modified versions,
provided that you include in the
combination all of the Invariant Sections of all of the original documents, unmodified, and
list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in
its license notice, and that you
preserve all their Warranty Disclaimers.
The author(s) and publisher(s)

of the Document do not by this
License give permission to use
their names for publicity for or
to assert or imply endorsement
of any Modified Version. 5.
COMBINING DOCUMENTS
by) any one entity. If the Document already includes a cover

text for the same cover, previously added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of,
you may not add another; but
you may replace the old one, on
explicit permission from the previous publisher that added the
old one.
You may make a collection consisting of the Document and

other documents released under
this License, and replace the in-
In the combination, you must

combine any sections Entitled
"History" in the various original documents, forming one section Entitled "History"; likewise
combine any sections Entitled
"Acknowledgements", and any
sections Entitled "Dedications".
You must delete all sections Entitled "Endorsements". 6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS
The combined work need only

contain one copy of this License,
and multiple identical Invariant
Sections may be replaced with
a single copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the
same name but different contents, make the title of each
such section unique by adding
at the end of it, in parentheses,
the name of the original author
or publisher of that section if
known, or else a unique number. Make the same adjustment
to the section titles in the list of
Invariant Sections in the license
notice of the combined work.
A compilation of the Document

or its derivatives with other
separate and independent documents or works, in or on a
volume of a storage or distribution medium, is called an "aggregate" if the copyright resulting from the compilation is not
used to limit the legal rights of
the compilations users beyond
what the individual works permit. When the Document is
included in an aggregate, this
You may extract a single document from such a collection,

and distribute it individually under this License, provided you
insert a copy of this License
into the extracted document,
and follow this License in all
other respects regarding verbatim copying of that document. 7.
AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS
dividual copies of this License

in the various documents with a
single copy that is included in
the collection, provided that you
follow the rules of this License
for verbatim copying of each of
the documents in all other respects.
Translation is considered a kind

of modification, so you may distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section
4. Replacing Invariant Sections
with translations requires special permission from their copyright holders, but you may include translations of some or all
Invariant Sections in addition to
the original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include a translation of this License, and all the license notices
If the Cover Text requirement of

section 3 is applicable to these
copies of the Document, then if
the Document is less than one
half of the entire aggregate, the
Documents Cover Texts may
be placed on covers that bracket
the Document within the aggregate, or the electronic equivalent
of covers if the Document is in
electronic form. Otherwise they
must appear on printed covers
that bracket the whole aggregate.
8. TRANSLATION
License does not apply to the

other works in the aggregate
which are not themselves derivative works of the Document.
However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your

license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a) pro-
You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document except as expressly provided under this License. Any
attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute it is
void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
If a section in the Document is

Entitled "Acknowledgements",
"Dedications", or "History", the
requirement (section 4) to Preserve its Title (section 1) will
typically require changing the
actual title. 9. TERMINATION
in the Document, and any Warranty Disclaimers, provided that

you also include the original English version of this License and
the original versions of those notices and disclaimers. In case
of a disagreement between the
translation and the original version of this License or a notice
or disclaimer, the original version will prevail.
Termination of your rights under

this section does not terminate
the licenses of parties who have
received copies or rights from
you under this License. If your
rights have been terminated and
not permanently reinstated, receipt of a copy of some or all of
the same material does not give
you any rights to use it. 10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS
LICENSE
Moreover, your license from a

particular copyright holder is reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the
violation by some reasonable
means, this is the first time you
have received notice of violation
of this License (for any work)
from that copyright holder, and
you cure the violation prior to
30 days after your receipt of the
notice.
visionally, unless and until the

copyright holder explicitly and
finally terminates your license,
and (b) permanently, if the copyright holder fails to notify you
of the violation by some reasonable means prior to 60 days after
the cessation.
Each version of the License is

given a distinguishing version
number. If the Document specifies that a particular numbered
version of this License "or any
later version" applies to it, you
have the option of following the
terms and conditions either of
that specified version or of any
later version that has been published (not as a draft) by the
Free Software Foundation. If
the Document does not specify a
version number of this License,
you may choose any version
ever published (not as a draft)
by the Free Software Foundation. If the Document specifies
that a proxy can decide which
future versions of this License
can be used, that proxys public statement of acceptance of a
version permanently authorizes
you to choose that version for

may publish new, revised versions of the GNU Free Documentation License from time
to time. Such new versions
will be similar in spirit to the
present version, but may differ in detail to address new
problems or concerns.
See
http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/.
"Incorporate" means to publish

or republish a Document, in
whole or in part, as part of another Document.
"CC-BY-SA" means the Creative Commons AttributionShare Alike 3.0 license published by Creative Commons
Corporation, a not-for-profit
corporation with a principal
place of business in San Francisco, California, as well as
future copyleft versions of that
license published by that same
organization.
"Massive Multiauthor Collaboration Site" (or "MMC

Site") means any World Wide
Web server that publishes
copyrightable works and also
provides prominent facilities for
anybody to edit those works. A
public wiki that anybody can
edit is an example of such a
server. A "Massive Multiauthor
Collaboration" (or "MMC")
contained in the site means any
set of copyrightable works thus
published on the MMC site.
the Document. 11. RELICENSING
Copyright (C) YEAR YOUR

NAME. Permission is granted to
copy, distribute and/or modify
this document under the terms
of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or any
To use this License in a document you have written, include

a copy of the License in the
document and put the following copyright and license notices just after the title page:
The operator of an MMC Site

may republish an MMC contained in the site under CC-BYSA on the same site at any time
before August 1, 2009, provided
the MMC is eligible for relicensing. ADDENDUM: How to use
this License for your documents
An MMC is "eligible for relicensing" if it is licensed under this License, and if all
works that were first published
under this License somewhere
other than this MMC, and subsequently incorporated in whole
or in part into the MMC, (1)
had no cover texts or invariant
sections, and (2) were thus incorporated prior to November 1,
2008.
If your document contains nontrivial examples of program

code, we recommend releasing
these examples in parallel under
your choice of free software license, such as the GNU General
Public License, to permit their
use in free software.
If you have Invariant Sections

without Cover Texts, or some
other combination of the three,
merge those two alternatives to
suit the situation.
with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES, with

the Front-Cover Texts being
LIST, and with the Back-Cover
Texts being LIST.
If you have Invariant Sections,

Front-Cover Texts and BackCover Texts, replace the "with
. . . Texts." line with this:
later version published by the

Free Software Foundation; with
no Invariant Sections, no FrontCover Texts, and no Back-Cover
Texts. A copy of the license is
included in the section entitled
"GNU Free Documentation License".
Free
Inc.
As used herein, this License

refers to version 3 of the GNU
Lesser General Public License,
and the GNU GPL refers to
version 3 of the GNU General
Public License.
This version of the GNU Lesser

General Public License incorporates the terms and conditions of
version 3 of the GNU General
Public License, supplemented
by the additional permissions
listed below. 0. Additional Definitions.

changing it is not allowed.
Copyright 2007
Software Foundation,
<http://fsf.org/>
Version 3, 29 June 2007
GNU LESSER GENERAL

PUBLIC LICENSE
The Minimal Corresponding Source for a Combined

Work means the Corresponding
Source for the Combined Work,
excluding any source code for
portions of the Combined Work
that, considered in isolation, are
A Combined Work is a work

produced by combining or linking an Application with the Library. The particular version of
the Library with which the Combined Work was made is also
called the Linked Version.
An Application is any work

that makes use of an interface
provided by the Library, but
which is not otherwise based on
the Library. Defining a subclass
of a class defined by the Library
is deemed a mode of using an interface provided by the Library.
The Library refers to a covered work governed by this License, other than an Application
or a Combined Work as defined
below.
If you modify a copy of the

Library, and, in your modifications, a facility refers to a function or data to be supplied by an
Application that uses the facility (other than as an argument
passed when the facility is invoked), then you may convey a
copy of the modified version:
You may convey a covered work

under sections 3 and 4 of this
License without being bound by
section 3 of the GNU GPL. 2.
Conveying Modified Versions.
The Corresponding Application Code for a Combined

Work means the object code
and/or source code for the Application, including any data
and utility programs needed
for reproducing the Combined
Work from the Application, but
excluding the System Libraries
of the Combined Work. 1. Exception to Section 3 of the GNU
GPL.
based on the Application, and

not on the Linked Version.
49.3. GNU Lesser General Public License
The object code form of an Application may incorporate material from a header file that is
part of the Library. You may
convey such object code under
terms of your choice, provided
that, if the incorporated material
is not limited to numerical parameters, data structure layouts
and accessors, or small macros,
inline functions and templates
(ten or fewer lines in length),
you do both of the following:
3. Object Code Incorporating

Material from Library Header
Files.
* a) under this License, provided

that you make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event
an Application does not supply
the function or data, the facility still operates, and performs
whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful, or * b) under the GNU GPL, with none
of the additional permissions of
this License applicable to that
copy.
* a) Give prominent notice with

each copy of the Combined
Work that the Library is used
in it and that the Library and
its use are covered by this License. * b) Accompany the
Combined Work with a copy of
the GNU GPL and this license
document. * c) For a Combined Work that displays copyright notices during execution,
include the copyright notice for
You may convey a Combined

Work under terms of your
choice that, taken together, effectively do not restrict modification of the portions of the
Library contained in the Combined Work and reverse engineering for debugging such
modifications, if you also do
each of the following:
4. Combined Works.
* a) Give prominent notice with

each copy of the object code that
the Library is used in it and that
the Library and its use are covered by this License. * b) Accompany the object code with a
copy of the GNU GPL and this
license document.
the Library among these notices,

as well as a reference directing
the user to the copies of the
GNU GPL and this license document. * d) Do one of the following: o 0) Convey the Minimal Corresponding Source under the terms of this License,
and the Corresponding Application Code in a form suitable
for, and under terms that permit, the user to recombine or
relink the Application with a
modified version of the Linked
Version to produce a modified
Combined Work, in the manner specified by section 6 of
the GNU GPL for conveying
Corresponding Source. o 1)
Use a suitable shared library
mechanism for linking with the
Library.
A suitable mechanism is one that (a) uses at
run time a copy of the Library
already present on the users
computer system, and (b) will
operate properly with a modified version of the Library that
is interface-compatible with the
Linked Version. * e) Provide Installation Information, but only
if you would otherwise be required to provide such information under section 6 of the
* a) Accompany the combined
library with a copy of the same
You may place library facilities

that are a work based on the Library side by side in a single library together with other library
facilities that are not Applications and are not covered by
this License, and convey such a
combined library under terms of
your choice, if you do both of
the following:
5. Combined Libraries.
GNU GPL, and only to the extent that such information is necessary to install and execute a
modified version of the Combined Work produced by recombining or relinking the Application with a modified version of
the Linked Version. (If you use
option 4d0, the Installation Information must accompany the
Minimal Corresponding Source
and Corresponding Application
Code. If you use option 4d1,
you must provide the Installation Information in the manner
specified by section 6 of the
GNU GPL for conveying Corresponding Source.)
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the

Library as you received it specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU Lesser General
Public License or any later version applies to it, you have the
option of following the terms
and conditions either of that
published version or of any later

may publish revised and/or new
versions of the GNU Lesser
General Public License from
time to time. Such new versions
will be similar in spirit to the
present version, but may differ
in detail to address new problems or concerns.
6. Revised Versions of the GNU

Lesser General Public License.
work based on the Library, uncombined with any other library

facilities, conveyed under the
terms of this License. * b) Give
prominent notice with the combined library that part of it is a
work based on the Library, and
explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form
of the same work.
version published by the Free

Software Foundation. If the Library as you received it does not
specify a version number of the
GNU Lesser General Public Li-
cense, you may choose any version of the GNU Lesser General
Public License ever published
by the Free Software Foundation.
If the Library as you received

it specifies that a proxy can decide whether future versions of
the GNU Lesser General Public
License shall apply, that proxys
public statement of acceptance

of any version is permanent authorization for you to choose
that version for the Library.

LaTeX Ebook Reader

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

LaTeX Ebook Reader

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Wikibooks.

On the 28th of April 2012 the contents of the English as well as

June 29, 2012

14.11. Problems with Beamer . . . . . . . . . .

17.5. Powers and indices . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18.4. Page breaks in math environments . . . . . . . . . .

IV. Special Documents and Pages . . . . .

33. Advanced Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

35.5. Convert to image formats . . . . . . . . . . . . .

38.6. Spell-checking and Word Counting

46. More Bibliographies . . . . . . . .

TeX1 is a low-level markup and programming language created by Donald

1.1. What is TeX?

UNKNOWN TEMPLATE TeX

"", similar to TeX in the Latin alphabet. According to a different approach

Many later authors have contributed extensions, called packages or styles,

UNKNOWN TEMPLATE LaTeX

LaTeX (pronounced either "Lah-tech" or "Lay-tech") is a macro package

1.2. What is LaTeX?

This approach has some disadvantages in comparison with a WYSIWYG6

One solution to this dilemma is to make use of the modular possibilities of

Flexibility and modularity

1.2.1. Philosophy of use

Besides internet resources being plentiful, the best documentation source

Questions and documentation

ConTeXt is a TeX-based document preparation system (as LaTeX is) with a

1.3. Other terms regarding TeX

1.4.1. Installing a distribution

TeX Live can be downloaded here20 .

1.4.2. Getting a text editor

Download MacTeX.mpkg.zip on the MacTeX page26 , unzip it and follow

TeXworks27 is a dedicated TeX editor that is included in MiKTeX and TeX

Kile29 is a LaTeX editor for KDE30 (cross platform), providing a powerful

TeXstudio32 is a cross-platform open source LaTeX editor with interface

TeXmaker31 is a cross-platform editor very similar to Kile in features and user

WinEdt34 is a powerful and versatile text editor with strong predisposition

TeXShop36 is a TeXworks-like editor for Mac OS.

BaKoMa TeX35 is an editor for Windows and Mac OS with WYSIWYG-like

LaTeXila42 is another text editor for Linux (Gnome).

latex compiler reads a LaTeX .tex file and creates a .dvi

1.4.4. Applications within a distribution

Chapter 35 on page 937

the #latex46 IRC channel on Freenode,

1.5. What next?

Chapter ../Export To Other Formats/44 discusses more about exporting LaTeX

the TeX Stack Exchange47 Q&A,

LaTeX uses a markup language in order to describe document structure and

2.1. The LaTeX source

"Whitespace" characters, such as blank or tab, are treated uniformly as "space"

2.1.2. Special Characters

An empty line starts a new

It does not matter whether you

The backslash character \ can not be entered by adding another backslash

\# \$ \% \textasciicircum{} \& \_ \{ \} \~{} \textbackslash{}

things you did not intend.

2.1.3. LaTeX commands

A group is basically defined by a pair of braces. The range of commands put

2.1.4. LaTeX groups

Some commands need an argument, which has to be given between curly

2.1.5. LaTeX environments

When LaTeX encounters a % character while processing an input file, it ignores

Anything in LaTeX can be expressed in terms of commands and environments.

When LaTeX processes an input file, it expects it to follow a certain structure.